Use AccessLinks forms and reports with Microsoft Excel

To use the AccessLinks add-in program that comes with Microsoft Excel, you must have Microsoft Access installed. If the Access Form, Access Report, and Convert To Access commands do not appear on the Data menu, you need to install the AccessLinks add-in program. For more information, click  [image].

What do you want to do?

Create a new Microsoft Access form in Microsoft Excel

Use an existing form for data entry

Create a report with Access Report Wizard in Microsoft Excel

Modify an existing report

Convert a Microsoft Excel list to a Microsoft Access database


Create a new Microsoft Access form in Microsoft Excel

1	On the Data menu, click Access Forms.

2	Follow the instructions in the Access Form Wizard.

Note   The Microsoft Access Form Wizard guides you through building a data entry form for a Microsoft Excel list. You can enter additional data in your list by clicking the Forms button, which is placed on the worksheet by the Access Form Wizard.


Use an existing form for data entry

1	Select a cell in your worksheet list.

2	Click the Forms button on your worksheet.

The form you previously created is displayed.

Note   If Microsoft Excel cannot find the form, the Locate Microsoft Access Form dialog box allows you to browse your folders for the *.mdb file that is linked with your worksheet.


Create a report with Access Report Wizard in Microsoft Excel

1	On the Data menu, click Access Report.

2	Follow the instructions in the Access Report Wizard.

Note   The Microsoft Access Report Wizard guides you through building a report from data in a Microsoft Excel list. You can use the report based on your list later by clicking the Report button, which is placed on the worksheet by the Access Report Wizard.


Modify an existing report

1	Select a cell in your worksheet list.

2	Click the Report button on your worksheet.

The report you previously created is displayed.

Note   If Microsoft Excel cannot find the report, the Locate Microsoft Access Report dialog box allows you to browse your folders for the *.mdb file that is linked with your worksheet.


Convert a Microsoft Excel list to a Microsoft Access database

1	Select a cell in your worksheet list.

2	On the Data menu, click Convert To Access.

The Microsoft Access Table Analyzer Wizard guides you through permanently converting your Microsoft Excel list to a Microsoft Access database.

Note   Converting your Microsoft Excel list to a Microsoft Access database does not affect the original data.


Find cells with specific contents

1	To search the entire worksheet, click a single cell.

To search a range of cells, select the range.

2	On the Edit menu, click Go To.

3	Click Special.

4	Select the options you want.


Add comments to a worksheet cell

If you share your worksheet with other users, or if the worksheet contains complex formulas that need explanation, you can add a text note or a sound note to any cell. To record and play back sound notes, you must have recording hardware and sound driver software installed in your computer.

What do you want to do?

Add a text note to a cell

Record a sound note for a cell


Add a text note to a cell

1	Click the cell to which you want to add the note.

2	On the Insert menu, click Note.

3	In the Text Note box, enter the text you want for the note.

4	Click Add.

Note   You can add the same text note to another cell. Click the cell note in the Notes In Sheet box, enter the reference for the other cell in the Cell box, and then click Add.


Record a sound note for a cell

To record and play back sound notes, you must have recording hardware and sound driver software installed in your computer.

1	Click the cell to which you want to add a sound note.

2	On the Insert menu, click Note.

3	Click Record.

If the cell already has a sound note, the Record button is not available. To change the sound note, you must erase it and then record a new one.

4	In the Record dialog box, click Record.

5	When you finish recording, click Stop, and then click OK.

6	In the Cell Note dialog box, click Add.


Copy a note to another cell

1	Click the cell that contains the note you want to copy.

2	On the Edit menu, click Copy.

3	Click the cell to which you want to copy the note.

4	On the Edit menu, click Paste Special.

5	Under Paste, click Notes.

Notes

•	The copied note replaces any existing notes in the destination cell.

•	If the selected cell contains both a text note and a sound note, Microsoft Excel copies both notes.


Remove a note from a cell

1	Click the cell that contains the note you want to remove.

2	On the Edit menu, point to Clear, and then click Notes.


Hide or display cell notes and their indicators

1	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the View tab.

2	To hide or display cell notes and the red indicators, clear or select the Note Indicator check box under Show.


Recalculate all open cells, worksheets, and workbooks

•	To recalculate all cells on all worksheets in all open workbooks, press CTRL+ALT+F9.

Note   Recalculation of all formulas may take considerable time. To recalculate only the current worksheet, press SHIFT+F9.


Displaying detailed information about a cell

The Info window displays detailed information about the active cell. You can specify the kind of information you want to see, print statistics displayed in the Info window, verify a formula used in a cell, or check the precedents and dependents for a formula. You can arrange the Info window and your workbook window so that both are visible while you work.


Find detailed information about a cell

1	Click the cell you want to see information about.

2	On the Auditing toolbar, click  [image].

3	On the Info menu, click the category of information you want to view.

Tip   To see your worksheet and the Info Window at the same time, use the Arrange command on the Window menu.


Record dialog box

Records a sound note.

Dialog Box Options

Record

To record a sound note, click Record.

Stop

To stop recording a sound note, click Stop.

Pause

To pause the recording of a sound note, click Pause. To resume recording, click Pause again.

Play

To listen to the sound note you've recorded, click Play.

Time Scale

Displays the amount of the total recording time that has elapsed.


Load an add-in program into Microsoft Excel

1	On the Tools menu, click Add-ins.

2	In the Add-ins Available box, select the check box next to the add-in you want to load.

If the add-in you want to load does not appear, click Browse, and then locate the add-in you want to load. If the add-in is not installed on your computer, you can install it.

How?


Unload an add-in program from Microsoft Excel

1	On the Tools menu, click Add-ins.

2	In the Add-ins Available box, clear the check box next to the add-in you want to unload.

Note   Unloading an add-in from Microsoft Excel does not remove it from your computer system.


Equations for calculating trendlines

Linear

Calculates the least squares fit for a line represented by the following equation:

where m is the slope and b is the intercept.

Polynomial

Calculates the least squares fit through points using the following equation:

where b and  [image]  are constants.

Logarithmic

Calculates the least squares fit through points using the following equation:

where c and b are constants, and ln is the natural logarithm function.

Exponential

Calculates the least squares fit through points using the following equation:

where c and b are constants, and e is the base of the natural logarithm.

Power

Calculates the least squares fit through points using the following equation:

where c and b are constants.

R-squared Value

Note   The R-squared value you can display with a trendline is not an adjusted R-squared value. For logarithmic, power, and exponential trendlines, Microsoft Excel uses a transformed regression model.

Moving Average

Note   The number of points in a moving average trendline equals the total number of points in the series less the number you specify for the period.


Using trendlines in a chart

Trendlines are used in analyzing problems of prediction. Such analysis is also called regression analysis. Using regression analysis, you can extend a trendline in a chart forward or backward beyond the actual data to show a trend. You can also create a moving average, which smooths out fluctuations in data, showing the pattern or trend more clearly.

You can add trendlines to data series in bar, column, line, and xy (scatter) charts. You cannot add trendlines to data series in 3-D, radar, pie, or doughnut charts. If you change a chart that contains data series with associated trendlines to any of these chart types, you lose the trendlines.


Add a trendline to a data series

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Select the data series to which you want to add a trendline or moving average.

3	On the Insert menu, click Trendline.

4	On the Type tab, click the type of regression trendline or moving average you want.

5	If you selected Polynomial, enter in the Order box the highest power for the independent variable.

If you selected Moving Average, enter in the Period box the number of periods to be used in calculating the moving average.

Note   If you add a moving average to an xy (scatter) chart, the moving average is based on the order of the x values plotted in the chart. To get the result you want, you might need to sort the x values before adding a moving average.


Modify trendline settings

These options are available for regression trendlines only, you cannot use them for moving averages.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Double-click the trendline you want to modify.

3	Click the Options tab.

4	To name the trendline, type a name in the Custom box.

5	Select any other options you want.


Delete a trendline

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Select the trendline you want to delete.

3	Press DELETE.


Add error bars to a data series

Error bars graphically express potential error amounts relative to each data marker in a series. You can add error bars to data series in area, bar, column, line, and xy (scatter) charts. For xy (scatter) charts, you can display error bars for the x values, the y values, or both.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Select the data series to which you want to add error bars.

3	On the Insert menu, click Error Bars.

4	Select the options you want.

Note   If you change the worksheet values or formulas associated with the data points in the series, the error bars are adjusted to reflect your changes.


Modify error bar settings

When you select an error bar, any changes you make modify all of the error bars for that series.

1	Double-click the data series whose error bars you want to modify.

2	Click the Y Error Bars tab or the X Error Bars tab, depending on the type of error bars you are modifying.

3	To select a different type of error bar, click the type you want under Display.

4	To change the method used to determine the error, select the method you want under Error Amount. To change a custom method, click Custom, and then specify the worksheet range to be used as error amount values; or enter array formulas in the Plus and Minus boxes.


Delete error bars

Error bars can be deleted only for the entire series; you cannot delete individual error bars.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Click an error bar.

3	Press DELETE.


Create a chart with multilevel categories and series

Label ( x-axis) data should precede the series (y-axis) data on your worksheet when you make your cell range selection to create the chart. By default, Microsoft Excel uses the first rows or columns of the cell range selection to plot the label (x-axis) data.

1	Select a range of data on the worksheet.

2	Click  [image].

3	Complete steps 1 through 3 of the ChartWizard.

4	In step 4 of the ChartWizard, make sure that the total number of columns and rows is the same as the number of headings in your data. Check the sample display under Sample Chart.

Note   If you need to add data to the chart, select the data and labels you want to add, and then use the ChartWizard. If you drag and drop the data from the worksheet to the chart, paste the data into the chart, or use the New Data command on the Insert menu instead of using the ChartWizard, the organization of the data may not be retained.

Tip   If you cannot read the category labels displayed along the category axis, you can rotate them. Double-click the axis, click the Alignment tab in the Format Axis dialog box, and then click a different option under Orientation.


Create a chart from visible worksheet data

You can create and update charts that plot only visible data on your worksheet. For example, you can hide rows and columns or use AutoFilter to display only part of your data, and then you can create a chart from only the rows or columns that are displayed.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Chart tab.

3	Select the Plot Visible Cells Only check box.

Note   To keep your chart from being updated whenever you hide or display data, clear the Plot Visible Cells Only check box.


Equations for calculating the error amount

Standard Deviation

where:

s = series number

i = point number in series s

m = number of series for point y in chart

n = number of points in each series

  = data value of series s and the ith point

  = total number of data values in all series

M = arithmetic mean

Standard Error


Template Wizard Step 1 Of 5

The Template Wizard With Data Tracking creates a template you can use as a form to enter data in a database. Each time you or others in your group create a new workbook from the template, Microsoft Excel automatically copies data entered in the workbooks to a database that's associated with the template.

To create the template, first open an existing workbook that's organized and formatted so that you can easily fill in the data you want to track.

Select The Name Of The Workbook You Want To Create A Template From

All open workbooks appear in the list. If you don't see the workbook you want, click Cancel, open the workbook you want, and then click Template Wizard on the Data menu.

Type A Name For The Template

Type a new name if you want the template and workbook names to be different. To store the template in a custom subfolder of the Templates folder, include the subfolder name in the path.


Template Wizard Step 2 Of 5

When you enter data in a workbook based on the new template, Microsoft Excel will automatically copy the data to the database you specify in this step. You can specify either a new database or an existing one. If you specify an existing database, the categories of information you enter in workbooks based on the template must correspond to the existing fields of the database.

Database Type

Displays the database converters that are installed and registered on your system. Click the type of database you want to use.

Database Location And Name

To start a new database, type a path and a filename.

Browse

To add information to an existing database, click Browse, and then locate the database file you want.

Note   If you use the Template Wizard With Data Tracking to create a new database, the database can contain a single table or worksheet. To track data in multiple tables or sheets, first use your database application to create the database with the desired tables or sheets. Then use the Template Wizard in Microsoft Excel to map the workbook cells to the fields in the appropriate table or sheet.


Template Wizard Step 3 Of 5

In this step, you identify each cell you want to copy data from, and then you map the cells to corresponding fields in the database. The data you enter in each new workbook creates one new record in the database.

Sheet or Table

Identifies the sheet or table in the database in which field names are defined. If you're creating a new database, you can type a new name. If you're using an existing database that has multiple sheets or tables, click the item you want.

No.

Identifies the field (column) to which data from the specified cell will be copied.

Cell

Specifies the worksheet cell from which data will be copied. To enter a cell reference, first click in the Cell box, and then click the cell on the worksheet. You must enter an absolute reference to a single cell. You can enter cell references from multiple worksheets; however, you must include the sheet name — for example, 'Sheet 1'!$B$3 — if a workbook has more than one worksheet.

Field Name

Identifies the database field to which data from the specified cell will be copied. If you're creating a new database and the specified cell is below or to the right of a text label, click in the Field Name box to enter the label as the field name, or type another name. The field name must meet the requirements for field names in your selected database.

If you selected an existing database, the field names from the database automatically appear — you cannot change these names.


Template Wizard Step 4 Of 5

You might have a number of workbooks that contain data similar to that in the selected workbook. If the cell locations of the data in these workbooks are identical to the cell references you specified in the preceding step, Microsoft Excel can collect the data and add it to the database. Click the option you want, and then click Next.


Template Wizard Step 4 Of 5

List the workbooks that contain information you want added to the database. Use the Preview area to make sure that the values from the workbooks will be copied to the appropriate database fields.

Select

To add a workbook to the Files To Convert box, click Select, and then locate the workbook you want.

Delete

To remove a workbook from the Files To Convert box, click the workbook, and then click Delete.

Preview

To make sure that data in a workbook will be copied to the correct database fields, click the workbook in the Files To Convert box, and then click the Preview button.

Preview area

Displays the data that Microsoft Excel will copy from the selected workbook to the database fields. Use the scroll bar to view all of the fields.

Table

Identifies the database sheet or table in which the displayed field names are defined. If the database contains multiple sheets or tables, click the item you want.


Template Wizard Step 5 Of 5

Your new template is ready to use. To create a new workbook from the template, click New on the File menu. To change the template — for example, to copy data from additional workbook cells to the database or to change the location of cells in which you enter data — click Open on the File menu, open the template, and then click Template Wizard on the Data menu.

Add Routing Slip

To automatically route a new workbook created from the template to selected recipients, click Add Routing Slip, and then select the information service you want to use. The service you select must support Microsoft Exchange.


 Trace formulas that use the active cell

Make sure that the Hide All check box on the View tab in the Options dialog box (Tools menu) is cleared.

1	Click the cell you want to trace.

2	On the Auditing toolbar, click  [image]  to display an arrow to the first dependent cell.

To continue tracing dependent cells, click  [image]  again.

Notes

•	Blue arrows show all the dependents of the formula in the selected cell. Red arrows show errors.

•	To select the cell at the other end of an arrow, double-click the arrow.


Trace cells that provide data to a formula

Make sure that the Hide All check box on the View tab in the Options dialog box (Tools menu) is cleared.

1	Click the cell that contains the formula you want to trace.

2	On the Auditing toolbar, click  [image]  to display a tracer arrow to the first precedent cell.

To continue tracing levels of precedents, click  [image]  again.

Note   Blue arrows show all the precedents of the formula in the selected cell. Red arrows show errors.


Remove one or all levels of tracer arrows

•	To remove a tracer arrow, click the precedent cell or the dependent cell, and then click  [image] or  [image]  on the Auditing toolbar.

Microsoft Excel removes the level of the tracer arrow farthest away from the active cell.

To remove another level of tracer arrows, click the button again.

•	To remove all tracer arrows, click  [image]  on the Auditing toolbar.


Troubleshoot auditing a worksheet

What do you need help with?

Tracer arrows do not appear.

Tracer arrows disappear when I change my worksheet.

The Trace Dependents button doesn't work.

The Trace Error command stops before it gets to the source of the error.


Tracer arrows do not appear.

Tracer arrows do not appear if objects are hidden. To display hidden objects, click Options on the Tools menu, click the View tab, and then click either Show All or Show Placeholders.


Tracer arrows disappear when I change my worksheet.

All tracer arrows disappear if you change the formula in the tracer path, insert or delete columns or rows, or delete or move cells. To restore the tracer arrows after making any of these changes, you must trace errors in the worksheet again.


The Trace Dependents button doesn't work.

The Trace Dependents button doesn't trace the following:

•	References to objects, text boxes, embedded charts, or worksheet pictures

•	PivotTables

•	References to named constants

•	Formulas located in an external workbook that is closed

•	Formulas located on a macro sheet


The Trace Error command stops before it gets to the source of an error.

If more than one error path exists, the Trace Error command stops at the branch point. To continue tracing the error, click  [image] again.


Trace data to another workbook

If the reference you're tracing is in another workbook, you must first open the other workbook.

1	Double-click the arrow that displays  [image] and points to the active cell.

2	In the Go To box, click the reference you're tracing.


Find cells that don't match the active cell in a row or column

1	Select the range in which you want to compare cells.

2	On the Edit menu, click Go To.

3	Click Special.

4	To compare the cells in a row, click Row Differences.

To compare the cells in a column, click Column Differences.

Microsoft Excel highlights any cells that are different from the active cell.


Copy data within a row or column

1	Select the cells containing the data you want to copy.

2	To fill in adjacent cells, drag the fill handle across the cells you want to fill and then release the mouse button.

To fill in nonadjacent cells, hold down CTRL and select additional cells in the same row or column. On the Edit menu, point to Fill and then click Down, Right, Up, or Left.

Existing values or formulas in the cells you fill will be replaced.

Notes

•	If you drag the fill handle up or to the left of a selection and stop in the selected cells without going past the first column or the top row, you will delete the data within the selection.

•	If you copy types of data that Microsoft Excel can extend in a series, such as numbers, dates, or items in a custom AutoFill list, the values are incremented through the selected range instead of copied. If this occurs, select the original values again and hold down CTRL as you drag the fill handle.


Fill in a series of numbers, dates, or other items

Microsoft Excel can automatically fill in dates, time periods, and series of numbers, including numbers combined with text, such as Region 1, Region 2, . . ., and so on. If you used the Options command (Tools menu) to create a custom AutoFill list, you can also fill in text entries — for example, you can fill in your company's sales regions in row and column headings.

1	Select the first cell in the range you want to fill, and enter the starting item for the series.

To increment the series by a value other than 1, select the next cell in the range and enter the next item in the series. The difference between the two starting items determines the amount by which the series is incremented.

2	Select the cell or cells containing the starting items.

3	Drag the fill handle over the range you want to fill.

To fill in increasing order, drag down or to the right.

To fill in decreasing order, drag up or to the left.

Tip   The starting value might contain more than one item that can be incremented. For example, if the starting value is JAN-95, both the month and year can be incremented. To specify which value to increment, hold down the right mouse button as you drag the fill handle over the range. Release the mouse button and then click the appropriate command on the AutoFill shortcut menu. For the series FEB-95, MAR-95, . . ., click Fill Months. For the series JAN-96, JAN-97, . . ., click Fill Years.


Fill in a series for a linear best-fit trend

1	Select three or more cells containing the starting values for the trend.

2	Drag the fill handle in the direction you want to fill.


Fill in a series for a growth trend

1	Select at least two cells that contain values on which you want to base the trend.

2	Hold down the right mouse button and drag the fill handle in the direction you want to fill.

3	Release the mouse button and then click Growth Trend on the shortcut menu.


Create a custom AutoFill list

You can create a custom AutoFill series from existing items you've listed in a worksheet, or you can type the list from scratch.

1	If you've already entered the list of items you want to use as a series, select the list on the worksheet.

2	On the Tools menu, click Options.

3	Click the Custom Lists tab.

4	To use the selected list, click the Import button.

To type a new list, type the entries in the List Entries box, beginning with the first entry. Press ENTER after each entry. When the list is complete, click Add.


Edit or delete a custom AutoFill list

1	On the Tools menu, click Options.

2	Click the Custom Lists tab.

3	In the Custom Lists box, select the list you want.

4	To edit the list, make the changes you want in the List Entries box and then click Add.

To delete the list, click Delete.

Note   You cannot edit or delete the built-in lists for months and days.


Types of series that Microsoft Excel can fill in for you

You can automatically fill in several types of series by dragging directly on your worksheet or by using the Series command (Edit, Fill menu).

Time

A time series can include increments of days, weeks, or months that you specify, or it can include repeating sequences such as weekdays, month names, or quarters. For example, the initial time selections in the following table result in the series shown.

Initial selection	Extended series
9:00	10:00, 11:00, 12:00
Mon	Tue, Wed, Thu
Monday	Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday
Jan	Feb, Mar, Apr
Jan-92, Apr-92	Jul-92, Oct-92, Jan-93
Jan, Apr	Jul, Oct, Jan
15-Jan, 15-Apr	15-Jul, 15-Oct
1991, 1992	1993, 1994, 1995
Linear

When you create a linear series, Microsoft Excel increases or decreases values by a constant value as shown in the following table.

Initial selection	Extended series
1, 2	3, 4, 5
1, 3	5, 7, 9
100, 95	90, 85
Growth

When you create a growth series, Microsoft Excel multiplies values by a constant factor as shown in the following table.

Initial selection	Extended series
2 (step value 2)	4, 8, 16
2 (step value 3)	6, 18, 54
AutoFill

The AutoFill feature extends several types of series as shown in the following table.

Initial selection	Extended series
Qtr3 (or Q3 or Quarter3)	Qtr4, Qtr1, Qtr2
1st Period	2nd Period, 3rd Period
Product 1	Product 2, Product 3
Product 1: On backorder	Product 2: On backorder, Product 3: On backorder
1, 3, 4	5.66, 7.16, 8.66
In the preceding table, the last example is a best-fit trend. The next-to-last example shows how Microsoft Excel can extend part of a selection (Product 1) and copy another part (On backorder).


Troubleshoot using AutoFill

What do you want help with?

The fill handle is missing.

The wrong data is entered when I copy cells using the fill handle.

Information is deleted when I drag the fill handle.


The fill handle is missing.

On the Tools menu, click Options, click the Edit tab, and make sure Allow Cell Drag And Drop is selected. If the entire row or column is selected, the fill handle is displayed at the beginning of the row or column.


The wrong data is entered when I copy cells using the fill handle.

If you copy types of data that Microsoft Excel can extend in a series, such as numbers, dates, or items in a custom AutoFill list, the values are incremented through the selected range instead of copied. If this occurs, select the original values again and hold down CTRL as you drag the fill handle.


Information is deleted when I drag the fill handle.

If you drag the fill handle up or to the left of a selection and stop in the selected cells without going past the first column or the top row in the selection, data within the selection is deleted. Drag the fill handle out of the selected area before releasing the mouse button.


Add data to a chart

The method you use is determined by the type of chart you want to update — embedded chart or chart sheet. When you add data to a chart, the legend is updated automatically.

What do you want to do?

Add data series or data points to an embedded chart

Add data series or data points to a chart sheet


Add data series or data points to an embedded chart

1	On the worksheet, select the data you want to add, including any category and series names.

2	Point to the border of the selected data.

The pointer becomes an arrow.

3	Drag the selection to the embedded chart you want to update.

If Microsoft Excel needs more information to plot the data, the Paste Special dialog box appears.

Note   If you're unable to drag the selection, make sure that the Allow Cell Drag And Drop check box is selected. To check this setting, click Options on the Tools menu, and then click the Edit tab.


Add data series or data points to a chart sheet

1	Open the workbooks that contain the chart sheet and the worksheet with the data you want to add.

2	Select the data you want to add to the chart, including any category and series names.

3	Click the right mouse button, and then click Copy on the shortcut menu.

4	Click the tab for the chart sheet.

5	On the Edit menu, click Paste.

Note   To specify how you want your data plotted in the chart, click Paste Special on the Edit menu, and then select the options you want.


Delete data series

To delete data from both the worksheet and the chart, delete the data from the worksheet; the chart will be updated automatically. Use the following procedure to delete a data series from the chart without deleting it from the worksheet.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Select the data series you want to delete.

3	On the Edit menu, point to Clear, and then click Series.

Note   Deleting a data series from a chart does not delete the corresponding data from the worksheet.


Change values in a chart

After you create a chart, you can change the values associated with data points — either constant values or values generated from worksheet formulas. To change constant values, change the value in the worksheet; the chart will be updated automatically. To change data-point values generated from worksheet formulas, drag the data marker and use goal seeking.

What do you want to do?

Change data-point values in a worksheet cell

Change data-point values generated from worksheet formulas by using goal seeking


Change data-point values in a worksheet cell

1	Open the worksheet that contains the data plotted in the chart.

2	In the cell that contains the value you want to change, type a new value.

3	Press ENTER.


Change data-point values generated from worksheet formulas by using goal seeking

If you are adjusting the value of a data marker, and the value was generated from a formula, the Goal Seek dialog box appears.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Double-click the data series, and then click the data marker that contains the formula.

3	Drag the data marker.

The Goal Seek dialog box appears.

4	Click the cell whose value you want to change. The cell reference appears in the By Changing Cell box. The cell that contains the formula appears in the Set Cell box, and the value you want the formula to reflect appears in the To Value box. You can change the value of only one cell.

5	Click OK.

While goal seeking proceeds, the Goal Seek Status dialog box appears on the screen. To interrupt the operation, click Pause. If you want to continue one step at a time after clicking Pause, click Step. To continue the operation, click Continue.

6	To keep the solution values on the worksheet, click OK. To restore the original values, click Cancel.

Note   For more information about using goal seeking in charts, click  [image].


Using goal seeking in charts

If you want to change a data point based on a formula, you can use goal seeking to alter a value that affects the formula. Goal seeking helps you determine how changing a specific cell affects the result of the formula.

To use goal seeking in a chart, you drag a data marker that is based on a formula. The cell that you use to change the result of the formula must contain a value that the formula depends on, either directly or indirectly.


Change data label values and text

Data labels are created from the cells in your worksheet selection. If you later change the cells, the labels also change accordingly.

1	On the worksheet, select the cell that contains the label you want to change.

2	Type the new label.

3	Press ENTER.

Note   You can also edit a data label in a chart. Activate the chart, click the label, type the new text, and then press ENTER. Editing a data label by using this method breaks the link to the worksheet cell; the label is no longer updated automatically.


Link chart titles and text boxes to a worksheet cell

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Click the box that contains the text you want to link.

3	Type an equal sign (=) in the formula bar.

4	Switch to the worksheet, and then select the cell that contains the data or text you want shown in your chart. You can also type an external reference to the worksheet cell.

5	Press ENTER.

Note   You can enter only cell references; worksheet functions cannot be linked.


Reestablish links between data labels and worksheet cells

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Double-click the data marker associated with the data label whose link you want to reestablish.

3	Click the Data Labels tab.

4	Select the Automatic Text check box.


Change the way your data is plotted

There are three ways to change the way data is plotted: You can change whether the data series are plotted from rows or columns (on the worksheet); you can reverse the plotting order of categories or values in a chart or the series plotting order in a 3-D chart; and you can change the order in which series are plotted if they are formatted as the same chart type.

What do you want to do?

Plot data series in rows instead of columns, and vice versa

Reverse the plotting order of categories, values, or series

Change the plotting order of data series


Plot data series in rows instead of columns, and vice versa

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Click  [image].

3	Click Next.

4	Under Data Series In, click either Rows or Columns.


Reverse the plotting order of categories, values, or series

You can reverse the plotting order of categories or values for all charts, as well as for data series in 3-D charts with a third axis. You cannot reverse the plotting order of values in a radar chart.

1	Double-click the axis for the categories, values, or series whose plotting order you want to change.

2	Click the Scale tab.

3	To reverse the plotting order of categories, select the Categories In Reverse Order check box. To reverse the plotting order of values, select the Values In Reverse Order check box. To reverse the plotting order of series for 3-D charts, select the Series In Reverse Order check box.


Change the plotting order of data series

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	On the Format menu, click the command for the chart type group (such as Column Chart or Line Chart) you want to change.

3	Click the Series Order tab.

4	In the Series Order box, click the series you want to move.

5	Click either Move Up or Move Down to place the series in the order you want.


Preventing changes to a chart

You can protect a chart from changes by using the Protection command on the Tools menu.

If the chart is embedded, you can protect it as you would any object on a worksheet. If the chart is a chart sheet, you can protect either the chart only or the entire workbook. To remove protection, you must know the password that was created when the chart was protected.

If you cannot make changes to a chart, it may be protected. For more information about protection, click  [image].


Insert page breaks

If a worksheet is larger than one page, Microsoft Excel divides it into pages for printing by inserting automatic page breaks. These page breaks are based on the paper size, margin settings, and scaling options you set with the Page Setup command on the File menu. You can also create manual page breaks.

What do you want to do?

Insert a page break above and to the left of the selected cell

Insert horizontal page breaks only

Insert vertical page breaks only


Insert horizontal page breaks only

1	Select the row below the row where you want the page break to appear.

2	On the Insert menu, click Page Break.


Insert vertical page breaks only

1	Select the column to the right of the column where you want the page break to appear.

2	On the Insert menu, click Page Break.


Remove page breaks

1	To remove one page break, click a cell directly below a horizontal page break or directly to the right of a vertical page break.

To remove all manual page breaks, select all cells in the worksheet.

2	On the Insert menu, click Remove Page Break.

Note   Only manual page breaks can be removed.


Set page margins

1	Select the worksheet.

2	On the File Menu, click Page Setup, and then click the Margins tab.

3	In the Top, Bottom, Left and Right boxes, enter the margin size you want.

These setting should be larger than the minimum margins of your printer.


Set header and footer margins

1	Select the worksheet.

2	On the File Menu, click Page Setup, and then click the Margins tab.

3	Under From Edge, enter the header and footer margin sizes you want.

This setting should be smaller than your top and bottom margin settings.


Create custom headers and footers

1	Select the worksheet.

2	On the File menu, click Page Setup, and then click the Header/Footer tab.

3	To base your custom header or footer on an existing built-in header or footer, click the header or footer in the Header box or Footer box.

4	Click Custom Header or Custom Footer.

5	Click Left Section, Center Section, or Right Section, and then click the buttons to insert the header or footer information you want in that section, such as page number.

6	To enter additional text to the header or footer, enter the text in the Left Section, Center Section, or Right Section box.

To start a new line in one of the section boxes, press ALT+ENTER.

To delete a header or footer, select it, and then press BACKSPACE.

Note   You can have only one custom header or footer per worksheet. If you create a new custom header or footer, it will replace your old one.


Format headers and footers

1	On the File menu, click Page Setup, and then click the Header/Footer tab.

2	Click Custom Header or Custom Footer.

3	Select the text in the Left Section, Center Section, or Right Section box, and then click  [image].

4	Select the options you want.


Fit my work on the page

Your work might not fit exactly on the number of printed pages you want. You can scale your printed work to fit on more or fewer pages than it would at normal size, or you can specify a certain number of pages for your printed work.

What do you want to do?

Reduce or enlarge what I want to print

Specify a certain number of pages for the work


Specify a certain number of pages for my work

1	Select the worksheet whose contents you want to fit on a specific number of pages.

2	On the File menu, click Page Setup, and then click the Page tab.

3	Click Fit To.

4	Enter the number of pages you want the work to be printed on.

The printed data will not exceed this number of pages. Microsoft Excel will not enlarge the data to fill the pages.

Note   Microsoft Excel ignores manual page breaks when you fit the worksheets on a specific number of pages.


 Center worksheet data on the page

1	Select the worksheet.

2	On the File menu, click Page Setup, and then click the Margins tab.

3	To center the worksheet data horizontally on the page between the left and right margins, select the Horizontally check box under Center On Page.

To center the worksheet data vertically on the page between the top and bottom margins, select the Vertically check box under Center On Page.


How the color palette works

Each Microsoft Excel workbook has a palette of 56 colors that you can apply to cells, fonts, gridlines, graphic objects, and fills and lines in a chart. If you are using a color monitor, you can customize the shade and intensity of the colors in the color palette for each workbook.

When you change a color in the palette, it is changed for any element formatted with the color you changed, throughout the entire workbook. To use the same custom color scheme in a set of workbooks, you can copy the color palette from one workbook to another. For example, you can create a custom color palette that matches your company's logo and image and then copy it into all the workbooks used in company presentations. You can also replace the default color palette that Microsoft Excel uses when it creates a new workbook.


Copy color palettes between workbooks

1	Open the workbook that contains the color palette you want to copy.

2	Switch to the workbook to which you want to copy the color palette.

3	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Color tab.

4	In the Copy Colors From box, click the workbook that contains the color palette you want to copy.


Change colors in a color palette

1	Switch to the workbook that contains the color palette you want to change.

2	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Color tab.

3	To change the color, double-click the color you want to change, and then change the color settings.

To restore the default color palette, click Reset.


Consolidate data

You can summarize the data from one or more source areas by consolidating it and creating a consolidation table. These source areas can be on the same worksheet as the consolidation table, on different sheets in the same workbook, or in different workbooks or Lotus 1-2-3 files. When you consolidate the source data, you apply a summary function, such as Sum, to create the summary data.

There are two ways to consolidate data:

•	By position, when the data in the source areas is arranged in the same order and uses the same labels. Use this method to consolidate data from a series of worksheets, such as departmental budget worksheets, that have been created from the same template.

•	By category, when the data in the source areas is not arranged in the same order but uses the same labels. Use this method to consolidate data from a series of worksheets that have different layouts but have the same data labels.

Note   Consolidating data by category is similar to creating a PivotTable. With a PivotTable, however, you can easily reorganize the categories. If you want a more flexible consolidation by category, you should consider creating a PivotTable.

What do you want to do?

Consolidate data by position

Consolidate data by category

Create a PivotTable


Consolidate data by category

1	Click the upper-left cell of the destination area for the consolidated data.

2	On the Data menu, click Consolidate.

3	In the Function box, select the summary function you want Microsoft Excel to use to consolidate the data.

4	In the Reference box, enter the source areas you want to consolidate. Be sure to include the data labels in your selection. For information about the types of source areas, click  [image].

5	Click Add.

6	Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all source areas you want to consolidate.

7	Under Use Labels In, select the check boxes that indicate where the labels are in the source area: either the top row, the left column, or both.

8	If you want Microsoft Excel to update your consolidation table automatically when the source data changes, select the Create Links To Source Data check box.

You cannot create links when the source and destination areas are on the same sheet.


Consolidate data by position

1	Click the upper-left cell of the destination area for the consolidated data.

2	On the Data menu, click Consolidate.

3	In the Function box, select the summary function you want Microsoft Excel to use to consolidate the data.

4	In the Reference box, enter the source areas you want to consolidate. For information about the types of source areas, click  [image].

5	Click Add.

6	Repeat steps 4 and 5 for all source areas you want to consolidate.

7	If you want Microsoft Excel to update your consolidation table automatically when the source data changes, select the Create Links To Source Data check box. You cannot create links when source and destination areas are on the same sheet.

Note   The category labels in the source areas are not copied to the destination area when you consolidate by position. If you want labels to appear on the destination worksheet, copy them or enter them manually.


Selecting source areas for a consolidation table

You specify the source areas of the data you want to summarize in the Reference box of the Consolidate dialog box. Use these guidelines to define source areas.

•	When the sources and destination are on the same worksheet, use cell references.

•	When the sources and destination are on different worksheets, use sheet and cell references.

•	When the sources and destination are in different workbooks, use book, sheet, and cell references.

•	When the sources and destination are in different workbooks in different locations on a disk, use the full path, book, sheet, and cell references. You can also type the complete path, workbook name, and sheet name for the source area. Type an exclamation point (!) following the sheet name, and then type the cell reference or name of the source area.

•	When the source area is a named range, use its name.

Tip   To enter a source definition without typing, click in the Reference box, and then select the source area.


Change a data consolidation table

After you create a consolidation table, you can add, delete, or change the source area references. You can also link the consolidation table to the source data so that the destination area will be updated automatically if the data in your source area changes.

What do you want to do?

Add a source area to an existing summary area

Change a reference to a source area

Delete a reference to a source area

Create links from a consolidation table to source data so data is updated automatically


Create links from a consolidation table to source data

This procedure assumes you're working with an existing consolidation table.

Note   If the worksheet that contains the destination area also contains an outline or has been used previously for a linked consolidation, do not create new links without first removing the outline and consolidation linking formulas.

1	Click the upper left cell in the consolidation table.

2	On the Data menu, click Consolidate.

3	Select the Create Links To Source Data check box.


Change a reference to a source area

If you did not create links to the source areas, you can change the source areas and consolidate the data again in the destination area. If you did create links to the source areas and you want to adjust the destination area, first delete the consolidation table, and then remove the outline.

1	Click the upper left cell in the existing consolidation table.

2	On the Data menu, click Consolidate.

3	Select the Source area reference you want to change under All References and edit the reference in the References box.

4	Click Add.

5	If you don't want to keep the old reference, select it in the All References box, and then click Delete.

6	To consolidate using the new source areas, click OK.

To accept the changes without consolidating the data, click Close.


Add a source area to an existing summary area

You can adjust source areas and reconsolidate data in the destination area only if you did not create links to the source areas. If you did create links to the source areas and you want to adjust the summary area, delete the consolidation table, and then remove the outline.

1	Click the upper left cell in the existing consolidation table.

2	On the Data menu, click Consolidate.

3	Select the Reference box.

4	If the worksheet containing the new source area is open, select the source area. For information about the types of source areas, click  [image].

5	Click Add.

6	To reconsolidate using the new source area, click OK.

To accept the changes without reconsolidating the data, click Close.


Delete a reference to a source area

1	Click the upper left cell in an existing consolidation table.

2	On the Data menu, click Consolidate.

3	In the All References box, click the source area reference you want to delete.

4	Click Delete.

5	To consolidate without the deleted source area, click OK.

To accept the changes without consolidating the data, click Close.


Troubleshoot data consolidation

If a consolidation did not produce the results you expected, be sure that:

•	You selected the appropriate summary function in the Consolidate dialog box.

•	You specified a destination area large enough to hold the consolidated data. To avoid problems with the shape of the destination area, click the upper-left corner of the destination area when you create a consolidated table. Ensure that you leave enough cells to the right and below the upper-left corner for the table.

If you are consolidating by position, be sure that each source area contains the same range of similar data in the same order.

If you are consolidating by category, also be sure that:

•	You selected the Top Row or Left Column check box, or both, in the Consolidate dialog box.

•	You included the row or column labels in the source areas and in the destination area.

•	You entered category labels identically in all source areas.

•	Source areas have unique labels for any categories that you don't want consolidated, such as the "Total" labels.


Convert text in a worksheet to columns

1	Select the range of cells you want to convert.

The range can be any number of rows tall, but no more than one column wide.

2	On the Data menu, click Text To Columns.

3	In the Convert Text To Columns Wizard, specify how you want the text divided into columns.


Import a text file into Microsoft Excel

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	In the File Name box, enter the name of the text file you want to import.

3	Click Open.

4	Follow the instructions on the screen to specify how you want the text divided into columns.


Moving workbooks between Lotus 1-2-3 and Microsoft Excel

When you open a Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet in Microsoft Excel, Microsoft Excel opens the corresponding FMT or FM3 file. Drop shadows and objects drawn on top of charts are not imported into Microsoft Excel. Also, double underlines and wide underlines appear as single underlines in Microsoft Excel. When you save a Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet in Microsoft Excel, an FMT or FM3 file is automatically saved.

Microsoft Excel cannot export formulas containing references to nonadjacent selections. Functions that produce references as a result are not exported to WKS format. The Microsoft Excel intersection (space) and union (,) operators are not exported to Lotus 1-2-3. In these cases, Microsoft Excel substitutes the value of the formula for the formula itself.


Customize Microsoft Excel to work with converted documents

1	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Transition tab.

2	Select the options you want.


Troubleshoot problems with converting file formats

The Open dialog box doesn't list the document I'm looking for.

All of the text in the file appears in the first column.

Values on the converted sheet don't match the values on the original sheet.

Some formulas were changed to text or values.

I can't find or run the macros in the converted document.


Values on the converted sheet don't match the values in the original sheet.
Values on the converted sheet don't match the values on the original sheet.

Microsoft Excel calculates some operators and functions in a different order than do other spreadsheet applications. To change how Microsoft Excel calculates these formulas, click Options on the Tools menu, and then click the Transition tab. Under Sheet Options, select the Transition Formula Evaluation check box.


Some formulas were changed to text or values.

If, when opening a file created in another spreadsheet application, Microsoft Excel encounters an operator or function that it cannot convert, it uses the result of the formula for the contents of the cell, instead of using the formula itself. You can reenter the formula on your Microsoft Excel worksheet using an equivalent operator or function.


I can't find or run the macros in the converted document.

To run a Lotus 1-2-3 macro in Microsoft Excel, press CTRL and the letter assigned to the macro. For example, if the macro is named \a in Lotus 1-2-3, press CTRL+a. To see the names of all of the macros on a converted Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet, point to Name on the Insert menu, and then click Define.


Using files created with previous versions of Microsoft Excel
Using files created in previous versions of Microsoft Excel

Microsoft Excel for Windows 95 and Microsoft Excel for Windows 5.0 use the same file format. You don't need to  convert anything to share files between these two versions of Microsoft Excel.

Microsoft Excel for Windows 95 can open files created in any previous version of Microsoft Excel for Windows. You can also save files from Microsoft Excel for Windows 95 for use in previous versions of Microsoft Excel. In the Save As dialog box, click the correct file format in the Save As Type box, and then type a new filename in the File Name box if you want to save both the original version and a converted version of the file.


Create a chart

If you want a chart to appear next to your worksheet data, create an embedded chart on the worksheet. To display a chart on a separate sheet in your workbook, create a chart sheet. Embedded charts and chart sheets are linked to the worksheet data they are created from, and both kinds of charts are updated when you update the worksheet data.

You can create charts from cells or ranges that are not adjacent to (next to) one another. Nonadjacent selections must form a rectangle. You can also create charts from a PivotTable.

Tip   As a shortcut to creating a chart sheet, you can select the data you want to plot — including category and series names — and then press F11. If Microsoft Excel cannot determine how to plot the data based on your selection, the ChartWizard starts.

What do you want to do?

Insert or embed a chart on a worksheet

Add a chart sheet

Create a chart from nonadjacent selections

Create a chart from a PivotTable using data from a worksheet


Create a chart from nonadjacent selections

You can create a chart from cells or ranges that are not adjacent to (next to) one another. Nonadjacent selections must form a rectangle.

1	Select the first group of cells that contain the categories or series you want to include.

2	While holding down CONTROL, select additional cell groups you want to include.

3	On the Insert menu, point to Chart, and then click either On This Sheet or As New Sheet.


Change the default chart format

The default chart format for Microsoft Excel is a column chart with a legend. Although you can modify this format after you create the chart, you can often save time by changing the default chart format — for example, if you routinely use a different format. You can use either the format of the active chart or another format you've already created as the new default format.

What do you want to do?

Make the format of an active chart the default chart format

Choose a different default chart format


Choose a different default chart format

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Chart tab.

3	In the Default Chart Format box, click the format you want.

The formats listed include the built-in formats and any custom formats you've added.

How?


Make the format of an active chart the default chart format

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Chart tab.

3	Click Use The Current Chart.

4	In the Format Name box, type a name.


Activate and select chart items

To change or format a chart sheet, it must be the active sheet in your workbook. To change or format an embedded chart, double-click it to activate it.

While the chart is active, you can select items and make changes. Some chart commands are not available until you've selected the corresponding chart item. To move, size, or delete an embedded chart, select the chart just as you would select any object on a worksheet.

Many chart items are grouped together. Some grouped items, such as data series, can be modified individually: Click once to select the group, and then click the item you want to modify. Items that can be modified individually are marked with an asterisk (*) in the following table. Other grouped items, such as gridlines and 3-D walls, cannot be modified individually. For these items, click once to modify or format the entire group.

To select	Do this
Data series*	Click a data marker in the data series.
A single data point	Click the series, and then click the data marker for the data point.
Doughnut data series*	Click the doughnut ring.
Pie data series*	Click the pie.
A pie or doughnut slice	Click the pie or the doughnut ring, and then click the slice or data point.
A trendline	Click the trendline.
An error bar	Click the error bar.
An x or y error bar	Double-click the error bar.
Data labels*	Click one of the data labels.
A single data label	Click a data label, and then click the single label.
A legend*	Click the legend.
A single legend entry	Click the legend, and then click the legend entry.
A single legend key	Click the legend, and then click the legend key.
Title or text box	Click the chart title, axis title, or text box.
Plot area	Click near the data markers in an area not occupied by another item.
Chart area	Click just outside the plot area.
Corners in a 3-D chart	Click a corner.
Walls in a 3-D chart	Click an area on a wall not occupied by a gridline.
Floors in a 3-D chart	Click a floor.
Axis	Click the axis or a tick-mark label.
Lines and bars	Click the gridline, drop line, series line, high-low line, up bar, or down bar.
Arrows and other graphic objects	Click the object.
Note   To cancel a selection, press ESC.


Add data labels

You can add a label to a data series, a single data point, or all data points in a chart. The chart type associated with the selected data points determines the type of label you can add.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Select the data series or the single data marker you want to label, and then click the right mouse button.

3	On the shortcut menu, click Insert Data Labels.

4	Under Data Labels, select an option for the type of label you want.

Tip   To label all data points, do not select any data markers.


Add titles to a chart and axes

You can add a title to a chart or add titles to the axes on a chart.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Click the right mouse button, and then click Insert Titles on the shortcut menu.

3	To add a chart title, select the Chart Title check box.

4	To add one or more axis titles, select the check boxes you want.

Placeholder text is added in the appropriate chart location. To change text in axis titles, select the text and then type the new text you want.

5	To insert a line break in a chart title or axis title, press ENTER.


Add a legend

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	On the Insert menu, click Legend. Microsoft Excel inserts the legend to the right of the plot area and resizes the plot area to accommodate the legend.

Tip   You can move and resize the legend. For more information, click  [image].


Add gridlines

When axes are displayed in your chart, you can add major, minor, vertical, or horizontal gridlines, or any combination of these.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Click the right mouse button, and then click Insert Gridlines on the shortcut menu.

3	To specify the types of gridlines you want, select the appropriate check boxes for each axis.


Add a text box to a chart

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	On the Drawing toolbar, click  [image].

3	Click where you want one corner of the text box, and then drag until the box is the size you want.

4	Type the text you want in the box (the text will wrap inside the box). To start a new line, press ENTER.


Delete data labels, titles, legends, or gridlines

You can delete data labels from a data series, a data point, or the entire chart. You can also delete a chart title, an axis title, the entire legend, a single legend entry and its key, or any type of gridlines.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Click the item you want to delete.

3	Press DELETE.

Note   To add or delete a chart legend, you can also click  [image]. To turn major horizontal gridlines on or off, click  [image].


Convert a Microsoft Excel version 4.0 crosstab table to a PivotTable

1	Select a cell on the worksheet that contains the crosstab table.

2	On the Data menu, click PivotTable.

3	In step 3 of the PivotTable Wizard, follow the instructions to finish the PivotTable.

Note   This procedure permanently converts your crosstab table to a Microsoft Excel PivotTable.


Update data in a PivotTable

1	Select a cell in the PivotTable.

2	On the Data menu, click Refresh Data.

Note   If your PivotTable is based on a Microsoft Excel list and you insert additional rows or columns in the list, you can update the PivotTable to include the new data by running the PivotTable Wizard. For more information about changing the source data for a PivotTable, click  [image].


Change source data for a PivotTable

If your PivotTable is based on a Microsoft Excel list and you insert additional rows or columns in the list, update the PivotTable to include the new data by following these steps. If your PivotTable is created from an external data source, you might need to update the PivotTable.

How?

1	Select a cell in the PivotTable.

2	On the Data menu, click PivotTable.

3	In step 3 of the PivotTable Wizard, click Back.

4	In step 2, select the new source data range that includes the additional rows or columns.

5	Click Next.

6	In step 3, follow the steps to modify your PivotTable to incorporate new fields, if necessary.

7	Click Finish.

Note   When the source data changes and you want the new information in the current PivotTable, use the Refresh Data command on the Data menu to update the PivotTable.


Delete a PivotTable

1	Select the entire PivotTable, including the page fields.

2	On the Edit menu, point to Clear, and then click All.

Note   This procedure does not affect the source data.


Create a chart from a PivotTable using data from your worksheet

1	Select the entire PivotTable, including the column fields and row fields. Do not include grand totals or page fields in your selection. You can also create a chart from a PivotTable with page fields.

How?

2	Click [image].

3	Drag across the worksheet until the rectangle encompasses the area you want for the chart.

4	Follow the instructions in the ChartWizard.

Notes

•	Microsoft Excel creates a chart that reflects the multiple levels of data in the PivotTable. Your chart changes when you hide items, show details, or rearrange fields in the PivotTable.

•	If your underlying PivotTable uses external data and you use Microsoft Query to add or delete fields from the external data, make sure that you update the PivotTable as well; otherwise, your chart will not be updated. For more information about changing a query for a PivotTable, click  [image].


Change a query for a PivotTable

Use this procedure if you created a PivotTable using the External Data Source option in the PivotTable Wizard, and you want to change the criteria of the query you created in Microsoft Query.

1	Select a cell in the PivotTable.

2	On the Data menu, click PivotTable.

3	In step 3 of the PivotTable Wizard, click Back.

4	In step 2, click Get Data.

5	In Microsoft Query, edit the query.

6	On the Microsoft Query File menu, click Return Data To Microsoft Excel.

7	In step 2 of the PivotTable Wizard, click Next.

8	In step 3, change your PivotTable to include new fields, if necessary.

9	Click Finish.

Note   For more information about using an external data source to create a PivotTable, click  [image].


Functions for summarizing PivotTable field labels

Click Custom to add block totals to the innermost row or column field of data in a specific field, or to use two or more types of subtotals (such as Sum and Average) on a selected PivotTable field. Microsoft Excel adds one subtotal row for each type you select. The PivotTable Field command for field labels is available when you select a PivotTable cell that contains a field label. The following table lists the available functions.

For this function	Subtotal line displays
Sum	The sum of the field values being subtotaled.
Count	The number of records or rows in the selected field's data.
Average	The average of the values in the selected field.
Max	The largest value in the selected field.
Min	The smallest value in the selected field.
Product	The product of the values in the selected field.
Count Nums	The number of records or rows in the selected field that contain numeric data.
StdDev	An estimate of the standard deviation of a population, where the selected field is the sample.
StdDevp	The standard deviation of a population, where the selected field is the entire population.
Var	An estimate of the variance of a population, where the selected field is the sample.
Varp	The variance of a population, where the selected field is the entire population.


Functions for summarizing PivotTable data fields

You can use any of the following functions to summarize the underlying values in the data field. The PivotTable Field command for data labels is available when you select a cell in the data area of your PivotTable.

For this function	Data area displays
Sum	The sum of the values in the underlying data. This is the default summary function for numeric data fields.
Count	The number of records or rows in the underlying data. This is the default summary function for data fields that contain something other than numbers.
Average	The average of the values in the underlying data.
Max	The largest value in the underlying data.
Min	The smallest value in the underlying data.
Product	The product of the underlying data.
Count Nums	The number of records or rows in the underlying data that contain numeric data.
StdDev	An estimate of the standard deviation of a population, where the underlying data is the sample.
StdDevp	The standard deviation of a population, where the underlying data is the entire population.
Var	An estimate of the variance of a population, where the underlying data is the sample.
Varp	The variance of a population of data, where the underlying data is the entire population.


Creating a PivotTable from an external data source

Before you can create a PivotTable using data from an external data source (a database, a text file, or another source other than a Microsoft Excel workbook), install Microsoft Query and the appropriate open database connectivity (ODBC) drivers to access the external data you want. For information about installing Microsoft Query, click  [image].

You can start Microsoft Query in step 2 of the PivotTable Wizard by clicking Get Data. In Microsoft Query, you can create a query—a set of search instructions used to retrieve specific data from an external database or data set. To use Microsoft Query from the PivotTable:

•	Specify the data source you want to access.

•	Specify the tables or files in the data source you want to access.

•	Use Microsoft Query to display, sort, filter, or join data from selected tables in your external data source before returning your data to the PivotTable Wizard.

For more information about building a query in Microsoft Query, click  [image].


Creating a PivotTable from another PivotTable

When you use a PivotTable as the source for a new PivotTable in the same workbook, the PivotTables are linked to the same source data. When you update one PivotTable, the other PivotTable is updated as well. Using the same source data for multiple PivotTables also reduces the amount of data required to reside in memory.

If you clear the Save Data With Table Layout check box in the PivotTable Wizard for either PivotTable, the data that is usually stored with a PivotTable is deleted for both of them when you close the workbook.

If you create your PivotTable from a PivotTable in another workbook, copy the source PivotTable to the workbook where you want the new PivotTable to appear. PivotTables in different workbooks do not share the same data set, so they can be updated separately.


Creating a PivotTable from multiple consolidation ranges

When you consolidate data from multiple lists or worksheets, the lists or worksheets must have identical row and column names. If you want to include grand totals in your PivotTable, do not include any total rows or total columns from the source data when you create the PivotTable.

•	If you click Create A Single Page Field For Me, Microsoft Excel creates a page field so that you can display one page for each source range or one page that consolidates all ranges from the source data.

•	If you click I Will Create The Page Fields, use the PivotTable Wizard to assign item names to separate data ranges in as many as four page fields.


Creating a PivotTable from a Microsoft Excel list or database

•	Microsoft Excel ignores any filters you have applied to a list by using the Filter command. Your PivotTable will include all data in the list.

•	If your list contains grand totals and subtotals, you might want to remove them to prevent Microsoft Excel from using them in your PivotTable.

•	The source list or database must contain column labels, because data in the first row of the list will be used for the field names.


Creating a chart from a PivotTable with page fields

To create a chart from a PivotTable with page fields, select only the main body of the PivotTable before you click  [image].

When you display each item in the list for the page field, your chart is updated to display the current data.

Tip   To save and print charts for all page fields in a PivotTable, click  [image] on the Query And Pivot toolbar to display each page in a separate worksheet. Each page field can then be plotted in an individual chart.


Using custom calculations in a PivotTable

The following table describes the functions available for custom calculations in data fields.

Function	Result
Difference From	Displays all the data in the data area as the difference between the Base Field and Base Item you've specified.
% Of	Displays all the data in the data area as a percentage of the Base Field and Base Item you've specified.
% Difference From	Displays all the data in the data area by using the same method as the Difference From function, but displays the difference as a percentage of the Base data.
Running Total In	Displays the data for successive items as a running total. You must select the field whose items you want shown in a running total.
% Of Row	Displays the data in each row as a percentage of the row's total.
% Of Column	Displays all the data in each column as a percentage of the column's total.
% Of Total	Displays the data in the data area as a percentage of the grand total of all the data in the PivotTable.
Index	Displays the data by using the following algorithm: ((value in cell) x (Grand Total)) / ((Grand Row Total) x (Grand Column Total))


Protect a workbook

You can assign protection to an entire workbook to prevent unauthorized users from opening it, accessing it, or saving changes to it. Microsoft Excel provides three levels of workbook protection:

•	Password protection prevents those who don't know the password from opening the workbook or accessing its data in another workbook through links.

•	Write-reservation protection lets others open the workbook as read-only, but they can't save changes to it without the password. If someone opens a document as a read-only file and changes it, that person can save the document only by giving it a different name.

•	Read-only recommended protection lets others choose whether to open the workbook as a read-only file or a read-write file. If someone opens the document as a read-only file and changes it, it must be saved with a different name. If someone opens the document as a read-write file and changes it, it can be saved under its own name.

Caution   If you assign password protection to a workbook and then forget the password, you can't open the workbook, access its data in another workbook through links, remove protection from the workbook, or recover data from the workbook. It's a good idea to keep a list of your passwords and their corresponding workbook and sheet names in a safe place.

What do you want to do?

Require a password when a workbook is opened or accessed

Require a password to edit a workbook

Recommend opening a workbook as read-only


Require a password when a workbook is opened or accessed

1	Open the workbook.

2	On the File menu, click Save As.

3	Click Options.

4	In the Protection Password box, type a password, and then click OK.

5	In the Reenter Protection Password box, type the password again, and then click OK.

6	Click Save.

7	If necessary, click Yes to replace the saved workbook with the open workbook.


Require a password to edit a workbook

1	Open the workbook.

2	On the File menu, click Save As.

3	Click Options.

4	In the Write Reservation Password box, type a password, and then click OK.

5	In the Reenter Write Reservation Password box, type the password again, and then click OK.

6	Click Save.

7	If necessary, click Yes to replace the saved workbook with the open workbook.


Recommend opening a workbook as read-only

1	Open the workbook.

2	On the File menu, click Save As.

3	Click Options.

4	Select the Read-Only Recommended check box, and then click OK

5	Click Save.

6	If necessary, click Yes to replace the saved workbook with the open workbook.


Change or delete a password

You must know the password to open the workbook.

1	Open the workbook.

2	On the File menu, click Save As.

3	Click Options.

4	In the Protection Password box or the Write Reservation Password box, select the symbols that represent the existing password.

5	To change the password, type the new password, and then click OK.

To remove the password, press DELETE, and then click OK.

6	If you changed the password, retype the new password, and then click OK.

7	Click Save.

8	If necessary, click Yes to replace the saved workbook with the open workbook.


Control changes to a workbook

Microsoft Excel provides several ways to restrict unauthorized users from opening or changing a workbook. You can:

•	Protect a workbook's structure so that sheets in the workbook can't be moved, deleted, hidden, unhidden, or renamed, and new sheets can't be inserted.

•	Protect a workbook's windows so that they can't be moved, resized, hidden, unhidden, or closed. A workbook's windows are sized and positioned the same way each time the workbook is opened.

•	Protect a sheet to prevent others from changing its contents. For example, you can prevent changes to cells on worksheets, items on a chart sheet or dialog sheet, graphic objects on worksheets and chart sheets, or code in a Visual Basic module. When you protect a sheet, all cells and graphic objects on the sheet are locked. At times, you may want to leave some cells or graphic objects unlocked for editing. For example, if you use a worksheet as a form, you can lock cells containing labels and instructions but unlock the entry fields so that others can fill them in.

•	Protect only the locked cells on a sheet from changes.

•	Protect only the locked graphic objects on a sheet from changes.

•	Hide worksheet formulas so that they don't appear in the formula bar.

Caution   If you assign password protection to a workbook and then forget the password, you can't open the workbook, access its data in another workbook through links, remove protection from the workbook, or recover data from the workbook. It's a good idea to keep a list of your passwords and their corresponding workbook and sheet names in a safe place.

What do you want to do?

Protect or remove protection from a workbook's structure or windows

Protect or remove protection from a sheet

Unlock specified cells on a protected sheet

Unlock specified graphic objects on a protected sheet

Hide and unhide formulas


Protecting a workbook's structure

You can protect a workbook's structure so that sheets in the workbook can't be moved, deleted, hidden, unhidden, or renamed, and new sheets can't be inserted. When you protect a workbook's structure, you prevent:

•	Adding a new chart sheet. (You can still add an embedded chart to an existing sheet by using the ChartWizard.)

•	Recording a macro on a new sheet in the workbook.

•	Moving or copying a sheet from the workbook or from another workbook.

•	Displaying source data for a cell in the data area of a PivotTable.

•	Using the Scenario Manager to create a summary report for a scenario.

•	Creating a report from an Analysis ToolPak function.


Protect or remove protection from a workbook's structure or windows

1	Open the workbook.

2	On the Tools menu, point to Protection, and then click Protect Workbook.

3	To protect the structure of a workbook so that sheets in the workbook can't be moved, deleted, hidden, unhidden, or renamed, and new sheets can't be inserted, select the Structure check box.

To protect a workbook's windows so that they are sized and positioned the same way each time the workbook is opened, select the Windows check box.

4	To prevent others from removing workbook protection, type a password and click OK, and then retype the password in the Confirm Password dialog box.

Note   To remove protection, point to Protection (Tools menu), and then click Unprotect Workbook. If you assigned a password when you protected the workbook's structure or windows, you have to type that password to remove protection.


Protect or remove protection from a sheet

1	Open the workbook.

2	Switch to the sheet you want to protect.

3	On the Tools menu, point to Protection, and then click Protect Sheet.

4	To prevent changes to cells on worksheets or items in charts, select the Contents check box.

To prevent changes to graphic objects, select the Objects check box.

To prevent changes to the definitions of scenarios on a worksheet, select the Scenarios check box.

5	To prevent others from removing sheet protection, type a password and click OK, and then retype the password in the Confirm Password dialog box.

6	Unlock the cells you want.

How?

7	Unlock the graphic objects you want.

How?

Note   To remove protection, point to Protection (Tools menu), and then click Unprotect Sheet. If you assigned a password when you protected the sheet, you have to type that password to remove protection.


Unlock specified cells on a protected sheet

1	On the Tools menu, point to Protection, and then click Unprotect Sheet.

2	Select the cell range you want to unlock.

3	On the Format menu, click Cells, and then click the Protection tab.

4	Clear the Locked check box.

5	To protect the sheet again, point to Protection on the Tools menu, and then click Protect Sheet.

6	Select the Contents check box.

Tip   To move among unlocked cells on a protected sheet, press TAB.


Unlock specified graphic objects on a protected sheet

1	On the Tools menu, point to Protection, and then click Unprotect Sheet.

2	Select a graphic object you want to unlock.

3	On the Format menu, click Object, and then click the Protection tab.

4	Clear the Locked check box.

5	If the selected object is a text box, clear the Lock Text check box.

6	On the Tools menu, point to Protection, and then click Protect Sheet.

7	Select the Objects check box.

Tip   To move among unlocked graphic objects on a protected sheet, press TAB.


Add or remove a field in a PivotTable

1	Select a cell in the PivotTable.

2	On the Data menu, click PivotTable.

Field buttons for each field in the source data are displayed along the right side of the PivotTable Wizard –Step 3 dialog box.

3	To add a field, drag the field button to the part of the pivot area that corresponds to the type of field you want to create.

Note   To remove a field, drag the field button out of the PivotTable. Removing a field removes that field's associated data from the PivotTable, but it doesn't affect the source data.


Show or hide items in a PivotTable field

1	Select the field label whose items you want to hide or show.

2	On the Data menu, click PivotTable Field.

3	In the Hide Items box, click the items you want to hide, or click selected items you want to show.

Note   Totals and subtotals in the PivotTable are adjusted automatically when you hide or show an item. Hiding data in the PivotTable doesn't affect the source data.


Show or hide detail data in a PivotTable

1	Select the field item whose row or column detail you want to show or hide.

2	On the Data menu, point to Group And Outline, and then click Show Detail or Hide Detail.

Note   If you want to show or hide detail items for specific data in the data area, double-click the data item. The detail data is placed on a separate worksheet in the workbook. If you double-click an item that has no detail data, you can add a row field or a column field in the PivotTable source data that is not currently displayed. In the displayed list, click the field you want to add.


Change the layout of a PivotTable

You can change the appearance of a PivotTable directly on the worksheet by dragging field buttons or data cells. If you want more control over the layout of the PivotTable fields, or if you didn't include all of the source fields for the data when you created the PivotTable, you can also change the layout by using the PivotTable Wizard. Changing the PivotTable layout doesn't affect the source data.

What do you want to do?

Change PivotTable layout by dragging a field or data cell

Change PivotTable layout by using the PivotTable Wizard


Change PivotTable layout by dragging a field or data cell

1	Point to the cell border or field button of the PivotTable item or field you want to move.

2	When the pointer becomes an arrow, drag the cell or field button to a new position.


Change PivotTable layout by using the PivotTable Wizard

1	Select a cell in the PivotTable.

2	On the Data menu, click PivotTable.

3	In step 3 of the PivotTable Wizard, drag field buttons to the row, column, or page field orientation you want.


Use summary functions or subtotals in a PivotTable

You can customize PivotTable data by using a type of calculation other than the default summary function that Microsoft Excel uses, or you can add more than one subtotal to a data field or to data under a field label.

What do you want to do?

Change the summary function for a PivotTable field label

Change the summary function for a PivotTable data field

Add or remove subtotals for outer row or column fields in a PivotTable

Add or remove subtotals for inner row or column fields in a PivotTable


Change the summary function for a PivotTable field label

1	In the PivotTable Wizard – Step 3, double-click the field button whose subtotal you want to modify.

2	Under Subtotals, select one or more of the subtotal types.

Note   Microsoft Excel adds one subtotal line for each subtotal type you select. For a description of the summary functions or subtotal types for field labels, click  [image].


Change the summary function for a PivotTable data field

1	In the data area, select a cell whose summary function you want to change.

2	On the Data menu, click PivotTable Field.

3	In the Summarize By box, click the summary function you want to use.


Add or remove subtotals for outer row or column fields in a PivotTable

1	Double-click the field button you want to display subtotals for.

2	To display subtotals, click Automatic under Subtotals. To use a different summary function, or to display more than one type of subtotal, click Custom and then click the summary functions you want to use in the box to the right of Custom.

To remove subtotals, click None under Subtotals.

Note   Microsoft Excel automatically displays subtotals for the outermost row or column field when you create two or more rows or columns in a new PivotTable. For a description of the summary functions for field labels, click  [image].


Add or remove subtotals for inner row or column fields in a PivotTable

Microsoft Excel doesn't automatically display subtotals or block totals for the innermost row or column field in a PivotTable.

1	Double-click the field button for the inner row or column field you want a subtotal for.

2	To add subtotals for inner fields, click Custom under Subtotals, and then click the summary functions you want.

To remove subtotals from inner fields, click None under Subtotals.

Note   For a description of the summary functions for data fields, click  [image].


Show or hide grand totals in a PivotTable

1	Select a cell in the PivotTable.

2	On the Data menu, click PivotTable.

3	Click Next.

4	To display grand totals, select the Grand Totals For Columns check box, the Grand Totals For Rows check box, or both.

To hide grand totals, clear the Grand Totals For Columns check box, the Grand Totals For Rows check box, or both.

Note   The default summary function used to calculate the grand totals is also used to calculate values for the associated data field.


Calculating PivotTable data

The values in the data area summarize the underlying data. For example, a PivotTable could have a column field button labeled Year and display the field items 1993, 1994, and 1995 as columns. A row field button labeled Region could display the field items North, South, East, and West as rows. The value at the intersection of the 1995 column and the North row would be summarized from the records in the underlying data from the field items 1995 and North.

A PivotTable uses a summary function to summarize the values in the data area. Microsoft Excel uses Sum to calculate data fields that contain numeric data, and it uses Count to calculate cells that contain text. You can choose a different summary function — such as Average, Max, Min, or StdDev — to further analyze and customize your data.

You can also apply a custom calculation that calculates values based on other items or cells in the data area. For example, you could display values as a percentage of a specific row in the PivotTable. For information about using custom calculations in a PivotTable, click  [image].


Create a custom calculation for a PivotTable data field

1	Select a cell in the data area for the field you want to create a custom calculation for.

2	On the Data menu, click PivotTable Field.

3	Click Options.

4	In the Show Data As box, click the custom calculation you want.

5	If required, click the field you want in the Base Field box.

6	If required, click the item you want  in the Base Item box.

Note   For more information about using custom calculations in a PivotTable, click  [image].


Rename a PivotTable field or item

1	Select the field or item you want to rename.

2	In the formula bar, type a new name.

3	Press ENTER.

Note   Changing PivotTable field names and items doesn't affect the source data.


Change the number format for the data area of a PivotTable

1	Select a cell in the data area of the PivotTable.

2	On the Data menu, click PivotTable Field.

3	Click Number.

4	In the Category box, click the format category you want.

5	Click OK.

Note   Microsoft Excel changes the number format for all cells that belong to the same data field as the selected cell. If your PivotTable summarizes more than one field in the data area, you must format each field separately.


Use page fields in a PivotTable

PivotTable page fields, positioned two rows above the main body of the PivotTable in the leftmost column, can be used to display field data independent of other fields in the PivotTable. When you select an item in a page field, the data shown in the PivotTable changes. You can place each page on a separate worksheet to print data or plot charts independent of other data in the PivotTable. You can also combine all the data from the pages into a single PivotTable to create an overview chart or to perform summary calculations on the entire range of data.

What do you want to do?

Display page field items in a PivotTable

Display page field pages on separate worksheets

Show summary data for all page field items


Display page field items in a PivotTable

1	Click the arrow next to the displayed page field item.

2	Click the item you want to display.


Display page field pages on separate worksheets

1	Select a cell in the PivotTable.

2	Click the right mouse button, and then click Show Pages on the shortcut menu.

3	Click the page field that contains the items you want to display on separate worksheets.


Show summary data for all page field items

1	Click the arrow next to the displayed page field item.

2	Click All.


Group and ungroup data in a PivotTable

You can group dates, times, numbers, and selected items in a PivotTable. You cannot group items in page fields, but if you temporarily move a page field  to row or column orientation, you can group the items and then move the field back to page field orientation again. Grouping and ungrouping operations will affect all PivotTables that are based on another PivotTable in the same workbook.

What do you want to do?

Group and ungroup selected items in a PivotTable

Group and ungroup numeric items in a PivotTable

 	Group and ungroup dates in a PivotTable

Group and ungroup items in a PivotTable page field


Group and ungroup selected items in a PivotTable field

1	Select the items you want to combine.

2	On the Query And Pivot toolbar, click  [image]. Microsoft Excel creates a new item that combines the selected items.

Note   To ungroup grouped items, select the group, and then click  [image] on the Query And Pivot toolbar. You cannot ungroup a single group of numbers, dates, or times that you've grouped automatically. The entire group for grouped numbers, dates, or times is ungrouped.

If you ungroup the last item in a row field or column field, the group field is removed and is no longer available in the PivotTable.


Group and ungroup items in a PivotTable page field

1	Drag the selected page field to row or column orientation.

2	Select the text items you want to combine.

3	On the Query And Pivot toolbar, click  [image].

4	Select the grouped field, and then drag it back to page orientation.

Note   To ungroup page field items, drag the grouped page field back to row or column orientation, and then click  [image]  on the Query And Pivot toolbar.


Group and ungroup numeric items in a PivotTable

1	Select a single numeric item in the field you want to group.

2	On the Query and Pivot toolbar, click  [image].

3	In the Starting At box, type the first item you want to group.

4	In the Ending At box, type the last item you want to group.

5	In the By box, type the size you want each group to be.

Note   To ungroup numeric items, select the group, and then click  [image]  on the Query And Pivot toolbar. You cannot ungroup a single group in a numeric field; the entire group for the field is ungrouped.

Tip   If a field contains integers from 1 to 100 and you want to group them into 10 groups of 10, type 1 in the Starting At box, type 100 in the Ending At box, and then type 10 in the By box.


Group and ungroup dates in a PivotTable

1	Select a single date or time item in the field you want to group.

2	On the Query And Pivot toolbar, click  [image].

3	If necessary, type the first item to group in the Starting At box, and type the last item to group in the Ending At box.

4	In the By box, click one or more time periods for the items in the group.

5	If you clicked Days in the By box, enter the size of the group in the Number Of Days box. For example, type 7 in the Number Of Days box to group items by weeks.

Note   To ungroup grouped date or time items, select the group, and then click  [image] on the Query And Pivot toolbar. You cannot ungroup a single group in a date or time field; the entire group for the field is ungrouped.


Sort data in a PivotTable

Microsoft Excel uses the following order for ascending sorts: numbers, text, logical values, error values, blank cells. Descending sorts reverse this order, except for blank cells, which are always sorted last.

What do you want to do?

Sort PivotTable items by labels

Sort PivotTable items by values in the data area

Use a custom sort order in a PivotTable


Sort PivotTable items by labels

1	Select the field button for the field you want to sort.

2	On the Data menu, click Sort.

Tip   Field items in a PivotTable are automatically sorted in ascending order, according to their labels. If you later move or sort the items, you can restore their original order by sorting them by their labels.


Sort PivotTable items by values in the data area

1	Select the field containing the items you want to sort.

If you select a column field, items will be sorted from left to right.

If you select a row field, items will be sorted from top to bottom.

2	On the Data menu, click Sort.

3	In the Sort By box, enter a cell in the data area for the values you want to sort by.

The text at the bottom of the dialog box describes how Microsoft Excel will sort the data.

Tip   Field items in a PivotTable are automatically sorted in ascending order, according to their labels. If you later move or sort the items, you can restore their original order by sorting them by their labels.


Use a custom sort order in a PivotTable

1	Select the field you want to sort.

2	On the Data menu, point to Sort, and then click Options.

3	In the First Key Sort Order box, click an option.

Note   For information about creating your own custom sort order, click  [image].

Tip   When you sort a PivotTable that contains items that are typically sorted chronologically rather than alphanumerically — such as Jan, Feb, Mar — Microsoft Excel automatically sorts them using a custom sort order. If you sort or move items into another order, use this method to return the items to the original custom sort order.


Troubleshoot PivotTables

What do you need help with?

I run out of memory when I create my PivotTable.

Number formatting is not shown when I use the formatted data in my PivotTable.

When I refresh or customize my PivotTable, I lose the formatting I applied to selected cells in the PivotTable.

My data field is using COUNT rather than SUM as the summary function.


I run out of memory when I create my PivotTable.

•	Make sure that you're not adding too many fields to your PivotTable. Depending on the amount of memory on your computer and the size of the source data used for your PivotTable, the number of fields you can add may vary. When you want to use a large number of fields in a PivotTable, add them as row fields in step 3 of the PivotTable Wizard; row fields do not use as much memory as column fields.

•	Microsoft Excel caches a copy of the data source when it creates a PivotTable. If you're creating several PivotTables from the same source data, use the Another PivotTable option in step 1 of the PivotTable Wizard whenever possible. PivotTables created with this option selected will use the same cached data, rather than multiple caches that use more memory.

•	Reduce the overall number of PivotTables in the workbook. For instance, copy page fields to separate workbooks, or move worksheets with separate page fields to another workbook.


Number formatting is not shown when I use the formatted data in my PivotTable.

When you create a PivotTable, numeric formatting of source data or data in your list is not used in the PivotTable. To use number formatting in a PivotTable, select a cell in the data field. On the Data menu, click PivotTable Field. Click Number, and then click the category.


When I refresh or customize my PivotTable, I lose the formatting I applied to selected cells.

•	If you formatted selected items in your PivotTable by using the Number command on the Format menu, the formatting disappears when the PivotTable is refreshed or further customized. To keep the formatting, select a cell in the data field. On the Data menu, click PivotTable Field. Click Number, and then click the category you want.

•	Change the automatic formatting used in step 4 of the PivotTable Wizard. Select the PivotTable. On the Format menu, click AutoFormat. In the Table Format box, click the AutoFormat you want. For more information about applying an AutoFormat, click  [image].


My data field is using COUNT rather than SUM as the summary function.

If your data field is numeric but contains blank cells, Microsoft Excel uses COUNT as the default summary function. By default, Microsoft Excel uses the SUM function for numeric data and the COUNT function for nonnumeric data and blank cells in the data field of a PivotTable. Select the PivotTable cell that contains "Count of" and the data field name. On the Data menu, click PivotTable Field. In the Summarize By box, click Sum.


Create a report

1	On the View menu, click Report Manager. If the Report Manager command doesn't appear on the View menu, load the Report Manager add-in in Microsoft Excel.

How?

2	Click Add.

3	In the Report Name box, type a name for the report.

4	In the Sheet box, click the sheet you want for the first section of the report.

5	Select the View check box. In the View box, click the view (if any) you want for the first section of the report.

6	Select the Scenario check box. In the Scenario box, click the scenario (if any) you want for the first section of the report.

7	To add a section to the list in the Sections In This Report box, click Add.

8	Repeat steps 4 through 7 until you've created all of the sections you want in the report.

Notes

•	If you create a section that includes only one sheet, and if that sheet includes a print area, Microsoft Excel will print only the print area of that sheet.

•	Microsoft Excel prints the sections of a report in the order in which they're listed.


Edit a report

1	On the View menu, click Report Manager.

2	In the Reports box, click the report you want to edit, and then click Edit.

3	To add a new section, click the sheet, view, and scenario you want under Section To Add, and then click Add.

To delete a section, click the section in the Sections In This Report box, and then click Delete.

To change the order of the sections, click the section you want to move, and then click either Move Up or Move Down.

To number the pages of the report consecutively, select the Use Continuous Page Numbers check box.


Print a report

1	On the View menu, click Report Manager.

2	In the Reports box, click the report you want to print.

3	Click Print.

4	In the Copies box, type the number of copies you want to print.


Report Manager command (View menu)

Prints a sequence of sheets, views, and scenarios.

Dialog Box Options

Reports

To print, edit, or delete a report, click the report in the Reports box.

Print

To print the selected report, click Print.

Add

To create a report, click Add.

Edit

To edit the selected report, click Edit.

Delete

To delete the selected report, click Delete.


Add Report and Edit Report dialog boxes

In the Add Report dialog box, you create new reports. In the Edit Report dialog box, you edit existing reports. You can name reports, create report sections, change the order of sections, and number report sections consecutively.

Dialog Box Options

Report Name

To create a name for a report, type the name in the Report Name box.

Section To Add

To create a section for a report, select the options you want under Section To Add.

Sheet

To specify the sheet in the active workbook you want for the section, click the sheet in the Sheet box.

View

To specify the view (if any) you want for the section, click the view in the View box.

Scenario

To specify the scenario (if any) you want for the section, click the scenario in the Scenario box.

Add

To add the selected section to the Sections In This Report box, click Add.

Sections In This Report

Lists the sections in the current report. Microsoft Excel prints sections in the order in which they're listed.

Move Up

To move up the selected section in the Sections In This Report box, click Move Up.

Move Down

To move down the selected section in the Sections In This Report box, click Move Down.

Continuous Page Numbers

To number pages consecutively within a report, select the Use Continuous Page Numbers check box. If this option is not selected, Microsoft Excel restarts the numbering at 1 in each section of the report.

Delete

To delete the section selected in the Sections In This Report box, click Delete.


Edit cell contents

1	Double-click the cell that contains the data you want to edit.

2	Edit the cell contents.

3	To enter your changes into the cell, press ENTER.

To cancel your changes, press ESC.


Move or copy part of a cell's contents into another cell

1	Double-click the cell that contains the data you want to move or copy.

2	In the cell, select the characters you want to move or copy.

3	To move the selection, click  [image].

To copy the selection, click  [image].

4	Double-click the cell to which you want to move or copy the data.

5	In the cell, click where you want to paste the data.

6	Click  [image].

7	Press ENTER.

Note   When you double-click a cell, the arrow keys work only within that cell. To use the arrow keys to move to another cell, you must first press ESC. Or, you can just select any other cell with the mouse.


Transpose rows and columns while pasting

You can switch the orientation of data when you paste it. Data from the top row of the copy area appears in the left column of the paste area; data from the left column appears in the top row.

1	Select the cells that you want to transpose.

2	Click  [image].

3	Select the upper-left cell of the paste area.

4	On the Edit menu, click Paste Special.

5	Select the Transpose check box.


Insert moved or copied data into new worksheet cells

1	Select the cells that contain the data you want to cut or copy.

2	To move the selection, click  [image].

To copy the selection, click  [image].

3	Select the upper-left cell where you want to place the cut or copied cells.

4	On the Insert menu, click Cut Cells or Copied Cells.

5	Select the direction you want to shift the surrounding cells.


Move or copy cells long distances or to other documents

1	Select the cells you want to move or copy.

2	To move the selection, click  [image].

To copy the selection, click  [image].

3	If you want to move or copy the cells to another sheet or workbook, switch to it.

4	Select the upper-left cell of the paste area.

5	To move the data to existing cells, click  [image]. Microsoft Excel replaces any existing data in the paste area.

To insert the moved or copied data between existing cells, click Cut Cells or Copied Cells on the Insert menu.

Note   To cancel the moving border after you have finished moving or copying, press ESC.


Move or copy cells a short distance within a window

1	Select the cells you want to move or copy.

2	Point to the border of the selection.

3	To move the data, drag the selection where you want to paste it.

To copy the data, hold down CTRL while dragging the selection where you want to paste it.

To insert the data between existing cells, hold down SHIFT (if moving) or SHIFT+CTRL (if copying) while dragging the selection where you want to insert it.

Note   If you drag the selection beyond the visible window, your document will scroll in the same direction.


Move or copy one selection to several locations

1	Select the cells you want to move or copy.

2	To move the cells, click  [image].

To copy the cells, click  [image].

3	To paste the same cells in several places on your worksheet, select the upper-left cell of each paste area.

To select nonadjacent cells, hold down CTRL as you select them.

4	Click  [image].

5	To paste the same copy area again, repeat steps 3 and 4.

Note   To cancel the moving border after you have finished moving or copying, press ESC.


Calculate while pasting

1	Select the cells you want to copy.

2	Click  [image].

3	Select the paste area.

4	On the Edit menu, click Paste Special.

5	To combine the formulas in the copied cells with the formulas in the paste area, click Formulas.

To combine the values in the copied cells with the values in paste area, click Values.

6	Under Operation, select the operation you want to use to combine each copied cell and its corresponding paste area cell.

Note   To cancel the moving border after you have finished pasting, press ESC.


Copy the cell value without copying the formula or formatting

1	Select the cells you want to copy.

2	Click  [image].

3	Select the upper-left cell of the paste area.

4	On the Edit menu, click Paste Special.

5	Click Values.


Copy the cell formula without copying the formatting

1	Select the cells you want to copy.

2	Click  [image].

3	Select the upper-left cell of the paste area.

4	On the Edit menu, click Paste Special.

5	Click Formulas.


Copy visible cells only

Use this procedure if you have hidden cells, rows, or columns on your worksheet and you want to copy only the visible cells.

1	Select the cells you want to copy.

2	On the Edit menu, click Go To.

3	Click Special.

4	Click Visible Cells Only.

5	Click OK.

6	Click  [image].

7	Select the upper-left cell of the paste area.

8	Click  [image].

Note   If the paste area contains hidden rows or columns, Microsoft Excel pastes the copy area into consecutive rows or columns, even if they are not visible. You might need to unhide the paste area to see all of the copied cells.


Skip blank cells when copying

When you copy a range that includes blank cells, you can prevent the copied blank cells from replacing cell values in the paste area.

1	Select the cells you want to copy.

2	Click  [image].

3	Select the upper-left cell of the paste area.

4	On the Edit menu, click Paste Special.

5	Select the Skip Blanks check box.


Clear selected cells

Clearing a cell removes the contents (formulas and data), formats, notes, or all three from a cell. If a cell's contents are cleared, its value is zero and a formula referring to that cell will receive a value of zero.

1	Select the cells you want to clear.

2	On the Edit menu, point to Clear, and then click All, Contents, Formats, or Notes.

Tip   Pressing DEL clears contents only.


Clear entire rows and columns

1	Select a row or column.

How?

2	On the Edit menu, point to Clear, and then click All, Contents, Formats, or Notes.

Notes

•	Pressing DEL clears contents only.

•	Clearing a cell removes the contents (formulas and data), formats, notes, or all three from a cell. If a cell's contents are cleared, its value is zero and a formula referring to that cell will receive a value of zero.


Delete selected cells

1	Select the cells you want to delete.

2	On the Edit menu, click Delete.

3	Select the direction you want to shift the surrounding cells.


Delete selected rows and columns

1	Select a row or column.

How?

2	On the Edit menu, click Delete.


Add terms to the spelling dictionary

1	Click  [image].

2	When Microsoft Excel displays a word that you want to add to a custom dictionary, select the custom dictionary in the Add Words To box.

3	Click Add.


Paste only constants, formulas, or other types of cells

1	Select the range that includes the cells you want to copy.

2	On the Edit menu, click Go To.

3	Click Special.

4	Select the type of cells you want to copy.

5	Click OK.

6	Click  [image].

7	Select the upper-left cell of the paste area.

8	Click  [image].


Clear or delete cells, rows or columns

Cells are either blank or contain values. You can either delete cells or clear the contents of cells.

When you delete cells, they are removed from the worksheet and the surrounding cells shift to fill the space. When you clear cells, you remove the cell contents, formats, or notes but leave the blank cells on the worksheet.

When you insert or delete cells, rows, or columns, Microsoft Excel adjusts references to the shifted cells to reflect their new locations. This keeps your formulas up to date. However, a worksheet formula containing a reference to a deleted cell displays the #REF! error value.

What do you want to do?

Clear selected cells

Clear entire rows and columns

Delete selected cells

Delete selected rows and columns


Paste the value, format, or formula of cells

Worksheet cells can have many attributes, including:

•	Values: What appears in the cell.

•	Formulas: Determine the value in a cell. Formulas appear in the formula bar when the cell is active.

•	Formats: How the cells and values are displayed; for example, in bold.

When you move or copy cells, you can paste all cell attributes by dragging or by clicking  [image], or you can paste only selected cell attributes such as values or formats. You can also perform mathematical or other operations while you paste.

What do you want to do?

Copy the cell formula without copying the formatting

Copy the cell value without copying the formula or formatting

Copy visible cells only; for example, from an outline or filtered list

Paste only constants, formulas, or other types of cells

Transpose rows and columns while pasting

Calculate while pasting

Skip blank cells when copying


Move or copy cell data

The easiest way to move or copy data a short distance is by selecting the cells and dragging the cell border with the mouse. To move or copy cells a longer distance or to another sheet, workbook, or application, use  [image], [image], and  [image].

Instead of copying an entire cell, you can copy just a portion of its contents. You can also paste data into several cells, or you can insert moved or copied data between existing cells.

What do you want to do?

Move or copy cells long distances or to other documents

Move or copy cells a short distance within a window

Move or copy part of a cell's contents into another cell

Move or copy one selection to several locations

Insert moved or copied data into new worksheet cells


Copy or move characters within a cell

1	Double-click the cell that contains the data you want to copy or move.

2	In the cell, select the characters you want to copy or move.

3	To move the characters, click  [image].

To copy the characters, click  [image].

4	In the cell, click where you want to paste the characters.

5	Click  [image].


Complex search criteria

When a module sheet is active, you can use complex criteria in the Find What box in the Find or Replace dialog box to help formulate the search you want to make. To use complex search criteria, you must select the Use Pattern Matching check box.

To find	Use this operator	Examples
Any single character	?	s?t finds "sat" and "set."
Any string of characters	*	s*d finds "sad" and "started."
One of the specified characters	[ ]	w[io]n finds "win" and "won."
Any single character in this range	[-]	[r-t]ight finds "right" and "sight." Ranges must be in ascending order.
Any single character except the characters inside the brackets	[!]	m[!a]st finds "mist" and "most," but not "mast."
Any single character except characters in the range inside the brackets	[!x-z]	t[!a-m]ck finds "tock" and "tuck," but not  "tack" or "tick."


Check spelling or automatically correct spelling errors

You can check spelling on all types of sheets. You can add your own terms to the dictionary Microsoft Excel uses. If you have Microsoft Office, Microsoft Excel shares the same dictionaries with the other Office applications.

You can also use the AutoCorrect feature to correct typing errors automatically. For example, Microsoft Excel can change "adn" to "and." As with the spelling dictionaries, Microsoft Excel shares your AutoCorrect entries with the other Microsoft Office applications.

What do you want to do?

Check spelling

Correct typing and spelling errors automatically

Add terms to the spelling dictionary

Add an AutoCorrect entry during a spelling check


Cannot execute MSQRY32.EXE

Possible Causes

•	Your system doesn't have enough memory free to start Microsoft Query.

•	MSQRY32.EXE is either not installed properly or not in your path.

Solutions

•	Close some of the programs you are currently running, and then try again.

•	Run the Microsoft Excel Setup program to install Microsoft Query.


Delete this query definition? (The actual data will remain.)

Possible Cause

You cleared the Keep Query Definition check box.

Solution

To delete the query definition and retain the result set, click OK. You will no longer be able to update your data by clicking Refresh Data unless you create a new query.

To cancel your action and return to the Get External Data dialog box, click Cancel. Then select the Keep Query Definition check box and click OK.


The reference is invalid.

Possible Causes

The destination reference you specified is one of the following:

•	An external reference that doesn't exist

•	A chart sheet

Solution

Change the destination reference to an existing worksheet.


Locked cells cannot be changed.

Possible Cause

Your Microsoft Excel worksheet is protected.

Solution

Point to Protection on the Tools menu, and then click Unprotect Sheet.


Opening query failed.

Possible Cause

Your Microsoft Excel worksheet is protected.

Solution

Point to Protection on the Tools menu, and then click Unprotect Sheet.


Operation canceled.

Possible Cause

You pressed ESC while Microsoft Query was returning query results to Microsoft Excel.

Solution

Click OK and then rerun your query by clicking Get External Data on the Data menu.


The active cell must be part of a Microsoft Query definition or a pivot table.

Select a cell that is part of a query definition or PivotTable, and then try again.


The destination reference is in a query range. Do you want to replace the query definition?

Possible Cause

You have specified a destination reference for a new query that is within an existing query definition.

Solution

To change the current query definition, click OK.

To keep the current query definition, click Cancel, and then change the destination in the Get External Data dialog box.


The range in which the data will be placed is part of an array or locked cells.

Possible Causes

Your destination range contains one of the following:

•	Part of an array

•	Locked cells

Solutions

•	Change the destination range so that it is outside of the array, move the array, or delete the array from the destination range.

•	Unlock the cells in the destination range, or change the destination range so that it is outside of the locked cells.


The selection is invalid.

Possible Cause

You selected a picture, object, or nonadjacent cell and then tried to retrieve or update data.

Solution

Select a cell on a worksheet, and then try again.


Use PivotTable Wizard to get external data for a pivot table.

Possible Cause

You clicked Get External Data when your selection was in a PivotTable.

Solutions

Do one of the following:

•	Select a cell or range that is not in a PivotTable, and then click Get External Data again.

•	Use the PivotTable Wizard to get external data for an existing PivotTable.


Cannot resolve circular references.

There is a circular reference. Circular references can be resolved only when the Iteration check box is selected.

•	To use iteration to resolve a circular reference, click Options on the Tools menu, click the Calculation tab, and then select the Iteration check box.

•	If you didn't intend to create a circular reference, locate the cells involved, and then correct the formulas.

To locate circular references:

1	On the status bar, there will be a reference to one of the cells in the circular reference after the word "Circular."

2	Select the referenced cell.

3	On the Edit menu, click Go To.

4	Click Special.

5	Click either Precedents or Dependents, and then click All Levels. This selects all cells in the circular reference. If just one cell is selected, that cell contains a formula that refers to itself.


Error printing on '[printer]'.
Error printing on (printer).

Microsoft Excel is unable to print.

There are several possible reasons:

•	There may not be enough memory available. Try closing other documents and applications.

•	If you use a network for printing, there may be a problem with the network connection or with the printer driver. Click the Start button, point to Settings, click Printers, and then double-click Add Printer.

•	There may be loose cables or bad connections between your computer and your printer.


Not enough system resources to display completely.
Not enough memory to display completely.

The amount of available memory is not sufficient for Microsoft Excel to update what is displayed on the screen.

To check and free up memory, do the following:

•	To check available memory, switch to the Windows desktop. With the right mouse button, click the My Computer icon, click Properties, and then click the Performance tab. The percentage of available memory is displayed.

•	To free up more memory, try closing other applications or worksheet windows. To update data on the screen, move the window off the screen and back again, minimize and then restore the window, or close and then reopen the window.

•	If you're running Microsoft Excel with Windows NT, you may have run out of memory or disk space.


Replace existing '[filename]'?
Replace existing (filename)?

You're trying to save your document with a filename that already exists on the disk. To save and replace the existing document, click OK. If you don't want to replace the document, click Cancel. To save the document without replacing the existing one, save the file with a different name.


Error in formula.

The formula you tried to enter contains an error.

If you're entering a mathematical formula, correct the formula or cancel it. If you cannot correct the formula now and don't want to cancel it, delete the equal sign from the beginning of the formula. Microsoft Excel will enter the data as text.

To correct the formula, do the following:

1	Click OK to close the message.

2	Edit the formula in the formula bar.

3	Press ENTER.

To get information about the correct syntax for the formula, do the following:

1	Click OK to close the message.

2	On the Insert menu, click Function.

3	In the appropriate boxes, click a function category and a function name.

4	Click Next.

To cancel the formula, do the following:

1	Click OK to close the message.

2	Press ESC.

Common formula problems:

•	Unmatched parentheses.

•	Too few or too many arguments in a function.

•	An invalid character where an operator was expected.

•	A workbook name enclosed in quotation marks but not followed by an exclamation point.

•	An external reference without a workbook name.

•	An incorrectly constructed number.

•	An external reference referring to something other than a name or a reference.

•	A missing operand or a missing closing bracket for an array constant.

•	A nonrectangular array constant.

•	A reference number that's out of the range.

•	Nested external references.

•	The Transition Formula Entry check box is selected. On the Tools menu, click Options, click the Transition tab, and then clear the Transition Formula Entry check box.


'[Copy or cut]' and paste areas are different shapes.
(Copy or cut) and paste areas are different shapes.

The paste area you selected is either too large, too small, or the wrong shape.

If you clicked Copy before clicking Paste on the Edit menu, or if you clicked Copied Cells on the Insert menu, the paste area must be one of the following:

•	A single cell

•	A rectangle that's the exact size and shape of the copied area

•	A rectangle able to contain two or more rectangles that are the exact shape of the copied area

If you clicked Cut before clicking Paste on the Edit menu, or if you clicked Cut Cells on the Insert menu, the paste area must be one of the following:

•	A single cell

•	A rectangle that's the exact size and shape of the cut area


Cannot find '[filename]'.
Cannot find (filename).

Microsoft Excel cannot find the document you're trying to open. Either the document does not exist, you specified the wrong folder or drive, or you mistyped the filename.

Click OK to close the message, and then click Open on the File menu. Find the correct location and the name of the file you want to open. If you're using a macro to open a document, you'll probably need to include the path as part of the filename.


Cannot access '[filename]'.
Cannot access (filename).

You're trying to save, open, or link to a document that cannot currently be accessed. The following are possible reasons for this message:

•	The document name or path you specified doesn't exist.

Check the spelling of the filename.

•	The document you're trying to open is being used by another application.

When the document is no longer being used, try again to open it.

•	The name of the workbook you're trying to save is the same as the name of another document that's read-only or that's being used by another application.

Save your workbook with a different name. If you want your workbook to have the same name, save the read-only workbook as a read-write workbook, or wait until the document is no longer being used.

•	You're trying to save a workbook to a read-only network server, folder, or disk, or to a network drive that has run out of disk space.

Save the workbook to a different network server, folder, or disk.

•	You're trying to reopen the last-saved version of an open workbook, but the saved version has been deleted.

Save the open workbook with another name, and then open the backup version of the deleted workbook (if one exists).


Filename is not valid.

Microsoft Excel tried to save a workbook and failed. Either the filename is not valid, the specified folder does not exist, or the folder is read-only.

If you're trying to save a Personal Macro Workbook, Microsoft Excel could not find the XLSTART folder.

You can use any character in a filename except a colon, backslash, vertical bar, less-than sign, greater-than sign, question mark, left or right square bracket, or asterisk. A filename can be up to 218 characters long.


Locked cells cannot be changed.

When a sheet is protected with the Protection command on the Tools menu, you cannot change a locked cell.

To edit cells on a protected sheet, do the following:

1	On the Tools menu, point to Protection, and then click Unprotect Sheet.

2	Type the password, if necessary, and then click OK.

3	Select the cells you want to change.

4	On the Format menu, click Cells, and then click the Protection tab.

5	Clear the Locked check box, and then click OK.

6	On the Tools menu, point to Protection, and then click Protect Sheet.

7	Type the password, if necessary, and then click OK.


A document with the name '[filename]' is already open.
A document with the name (filename) is already open.

You cannot open two documents with the same name. Even if the documents are in different folders, they must have different names if you want to open them at the same time.

To open the second document, either close the document that's currently open or rename one of the documents.


Save large Clipboard from '[filename]'?
Save large Clipboard from (filename)?

You clicked either the Close or Exit command on the File menu after copying more than 50 cells. Copying a large amount of data onto the Clipboard uses a significant amount of memory, so Microsoft Excel asks if you want to save the data on the Clipboard for later use. Click Yes to save the data on the Clipboard, or click No if you don't want to save it.


Selection too large. Continue without Undo?

Microsoft Excel cannot undo changes made to that many cells. You might be able to complete the operation, but you won't be able to reverse it with the Undo button or command. Click OK to proceed with the task, or click Cancel to leave the document unchanged.


Parentheses do not match.

You've entered a formula in the formula bar with incorrect or missing parentheses. Although Microsoft Excel can automatically add missing parentheses to simple formulas, the formula you entered has more than one possible location for additional parentheses. Check the formula, and then add the parentheses in the appropriate places.


Error in formula: missing operand.

You've typed an incomplete formula. You must include an operand following each operator. For example, =A1+A2+ is missing an operand following the second plus sign. Add the missing operand to the formula, or delete the extra operator.


'[Incorrect number of]' arguments.
(Incorrect number of]) arguments.

You've added either too few or too many arguments to the function you just entered. Check the proper syntax of the function, and then reenter it.


Selection is not valid.

There are several possible reasons for this message:

•	If you clicked either the Copy or Paste command on the Edit menu, the copy and paste areas cannot overlap unless they're exactly the same.

•	If the paste area you select is a single cell, the pasted data must not extend beyond the edges of the worksheet.

•	If you pointed to the Name command on the Insert menu and then clicked Create, the row or column containing the proposed names won't be included in the definitions of the names.

•	If the names you're creating are listed in a row, you must select more than one row.

•	If the names you're creating are listed in a column, you must select more than one column.

•	If you clicked the Table command on the Data menu, you must select a single rectangle that is more than one row high and more than one column wide.


Cannot read this binary file. Open file as text?

You tried to open a binary file that was in a format that Microsoft Excel couldn't read. This file could be:

•	A file from a version of Microsoft Excel that is later than the version you're running. In this case, quit Microsoft Excel, run the later version of Microsoft Excel, open the file, and then use the Save As command on the File menu to change the file type to Microsoft Excel Workbook.

•	A file from another program in a format that Microsoft Excel cannot read. Try copying the data from the other application and then pasting it into Microsoft Excel.

•	A file, such as a program, that's not intended to be opened as a spreadsheet.

•	A file that's been corrupted.


'[Filename]' was created in a previous version of Microsoft Excel. Do you want to update it to Microsoft Excel 5.0 format?
(Filename) was created in a previous version of Microsoft Excel. Do you want to update it to Microsoft Excel 7.0 format?

You're trying to save a file from a previous version of Microsoft Excel. To replace the existing file format with the Microsoft Excel version 7.0 format, click Yes. To retain the previous version's file format, click No.


Replace contents of destination cells?

You tried to move cells by selecting them and then dragging them to a new location, but the destination area is not blank. Click OK to replace the existing cells with the cells you're moving, or click Cancel to cancel the move.


Cannot find matching data.

Microsoft Excel couldn't find the data you're searching for.

If you used the Find command, either there's not a cell that contains what you typed, or you mistyped what you want to find.


Sheet name is not valid.

You tried to rename a sheet in a workbook, but doing so would result in an invalid sheet name. The following are possible reasons for this:

•	The sheet name exceeds the 31-character limit for sheets, or you didn't type anything.

•	The sheet has the same name as another sheet.

•	The sheet name contains a colon, a backslash, a forward slash, an asterisk, or a question mark.

•	The sheet name begins with an opening square bracket followed by 0 or more characters, and it ends with a closing square bracket.


Selected sheets will be permanently deleted. Continue?

Click OK to permanently delete the selected sheets, or click Cancel to cancel the deletion.

To hide a sheet, select it, point to Sheet on the Format menu, and then click Hide.


This document contains links. Re-establish links?

The document you're opening contains automatic links.

To update the linked data with the most current information, click Yes. To keep the current linked data, click No.


No headers detected. Assume top row of selection is header row?

Microsoft Excel cannot determine which row you want to use as the column labels for this list.

To use the first row of the selection for the column labels, click OK. To cancel the Filter command, click No.

To add an additional row to use as column labels, click Cancel, add the label data to your selection, and then click Filter on the Data menu.


'[Filename]' is already open.  Reopening will cause your changes to be discarded.  Do you want to reopen?
(Filename) is already open.  Reopening will cause your changes to be discarded.  Do you want to reopen?

The file you're trying to open is already open.

To open a new copy of the file, replace the open file, and lose any changes made since the last time the file was saved, click OK. To cancel the Open command, click Cancel.


No list found. Select a single cell within your list and Microsoft Excel will select the list for you.

The active cell is not within a list. Select a single cell within your list, and then click the command again.


External reference is not valid.

Your chart formula contains an invalid external reference to a worksheet.

The following are some of the possible causes for this message:

•	The workbook containing the cells you're referring to is not open. Open the workbook, and then enter the reference.

•	A text label formula refers to a name on a worksheet that doesn't result in text. Make sure that the name is defined as text or that it refers to a cell or formula that returns text.

•	An external reference in the SERIES formula for the chart's categories or values refers to a name on the worksheet, but that name defines something other than a rectangular reference or array. Make sure that the name refers to a rectangular range of cells or an array.


Cannot use that command on multiple selections.

The command you've chosen cannot be performed when there are nonadjacent selections. Select only one range at a time, and then choose the command again.


Selected file type will save only the active sheet.

The file type you selected in the Save As Type box refers only to the active sheet. If you want to save all of the sheets in this workbook as the selected file type, you must select each sheet and save it as a separate file.


Save changes in '[filename]'? Note: The current file format is not Microsoft Excel Workbook.
Save changes in (filename)? Note: The current file format is not Microsoft Excel Workbook.

You tried to close the file without saving changes. This file isn't in the most current Microsoft Excel workbook format. To save the file in the most current workbook format, click Yes, and then click Microsoft Excel Workbook in the Save As Type box. To close the file in its current format without saving the changes, click No.


The Timer driver is not installed on this system. Microsoft Excel cannot run without the Timer driver. Choose the help button for more information.
The Timer driver is not installed on this system. Microsoft Excel cannot run without the Timer driver. Click the Help button for more information.

With Windows NT, Microsoft Excel cannot run without the Timer driver installed. To install the driver, do the following:

1	In the Program Manager, click the Main icon, and then double-click the Control Panel icon.

2	In the Control Panel window, double-click the Drivers icon.

3	If the Timer driver isn't listed in the Installed Drivers box, click Add.

4	In the Installed Drivers box, click Timer, and then click OK.

If the driver doesn't exist on your system, Windows will ask you to insert the appropriate Setup disk. Follow the instructions on the screen.

6	In the Drivers dialog box, click Close.

7	Close the Control Panel, restart Microsoft Windows, and then restart Microsoft Excel.


Insert rows

1	To insert a single row, select a cell in the row immediately below where you want the new row.

To insert multiple rows, select the same number of rows immediately below where you want the new rows.

2	On the Insert menu, click Rows.


Insert columns

1	To insert a single column, select a cell in the column immediately to the right of where you want the new column.

To insert multiple columns, select the same number of columns immediately to the right of where you want the new columns.

2	On the Insert menu, click Columns.


Group rows or columns into an outline

1	Select the rows or columns you want to group.

2	On the Data menu, point to Group And Outline, and then click Group.

Note   If you didn't select the entire row or column, click either Rows or Columns when Microsoft Excel displays the Group dialog box.


Hide rows or columns

1	Select the rows or columns you want to hide.

2	On the Format menu, point to either Row or Column, and then click Hide.


Display hidden rows or columns

1	To display hidden rows, select the row above and the row below the hidden rows.

To display hidden columns, select the column to the left and the column to the right of the hidden columns.

2	On the Format menu, point to either Row or Column, and then click Unhide.


Add a worksheet

•	To add a single worksheet, click Worksheet on the Insert menu.

To add multiple worksheets, hold down SHIFT while you select the number of worksheet tabs you want to add, and then click Worksheet on the Insert menu.


Add a chart sheet

1	Select the rows or columns that contain the data and the label text you want to include in your chart.

2	On the Insert menu, point to Chart, and then click As New Sheet.

3	Follow the instructions in the ChartWizard.


Add a Visual Basic module sheet

•	On the Insert menu, point to Macro, and then click Module.


Add a dialog sheet

•	On the Insert menu, point to Macro, and then click Dialog.


Trace errors

1	Select the cell that contains the error.

2	On the Tools menu, point to Auditing, and then click Trace Error.

Note   To select the cell at the other end of an arrow, double-click the arrow.


Insert a page break above and to the left of the selected cell

1	Select the cell immediately below and to the right of where you want to start a new page.

2	On the Insert menu, click Page Break.


Hide a sheet

1	If the sheet you want to hide isn't active, click the tab that contains the sheet to make it active.

2	On the Format menu, point to Sheet, and then click Hide.

Note   You cannot hide the only visible sheet in a workbook.


Display a hidden sheet

1	On the Format menu, point to Sheet, and then click Unhide.

2	In the Unhide Sheet box, click the name of the hidden sheet you want to display.


Insert or embed a chart on this worksheet

1	Select the rows or columns that contain the data and the label text you want to include in your chart.

2	Click  [image].

3	To set the location and size of the chart on your worksheet, position the cross hair where you want it, click, and then drag.

To create a square shape for the chart, hold down SHIFT while you click and drag.

4	Follow the instructions in the ChartWizard.


Change the chart type

For 2-D charts, you can change the chart type of a data series, a chart type group, or the entire chart. For 3-D charts, you can change only the type of the entire chart.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart.

If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	To change the chart type of a data series, select the data series.

To change the chart type of a group or an entire chart, you don't need to select a data series.

3	On the Format menu, click Chart Type.

4	Under Apply To, select the option that applies to the type of change you want to make.

5	Under Chart Dimension, click either 2-D or 3-D.

6	Click the chart format you want to use.


Create a PivotTable to analyze data

1	On the Data menu, click PivotTable.

2	Follow the instructions in the PivotTable Wizard.


Filter a list

By filtering a list, you can display just the rows that meet the criteria you specify. For example, in a list of salespeople and sales amounts, you can see only the names of the salespeople who sold more than $5,000. There are two ways to filter a list in Microsoft Excel: using the AutoFilter command or the Advanced Filter command, both on the Data menu.

The AutoFilter command displays arrows next to the column labels in a list, so you can select the item you want to display. Use the AutoFilter command to quickly filter rows using criteria in a single column.

The Advanced Filter command filters your list, as AutoFilter does, but it does not display arrows in column labels for criteria selection. Instead, you type criteria in a criteria range on your worksheet. Use the Advanced Filter command with criteria in two or more columns, with three or more conditions in a single column, or to apply calculated values as your criteria.

What do you want to do?

Filter a list using AutoFilter

Filter a list using the Advanced Filter command


Filter a list using AutoFilter

For this procedure to work, your list must have column labels.

1	Select a cell in the list you want to filter.

2	On the Data menu, point to Filter, and then click AutoFilter.

3	Click the arrow in the column that contains the data you want to filter.

4	To filter the list by one value in the column, select the value.

To filter the list by two or more values in the column, or to apply comparison operators other than And, click Custom. For information about custom AutoFilters, click  [image].


Create a custom AutoFilter

These steps filter a list using one or two comparison criteria for the same column. For this procedure to work, your list must have column labels.

•	To match one criterion, click the arrow next to the first operator box, then select the comparison operator you want to use.

•	To match two criteria, click the And or Or button. In the second comparison operator and column label boxes, select the operator and value you want.

For information about comparison criteria, click  [image].


Filter a list using the Advanced Filter command

For this procedure to work, your list must have column labels.

1	Insert several rows above your list.

2	In a blank row, type or copy the criteria labels you want to use to filter the list. These labels should be identical to the labels of the columns you want to filter.

3	In the rows below the criteria labels, type the criteria you want to match. To see criteria examples, click  [image]. Leave at least one blank row between your criteria values and your list.

4	Click a cell in the list.

5	On the Data menu, point to Filter, and then click Advanced Filter.

6	To filter the list by hiding rows that don't match your criteria, click Filter The List, In-Place.

To filter the list by copying rows that match your criteria to another area of the worksheet, click Copy To Another Location, click the Copy To box, and then click the upper-left corner of the paste area.

7	In the Criteria Range box, specify the criteria range, including the criteria labels.


Examples of criteria for Advanced Filter

For simple filtering, use the AutoFilter command. Use the Advanced Filter command for filtering lists that require the following.

Use a calculated value (formula) for the criteria

You can use a criterion that is the result of a formula. For example, the criteria range

displays rows that have a value in column E greater than the average of cells E5:E14.

Note   If you use a column label instead of a relative cell reference or a range name, Microsoft Excel displays the error #NAME? in the cell that contains the computed criterion formula. You can ignore this error, as it does not affect how the list is filtered.

Use criteria from two or more columns

To specify multiple criteria for different columns, enter all criteria in the same row of the criteria range. For example, the criteria range

displays all rows that contain Produce in the Type column, Davolio in the Salesperson column, and sales values greater than $1000.

To specify a series of different criteria for different columns, enter the criteria in different rows. For example, the criteria range

displays all rows that contain Produce in the Type column, or Davolio in the Salesperson column, or sales values greater than $1000.

To specify AND/OR relationships in the same criteria range, type the criteria in separate rows. For example, the criteria range

displays the rows that contain Davolio in the Salesperson column and sales values greater than $1500, or the rows for salesperson Buchanan with sales values greater than $1500.

Use three or more conditions in a single column

To specify three or more conditions from a single column, type the criteria directly below each other in separate rows. For example, the criteria range

displays the rows that contain either Davolio, Buchanan, or Suyama in the Salesperson column.


Remove a filter from a list

What do you want to do?

Remove a filter from a column

Remove AutoFilter arrows from a list

Redisplay all rows in a filtered list


Remove a filter from a column

•	Click the arrow next to the column, and then click All.


Remove AutoFilter arrows from a list

•	On the Data menu, point to Filter, and then click AutoFilter.


Redisplay all rows in a filtered list

•	On the Data menu, point to Filter, and then click Show All.


Types of comparison criteria

You can use the following types of comparison criteria in a criteria range using an advanced filter or in a custom AutoFilter.

A series of characters you want matched

To find records that contain an exact value, type the text, number, date, or logical value in the cell below the criteria label. For example, if you type 98133 below a Postal Code label in the criteria range, Microsoft Excel displays only rows that contain the postal code value 98133.

When you use text as criteria, Microsoft Excel finds all items that begin with that text. For example, if you type the text "Dav" as a criterion, Microsoft Excel finds Davolio, David, and Davis. To match only the specified text, type the formula

=''=text''

where text is the text you want to match.

Wildcard characters

To find text values that share some characters but not others, use a wildcard character. A wildcard character represents one or more unspecified characters.

To find	Use	Example
? (question mark)	Any single character in the same position as the question mark	sm?th finds "smith" and "smyth"
* (asterisk)	Any number of characters in the same position as the asterisk	*east finds "Northeast" and "Southeast"
~ (tilde) followed by ?, *, or ~	An actual question mark, asterisk, or tilde	fy91~? finds "fy91?"
A quantity you want compared

To display only rows that fall within certain limits, type a comparison operator, followed by a value, in the cell below the criteria label. For example, to find rows whose unit values are greater than or equal to 1000, type ">=1000" under the Units criteria label in the criteria range.

Note   Microsoft Excel does not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase characters when evaluating data.


AutoFilter options

In addition to filtering by a unique value in the current column, you can apply other filter options.

To do this	Click
Display all rows	All
Display all rows that contain whatever upper or lower intervals you specify, for example the top 10% of sales amounts	Top 10
Apply two criteria values within the current column, or use comparison operators other than AND	Custom
Display only rows that contain a blank cell in the column	Blanks
Display only rows that contain a value in the column	NonBlanks


Add up-down bars and drop, series, and high-low lines to charts

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	On the Format menu, click the command for the chart group (such as Area Group or Line Group) to which you want to add bars or lines.

3	Click the Options tab.

4	Select the type of lines or bars you want.


Change colors, patterns, lines, and borders in charts

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Double-click the chart item you want to change.

3	Click the Patterns tab.

4	Select the options you want.


Change number formats in charts

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	To format tick-mark labels, double-click the appropriate axis. To format data labels, double-click them. To format a single data label, click it once (to select all of the labels), click it again (to select it), and then double-click it. To format a trendline label, double-click it.

3	Click the Number tab.

4	Select the options you want.

Note   To restore the link between numbers in the chart and numbers on the worksheet, select the Linked To Source check box. Links are sometimes broken when values are manually changed in the chart.


Vary colors in the same data series

You can vary the colors of data markers within the same data series in single-series charts. Slices in pie charts, which contain only one series, are varied by default.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	On the Format menu, click the chart group (such as Column Group or Bar Group) you want to change.

3	Click the Options tab.

4	Select the Vary Colors By Point check box or the Vary Colors By Slice check box.


Smooth the angles of line charts

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Double-click the line you want to smooth.

3	Click the Patterns tab.

4	Select the Smoothed Line check box.


Explode or pull out slices in pie and doughnut charts

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	To explode all of the slices in a pie chart, click once to select the whole chart. To explode a single slice in a pie chart, click the chart, and then click the slice itself. To explode a single slice in a doughnut chart, the slice must be part of the outer ring. Click once to select the outer ring, and then click the slice itself.

3	Drag it away from the center of the chart.


Change the doughnut hole size

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	On the Format menu, click Doughnut Group.

3	Click the Options tab.

4	In the Doughnut Hole Size box, type a value between 10 and 90 to specify the diameter of the hole. The higher the percentage, the larger the hole and the smaller the width of the doughnut rings.


Change the angle of the first doughnut or pie slice

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	On the Format menu, click either Pie Group or Doughnut Group.

3	Click the Options tab.

4	In the Angle Of First Slice box, type a value between 0 and 360 to specify the angle at which you want the first slice to appear.


Format error bars

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	To format all of the error bars for a data series, double-click an error bar.

3	Click the Patterns tab.

4	Under Line, select the style, color, and weight you want for the line.

5	Under Marker, select the type of marker you want.


Arrange and space data markers in bar and column charts

You can overlap 2-D bars or column markers to make a chart easier to read. Or, if your chart has clusters of data markers, you can increase the gap width, which determines the spacing between those clusters.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	On the Format menu, click either Bar Group or Column Group.

3	Click the Options tab.

4	To change the overlap within a data marker cluster, type a value between -100 and 100 in the Overlap box. The higher the value, the greater the overlap within the cluster.

5	To change the spacing between clusters of data markers, type a value between 0 and 500 in the Gap Width box. The higher the value, the greater the distance between clusters.


Create and format picture markers

1	Switch to the application and the document that contain the picture you want to use as a data marker.

2	Copy the picture.

3	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

4	Click the data series or individual marker you want to replace with picture markers.

5	Click  [image].

6	To resize or stack the pictures, double-click the picture marker, click the Patterns tab, and then select the options you want.

Note   To clear pictures from data markers, click the data marker or data series whose picture markers you want to clear. On the Edit menu, click Clear, and then click Formats.


Format chart axes and tick marks

You can customize the style, color, and weight of axes and tick marks. Any colors or patterns you apply to an axis are also applied to the tick marks on that axis.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Double-click the axis you want to format.

3	Click the Patterns tab.

4	Under Axis, select the style, color, and weight you want for the axis and tick-marks.

5	Under Tick Mark Type, select the appropriate options to specify how you want the major and minor tick marks to appear on the axis.

Note   To hide major or minor tick marks, or to hide both types, click None.


Format gridlines

Gridlines are formatted independently of axes.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	To format all major gridlines for an axis, double-click a major gridline for that axis. To format all minor gridlines for the axis, double-click a minor gridline for the axis.

3	Click the Patterns tab.

4	Under Line, select the style, color, and weight you want for the gridlines.


Display and hide axes

Hiding an axis also hides the tick-mark labels.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	On the Insert menu, click Axes.

3	Select the check boxes for the axes you want to display. Clear the check boxes for the axes you want to hide.


Change the value-axis scale

The scale specifies the value of tick marks on an axis, the intervals at which the values occur, and the point at which one axis crosses another. Before you can make changes to an axis, it must be displayed.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Double-click a value axis.

3	Click the Scale tab.

4	Select the options you want.


Change the placement of category tick marks and labels

Each category on the category axis is identified by a single label, and categories are separated by tick marks. You can change the intervals at which labels and tick marks appear. For 2-D charts, you can specify where you want the value (y) axis to cross the category (x) axis.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Double-click a category axis.

3	Click the Scale tab.

4	Select the options you want.

Note   To have the value axis cross after the last category, select the Value (Y) Crosses At Maximum Category check box. To have the value axis cross through the middle of the category axis, clear the Value (Y) Axis Crosses Between Categories check box.


Move and resize charts and chart items by using the mouse

You can use the mouse to resize and move some types of chart items. You cannot resize titles by dragging, however.

If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab. Click the chart item.

	To move a chart item, point to the item, and then drag it to where you want it.
	To resize a chart item, point to a sizing handle. The mouse pointer changes to a double-headed arrow. Click and drag until the item is the size you want.


Move and resize legends by using formatting commands

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Double-click the legend.

3	Click the Placement tab.

4	Select the legend position you want.

Note   When you use the Placement tab, the legend loses any custom sizing you may have already applied.


Control the display of a chart sheet

When a chart sheet is sized with the window, the chart fills the entire window and you cannot zoom in or out on it. Sizing the chart with the window makes viewing the chart convenient; sizing the chart independently from the window allows you to use the Zoom command on the View menu and easily see how the chart will look when it's printed.

1	Click the tab for the chart sheet.

2	On the View menu, click Sized With Window.


Size and set up a chart for printing

If the chart is embedded on a worksheet, you can size it and move it on the worksheet, and then you can view the worksheet and chart together by using the Print Preview command on the File menu.

If you're working with a chart sheet, you can size and scale the chart area, specify how it should be placed on the printed page, and then view it in the preview window. By default, the chart is sized to fit the full page.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	On the File menu, click Page Setup.

3	Click the Chart tab.

4	Select the printing options you want.


Format and arrange tick-mark labels

You can change the position, font, and number format of tick-mark labels.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Double-click the axis whose tick-mark labels you want to format.

3	Click the Patterns tab.

4	Under Tick-Mark Labels, select the position on the chart where you want the tick-mark labels to appear.

5	If you've changed the point at which this axis crosses another axis and you want to keep the tick-mark labels near the axis, click Next To Axis.

6	Click the Alignment tab, and then select the text orientation you want.

7	Click the Font tab, and then select the options you want.

8	Click the Number tab, and then select the options you want.


Change series tick-mark labels in the chart

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Double-click the data series whose series name you want to change.

3	Click the Name And Values tab.

4	In the Name box, type the cell reference or name you want. Or, with the dialog box open, click in the Name box, switch to your worksheet, and then select the cell that contains the label you want plotted in the chart.

Note   To change a label name without changing the name in the worksheet, type the name you want in the Name box (Name And Values tab). However, be aware that doing this breaks the link to the worksheet cell; if you later make a change to the worksheet cell, that change will not be reflected in the chart.


Change the font and alignment of chart text

You can change the font and alignment of all chart text. If the text is unlinked, you can format the whole text item or individual characters within the text. If the text is linked to worksheet cells, you can format the text as a whole, but you cannot format individual characters.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Double-click the chart text you want to format.

3	Click the Font tab.

4	Select the font name, size, color, and any other options you want.

5	Click the Alignment tab.

6	Select the options you want.


Change category tick-mark labels in the chart

Tick-mark labels are linked to the cells in the worksheet selection used to create the chart. Although you can change the labels in the chart itself, it's easier to edit this text directly on the worksheet. To change tick-mark labels on the worksheet, select the cell that contains the label name you want to change, type the new name, and then press ENTER.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Double-click the first data series.

3	Click the X Values tab.

4	In the X Values box, type the cell or cell range reference you want. Or, with the dialog box open, click in the X Values box, switch to your worksheet, and then select the cell range that contains the labels you want plotted in the chart.


Edit legend entries

Legend entries are linked to the cells in the worksheet selection used to create the chart. Although you can change the legend in the chart itself, it's easier to edit legend text directly on the worksheet. To edit legend entries on the worksheet, select the cell that contains the series name (or category name) you want to change, type the new name, and then press ENTER.

1	To associate a legend entry with a different cell on a worksheet, open the worksheet that contains the range plotted in the chart.

2	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

3	Double-click the data series whose legend entry you want to change.

4	Click the Name And Values tab.

5	With the dialog box open, click in the Name box, switch to your worksheet, and then click the worksheet cell that contains the new series name you want plotted in the chart.

Note   To change a legend entry name without changing the name on the worksheet, type the name you want in the Name box (Name And Values tab). However, be aware that doing this breaks the link to the worksheet cell; if you later make a change to the worksheet cell, that change will not be reflected in the chart.


Troubleshoot problems with charts

What do you need help with?

My chart doesn't display the data the way I want it to.

I can't find the right menu command, tab, or dialog-box options.

I want to create an xy (scatter) chart, but I'm having trouble setting up my data.


My chart doesn't display the data the way I want it to.

If the data in your chart isn't represented the way you want, check the following items:

•	Is the data on the worksheet arranged in rows or columns, and does the chart reflect the way the data is structured? If not, activate the chart, and then click  [image]  to rerun the ChartWizard.

•	Have you specified the correct number of rows or columns to be used for legend text? If not, activate the chart, and then click  [image]  to rerun the ChartWizard. In Step 4 of the ChartWizard, specify the correct number of rows or columns to be used for legend text.

•	Are chart items formatted incorrectly? Some settings — such as Gap Width, Overlap, and Angle Of First Slice for pie and doughnut charts — determine how your data markers are aligned. Different options are available depending on the type of chart you're using. For more information about arranging data markers in bar and column charts, click  [image]. For more information about changing the angle of the first slice in pie and doughnut charts, click  [image].

•	Is the scale of the chart correct? To check the settings for the scale of the chart, double-click each axis in the chart, and then check the settings on the Scale tab in the Format Axis dialog box.


I can't find the correct menu command, tab, or dialog-box options.

Menu commands for charting vary depending on the type of chart item selected. Also, you must activate an embedded chart for the correct menu items to appear. To activate a chart, double-click it. Then, to format most types of chart items, just double-click the item. In most cases, the correct dialog box will appear.

Some types of chart items, such as data series, are grouped together. To select the entire group, click once. To select an individual item within a group, click the group, and then click the item. Other types of chart items, such as gridlines and 3-D walls, are grouped together and cannot be formatted individually. For these types, click the group to modify its formatting.

For more information about selecting and formatting chart items, click  [image].


I want to create an xy (scatter) chart, but I'm having trouble setting up my data.

Use an xy (scatter) chart to show the relationship between two data series. If you want to show categories on one axis and values on another, you may want to use a different type of chart, such as a line chart.

An xy (scatter) chart plots the points using a pair of coordinates — one from an x series and one from a y series. The top row (or left column) of your data selection represents the x series, and each successive row (or column) represents a y series.

You can also create an xy (scatter) chart with a different x value for each set of y values. Arrange your data as shown, and then change the x value for the data series. Double-click a data series, click the X Values tab in the Format Selected Series dialog box, and then change the worksheet reference.


Format the parts of and perspective in 3-D charts

In 3-D charts, you can change the elevation, the perspective, the rotation, and the floor and walls.

What do you want to do?

Change the depth and width in a 3-D chart

Set the height and perspective in a 3-D chart

Change the rotation and elevation in a 3-D chart

Format the walls and floor in a 3-D chart


 Format levels in a 3-D surface chart

To format the levels in a 3-D surface chart, you must format the legend key.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab. If the chart doesn't have a legend, click  [image] to add one.

2	Click the legend once to select it, and then click the legend key that represents the surface level you want to change.

3	Double-click the legend key to display the Format Legend Key dialog box.

4	Select the options you want, and then repeat steps 2 and 3 for each level you want to format.


 Format the walls and floor in a 3-D chart

You can format the walls and floor in 3-D charts (except for pie charts) by applying patterns, colors, and borders.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Double-click a wall or floor.

3	Select the options you want.


Change the rotation and elevation in a 3-D chart

1	Click the intersection of any two axes to select the corners of the chart.

The Name box on the formula bar should say "Corners."

2	Drag any corner to adjust the elevation and rotation in the chart.

3	To view the data markers, hold down CTRL while you drag.

Note   You can also rotate the chart by using formatting commands. Activate the chart, click the right mouse button, and then click 3-D View.


 Set the height and perspective in a 3-D chart

Depending on the chart type and the options you select, you can change the height and perspective in the chart, and you can turn right angles on or off.

•	With the Right Angle Axes check box cleared, you can set the Perspective and Height options.

•	With the Right Angle Axes check box selected, you can either set the Height option or turn the Auto Scaling option on.

•	With both the Right Angle Axes and Auto Scaling check boxes selected, you cannot set the Perspective and Height options.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Click the right mouse button, and then click 3-D View on the shortcut menu.

3	Select the options you want.

Note   The Perspective option is not available for 3-D bar charts, which always have the Right Angle Axes check box selected.


Change the depth and width in a 3-D chart

You can change the chart depth in 3-D charts that have axes, the gap depth in 3-D perspective charts, and the gap width in bar or column charts.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	On the Format menu, click the chart group (such as 3-D Column Group) you want to change.

3	Click the Options tab.

4	Select the options you want.


Adjust column width and row height

You can adjust the width of columns and the height of rows. You can also define the standard width of columns for a worksheet. Defining the standard column width adjusts all columns to the same width, except for columns that have previously been changed.

What do you want to do?

Adjust column width

Adjust row height

Adjust width of columns to the standard width

Define the standard column width


Adjust column width

1	Select the columns whose width you want to adjust.

To change width for all columns on the worksheet, click the Select All button.

2	Drag the border at the right of the column heading until the column is the width you want.

The column width displayed at the left end of the formula bar is the average number of characters of the standard font that fit in a cell.

Note   To make the column width fit the contents, double-click the border to the right of the column heading.


Adjust row height

1	Select the rows whose height you want to adjust.

To change height for all rows on the worksheet, click the Select All button.

2	Drag the border below the row heading until the row is the height you want.

The row height in points, from 0 to 409.5, is displayed at the left end of the formula bar.

Note   To make the row height fit the contents, double-click the border below the row heading.


Adjust width of columns to the standard width

1	Select the columns you want to change to the standard width.

To change all columns on the worksheet to the standard width, click the Select All button.

2	On the Format menu, point to Column, and then click Standard Width.

3	Click OK.


Define the standard column width

1	To define the standard column width for all worksheets in a workbook, first select all worksheets.

To apply the standard width to all columns, click the Select All button.

To apply the standard width to only those columns that have not previously been changed, select a cell on the worksheet.

2	On the Format menu, point to Column, and then click Standard Width.

3	Type a new number.

This is the average number of characters of the standard font that fit in a cell.


Justify text within a cell

1	Select the cells you want to justify.

2	On the Format menu, click Cells, and then click the Alignment tab.

3	Under Horizontal, click Justify.

Note   Justifying automatically wraps the text. You must have more than one line of wrapped text to see the justification.


Distribute text to fill a selected range

1	Select the cells containing the text you want to fill across a range. Include the entire range in which you want the text to appear. Except for the left column, cells in the range should be blank.

2	On the Edit menu, point to Fill, and then click Justify.

The text is entered into the cells in the left column, but flows over into the empty cells to the right.


What the error value #DIV/0! means

The #DIV/0! error value occurs when a formula is trying to divide by 0 (zero).

Possible cause	Suggested action
Using a reference to a blank cell or to a cell that contains zero as a divisor. (If an operand should be a number but is blank, Microsoft Excel interprets that blank as a zero.)	Change the reference or enter a value other than zero in the cell used as a divisor.
Entering a formula that contains explicit division by zero (0) -- for example, =5/0.	Correct the formula.
Writing a macro that uses a macro function that returns #DIV/0! in certain situations.	Check the functions you are using to see if one or more of them returns #DIV/0! in certain situations.


What the error value #N/A means

The #N/A error value occurs when no value is available. This error value can ensure that you don't accidentally refer to a blank cell. If certain cells on your worksheet should contain data that is not yet available, enter #N/A in those cells. Formulas that refer to those cells will then return #N/A instead of calculating a value.

Possible cause	Suggested action
Giving an inappropriate argument for lookup_value in the HLOOKUP, LOOKUP, MATCH, or VLOOKUP functions.	Adjust the lookup_value.
Using an array argument that was expanded.	Change the cell references to reflect additional data brought into the expanded array formula entry range. For example, change {$a$1:$c$10} to {$a$1:$c$15} to reflect additional cells that are being calculated in the expanded array formula.
Omitting one or more arguments to a built-in or custom worksheet function.	Enter all arguments in the function.
Using a custom worksheet function that did not run successfully.	Correct or don't use the custom function.
Writing a macro that uses a macro function that returns #N/A in certain situations.	Check the functions you are using to see if one or more of them returns #N/A in certain situations.


What the error value #NAME? means

The #NAME? error value occurs when you use a name that Microsoft Excel doesn't recognize.

Possible cause	Suggested action
Deleting or failing to define the name.	Define the name.
Misspelling the name.	Correct the spelling. Highlight the name in the formula bar, and then select the name from the name box at the left end of the formula bar.
Misspelling the name of a function.	Correct the spelling. Use the Function Wizard to insert the correct function name into the formula.
Entering text without double quotation marks in the formula. Microsoft Excel interprets your entry as a name even though you intended it as text.	Enclose text in the formula in double quotation marks.
Omitting a colon in a range reference.	Correct the formula.


What the error value #NULL! means

The #NULL! error value occurs when you specify an intersection of two areas that do not intersect.

Possible cause	Suggested action
Using an incorrect range operator or incorrect cell reference.	To refer to two areas that don't intersect, use the union operator, the comma (,). Check for typing errors in the range specifications.


What the error value #NUM! means

The #NUM! error value occurs when there is a problem with a number.

Possible cause	Suggested action
Using an unacceptable argument in a function that requires a numeric argument.	Correct the argument.
Using a worksheet function that iterates, such as IRR or RATE, and the function cannot find a result that works.	Try using a different starting value for the function.
Entering a formula that produces a number that is too large or too small to be represented in Microsoft Excel.	Change the formula so that its result is within the allowed range of numbers.


What the error value #REF! means

The #REF! error value occurs when you refer to a cell that is not valid.

Possible cause	Suggested action
Deleting cells referred to by other formulas or pasting moved cells over cells referred to by other formulas.	Change the formulas, or reinstate the cells on the worksheet by clicking Undo on the Edit menu immediately after deleting or pasting cells.
Writing a macro that uses a macro function that returns #REF! in certain situations.	Check the functions you are using to see if one or more of them returns #REF! in certain situations.
Using a remote reference to an application that is not running or to a topic that is not available.	Start the application. Make sure that you're using the correct topic.


What the error value #VALUE! means

The #VALUE! error value occurs when you use the wrong type of argument or operand.

Possible cause	Suggested action
Entering text where a number or logical value is required. Microsoft Excel cannot translate the text into the correct data type.	Check the formula or function for the required operand or argument. Check the referenced cells for valid values.
Supplying a range to an operator or a function that requires a single value when no cell in the range is in the same row or column as the cell that contains the formula or function.	Change the range to a single value.
Using a matrix that is not valid in one of the matrix worksheet functions.	Correct the matrix.
Writing a macro using a function that returns #VALUE! in certain situations.	Check the functions you are using to see if one or more of them returns #VALUE! in certain situations.


What the error value ##### means

You have used a formula that produces a result that is too long to fit in the cell.

This error value also occurs when a constant numeric value is too long. This is not an actual error value, but an indicator that the column needs to be wider.


How Microsoft Excel handles unexpected values in formulas

When you enter a formula,  Microsoft Excel expects certain types of values for each operator. If you enter something that is different from what is expected, Microsoft Excel converts the value, if possible, to give more flexibility when using formulas.

The formula	Produces	Explanation
="1"+"2"	3	When you use a plus sign, Microsoft Excel expects you to use numbers. Even though the quotation marks mean that "1" and "2" are text values, Microsoft Excel automatically converts the text values to numbers.
=1+"$4.00"	5	When a number is expected, Microsoft Excel converts text if it is in a format that would usually be accepted for a number.
=SQRT("Sunday")	#VALUE!	Microsoft Excel cannot convert the text to a number because the text is not an acceptable format for a number constant.
="6/1/92"-"5/1/92	31	Because the dates are in an acceptable Microsoft Excel date format, Microsoft Excel converts them to serial numbers.
="A"&TRUE	ATRUE	When text is expected, Microsoft Excel converts numbers and logical values to text.


How operators work

Operators specify the operation, such as addition, subtraction, or multiplication, that you want to perform on the elements of a formula.

•	Arithmetic operators perform basic mathematical operations, combine numeric values, and produce numeric results.

•	Comparison operators compare two values and produce the logical value TRUE or FALSE.

•	A text operator joins one or more text values into a single combined text value.

Arithmetic operator	Meaning
+ (plus sign)	Addition
- (minus sign)	Subtraction (or negation, when placed before a value, for example, -1)
/ (forward slash)	Division
* (asterisk)	Multiplication
% (percent sign)	Percent, when placed after a value, for example, 20%
^ (caret)	Exponentiation
Comparison operator	Meaning
=	Equal to
>	Greater than
<	Less than
>=	Greater than or equal to
<=	Less than or equal to
<>	Not equal to
Text operator	Meaning
& (ampersand)	Connects, or concatenates, two values to produce one continuous text value.
Reference operator	Meaning
Range (colon)	Produces one reference to all the cells between and including the two references.
Union (comma)	Produces one reference that includes the two references.
Intersection (space)	Produces one reference to cells common to the two references.


How formulas work

A formula can help you analyze data on a worksheet. You can perform operations, such as addition, multiplication, and comparison on worksheet values. Use a formula when you want to enter calculated values on a worksheet.

A formula can include any of the following elements: operators, cell references, values, worksheet functions, and names. To enter a formula in a worksheet cell, type a combination of these elements in the formula bar. A formula must begin with an equal sign (=).


Enter a formula

1	Select the cell in which you want to enter the formula.

2	Type an equal sign (=), followed by a formula. If you begin a formula by pasting a name or function, Microsoft Excel automatically inserts the equal sign.

Tip   You can also enter a formula by using the Function Wizard or pasting in copied information.


Enter an external reference in a formula

1	Select the cells in which you want to enter the external reference.

2	Type an equal sign (=). If you are not starting the formula with the external reference, type the operator that you want to precede the external reference.

3	Switch to the workbook that contains the cells to which you want to refer.

4	Select the cells to which you want to refer.

Note   You can perform functions on the values linked from another workbook to create reports that show various results from the same data. To perform functions on linked data, enter the external reference as the argument to the function.


Display formulas and values on a worksheet

•	To switch between displaying formulas and their values, press CTRL+` (single left quotation mark).


Troubleshoot using formulas to analyze your data

When you write formulas:

•	Make sure you have matched sets of parentheses.

•	If you are using a function that returns an array, make sure you have selected enough cells for the results.

How?

•	Apply functions only to data types they are compatible with. For example, apply DATE functions to serial numbers, not to text.

•	Try to combine functions to get more powerful formulas. For example, to calculate a summary of data, combine an IF function with a SUM function.

•	Enter array formulas correctly.

How?

•	Enter nested functions correctly.

How?


How Microsoft Excel identifies cells

By default, Microsoft Excel uses the A1 reference style, which labels columns with letters (A through IV, for a total of 256 columns) and labels rows with numbers (1 though 16384).

The R1C1 reference style, in which both rows and columns are numbered, is an alternative to the A1 reference style that is useful for showing relative references. In R1C1 style, Microsoft Excel indicates the location of a cell with an "R" followed by a row number, and a "C" followed by a column number. For example, the absolute reference R1C1 is equivalent to the absolute reference $A$1 in A1 reference style. If the active cell is A1, the relative reference R[1]C[1] refers to the cell one row down and one column to the right, or B2.

The following table shows examples of references in R1C1 style.

Reference	Indicates
R[-2]C	A relative reference to the cell two rows up, same column
R[2]C[2]	A relative reference to the cell two rows down, two columns to the right
R2C2	An absolute reference to the cell in the second row, second column
R[-1]	A relative reference to the entire row above the active cell
R	An absolute reference to the current row


References to cells in intersecting ranges

Microsoft Excel uses the intersection operator, a space, to refer to a cell that two intersecting cell ranges share in common. For example, if the range B3:M3 contains sales figures, and the range C2:C8 contains various data for February, the formula =B3:M3 C2:C8 uses the intersection operator to refer to cell C3, the value at the intersection of the two ranges.

Names make intersections easier to use. For example, if you define the name Sales as the range B3:M3 and the name February as the range C2:C8, the formula =February Sales produces the same result (cell C3) as the previous example.

In a formula, if you specify a reference to a row or column that should be a reference to a single cell, Microsoft Excel performs the operation on only one cell from that reference. For example, if you enter the formula =Sales*15% in cell C10, Microsoft Excel looks for a cell in the same row or column that fits the description in the formula. Because the named range Sales (B3:M3) includes a cell in column C, the same column as the formula, Microsoft Excel uses cell C3, the cell used in the formula.


The difference between relative and absolute references

The distinction between relative and absolute references is important if you will be copying a formula from one cell to another cell. By default, Microsoft Excel uses relative references.

When you move or copy a formula with an absolute reference, Microsoft Excel copies the absolute reference exactly as it appears in the original formula. However, because relative references automatically adjust for the new location, the relative references in a copied or moved formula refer to different cells than the references in the original formula. The relationship between these cells and the cell that contains the copy of the formula is the same as the relationship between the cells referred to in the original formula and the cell that contains the formula itself.

In this example, cell A2 contains a formula that multiplies the value in the cell above it by 2. The formula uses the relative reference "A1," and the result of the formula is 200.
When the formula is copied to cell B2, Microsoft Excel adjusts the formula to refer to cell B1 — the cell immediately above the cell that contains the formula — and the result of the formula is 1,000.
If you had started with an absolute reference instead of a relative reference in the preceding example, both the original formula and the copied formula would multiply cell A1 by 2, and the result would be 200.
You can also use mixed references, such as A$1 or $A1. Microsoft Excel will adjust the column letter or row number (whichever does not have a "$"), and will leave the other part of the reference unchanged.


Replace all or part of an external reference formula with its value

1	Switch to the dependent workbook.

2	Select the cell that contains the external reference formulas you want to replace with values.

3	Click  [image].

4	On the Edit menu, click Paste Special.

5	Under Paste, select the Values check box.


Automatically sum a range of cells

1	Select the cells you want to sum.

2	To see the cells included in the calculation, click  [image].

To insert the results of the calculation into your worksheet, click  [image] again.


Sum multiple rows and columns

1	Select the rows and columns you want to sum. Make sure to add empty cells to contain the calculation results.

To sum noncontiguous rows or columns, you must also select the intervening cells.

2	Click  [image].

Note To sum both rows and columns simultaneously, leave blank cells at the bottom and right of your selection.


Create grand totals in your worksheet

1	Select the rows and columns that contain the subtotals you want included in your grand totals. Make sure to add empty cells to contain the calculation results.

2	Click  [image].

Note   Microsoft Excel recognizes which cells are referenced in the subtotals and omits them from its calculations, even if they are selected.


 Using references

A reference identifies a cell or a group of cells on a worksheet, and tells Microsoft Excel which cells to look in to find the values you want to use in a formula. With references, you can use data contained in different parts of a worksheet in one formula or use the value of one cell in several formulas. You can also refer to cells in other sheets in a workbook, to other workbooks, and to data in other applications. References to cells in other workbooks are called external references. References to data in other applications are called remote references.

Cell references are based on the column and row headings on a worksheet. By default, Microsoft Excel uses the A1 reference style, in which columns are labeled with letters (A, B, C, ... Z; AA, AB, AC, ... AZ; BA, BB, BC, and so on) and rows are labeled with numbers. You can also change the column headings to be numbers instead of letters. This is known as R1C1 reference style. Microsoft Excel displays the reference of the active cell in the reference area to the far left of the formula bar.


What happens to 3-D references when you move or delete cells

The following examples explain what happens when you move, copy, insert, and delete worksheets that are included in a 3-D reference. The formula for summing cells A2 through A5 on worksheets 2 through 6 [=SUM(Sheet2:Sheet6!A2:A5)] is used in the  examples.

•	If you insert or copy sheets between Sheet2 and Sheet6 in the workbook (the endpoints in this example), Microsoft Excel includes the values in the additional sheets in the calculations.

•	If you delete sheets between Sheet2 and Sheet6 in the workbook, Microsoft Excel removes their values from the calculation.

•	If you move sheets from between Sheet2 and Sheet6 to a location outside the referenced sheet range, Microsoft Excel removes their values from the calculation.

•	If you move either Sheet2 or Sheet6 to another location in the workbook, Microsoft Excel adjusts the calculation to accommodate the new range of sheets between them.

•	If you delete any sheets in the calculation, Microsoft Excel adjusts the calculation to accommodate the new range of sheets between them.


Enter a reference to another worksheet

1	Select the cell in which you want to enter a reference.

2	Type an equal sign (=).

3	If you are not starting the formula with a reference, type the operator that you want to precede the reference.

4	Switch to the worksheet that contains the cells you want to refer to, and then select the cells you want.

Tip   To enter a reference to a range, select the range, hold down SHIFT, and then click the tab that will end the reference.


Update references to data from other applications

1	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Calculations tab.

2	Select the Update Remote References check box.


Using functions

The built-in functions in Microsoft Excel perform standard worksheet and macro sheet calculations. The values on which a function performs operations are called arguments. The values that the functions return are called results. You use functions by entering them into formulas on your worksheet. The sequence of characters used in a function is called the syntax. The syntax of a formula begins with an equal sign (=) and is followed by a combination of values and operators. If a function appears at the beginning of a formula, precede it with an equal sign, as with any formula.

Parentheses tell Microsoft Excel where arguments begin and end. You must include both parentheses, with no spaces before or after them. Arguments can be numbers, text, logical values, arrays, error values, or references. The argument you designate must produce a valid value for that argument. Arguments can also be constants or formulas, and the formulas can contain other functions. When an argument to a function is itself a function, it is said to be nested. In Microsoft Excel, you can nest up to seven levels of functions in a formula.


Insert a worksheet function into a formula

1	To paste a function at the beginning of a formula, select the cell in which you want to enter the formula.

To paste a function elsewhere in the formula, click where you want to insert the function.

2	On the Insert menu, click Function.

3	In the Function Category box, click the function category.

4	In the Function Name box, click the function name.

5	Click Next.

6	Enter values, references, names, formulas, and other functions into the argument boxes.


Edit formulas that contain functions

1	Select the cell that contains the formula you want to edit.

2	Click  [image].

3	Edit the arguments.

4	To enter your changes and display the next function in the formula for editing, click Next.

To enter your changes and return to the worksheet, click Finish.


Create a nested function

1	Click  [image].

2	To move to the appropriate edit box on the second screen of the Function Wizard, click Next.

3	To get a list of available functions, click  [image].

4	Click the function you want to add to your formula.


Define a name with a 3-D reference

1	On the Insert menu, click Name, and then click Define.

2	In the Names In Worksheet box, type the name.

3	In the Refers To box, type an equal sign (=), and then type the reference of the 3-D range you want to use, or select the 3-D range in the workbook.


Edit the reference or formula for a name

1	On the Insert menu, click Name, and then click Define.

2	In the Names In Workbook box, click the name whose reference or formula you want to change.

3	In the Refers To box, edit the reference or formula.


Change a named reference

1	On the Insert menu, click Name, and then click Define.

2	In the Names In Workbook list, click the name you want to change.

3	In the Names In Workbook box, double-click the name.

4	Type the new name for the reference, and then click Add.

5	To delete the original name, click the original name, and then click Delete.


Check what a name refers to

1	On the Insert menu, click Name, and then click Define.

2	In the Names In Workbook box, click the name whose reference you want to check; and then look in the Refers To box for the reference.


Find out what names apply to cells

1	On the Tools menu, click Options and then click the View tab.

2	Select the Info Window check box, and then click OK.

3	On the Window menu, click Arrange to arrange the workbook and the Info window so that you can see both at the same time, and then click OK.

4	Switch to the Info Window.

5	On the Info menu, click Names.

6	Switch to the workbook window, and click on a cell to see the associated name that appears in the Info window.


Replace cell references with a defined name

1	Select the range in which you want references replaced with names.

2	On the Insert menu, click Name, and then click Apply.

3	In the Apply Names box, select one or more names.

Tip   To apply names to the entire worksheet, select a single cell.


Paste a name into a formula

You must have defined names in your workbook before you can paste names into a formula.

How?

1	In the formula bar, click where you want to paste the name. If the formula bar is blank, type an equal sign (=) to start the formula.

2	From the name box at the left end of the formula bar, click the name you want to paste.


Paste a list of all defined names into a workbook

1	Select a cell that will become the upper-left corner of the list. Make sure to leave enough room so that the list won't overwrite existing data.

2	On the Insert menu, click Name, and then click Paste.

3	Click Paste List.

Note   Microsoft Excel pastes all the names on your workbook, starting at the active cell. The list of names is two columns wide. The left column lists the names; and the right column lists the cell references to which the names refer.


Apply a name to cells and formulas

1	On the Insert menu, click Name, and then click Apply.

2	In the Apply Names box, click the name you want to apply.


Naming formulas and constants

You can give a name to a cell's formula or constant (a fixed value, such as an interest rate) by clicking Name on the Insert menu, and then clicking Define. It may be easier to use formulas or values throughout a workbook if they have descriptive names, for example, Sales or Profits. You may also find it easier to write complex formulas if parts of those formulas contain named, shorter formulas than other parts of your workbook.


Name cells

1	Select the cell, range of cells, or nonadjacent selections that you want to name.

2	Click the name box at the left end of the formula bar.

3	Type the name for the cells.

Note   You can create names by using existing headings on your worksheet. Select the cells that contain the headings, click Name on the Insert menu, and then click Create.


Create names based on row and column titles

1	Select the range you want to name, including the row or column titles.

2	On the Insert menu, click Name, and then click Create.

3	In the Create Names In box, select the Top Row, Left Column, Bottom Row, or Right Column check box to designate the location of the labels for the name.


Name a formula or reference

1	On the Insert menu, click Name, and then click Define.

2	In the Names In Workbook box, enter the name for the formula or reference.

3	In the Refers To box, type the formula or reference. The formula must begin with an equal sign (=).


Constants in an array

In any array formula in which you use a reference to a range of cells, you can type the array of values contained in the range of cells. The array of values you type is called an array constant. Array constants generally are used in place of references when you don't want to enter each constant value in a separate cell on your worksheet. For example, if you entered {10,20,30,40}, you would create a 1-by-4 array: 10 20 30 40.

How?

Note   You can successfully enter an array constant or range into an ordinary formula. However, the formula might produce a different result from when it is entered as an array formula. In an ordinary formula, only the first item in an array constant is used, and it produces only a single result. For example, if you enter the formula ={1,2,3}+{2,3,4} as an ordinary formula, Microsoft Excel adds the first value in each array and produces the single result "3." If you enter the formula as an array formula, it produces three results: 3, 5, and 7.


What an array constant can contain

•	Array constants can contain numbers, text, logical values, or error values.

•	Numbers in array constants can be in integer, decimal, or scientific format.

•	Text must be enclosed in double quotation marks.

•	You can include different types of values in the same array constant.

•	The values in an array constant must be constants, not formulas.

•	Array constants cannot contain dollar signs, parentheses, or percent signs.

•	Array constants cannot contain columns or rows of unequal length.


Enter an array constant

•	To enter constants in an array, type the values directly into the formula, and enclose them in braces ({}).

Note   Use commas to separate values in different columns and use semicolons to separate values in different rows. For example, to use the following array in a formula:

1 2 3

4 5 6

type {1,2,3;4,5,6}, including the braces. This is a 2-by-3 array because it consists of 2 rows of 3 values each, or 2 rows and 3 columns.


How Microsoft Excel expands array formulas

When you use an array constant in a formula or function, the other components or arguments should have the same dimensions as the first array. Each component must have the same number of rows and the same number of columns as the component with the greatest number of columns.

For example, in the formula =SUM({1,2,3}*4), one component, {1,2,3}, is a 1-by-3 array, and the other, 4, is a single value. When evaluating this formula, Microsoft Excel automatically expands the second component to a 1-by-3 array and evaluates the formula as =SUM({1,2,3}*{4,4,4}). The result of the formula is 24, which is the sum of 1*4, 2*4, and 3*4.


Array formulas

Array formulas can reduce the amount of time you spend entering repetitive formulas by taking the place of several single-value formulas. You can use array formulas to perform an operation that produces multiple results or to operate on a group of arguments arranged in rows and columns.


Create an array formula

1	Select the range of cells in which you want to enter the formula.

2	Enter the formula.

3	Press CTRL+SHIFT+ENTER.


Edit an array formula

1	Select any cell in the array range.

2	Click in the formula bar. The array formula braces disappear when the formula bar is active.

3	Edit the formula.

4	Press CTRL+SHIFT+ENTER.


Select an array range

1	Select any cell in the array range.

2	On the Edit menu, click Go To.

3	Click Special.

4	Select the Current Array check box.


Clear an array range

1	Select the array range.

2	On the Edit menu, click Clear, and then click Contents.


Convert an array range to constant values

1	Select the array range.

2	Click  [image].

3	On the Edit menu, click Paste Special.

4	Under Paste, select the Values check box.


 Replace a formula with its calculated value

Replacing a formula with its value permanently removes the formula. If you accidentally replace a formula with a value and want to restore the formula, click Undo Entry on the Edit menu immediately after entering or pasting the value.

1	Double-click the cell that contains the formula you want to replace with its value.

2	Press F9.

3	Press ENTER.


Calculate a portion of a formula

1	Double-click the cell that contains the formula.

2	Select the portion of the formula you want to calculate.

3	Press F9.

4	To make the calculated value part of the formula, press ENTER.

To restore the original formula, press ESC.


Freeze the values in a range of cells

1	Select the cells that contain the formulas you want to replace with their resulting values.

2	Click  [image].

3	On the Edit menu, click Paste Special.

4	Under Paste, select the Values check box.


Freeze only the external references portion of a formula

1	Select the cell that contains the external reference you want to freeze.

2	In the formula bar, select the external reference part of the formula.

3	Press F9.

4	Press ENTER.


Turn off calculation before saving the worksheet

1	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Calculation tab.

2	Click Manual.

3	Under Calculation, clear the Recalculate Before Save check box.

When you are ready to calculate your worksheets, press F9.

Note   If a worksheet contains a formula that is linked to an uncalculated worksheet and you update that link, Microsoft Excel displays a message stating that the source worksheet is not completely calculated. To update the link with the current value stored on the source worksheet, even though the value might not be correct, click OK. To cancel updating the link and use the previous value obtained from the source worksheet, click Cancel.


Solving circular reference formulas

When a formula refers to its own cell, either directly or indirectly, it is called a circular reference. To calculate such a formula, Microsoft Excel must calculate each cell involved in the circular reference once by using the results of the previous iteration. Unless you change the default settings for iteration, Microsoft Excel stops calculating after 100 iterations or after all values in the model change by less than 0.001 between iterations.

Microsoft Excel cannot resolve formulas with circular references by using normal calculation. When you make a circular reference, the status bar indicates which cell is involved in the circular reference. If the circular reference is accidental, you need to redesign the formulas or logic to break the circular reference. If you want to use a circular reference intentionally, use Options on the Tools menu, click the Calculation tab, and select the Iteration check box. Then indicate the maximum number of iterations and degree of change you want Microsoft Excel to use.


Controlling calculations in a worksheet

Calculation is the process of computing formulas and then displaying the results as values in the cells that contain the formulas. You can control when calculation occurs.

Whenever possible, Microsoft Excel updates only those cells affected by values you change so that you can avoid unnecessary calculations.

Microsoft Excel uses the underlying stored values in cells for calculation, rather than the values as you have formatted them to be displayed. For instance, a date that appears as "6/22/93" will contain its underlying numeric value. This means that you can change the appearance of a value (for example, to "6-22-93") on a worksheet without affecting the value itself.

As calculation proceeds, you can choose commands or perform actions such as entering numbers or formulas. Microsoft Excel temporarily interrupts calculation to carry out the other commands or actions, and then resumes calculation.


Control the number of times a circular reference is calculated

1	On the Tools menu, choose Options, and then click the Calculation tab.

2	In the Maximum Iterations box, type the maximum number of iterations you want Microsoft Excel to perform. The more iterations you specify, the longer your worksheet takes to calculate.

3	In the Maximum Change box, type the maximum change between iterations. The smaller the number you specify, the longer your worksheet takes to calculate and the more accurate your answer is.


Set the precision with which numbers are calculated

You can choose to permanently change the constant values stored on the worksheet to their displayed values. If you later choose to calculate with full precision, the original full-precision values cannot be restored.

1	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Calculation tab.

2	Select the Precision As Displayed check box.


Rename a workbook

1	Switch to the workbook you want to rename.

2	On the File menu, click Save As.

3	In the File Name box, type the new filename.

Note   Microsoft Excel retains the previous version of the workbook under its original name.


Save unnamed linked workbooks

1	Switch to the source document.

2	On the File menu, click Save As.

3	In the File Name box, enter a name for the document, and then click OK.

4	For each additional source document, repeat steps 1 through 3.

5	Switch to the dependent document.

6	Repeat steps 2 through 3 for each dependent document.

Tip   If you save linked workbooks in different directories and want to retain the correct link references, make sure to use the Save As command to save all source documents before you save the dependent documents.


Recalculate the values in a linked workbook

1	Open the source and dependent workbooks.

2	Press F9.


Manually calculate all open workbooks

•	Press F9.

Note   If you click in the formula bar and then press F9, the value of the formula or the selected part of the formula is displayed.


When to link workbooks

Linking is especially useful when it is not practical to keep large worksheet models or systems together in the same workbook.

Merging Data from Several Workbooks. You can link workbooks from several users or departments and integrate the pertinent data into a summary workbook. The original workbooks can still be edited separately from the summary workbook.

Creating Different Views of Your Data. You can enter all of your data and formulas in one or more source workbooks, and then create a report workbook that contains links only to the pertinent data in the source workbooks.

Streamlining Large, Complex Models. By breaking down a complicated model into a series of interdependent workbooks, you can work on the model without opening all of its related sheets. Smaller workbooks are easier to edit, don't require as much memory, and are faster to open, save, and calculate.

Linking is not limited to links between two workbooks. You can also construct hierarchies of linked workbooks.


Create a link between workbooks

1	In the source workbook, select the cells you want to refer to.

2	Click  [image].

3	Switch to the workbook you want to paste the linked data into.

4	Select the cell or the upper-left corner of the range in which you want the linked data to appear.

5	On the Edit menu, click Paste Special.

6	To paste the link into the selected cells, click Paste Link.

To paste the data as a linked picture at the active cell location, hold down SHIFT and click Paste Picture Link on the Edit menu.

Note   To edit the data in the picture, you must edit the source cells in the source workbook.


Open a source workbook

1	Switch to the dependent workbook.

2	On the Edit menu, click Links.

3	In the Source File box, select the name of the source document.

4	Click Open Source.


Redirect links for a source workbook

1	Switch to the dependent workbook.

2	On the Edit menu, click Links.

3	In the Source File list box, select the name of the source document for which you want to redirect links.

4	Click Change Source.

5	In the File Name box, enter a new name for the source document, including the path.


Update data from a source workbook

1	Switch to the dependent workbook.

2	On the Edit menu, click Links.

3	In the Source File box, click the name of the document.

4	Click Update Now.


Hidden Function

This function is available for compatibility with another language version of Microsoft Excel.


Hide and unhide workbooks and sheets

You can hide workbooks and sheets to reduce the number of windows and sheets on your screen and to help prevent unwanted changes. For example, you can hide sheets containing macros or critical data. The hidden workbook or sheet remains open, and all sheets in the workbook are available to be referenced from other documents.

What do you want to do?

Hide or unhide a workbook

Hide a sheet

Display a hidden sheet


Hide or unhide a workbook

1	Open the workbook.

2	On the Window menu, click Hide.

Note   To unhide a workbook, click Unhide on the Window menu; or, if no windows are visible, click Unhide on the File menu. You can unhide only one workbook at a time.


Hide and unhide formulas

1	Select the range of cells whose formulas you want to hide. You can also select nonadjacent ranges or the entire sheet.

2	On the Format menu, click Cells, and then click the Protection tab.

3	Select the Hidden check box.

4	Click OK.

5	On the Tools menu, point to Protection, and then click Protect Sheet.

6	Select the Contents check box.

Note   To display a selected cell's formula in the formula bar, select the range of cells whose formulas you want to unhide. On the Tools menu, point to Protection, and then click Unprotect Sheet. On the Format menu, click Cells, and then click the Protection tab. Clear the Hidden check box.


Lotus 1-2-3 keyboard equivalents

The default Microsoft Excel keyboard equivalents for Lotus 1-2-3 key commands are listed in the following tables. Use these keys unless you've selected the Transition Navigation Keys check box on the Transition tab (Tools menu, Options command).

Command or function	Lotus 1-2-3	Microsoft Excel
Help	F1	F1
Edit	F2	F2
Name	F3	F3
Absolute/Relative	F4	F4
Go To	F5	F5
Next Window	F6	CTRL+F6
Query	F7	ALT, D, F the first time; DOWN ARROW thereafter
Table	F8	Tables are recalculated automatically, unless the Automatic Except Tables check box is selected (Tools menu, Options command, Calculation tab).
Calculate	F9	F9
Graph	F10	F11 or ALT+F1
Navigation keys

Lotus 1-2-3	Microsoft Excel
Up, Down	UP ARROW, DOWN ARROW
Left, Right	LEFT ARROW, RIGHT ARROW
End, Up	CTRL+UP ARROW or END+UP ARROW
End, Down	CTRL+DOWN ARROW or END+DOWN ARROW
End, Left	CTRL+LEFT ARROW or END+LEFT ARROW
End, Right	CTRL+RIGHT ARROW or END+RIGHT ARROW
Home	CTRL+HOME
Tab	CTRL+PAGE DOWN
Shift+Tab	CTRL+PAGE UP
PgUp, PgDn	PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN


Outline data using shortcut keys

To	Press
Ungroup rows or columns	ALT+SHIFT+LEFT ARROW
Group rows or columns	ALT+SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW
Display or hide outline symbols	CTRL+8
Hide selected rows	CTRL+9
Unhide selected rows	CTRL+SHIFT+(
Hide selected columns	CTRL+0 (zero)
Unhide selected columns	CTRL+SHIFT+)


Transition navigation keys

If you've selected the Transition Navigation Keys check box on the Transition tab (Tools menu, Options command), the following keyboard shortcuts are in effect.

Navigation keys

To move	Press
One page to the left	CTRL+LEFT ARROW
One page to the right	CTRL+RIGHT ARROW
To the next sheet in a workbook	CTRL+PAGE DOWN
To the previous sheet in a workbook	CTRL+PAGE UP
One cell to the right	TAB
One cell to the left	SHIFT+TAB
To the first cell on the sheet (the cell in the upper-left corner)	HOME
By carrying out the Go To command (Edit menu)	F5
To the next window of the same workbook	F6
To the previous pane of the same window	SHIFT+F6
In Data Find mode, to	Press
Move to the previous field in the current record	LEFT ARROW
Move to the next field in the current record	RIGHT ARROW
Move to the first record	HOME
Move to the last record	END
Text-alignment prefix characters

Use the following text-alignment prefix characters to assign alignment formats as you enter data in cells.

To	Press
Left align data in the cell	' (apostrophe)
Right align data in the cell	" (double quotation mark)
Center data within the cell	^ (caret)
Repeat characters across the cell	\ (backslash)
Note   When you're in Point mode, hidden columns are temporarily unhidden.


Work with databases, lists, and PivotTables using shortcut keys

Work in a data form using shortcut keys

To	Press
Select a field or a command button	ALT+ key for letter underlined in name
Move to the same field in the next record	DOWN ARROW
Move to the same field in the previous record	UP ARROW
Move to the next field you can edit in the record	TAB
Move to the previous field you can edit in the record	SHIFT+TAB
Move to the first field in the next record	ENTER
Move to the first field in the previous record	SHIFT+ENTER
Move to the same field 10 records forward	PAGE DOWN
Move to the same field 10 records back	PAGE UP
Move to the new record	CTRL+PAGE DOWN
Move to the first record	CTRL+PAGE UP
Move to the beginning or end of a field	HOME or END
Move one character left or right within a field	LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW
Extend a selection to the beginning of a field	SHIFT+HOME
Extend a selection to the end of a field	SHIFT+END
Select the character to the left	SHIFT+LEFT ARROW
Select the character to the right	SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW
Work with AutoFilter using shortcut keys

To	Press
Display the list for the selected column label	ALT+DOWN ARROW
Close the list for the selected column label	ALT+UP ARROW
Select the previous item in the list	UP ARROW
Select the next item in the list	DOWN ARROW
Select the first item in the list (All)	HOME
Select the last item in the list (NonBlanks)	END
Filter the list using the selected item	ENTER
Work with the PivotTable Wizard using shortcut keys

In Step 3 of the PivotTable Wizard, to	Press
Select the next or previous field button in the list	UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW
Select the field button to the right or left in a multicolumn field button list	LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW
Move the selected field into the Page area	ALT+P
Move the selected field into the Row area	ALT+R
Move the selected field into the Column area	ALT+C
Move the selected field into the Data area	ALT+D
Display the PivotTable Field dialog box	ALT+L
Work with page fields in a PivotTable using shortcut keys

To	Press
Display the page field list	ALT+DOWN ARROW
Close the page field list	ALT+UP ARROW
Select the previous item in the list	UP ARROW
Select the next item in the list	DOWN ARROW
Select the first visible item in the list	HOME
Select the last visible item in the list	END
Display the selected item	ENTER
Group and ungroup PivotTable items using shortcut keys

To	Press
Group selected PivotTable items	ALT+SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW
Ungroup selected PivotTable items	ALT+SHIFT+LEFT ARROW


Enter and format data using shortcut keys

Enter data using shortcut keys

To	Press
Complete a cell entry	ENTER
Cancel a cell entry	ESC
Repeat the last action	F4
Start a new line in the same cell	ALT+ENTER
Insert a tab character in a cell	CTRL+ALT+TAB
Delete the character to the left of the insertion point, or delete the selection	BACKSPACE
Delete the character to the right of the insertion point, or delete the selection	DELETE
Delete text to the end of the line	CTRL+DELETE
Move one character up, down, left, or right	Arrow keys
Move to the beginning of the line	HOME
Edit a cell note	SHIFT+F2
Create names from cell text	CTRL+SHIFT+F3
Fill down	CTRL+D
Fill to the right	CTRL+R
Fill the selected cell range with the current entry	CTRL+ENTER
Complete a cell entry and move down in the selection	ENTER
Complete a cell entry and move up in the selection	SHIFT+ENTER
Complete a cell entry and move to the right in the selection	TAB
Complete a cell entry and move to the left in the selection	SHIFT+TAB
Work in cells or the formula bar using shortcut keys

To	Press
Start a formula	EQUAL SIGN
Activate a cell and the formula bar	F2
Activate and clear the formula bar when a cell is selected, or delete the preceding character in the formula bar	BACKSPACE
Paste a name into a formula	F3
Define a name	CTRL+F3
Calculate all sheets in all open workbooks	F9 or CTRL+EQUAL SIGN
Calculate the active sheet	SHIFT+F9
Insert the AutoSum formula	ALT+EQUAL SIGN
Enter the date	CTRL+SEMICOLON
Enter the time	CTRL+SHIFT+COLON
Cancel an entry in the cell or formula bar	ESC
Complete a cell entry	ENTER
Insert a line break	ALT+ENTER
Insert a tab character	CTRL+ALT+TAB
Copy the value from the cell above the active cell into the cell or the formula bar	CTRL+SHIFT+"
Alternate between displaying cell values and displaying cell formulas	CTRL+`(single left quotation mark)
Copy a formula from the cell above the active cell into the cell or the formula bar	CTRL+' (apostrophe)
Enter a formula as an array formula	CTRL+SHIFT+ENTER
Display step 2 of the Function Wizard, after you type a valid function name in a formula	CTRL+A
Insert the argument names and parentheses for a function, after you type a valid function name in a formula	CTRL+SHIFT+A
Activate the AutoComplete list	ALT+DOWN ARROW
Format data using shortcut keys

To	Press
Carry out the Style command (Format menu)	ALT+' (apostrophe)
Carry out the Cells command (Format menu)	CTRL+1
Apply the General number format	CTRL+SHIFT+~
Apply the Currency format with two decimal places (negative numbers appear in parentheses)	CTRL+SHIFT+$
Apply the Percentage format with no decimal places	CTRL+SHIFT+%
Apply the Exponential number format with two decimal places	CTRL+SHIFT+^
Apply the Date format with the day, month, and year	CTRL+SHIFT+#
Apply the Time format with the hour and minute, and indicate A.M. or P.M.	CTRL+SHIFT+@
Apply the two-decimal-place format with commas	CTRL+SHIFT+!
Apply the outline border	CTRL+SHIFT+&
Remove all borders	CTRL+SHIFT+_
Apply or remove bold formatting	CTRL+B
Apply or remove italic formatting	CTRL+I
Apply or remove an underline	CTRL+U
Apply or remove strikethrough formatting	CTRL+5
Hide rows	CTRL+9
Unhide rows	CTRL+SHIFT+(
Hide columns	CTRL+0 (zero)
Unhide columns	CTRL+SHIFT+)


Edit and move data using shortcut keys

Select in worksheets and workbooks using shortcut keys

To	Press
Extend the selection by one cell	SHIFT+ arrow key
Extend the selection to the edge of the current data region	CTRL+SHIFT+ arrow key
Extend the selection to the beginning of the row	SHIFT+HOME
Extend the selection to the beginning of the worksheet	CTRL+SHIFT+HOME
Extend the selection to the last cell in the worksheet (lower-right corner)	CTRL+SHIFT+END
Select the entire column	CTRL+SPACEBAR
Select the entire row	SHIFT+SPACEBAR
Select the entire worksheet	CTRL+A
Collapse the selection to the active cell	SHIFT+BACKSPACE
Extend the selection down one screen	SHIFT+PAGE DOWN
Extend the selection up one screen	SHIFT+PAGE UP
Select the current region	CTRL+SHIFT+*
With an object selected, select all objects on a sheet	CTRL+SHIFT+SPACEBAR
Alternate between hiding objects, displaying objects, and displaying placeholders for objects	CTRL+6
Show or hide the Standard toolbar	CTRL+7
In End mode, to	Press
Turn End mode on or off	END
Extend the selection to the end of the data block in the direction of the arrow	END, SHIFT+ arrow key
Extend the selection to the last cell in the worksheet (lower-right corner)	END, SHIFT+HOME
Extend the selection to the last cell in the current row (unavailable if you've selected the Transition Navigation Keys check box)	END, SHIFT+ENTER
With scroll lock on, to	Press
Scroll the screen up or down one row	UP ARROW or  DOWN ARROW
Scroll the screen left or right one column	LEFT ARROW or  RIGHT ARROW
Extend the selection to the cell in the upper-left corner of the window	SHIFT+HOME
Extend the selection to the cell in the lower-right corner of the window	SHIFT+END
Turn Scroll Lock on or off	SCROLL LOCK
Note   When you use the scrolling keys (such as PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN) with Scroll Lock turned off, your selection moves the distance you scroll. If you want to keep the same selection as you scroll, turn Scroll Lock on first.

Select cells with special characteristics using shortcut keys

To	Press
Select all cells that contain a note	CTRL+SHIFT+?
Select a range around the active cell (the selected range is an area enclosed by blank rows and blank columns)	CTRL+SHIFT+*
Select the entire array that the active cell belongs to	CTRL+/
Select cells whose contents are different from the comparison cell in each row (for each row, the comparison cell is in the same column as the active cell)	CTRL+\
Select cells whose contents are different from the comparison cell in each column (for each column, the comparison cell is in the same row as the active cell)	CTRL+SHIFT+|
Select only cells that are directly referred to by formulas in the selection	CTRL+[
Select all cells that are directly or indirectly referred to by formulas in the selection	CTRL+SHIFT+{
Select only cells with formulas that refer directly to the active cell	CTRL+]
Select all cells with formulas that refer directly or indirectly to the active cell	CTRL+SHIFT+}
Select only visible cells in the current selection	ALT+SEMICOLON
Select chart items using shortcut keys

Some items, such as data series and data labels, are grouped together. First select the entire group, and then select an individual item within the group.

To	Press
Select the previous group of items	DOWN ARROW
Select the next group of items	UP ARROW
Select the next item within the group	RIGHT ARROW
Select the previous item within the group	LEFT ARROW
Move within a selection using shortcut keys

To	Press
Move from top to bottom within the selection, or move to the right one cell if only one row is selected	ENTER
Move from bottom to top within the selection, or move to the left one cell if only one row is selected	SHIFT+ENTER
Move from left to right within the selection	TAB
Move from right to left within the selection	SHIFT+TAB
Move clockwise to the next corner of the selection	CTRL+PERIOD
Move to the right between nonadjacent selections	CTRL+ALT+RIGHT ARROW
Move to the left between nonadjacent selections	CTRL+ALT+LEFT ARROW
Insert, delete, and copy a selection using shortcut keys

To	Press
Copy the selection	CTRL+C
Paste the selection	CTRL+V
Cut the selection	CTRL+X
Clear the selection of formulas and data	DELETE
Insert blank cells	CTRL+SHIFT+PLUS SIGN
Delete the selection	CTRL+MINUS SIGN
Undo the last action	CTRL+Z
Move in worksheets and workbooks using shortcut keys

To	Press
Move one cell in a given direction	Arrow key
Move to the edge of the current data region	CTRL+ arrow key
Move between unlocked cells in a protected worksheet	TAB
Move to the beginning of the row	HOME
Move to the beginning of the worksheet	CTRL+HOME
Move to the last cell in the worksheet (in the lower-right corner)	CTRL+END
Move one screen down	PAGE DOWN
Move one screen up	PAGE UP
Move one screen to the right	ALT+PAGE DOWN
Move one screen to the left	ALT+PAGE UP
Move to the next sheet in the workbook	CTRL+PAGE DOWN
Move to the previous sheet in the workbook	CTRL+PAGE UP
Move to the next workbook	CTRL+F6
Move to the previous workbook	CTRL+SHIFT+F6
Move to the next pane	F6
Move to the previous pane	SHIFT+F6
In End mode, to	Press
Turn End mode on or off	END
Move by one block of data within a row or column	END, arrow key
Move to the last cell in the worksheet (in the lower-right corner)	END, HOME
Move to the last cell in the current row (unavailable if you've selected the Transition Navigation Keys check box)	END, ENTER
With Scroll Lock turned on, to	Press
Move to the cell in the upper-left corner of the window	HOME
Move to the cell in the lower-right corner of the window	END
Turn Scroll Lock on or off	SCROLL LOCK

Note   When you use the scrolling keys (such as PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN) with Scroll Lock turned off, your selection moves the distance you scroll. If you want to keep the same selection as you scroll, turn Scroll Lock on first.

Scroll in a workbook window using shortcut keys

To	Press
Move one screen up or down	PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN
Move one screen to the right	ALT+PAGE DOWN
Move one screen to the left	ALT+PAGE UP
Move to the previous sheet in the workbook	CTRL+PAGE UP
Move to the next sheet in the workbook	CTRL+PAGE DOWN
Display the next window	CTRL+F6 or CTRL+TAB
Display the previous window	CTRL+SHIFT+F6 or CTRL+SHIFT+TAB
Scroll to display the active cell	CTRL+BACKSPACE
Turn scroll lock on or off	SCROLL LOCK
Scroll one row up or down	UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW (with Scroll Lock turned on)
Scroll one column left or right	LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW (with Scroll Lock turned on)


Function keys

	Function key	SHIFT	CTRL	CTRL+ SHIFT	ALT+ SHIFT
F1	Get online Help or the Answer Wizard				Insert a new worksheet
F2	Activate a cell and the formula bar	Edit a cell note	Display the Info window
F3	Paste a name into a formula	Display the Function Wizard	Define a name	Create names from cell text
F4	Repeat the last action	Repeat a Find or Go To action	Close the window
F5	Carry out the Go To command (Edit menu)	Carry out the Find command (Edit menu)	Restore the window size
F6	Go to the next pane	Go to the previous pane	Go to the next workbook	Go to the previous workbook
F7	Carry out the Spelling command (Tools menu)		Carry out the Move command (Control menu)
F8	Extend a selection	Turns Add mode on or off	Carry out the Size command (document Control menu)
F9	Calculate all sheets in all open workbooks	Calculate the active sheet	Minimize the workbook
F10	Activate the menu bar	Display a shortcut menu	Maximize the document window
F11	Create a chart
F12	Carry out the Save As command (File menu)	Carry out the Save command (File menu)	Carry out the Open command (File menu)	Carry out the Print command (File menu)


Using shortcut keys

What do you want to do?

Enter and format data using shortcut keys

Edit and move data using shortcut keys

Outline data using shortcut keys

Print and preview a document using shortcut keys

Work with databases, lists, and PivotTables using shortcut keys

Work with menus using shortcut keys

Work in windows and dialog boxes

Function keys


Trappable Errors (Microsoft Excel)

Microsoft Excel uses the following trappable errors.

Code	Message

1000	'[Object]' does not have '[property name]' property

The property does not exist for this object. For more information, search Visual Basic Help for the object name.

1001	'[Object]' does not have '[method name]' method

The method does not exist for this object. For more information, search Visual Basic Help for the object name.

1002	Missing required argument '[argument]'

The method expected a required argument that does not exist. Add the argument to the code. To see a list of required arguments, search Visual Basic Help for the method name.

1003	Invalid number of arguments

The method has the wrong number of arguments. This usually occurs when you use comma-separated positional arguments (instead of named arguments), and you have too many arguments. To see the valid arguments for this method,  search Visual Basic Help for the method name.

1004	'[Method name]' method of '[object]' class failed

The method cannot be used on the object. Possible reasons include:

•	An argument contains an value that is not valid. A common cause of this problem is trying to access an object that does not exist; for example, Workbooks(5) when there are only 3 workbooks open.

•	The method cannot be used in the applied context. For example, some Range object methods require that the range contain data. If the range does not contain data, the method fails.

•	An external error occurred, such as a failure to read or write from a file.

1005	Unable to set the '[property name]' property of the '[object]' class

The property cannot be changed. Possible reasons include:

•	The value you are using for the property is not valid; for example, setting a property to a string value when the property requires a Boolean value.

•	The property is read-only and cannot be written.

For more information about the property, search Visual Basic Help for the property name.

1006	Unable to get the '[property name]' property of the '[object]' class

The property cannot be read. Possible reasons include:

•	The property cannot be used in the applied context. For example, the code ActiveChart.Legend.Font.Color = RGB(255, 0, 0) will cause this error if the active chart does not contain a legend.

For more information about the property, search Visual Basic Help for the property name.


Run a Lotus 1-2-3 macro in Microsoft Excel
Run a Lotus 1-2-3 or Quattro Pro for MS-DOS macro in Microsoft Excel

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	In File Type box, click Lotus 1-2-3 Files or Quattro Pro/DOS Files.

3	In the File Name box, click the name of the worksheet you want to open, and then click Open.

4	While holding down CTRL, type the letter of the macro name.

If your macro contains a {?} command and the phrase "MI Pause" appears in the status bar, press ENTER.

Note   Microsoft Excel runs Lotus 1-2-3 and Quattro Pro for MS-DOS macros that are compatible with Lotus 1-2-3 Release 2.01. Microsoft Excel also supports some macro functionality from Lotus 1-2-3 Release 2.2.


Guidelines for running Lotus 1-2-3 macros in Microsoft Excel

What do you want to do?

Convert Lotus 1-2-3 Release 2.2 macro library files

Run a Lotus 1-2-3 AutoExec macro

Learn about the limitations of running a Lotus 1-2-3 macro

Adjust the screen size before running a Lotus 1-2-3 macro


Convert Lotus 1-2-3 Release 2.2 macro library files

•	If you have Lotus 1-2-3 macros in Lotus 1-2-3 macro libraries (that is, macros in Lotus 1-2-3 Release 2.2 MLB file format), convert the macro library files to 1-2-3 WK1 format. To run the macro, open the worksheet in Microsoft Excel.


Run a Lotus 1-2-3 AutoExec macro

•	If you have a 1-2-3 AutoExec macro named "\0" on your worksheet, Microsoft Excel runs the macro automatically when you open the worksheet. To open a worksheet without running the AutoExec macro, click Open on the File menu, click the filename in the File Name box, and then click OK while holding down SHIFT. If you have a Microsoft Excel macro named "Auto_Open" that refers to a macro sheet and a \0 macro on the same worksheet, Microsoft Excel runs the Auto_Open macro first, and then it runs the \0 macro.


The limitations of running a Lotus 1-2-3 macro

Lotus 1-2-3 macros that are not supported by Lotus 1-2-3 Release 2.01 are not fully run

Microsoft Excel recognizes all Lotus 1-2-3 file formats, but it fully runs only macros that contain menu commands, @ functions, keywords, and advanced macro commands that are supported by Lotus 1-2-3 Release 2.01.

Lotus 1-2-3 add-ins are not supported

Make sure to remove any keystrokes or command names that attach, start, or use a Lotus 1-2-3 add-in, such as the Allways add-in and its menu structure. For example, you should remove statements such as /a and {app1}.

Lotus 1-2-3 macros cannot end in a menu

When you run a Lotus 1-2-3 macro in Microsoft Excel, the macro cannot end in a menu, such as the keystrokes /pp. If a macro ends in a menu, a message appears stating that macros cannot end in a menu, and the macro stops. However, the macro can end in a prompt for more information − such as the keystrokes /ppr − so that you can specify the print range.


Adjust the screen size before running a Lotus 1-2-3 macro

•	For best visual results when running a Lotus 1-2-3 macro, you can maximize both the Microsoft Excel window and the active document window. Note that the {PGUP}, {PGDN}, {BIGRIGHT}, and {BIGLEFT} commands work with the current page size, not with the 20-row page size that is standard in Lotus 1-2-3. For example, if your macros require a 20-row page height, adjust the window size before running the macro.


Lotus 1-2-3 functions

Most Lotus 1-2-3 functions have an equivalent in Microsoft Excel. When the Transition Formula Entry option is selected, you can type most Lotus 1-2-3 functions directly into the formula bar, and Microsoft Excel will convert the functions to their Microsoft Excel equivalents. You cannot use the Transistion Formula Entry option to enter functions created in Lotus 1-2-3 Release 3 or later.

To use the Transition Formula Entry option, click the Transition tab in the Options dialog box (Tools menu, Options command), and then select the Transition Formula Entry check box.

What do you need help with?

Lotus 1-2-3 functions with Microsoft Excel equivalents

Microsoft Excel functions without Lotus 1-2-3 equivalents


Lotus 1-2-3 functions with Microsoft Excel equivalents

Many Lotus 1-2-3 functions have Microsoft Excel equivalents. However, Microsoft Excel uses different rules than Lotus 1-2-3 when evaluating text in formulas, certain database criteria, and the value of certain logical operators. When the Transition Formula Evaluation option is selected, Microsoft Excel interprets some of the following functions as they would be interpreted in Lotus 1-2-3.

To use the Transition Formula Evaluation option, click the Transition tab in the Options dialog box (Tools menu, Options command), and then select the Transition Formula Evaluation check box.

Lotus function	Microsoft Excel equivalent
@@	INDIRECT
@ABS	ABS
@ACOS	ACOS
@ASIN	ASIN
@ATAN	ATAN
@ATAN2	ATAN2
@AVG	AVERAGE
@CELL	CELL
@CELLPOINTER	CELL  When used without a second argument, returns information about the current selection.
@CHAR	CHAR
@CHOOSE	CHOOSE
@CLEAN	CLEAN
@CODE	CODE
@COLS	COLUMNS
@COS	COS
@COUNT	COUNTA
@CTERM	NPER  Requires periodic payment instead of future value.
@DATE	DATE
@DATEVALUE	DATEVALUE
@DAVG	DAVERAGE
@DAY	DAY
@D360	DAYS360  Applies only to Lotus 1-2-3 Release 3 or later.
@DCOUNT	DCOUNTA
@DDB	DDB
@DGET	DGET
@DMAX	DMAX
@DMIN	DMIN
@DSTD	DSTDEVP
@DSTDS	DSTDEV Applies only to Lotus 1-2-3 Release 3 or later.
@DSUM	DSUM
@DVAR	DVARP
@DVARS	DVAR  Applies only to Lotus 1-2-3 Release 3 or later.
@ERR	No equivalent function is needed because you can type error values directly into cells and formulas in Microsoft Excel.
@EXACT	EXACT
@EXP	EXP
@FALSE	FALSE
@FIND	FIND
@FV	FV
@HLOOKUP	HLOOKUP
@HOUR	HOUR
@IF	IF  In Microsoft Excel, the last two arguments can be any value; they are not limited to numbers or strings, as in @IF.
@INDEX	INDEX  Includes a form to select values from an array.
@INT	TRUNC
@IRR	IRR  Gives arguments in reverse order.
@ISERR	ISERR  Detects any of six Microsoft Excel error values.
@ISNA	ISNA
@ISNUMBER	ISNONTEXT
@ISRANGE	ISREF  Applies only to Lotus 1-2-3 Release 3 or later.
@ISSTRING	ISTEXT
@LEFT	LEFT
@LENGTH	LEN
@LN	LN
@LOWER	LOWER
@LOG	LOG
@MAX	MAX
@MID	MID
@MIN	MIN
@MINUTE	MINUTE
@MOD	MOD
@MONTH	MONTH
@N	N
@NA	NA
@NOW	NOW
@NPV	NPV
@PI	PI
@PMT	PMT  Microsoft Excel displays arguments in a different order than in @PMT.
@PROPER	PROPER
@PV	PV  Microsoft Excel displays arguments in a different order than in @PV.
@RAND	RAND  Calculates values randomly each time the function is recalculated. (@RAND calculates the same values in each work session.)
@RATE	RATE  Microsoft Excel displays arguments in a different order than in @RATE.
@REPEAT	REPT
@REPLACE	REPLACE
@RIGHT	RIGHT
@ROUND	ROUND
@ROWS	ROWS
@S	T
@SECOND	SECOND
@SIN	SIN
@SLN	SLN
@SQRT	SQRT
@STD	STDEVP
@STDS	STDEV  Applies only to Lotus 1-2-3 Release 3 or later.
@STRING	FIXED
@SUM	SUM
@SYD	SYD
@TAN	TAN
@TERM	NPER  Microsoft Excel displays arguments in a different order than in @TERM.
@TIME	TIME
@TIMEVALUE	TIMEVALUE
@TODAY	TODAY
@TRIM	TRIM
@TRUE	TRUE
@UPPER	UPPER
@VALUE	VALUE
@VAR	VARP
@VARS	VAR  Applies only to Lotus 1-2-3 Release 3 or later.
@VDB	VDB
@VLOOKUP	VLOOKUP
@YEAR	YEAR


Microsoft Excel functions without Lotus 1-2-3 equivalents

The following Microsoft Excel functions have no equivalents in Lotus 1-2-3 Release 3.1 or earlier, or in Lotus 1-2-3/W Release 1.0.

Note   This list does not include many Microsoft Excel add-in functions and statistical functions without Lotus 1-2-3 equivalents.

AREAS

DOLLAR

DPRODUCT

FACT

FREQUENCY

GROWTH

INT

IPMT

ISBLANK

ISERROR

ISLOGICAL

LINEST

LOGEST

LOOKUP

MATCH

MDETERM

MINVERSE

MIRR

MMULT

PPMT

PRODUCT

SEARCH

SUBSTITUTE

TEXT

TRANSPOSE

TREND

TYPE

WEEKDAY


Entering and calculating Lotus 1-2-3 formulas

In Microsoft Excel, you can enter formulas and work with range names just as you would in Lotus 1-2-3. You can calculate formulas and expressions according to either Microsoft Excel or Lotus 1-2-3 rules.

What do you need help with?

Enter Lotus 1-2-3 formulas

Calculate Lotus 1-2-3 formulas

Calculation rules for Lotus 1-2-3 formulas


Calculation rules for Lotus 1-2-3 formulas

Using the Transition Formula Evaluation option

When the Transition Formula Evaluation option is selected, Microsoft Excel calculates formulas and database criteria according to Lotus 1-2-3 rules.

The following types of expressions are evaluated differently:

•	Cells that contain text in Lotus 1-2-3 are considered to have a value of zero (0) when the cell is used in a formula. In Microsoft Excel, you cannot combine text and numeric entries in the same formula.

•	Boolean expressions in Lotus 1-2-3 are evaluated to "0" or "1" and display "0" or "1" in the cell. For example, 2<3 displays "1" in the cell to represent true. Microsoft Excel displays "TRUE" or "FALSE" in the cell.

•	Database criteria ranges are evaluated differently when you are extracting data, finding data, and using database functions. For example, computed criteria can use existing field names.

•	Certain functions —  including @MOD, @VLOOKUP, and @HLOOKUP — are evaluated differently. For example, @VLOOKUP performs literal matches on text.

Opening and saving Lotus 1-2-3 worksheets in Microsoft Excel

•	When you open a Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet in Microsoft Excel, Transition Formula Evaluation is selected for that sheet to ensure that Microsoft Excel calculates the formulas according to the preceding Lotus 1-2-3 rules.

•	If you save the Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet as a Microsoft Excel worksheet, Transition Formula Evaluation remains selected until you cancel it. Transition Formula Evaluation is not selected automatically for Microsoft Excel worksheets.

Mathematical Operator Evaluation in Lotus 1-2-3 and Microsoft Excel

The following lists compare the mathematical operators used by Microsoft Excel and Lotus 1-2-3, in descending order of evaluation.

Lotus 1-2-3 order of operators

^

+ or - (unary)

* or /

+ or -

= < > <= >= <>

#not#(unary)

#and# #or#

& (Release 2.0 or later only)

Microsoft Excel order of operators

AND, OR, NOT functions

+ or - (unary)

^

* or /

+ or -

&

= < > <= >= <>

Note   Lotus 1-2-3 evaluates the exponentiation operator (^) before the negation operator (-), whereas Microsoft Excel evaluates negation first. For example, the formula =-2^4 produces the value -16 in Lotus 1-2-3, but it produces 16 in Microsoft Excel. To correct this difference, use parentheses to force the correct order of evaluation; for example =-(2^4) =-16.


Enter Lotus 1-2-3 formulas

1	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Transition tab.

2	Select the Transition Formula Entry check box.

Note   When you select and clear the Transition Formula Entry option, formulas don't automatically reapply names or restore names to references. When you select the Transition Formula Entry option, it remains active for that worksheet until you cancel it, even if you save the Lotus 1-2-3 worksheet as a Microsoft Excel worksheet.


Calculate Lotus 1-2-3 formulas

1	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Transition tab.

2	To calculate formulas according to Lotus 1-2-3 rules, select the Transition Formula Evaluation check box.

To calculate formulas according to Microsoft Excel rules, clear the Transition Formula Evaluation check box.

Caution   Avoid alternately selecting and canceling the Transition Formula Evaluation option; otherwise, the values calculated on your worksheet might change. If you cancel the Transition Formula Evaluation option, your worksheet will adhere to Microsoft Excel rules; if you leave the option selected, your worksheet will adhere to Lotus 1-2-3 rules.


What is the data form?

A data form provides a simple way to see, change, add, and delete individual records from a list or database, or to find specific records based on the criteria you specify. A data form displays one complete record at a time. If you enter or edit data on the data form, Microsoft Excel changes the corresponding cells in the list. When you click the Form command on the Data menu, Microsoft Excel reads your data and displays the data form dialog box.

To use a data form, your list has to be set up in a specific format. For more information, click  [image].


Add a record by using a data form

1	Click a cell in the list you want to add records to.

2	On the Data menu, click Form.

3	Click New.

4	Type the fields for the new record.

To move to the next field, press TAB.

5	When you finish typing data, press ENTER to add the record.

6	When you finish adding records, click Close.


Add-in programs and other programs included with Microsoft Excel

Add-ins are supplemental programs that add custom commands and features to Microsoft Excel. The add-in programs listed in the following table are located in the Library folder or one of its subfolders. The programs listed in the table are located in the Msapps folder (in the Windows folder) or in the Common Files folder (in the Program Files folder). If you cannot locate a particular add-in or program on your hard disk or a network drive, you can rerun the Microsoft Excel Setup program and select Change Option to install these programs.

Program or add-in	Description
AccessLink	Provides Microsoft Access forms and reports to use with Microsoft Excel data, and imports Microsoft Excel data to Microsoft Access. Only available if Microsoft Access is installed.
Analysis ToolPak	Adds financial, statistical, and engineering analysis functions.
AutoSave	Saves workbooks at specified intervals automatically as you work.
Microsoft Query	Queries and retrieves data from external data sources.
Report Manager	Creates reports with different print views, display views, and scenarios.
Solver	Calculates solutions to what-if scenarios based on adjustable cells and constraint cells.
Template Wizard With Data Tracking	Creates templates that allow you to record entries in a database for tracking and analysis purposes.
Update Add-in Links	Updates links to Microsoft Excel 4.0 add-ins.
View Manager	Creates, stores, and displays different views of a worksheet. Can be used with Report Manager.
XLODBC add-in (Xlodbc.xla)	Uses ODBC functions to connect to external data sources with installed ODBC drivers.


Create a shared list

1	On the File menu, click Shared Lists, and then click the Editing tab.

2	To allow other users on your network to edit and save this file at the same time, select the Allow Multi-User Editing check box.

To prevent others from editing or saving this workbook at the same time, clear this check box.


Color Picker dialog box

Customizes the colors on the Microsoft Excel color palette and copies color palettes between workbooks.

•	When you copy an object with a custom color from one workbook to another, the color is copied along with the object.

•	The boxes at the bottom of the dialog box provide alternative systems for precisely setting the color. One system uses hue, saturation, and luminosity. The other system uses the three primary colors used by color monitors: red, green, and blue.

Dialog box options

Color Box

To change the color in the Color|Solid box, click in the large colored box. The settings for the current color are reflected in the Color|Solid box; in the Hue and Sat boxes, which control color saturation; in the Lum box, which controls luminosity; and in the Red, Green, and Blue boxes.

Brightness Bar

To change the amount of white and black in the color shown in the Color|Solid box, drag the arrow to the right of brightness bar up to increase the amount of white in the color, or drag it down to increase the amount of black in the color.

Color|Solid

If your computer system includes a monitor with 16-color display, the Color|Solid box displays the dithered approximation of a solid color.

Hue

To change the hue (that is, the gradation of red, yellow, green, and blue) of the current color, enter a value from 0 to 239 in the Hue box. Changing this value has the same effect as dragging horizontally in the large color box.

Sat (saturation)

To change the saturation (that is, how pure the color is and how different it is from gray), enter a value from 0 to 240 in the Sat box. Changing the value in the Sat box has the same effect as dragging vertically in the large color box.

Lum (luminosity)

To change the luminosity (that is, the amount of white or black) of the current color, enter a value from 0 to 240 in the Lum box. Changing the value in the Lum box has the same effect as dragging the arrow to the right of the brightness bar.

Red/Green/Blue

To change the current color by changing the amounts of red, green, and blue it contains, enter values from 0 to 255 in the Red, Green, and Blue boxes.


Microsoft Data Map

Microsoft Excel includes a mapping feature you can use to create a map based on your data and to analyze geographic data. For example, you might add labels, text, and pins to a map to display and analyze sales data for a particular region.

To use the mapping feature, select a range of cells on your worksheet that includes geographic data — such as countries or states — and then click  [image]. To set the location and size of the map on your worksheet, drag the cross hair.

If you don't see the Map button, rerun the Setup program to install the mapping feature. For more information about installing Office components, click  [image].

For more information about using the map feature, double-click an existing map, click Help, and then click Contents.


Summary functions for subtotaled lists

You can use any of the following functions to summarize data in a list. Click the function you want in the Use Function box in the Subtotal dialog box (Data menu, Subtotals command).

Use this function	To summarize
Sum	The sum of the values in a list. This is the default function for numeric data.
Count	The number of items in a list. This is the default function for data other than numbers.
Average	The average of the values in a list.
Max	The largest value in a list.
Min	The smallest value in a list.
Product	The product of a list.
Count Nums	The number of records or rows in a list that contain numeric data.
StdDev	An estimate of the standard deviation of a population, where the list is the sample.
StdDevp	The standard deviation of a population, where the list is the entire population.
Var	An estimate of the variance of a population, where the list is the sample.
Varp	The variance of a population, where the list is the entire population.


Microsoft Excel accessibility

Microsoft Excel contains features that make the product more accessible. You can change the magnification of your document, change the size and spacing of toolbar buttons, create your own toolbars, customize colors, quickly fill in repeated entries, automatically correct common typing mistakes, and assign shortcut keys to commands and tasks you repeat often.

What do you want to do?

Zoom in or out of a document

Make toolbar buttons larger

Change the spacing between toolbar buttons

Create a custom toolbar

Change colors in a color palette

Quickly fill in repeated entries in a column

Add an AutoCorrect entry during a spelling check

Enter and format data using shortcut keys

Work with menus using shortcut keys


Add an AutoCorrect entry during a spelling check

1	Click  [image].

2	When a word you often misspell or mistype is identified, enter the correct spelling in the Change To box.

3	To add the misspelled word and its correct spelling to the list of words and phrases that are corrected automatically, click AutoCorrect.


Print Preview dialog box

Displays each page as it will look when printed. The status bar at the bottom of the screen shows the current page number and the total number of pages in the selected sheet.

•	To preview specific pages, click Print on the File menu, specify a print range in the From and To boxes under Page Range, and then click Preview.

•	How your pages appear in the preview window may vary depending on the available fonts, the resolution of the printer, and what colors are available.

•	If your worksheet contains an embedded chart, Print Preview displays both the worksheet and the chart. Before using Print Preview, you can move or resize the chart by dragging.

Dialog Box Options

Next

To display the next page, click Next.

Previous

To display the previous page, click Previous.

Zoom

To switch between a magnified view and a full-page view of a sheet, click Zoom. Zoom does not affect printing size.

Print

To set printing options so that you can print the selected sheet, click Print.

Setup

To set options that control the appearance of printed sheets, click Setup.

Margins

To display or hide the handles used to adjust page margins, header and footer margins, and column widths, click Margins.

Close

To close the preview window and displays the active sheet, click Close.


Turn off AutoCorrect

1	On the Tools menu, click AutoCorrect.

2	Clear the Replace Text As You Type check box.


Using a list as a database

In Microsoft Excel, you don't need to do anything special to your list to make it a database. When you perform database tasks, such as finding, sorting, or subtotaling data, Microsoft Excel automatically recognizes your list as a database.

•	The columns in the list are the fields in the database.

•	The column labels in the list are the field names in the database.

•	Each row in the list is a record in the database.


Guidelines for creating a list on a worksheet

Microsoft Excel has a number of features that make it easy to manage and analyze data in a list.  To take advantage of these features, enter data in a list according to the following guidelines.

List size and location

•	Avoid having more than one list on a worksheet, because some list management features, such as filtering, can be used on only one list at a time.

•	Leave at least one blank column and one blank row between your list and other data on the worksheet. This helps Microsoft Excel select your list when you sort, filter, or insert automatic subtotals.

•	Avoid placing critical data to the left or right of the list; the data might be hidden when you filter the list.

Column labels

•	Create column labels in the first row of your list. Microsoft Excel uses these labels to create reports and to find and organize data.

•	Use a font, data type, alignment, format, pattern, border, or capitalization style for column labels that is different from the format you assign to the data in your list.

•	Use cell borders to insert lines below labels when you want to separate labels from data. Don't use blank rows or dashed lines.

Row and Column Contents

•	Design your list so that all rows have similar items in the same column.

•	Don't insert extra spaces at the beginning of a cell; extra spaces affect sorting and searching.

•	Use the same format for all cells in a column.


Look up values in a list

To follow this procedure, your list must have column labels.

1	Name your list.

How?

2	Insert several rows above your list.

3	In one of the newly inserted cells, type or copy the criteria label you want. This is the label of the column by which you will search the list.

4	Directly below the criteria label, type the first result label you want. This is the label of the first column from which you want a value returned.

If you want additional values returned from the list, add additional result labels below the first result label.

In the cells directly to the right of the result labels, enter the lookup formulas. When entering lookup formulas, use the VLOOKUP function. For example, the following formula uses the criteria value in cell B3 to search the second column of the list named "PRICE_LIST."

=VLOOKUP($B$3,PRICE_LIST,2,FALSE)

5	In the cell directly to the right of the criteria label, type a criteria value, and then press ENTER.


Add a Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro sheet

•	On the Insert menu, point to Macro, and then click MS Excel 4.0 Macro.

The new sheet is inserted to the left of the active sheet.

Note   To insert a Microsoft Excel 4.0 international macro sheet, first insert a Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro sheet. Then click Save As on the File menu. In the Save As Type box, select Microsoft Excel 4.0 Int'l Macro. If an existing international macro sheet is the active sheet, use the Worksheet Tab shortcut menu to insert additional international macro sheets.


Delete sheets from a workbook

1	Select the sheets you want to delete.

How?

2	On the Edit menu, click Delete Sheet.


Move or copy sheets

You can move or copy sheets within the active workbook, to another open workbook, or to a new workbook.

What do you want to do?

Move or copy sheets within a workbook

Move or copy sheets to another workbook

Move or copy sheets to a new workbook

Note   Be careful when you move or copy sheets. Calculations or charts based on data in a worksheet might become inaccurate if you move the worksheet. Similarly, if you move a worksheet within the range of a 3-D formula reference, information from the worksheet might be included in the calculation.


Move or copy sheets to a new workbook

1	Select the sheets you want to move or copy.

How?

2	On the Edit menu, click Move Or Copy Sheet.

3	In the To Book box, select New Book.

4	To copy the sheets, select the Create A Copy check box.


Move or copy sheets to another workbook

1	Open the workbook that contains the sheets you want to move or copy and the workbook that you want to receive the sheets.

2	On the Window menu, click Arrange, and then click Horizontal.

3	Select the sheets you want to move or copy.

How?

4	To move the sheets, drag the sheets to the row of sheet tabs in the destination workbook.

To copy the sheets, hold down CTRL and then drag the sheets.

5	Release the mouse button.

If you copied the sheets, release the mouse button and then release the CTRL key.


Move or copy sheets within a workbook

1	Select the sheet or sheets you want to move or copy.

How?

2	To move the sheets, drag the selected sheets along the row of sheet tabs.

To copy the sheets, hold down CTRL and then drag the sheets.

3	Release the mouse button.

If you copied the sheets, release the mouse button and then release the CTRL key.


Rename a sheet

1	Double-click the sheet tab you want to rename.

2	In the Name box, type a new sheet name.


Databases you can access with Microsoft Query

You can access and retrieve data by using the following drivers, which are available in Microsoft Excel for Windows 95:

•	Microsoft FoxPro (versions 2.0 and 2.5)

•	Microsoft Access (versions 1.0, 1.5, and 2.0)

•	Paradox (versions 3.0, 3.5, and 4.0)

•	dBASE (versions 3.0 and 4.0)

•	SQL Server (versions 1.1, 4.2, NT, and Sybase 4.2)

•	Microsoft Excel (XLS) (versions 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, and 7.0)

•	ODBC ODS Gateway

•	Text

You can also use other full-conformance-level ODBC drivers, such as those found in the Microsoft ODBC 2.0 Driver Pack. For information about the installation and conformance level of a specific driver, see the documentation for that driver.


Creating macros to access lists and external databases

You can create macros that access external data sources without using Microsoft Query. To add data-access commands to macros created in the Microsoft Visual Basic Programming System, Applications Edition, or in the Microsoft Excel version 4.0 macro language, use the Microsoft ODBC add-in.

You can also create macros or custom database applications that do use Microsoft Query to access external data. Use the Visual Basic command equivalents or the command-equivalent functions in the Microsoft Query add-in to create these macros.


Specify a source to retrieve data from

1	On the Data menu, click Get External Data. If the Get External Data command does not appear on the Data menu, you need to install Microsoft Query.

How?

2	Click Other.

3	Click the data source you want to add.

If the data source does not appear in the list, click New to define a new source, click the name of the driver you want to use, and then click OK.

4	Select the options you want.


Save the query definition with the result set

When you save the query definition with the result set, you can edit the query definition later or use the Refresh Data command to update the result set.

1	On the Data menu, click Get External Data. If the Get External Data command does not appear on the Data menu, you need to install Microsoft Query.

How?

2	Create a query or open a saved query.

3	On the Microsoft Query File menu, click Return Data To Microsoft Excel.

4	Select the Keep Query Definition check box.


Close Microsoft Query and return the results of a query to Microsoft Excel

1	To close Microsoft Query without closing Microsoft Excel, switch to Microsoft Query.

2	If a query is active, click Return Data To Microsoft Excel on the File menu.

3	On the Microsoft Query File menu, click Exit.

Note   If you close Microsoft Query before clicking Return Data To Microsoft Excel, a blank result set appears in Microsoft Excel. Double-click a cell in the blank result set to open the query definition. Then return the data to Microsoft Excel before closing Microsoft Query.


Choosing between Microsoft Excel and Microsoft Query

Use Microsoft Excel when you want to

Filter data that fits on a Microsoft Excel worksheet.

Format tables of data for reports or presentations.

Use data from an external database to create charts or to work with calculations.

Use Microsoft Query when you want to

Filter data that is too large to fit on a Microsoft Excel worksheet.

Filter data that is stored in an external database.

Join two or more separate tables of data based on specific criteria.

Retain the order of data after updating results.

Repeat queries for weekly, monthly, or quarterly reports.

Access data stored in file formats that Microsoft Excel cannot open as a worksheet.


Retrieve data from lists and external databases with Microsoft Query

1	On the Data menu, click Get External Data. If the Get External Data command does not appear on the Data menu, you need to install Microsoft Query.

How?

2	Click the data source you want to access.

3	Click the tables containing the information you want.

4	Drag the fields you want in your query down to the data pane.

5	On the File menu, click Return Data To Microsoft Excel.

6	In the Destination box, enter the reference for the upper-left cell of the range where you want the result set to appear.

7	To save the query definition with the result set, select the Keep Query Definition check box.


Update query results

1	Save the query definition with the result set.

  How?

2	Select a cell in the result set you want to update.

3	On the Data menu, click Refresh Data.


Change the query definition for an existing result set

1	Save the query definition with the result set.

  How?

2	Double-click a cell in the result set you want to change.

3	Edit the query in Microsoft Query.

4	On the File menu, click Return Data To Microsoft Excel.

5	Select the options you want.


Copy data and the query definition to another workbook

Before you do this procedure, make sure that the query you want to copy is saved in Microsoft Query.

1	Open the workbook where you want to place the query definition and its result set.

2	On the Data menu, click Get External Data. If the Get External Data command does not appear on the Data menu, you need to install Microsoft Query.

How?

3	Click Cancel to close the Select Data Source dialog box.

4	On the Microsoft Query File menu, click Open Query, and then select the query you want to copy.

5	On the File menu, click Return Data To Microsoft Excel.

6	Select the options you want.


Remove a query definition from a worksheet

Use this procedure if you want to keep your result set but not update it. After you remove a query definition, you cannot use Undo to restore it.

1	Select a cell in the result set.

2	On the Data menu, click Get External Data. If the Get External Data command does not appear on the Data menu, you need to install Microsoft Query.

How?

3	Clear the Keep Query Definition check box.

4	Click OK.

5	In the message box, click OK.


Troubleshoot problems with retrieving data from lists and external databases

What do you need help with?

The Get External Data command does not appear on the Data menu or does not work.

I can't access the list or external database I want to retrieve data from.

When I refresh the data of a query, my sorting and formatting disappear.

My macro for retrieving data won't run.


The Get External Data command does not appear on the Data menu or does not work.

•	Make sure that you have installed the Microsoft Query add-in. On the Tools menu, click Add-Ins, and then select MS Query Add-In. If this add-in does not appear in the list, click Browse, or use the Microsoft Excel Setup program to install the add-in.

•	If you have moved or deleted files associated with the Microsoft Query add-in, the add-in won't start correctly. Use the Microsoft Excel Setup program to reinstall the add-in.


My macro for retrieving data won't run.

•	Make sure that you have installed the Microsoft ODBC Function add-in. On the Tools menu, click Add-Ins, and then select ODBC Add-In. If this add-in does not appear in the list, use the Microsoft Excel Setup program to install it.

•	Make sure that you have installed the correct ODBC driver. On the Microsoft Query File menu, click New Query. Click Other, and then either select the ODBC driver you want or click New to define a new data source.

•	If you have opened the worksheet on a machine other than the one it was created on, make sure that the correct ODBC driver is installed and that the data source name matches the name on the original machine.

•	Use the debugging tools included with Microsoft Excel to make sure that you are using the correct syntax with the ODBC statements.

•	Make sure that you have installed the VBA.DLL file — needed to run macros written with Visual Basic, Applications Edition — in the same folder as Microsoft Excel. If not, use the Microsoft Excel Setup program to install this file.

•	Make sure that the XLODBC.XLA and XLODBC.DLL files are in the LIBRARY\MSQUERY subfolder of the folder containing Microsoft Excel.


When I refresh the data of a query, my sorting and formatting disappear.

When you refresh data, Microsoft Excel replaces the data in the result set with new data. If you want to sort or format the results of a query, copy the result set to another sheet in the workbook.

Or, you can record a macro for formatting data in a result set, and then run the macro after you refresh the data. On the Tools menu, point to Record Macro, and then click Record New Macro. Format your data, and then click the Stop Macro button on the Stop Recording toolbar.


I can't access the list or external database I want to retrieve data from.

•	Make sure that you have selected the data source you want. On the Microsoft Query File menu, click New Query. Select the data source you want, or click Other to define a new data source.

•	Make sure that you have installed the correct ODBC driver. On the Microsoft Query File menu, click New Query. Click Other, and then either select the ODBC driver you want or click New to define a new data source.

•	If you are trying to access a database on a network, check your computer connection to the network, then make sure that you have started your networking software and that the network is running. For more information about the network connections required for your database driver, refer to the online Help for the ODBC driver you are using.

•	If you are trying to access a database on a network server, make sure that you have the correct network and server and that the server is running.


Get External Data command (Data menu)

When you install the Microsoft Query add-in by clicking Add-Ins on the Tools menu, the Get External Data command appears on the Data menu.

•	When the active cell is outside of a result set, clicking this command starts or displays Microsoft Query so that you can create or open a query.

•	When the active cell is in a result set, clicking this command displays the Get External Data dialog box.

Get External Data dialog box options

Keep Query Definition

Select to save the query definition with the result set. Clear if you don't want to save the query or update the result set later.

Include Field Names

Select to include field names, as they appear in the query, as column headings in the result set.

Include Row Numbers

Select to include row numbers, in the order they appear in the query, as the first column in the result set.

Keep Password

Select to save the password for the external data source. Clear if you want to reenter the password each time you connect to the external data source and update the result set.

Destination

(Appears only when you create a new query.) Enter the reference for the upper-left cell in the range where you want the result set to appear.

Refresh

(Appears only when you click Get External Data while in a result set, and when you have saved the query definition.) Click to update the result set with new data from the source file without displaying Microsoft Query. This option is the same as the Refresh Data button and the Refresh Data command on the Data menu.

Edit Query

(Appears only when you click Get External Data while in a result set, and when you have saved the query definition.) Click to change the query definition for the current result set.


The difference between the Microsoft Query add-in and application

When you install Microsoft Query with Microsoft Excel, you install two different programs: the Microsoft Query add-in and the Microsoft Query application.

The add-in acts as a bridge between Microsoft Excel and the application. It places the Get External Data command on the Microsoft Excel Data menu. This command starts the Microsoft Query application so you can select how you want to return data to the worksheet.

The application communicates with and retrieves information from the data source. Using the application, you select the data you want to return to Microsoft Excel.

For more information, open the Microsoft Query application and choose Contents from the Help menu.


Embed a workbook or use worksheet data in Lotus Notes

To display properties of a Microsoft Excel workbook in a Lotus Notes form or view, you embed the workbook as an object in a Lotus Notes form. You can display many of the Microsoft Excel property fields as Lotus Notes fields or columns. For example, you can create a column in a Lotus Notes view that displays the title and author of the Microsoft Excel workbook.

You can also display the data from a named cell as a field in a Lotus Notes view.

Note   Named cells that are protected or that contain formulas are updated in only one way. If you change the field in Lotus Notes, the change isn't reflected in Microsoft Excel.

What do you want to do?

Embed a workbook in a Lotus Notes form

Use data from a worksheet in Lotus Notes


How Microsoft Excel workbook properties compare with Lotus Notes fields

An asterisk (*) next to a field name in the following table indicates that the field is updated both ways: changes in the Microsoft Excel document are reflected in the Lotus Notes field, and changes in the Lotus Notes field are reflected in the embedded Microsoft Excel document.

Microsoft Excel property	Lotus Notes field	Lotus  data type
*Title	Title	Text
*Subject	Subject	Text
*Author	Author	Text
*Keywords	Keywords	Text
*Comments	Comments	Text
*Template	Template	Text
*Manager	Manager	Text
*Company	Company	Text
*Category	Category	Text
Created	DateCreated	Time
Modified	LastSavedDate	Time
Last Saved By	LastSavedBy	Text
Size	NumberOfBytes	Text
Revision Number	NumberOfRevisions	Number
Total Editing Time	TotalEditingTime	Number
Printed	LastPrintedDate	Time
Pages	NumberOfPages	Number
Words	NumberOfWords	Number
Characters	NumberOfCharacters	Number
Paragraphs	NumberOfParagraphs	Number
Lines	NumberOfLines	Number
Security	Security	Number
Document Class	DocumentClass	Text
Name of application	NameOfApplication	Text
Custom Property name	Propertyname	Text
*Custom Value	Value	Text
Note   The Filename and Directory fields return empty values, because there is no filename or folder for an embedded object.

The DocumentClass field returns a version-dependent ID of the object obtained from the OLE registry. This value can be used to refer to server information in the OLE registry and identify the type of object that's embedded.


Use data from a worksheet in Lotus Notes

1	Select the cell that contains the data you want to display in Lotus Notes.

2	In the Name box at the left end of the formula bar, type a name.

3	Press ENTER.

4	On the File menu, click Properties, and then click the Custom tab.

5	In the Name box, type a name for the custom property.

6	Select the Link To Content check box.

7	In the Source box, click the named cell that you want to link to, and then click Add.

Note   When you create the corresponding field in a Lotus Notes form, type the custom property name in the Name box, not the named cell.


Import a Microsoft Excel file into Lotus Notes

You can import Microsoft Excel files into Lotus Notes in one of three ways:

•	Import a worksheet or range of cells directly into a Lotus Notes view. When you import into a Lotus Notes view, each row becomes a new Lotus Notes form.

•	Import a worksheet or range of cells into a rich-text field in a Lotus Notes form. The worksheet information is displayed as a table in the rich-text field.

•	Embed a Microsoft Excel workbook in a rich-text field in a Lotus Notes form. This method allows you to exchange field information between a workbook and Lotus Notes.

What do you want to do?

Import a worksheet or a range of cells into a Lotus Notes view

Import worksheet data into a rich-text field in a Lotus Notes form

Embed a document or workbook in a single Lotus Notes form

Embed a document or workbook in a Lotus Notes form design


Import a worksheet or a range of cells into a Lotus Notes view

1	In Lotus Notes, open the view into which you want to import a worksheet or cell range.

2	On the File menu, click Import.

3	In the List Files Of Type box, click Microsoft Excel.

4	In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to import.

5	Click Import.

6	In the Use Form box, click the name of an existing Lotus Notes form.

The information in each row will be imported as a form of the type you select.

7	In the Import As box, click Main documents or Response documents.

8	In the Column Format box, click View Defined or XLS Title Defined.

If you select View Defined, each row in the worksheet or range is imported as a new form in the view. The first column is imported as the first field shown in the view; the second column is imported as the second field show in the view, and so on.

If you select XLS Title Defined, the first row in the worksheet or range isn't imported, and the remaining rows are imported as new forms in the view. The data in each column is assigned to a field in Lotus Notes that corresponds to the name found in the first row of the worksheet or range.

9	In the Worksheet Import Range box, type the name of the worksheet and cell range you want to import.


Import worksheet data into a rich-text field in a Lotus Notes form

1	In Lotus Notes, open a form and then click in a rich-text field.

2	On the File menu, click Import.

3	In the List Files Of Type box, click Microsoft Excel.

4	In the File Name box, type the name of the file you want to import.

5	Click Import.

6	In the Open Document In Workbook box, click the name of the worksheet that contains the information you want to import.

7	Click Open.

8	In the Name Or Cell Range box, type the name or reference of the cell range.

To import the entire worksheet, accept the default.


Export a Lotus Notes view to Microsoft Excel

1	In Lotus Notes, open the view that contains the information you want to export.

If you don't want to export all the documents in the view, select the ones you want to export.

2	On the File menu, click Export.

3	In the File Name box, type a name for the new workbook.

4	In the Save File As Type box, click Microsoft Excel.

5	Click Export.

6	To specify which documents you want to export, click All Documents or Selected Documents.

7	To export the view titles as the first row of the worksheet, select the Include View Titles check box.


Use special currency symbols in custom number formats

1	Select the cells you want to format.

2	On the Format menu, click Cells, and then click the Number tab.

3	In the Category box, click Custom.

4	In the Type box, type or select a custom number format.

5	Click at the end of the custom number format.

6	On the numeric keypad, hold down ALT and type the ANSI code for the currency symbol.

To enter	Hold down ALT and type
¢	0162
£	0163
¥	0165
Note   Custom formats are saved with the workbook. If you want Microsoft Excel to always display an international currency symbol, double-click Regional Settings in the Windows Control Panel and change the settings before starting Microsoft Excel.


Format numbers as text

You must format the cells as text before you enter the numbers.

1	Select the cells you want to format.

2	On the Format menu, click Cells, and then click the Number tab.

3	In the Category box, click Text.

Note   You can quickly enter a number as text by preceding it with an apostrophe.


Create custom number formats

1	Select the cells you want to format.

2	On the Format menu, click Cells, and then click the Number tab.

3	In the Category box, select the format that most closely resembles the format you want.

 How?

4	In the Category box, click Custom.

5	In the Type box, edit the number format codes to create the format you want. Editing a built-in format does not remove it.

For more information, click  [image].


Delete custom number formats

1	On the Format menu, click Cells, and then click the Number tab.

2	In the Category box, click Custom.

3	In the Type box, select the number format you want to delete.

4	Click Delete.


Custom number formats

Using number format codes, you can create your own custom number formats. Number format codes can have up to four sections, separated by semicolons. These sections define the formats for positive numbers, negative numbers, zero values, and text, in that order.

If you include only two sections, the first one is used for positive numbers and zeros, and the second one is used for negative numbers. If you have only one section, all numbers use that format. If you skip a section, include the semicolon.

For more information about basic number format codes, click  [image].

For more information about number format codes for dates and times, click  [image].

For more information about number format codes for text and spacing, click  [image].

For more information about other number format codes, click  [image].


Basic number format codes

•	Use the General format to display numbers as integers, fractions as decimals, and scientific format for numbers that are too wide for the cell. Click Cells on the Format menu, click the Number tab, and click General in the Type box.

•	To display a specific number of digits (0's or #'s) to the right and left of the decimal point, include a decimal point in the number format. If the format contains only #'s to the left of the decimal point, numbers less than 1 begin with a decimal point.

•	To create placeholders for numbers, include the following format codes in a section. If the number has more digits to the right of the decimal point than there are placeholders in the format, the number is rounded to as many decimal places as there are placeholders. If the number has more digits to the left of the decimal point than there are placeholders in the format, the extra digits are displayed.

•	# does not display extra zeros.

•	0 (zero) displays extra zeros when a number has fewer digits than there are zeros in the format.

•	? displays extra zeros when a number has fewer digits than there are zeros in the format, and also adds a space for insignificant zeros on either side of the decimal point so that decimal points align. You can also use this symbol for fractions that have varying numbers of digits.

To display	Use this format code
1234.59 as 1234.6	####.#
8.9 as 8.900	#.000
12 as 12.0 and 1234.568 as 1234.57	#.0#
5.25 as 5 1/4 and 5.3 as 5 3/10, with aligned division symbols	# ???/???
.5 as 0.5	0.##
•	To display a comma as a thousands separator or to scale a number by a multiple of a thousand, include a comma in the number format.

To display	Use this format code
12000 as 12,000	#,###
12000 as 12	#,
12200000 as 12.2	0.0,,
•	To set the color for a section of the format, type the name of the color in square brackets in the section. To display a color from the color palette, include [COLOR n] in a section, where n is a number from 0 to 56.

[BLACK]	[BLUE]
[CYAN]	[GREEN]
[MAGENTA]	[RED]
[WHITE]	[YELLOW]


Hide data in cells

1	Select the cells that contain the data you want to hide.

2	On the Format menu, click Cells, and then click the Number tab.

3	In the Category box, click Custom.

4	In the Type box, type three semicolons (;;;).

The data contained in the cell will appear in the formula bar, or in the cell if you are editing within the cell. The data in the cell will not be printed.


Hide zeros by using a number format

1	Select the cells that you want to format.

2	On the Format menu, click Cells, and then click the Number tab.

3	In the Category box, click Custom.

4	In the Type box, type 0;0;

Note   To turn off the display of zero values for an entire sheet, click Options on the Tools menu and clear the Zero Values check box on the View tab.


Choose between types of number formats

The types of built-in number formats available are arranged in categories on the Number tab (Format Cells dialog box). First select the category, and then select from the options that appear. If you do not find the option you want, you can create your own custom number format.

To display numbers	Select this category on the Number tab
With no specific number format	General
With a thousands separator, decimal places, and different formats for negative numbers	Number
With decimal places, currency symbols, and different formats for negative numbers	Currency
With aligned currency symbols and decimal places	Accounting
As dates, or times and dates combined	Date
As times of the day	Time
As a percentage of 1	Percentage
As fractions	Fraction
In scientific format, E+	Scientific
As text, or to treat numbers as text	Text
As postal codes, phone numbers, or Social Security numbers	Special
What do you want to do?

Select a category on the Number tab

Create a custom number format


Number format codes for dates and times

•	To display days, months, and years, include the following format codes in a section. If you use m immediately after the h or hh format code, Microsoft Excel displays the minute instead of the month.

To display	Use this format code
Months as 1-12	m
Months as 01-12	mm
Months as Jan-Dec	mmm
Months as January-December	mmmm
Days as 1-31	d
Days as 01-31	dd
Days as Sun-Sat	ddd
Days as Sunday-Saturday	dddd
Years as 00-99	yy
Years as 1900-2078	yyyy
•	To display hours, minutes, and seconds, include the following format codes in a section.

To display	Use this format code
Hours as 0-23	h
Hours as 00-23	hh
Minutes as 0-59	m
Minutes as 00-59	mm
Seconds as 0-59	s
Seconds as 00-59	ss
Hours as 4 AM	h AM
Time as 4:36 pm	h:mm pm
Time as 4:36:03 p	h:mm:ss p
Hours as 25.02	[h]:mm
Minutes as 63:46	[mm]:ss
If the format contains an AM or PM, the hour is based on the 12-hour clock, where AM, am, A, or a indicates times from midnight until noon, and PM, pm, P, or p indicates times from noon until midnight. Otherwise, the hour is based on the 24-hour clock. The m or mm must appear immediately after the h or hh format code, or Microsoft Excel displays the month rather than the minute.

You can also use the decimal point to create time formats that display fractions of a second.

To display hours greater than 24, or minutes or seconds greater than 60, place brackets around the leftmost part of the time code. For example, the time code [h]:mm:ss allows the display of hours greater than 24.


Number format codes for text and spacing

•	To display characters, either enclose the characters in double quotation marks or precede them with a backslash. The following special characters do not need to be enclosed in quotation marks to be displayed: $ - + / ( ) : space. If you enter any of the following symbols, a backslash is provided for you: ! ^ & ` (left single quotation mark) ' (right single quotation mark) ~ { } = < >.

•	To create a space the width of a character in a number format, include an underscore followed by the character. For example, an underscore followed by a closing parenthesis allows positive numbers to line up correctly with negative numbers that are enclosed in parentheses.

•	To include a text section in a number format, include the symbol @ in the number format. Any text entered in the cell is formatted according to the section where the @ symbol appears. If the format does not have a text section, text you enter is not affected by the format.


Other number format codes

•	To display numbers as a percentage, where the number is multiplied by 100 and the percent sign is added, include the percent sign (%) in the number format.

•	To display numbers in scientific format, include the following format codes in a section. If a format contains a 0 or # to the right of an E-, E+, e-, or e+, Microsoft Excel displays the number in scientific format and inserts an E or e. The number of 0's or #'s to the right determines the exponent's number of digits. E- or e- places a minus sign by negative exponents. E+ or e+ places a minus sign by negative exponents and a plus sign by positive exponents.

•	To repeat the next character in the format enough times to fill the column width, include an asterisk (*) in the number format.

•	To set conditional values for a section, enclose the condition in square brackets, where condition is <, >, =, >=, <=, or <>. You can set conditions for each section of a number format. For example, the following format displays entries greater than 1000 in blue:

[>1000][Blue]#,##


Summarize data by outlining a worksheet

You can show or hide as much data as you want in a worksheet by grouping the rows and columns of data in an outline. Microsoft Excel can automatically outline the data if your worksheet is set up as follows:

•	You have used formulas such as SUM to summarize rows and columns of detail data.

•	Cell references in the formulas point in a consistent direction. Summary rows are placed consistently above or below the rows that contain their related detail data, and summary columns are placed consistently to the left or to the right.

If the rows and columns of summary data contain values instead of formulas, or if summary rows and columns are not placed consistently, you can create an outline manually.

What do you want to do?

Automatically outline a worksheet

Manually outline a worksheet


Automatically outline a worksheet

1	Select the range of cells you want to outline.

How?

To outline the entire worksheet, click any cell on the worksheet.

2	On the Data menu, point to Group And Outline, and then click Auto Outline.

The outline symbols appear on your screen.


Manually outline a worksheet

1	Select the rows or columns that contain detail data.

Detail rows or columns are usually adjacent to the row or column that contains the related summary data. For example, if Row 6 contains totals for Rows 3 - 5, select Rows 3 - 5.

How?

2	On the Data menu, click Group And Outline, and then click Group.

The outline symbols appear beside the group on your screen.

3	Continue selecting detail rows or columns and clicking the Group command until you have created all of the levels you want in your outline.

Tip   To group multiple outline levels, make sure you select all of the subordinate summary rows or columns, and their related detail data, that make up the next outline level. For example, Rows 6 and 10 contain subtotals for Rows 3 - 5 and Rows 7 - 9, respectively. Row 11 contains grand totals. To group the detail data for Row 11, select Rows 3 - 10. You may prefer to group the "outer" level first and then group the inner levels.


Remove an outline

If you no longer want to view summaries of worksheet data, you can remove an outline from all or part of the data. Removing an outline does not change the data on your worksheet.

1	To remove one or more groups from an outline, select the rows or columns that make up the groups.

To remove the entire outline, click any cell on the worksheet.

2	On the Data menu, click Group And Outline, and then click Clear Outline.


Show or hide detail data in an outline

If you've outlined a worksheet, you can use the outline symbols to show or hide specific groups of detail data.

•	To show detail data, click  [image] for the group of data you want to display.

To hide detail data, click  [image] for the group of data you want to hide.

•	To show a specific level of detail, click the row or column level symbol ( [image] ) for the lowest level you want to display.

All rows or columns below that level will be hidden. For example, to display levels 1 - 3, click  [image].

To display all rows or columns, click the symbols for the lowest row and column levels.


Display or hide outline symbols

1	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the View tab.

2	To display the outline symbols, select the Outline Symbols check box.

To hide the symbols, clear the check box.


Ungroup rows or columns in an outline

1	Select the rows or columns you want to ungroup.

2	On the Data menu, click Group And Outline, and then click Ungroup.


Copy only visible summary data in an outline

If you have hidden detail data in an outline and then select and copy the visible rows and columns of summary data, the hidden detail data is also copied. To copy only the summary data:

1	In the outline, display only the summary data you want to copy.

2	Select only the displayed summary data.

How?

3	Click [image].

4	Select the upper-left cell of the paste area.

5	Click [image].


Select a section of an outline

If you have already outlined a worksheet, you can use the outline symbols to select groups of data.

•	Press SHIFT and click the  [image] or  [image] symbol or the level bar of the outline level you want to select.


The -, +, and 123 symbols in an outlined worksheet

You use outline symbols to control the amount of detail data displayed in a worksheet outline. If you do not see the outline symbols, select the Outline Symbols check box on the View tab of the Options dialog box (Tools menu).

This symbol	Does this
	Indicates that the detail rows and columns are displayed. Click the  [image] symbol, or click anywhere on the level bar to hide the detail rows or columns.
	Marks a summary row or column with hidden detail. Click to display the detail data indicated by the column or row level bar.
	Marks a summary row or column with the detail rows or columns displayed. Click to hide the detail data indicated by the column or row level bar.
	Indicates the successive outline levels for the rows and columns in a multilevel outline. Click to display specific levels of data.


Troubleshoot outlining a worksheet

What do you need help with?

When I copy summary data in an outline, the detail data is also copied.

Detail data isn't grouped properly in a multilevel outline.

I can't see the outline symbols on my worksheet.

I've ungrouped data or removed an outline, but data is still hidden.


Data is not properly grouped or displayed in a multilevel outline.

•	When grouping rows and columns, select only the detail rows or columns that make up the group. Do not include the related summary row or column in the selection. For example, if Row 6 contains totals for the data in Rows 3 - 5, select Rows 3 - 5 to define the group.

•	It's best to have all data displayed when you are grouping multiple outline levels. Make sure you select all of the subordinate summary rows or columns, and their related detail data, that make up the next outline level. For example, Rows 6 and 10 contain subtotals for Rows 3 - 5 and Rows 7 - 9, respectively. Row 11 contains grand totals. To group the detail data for Row 11, select Rows 3 - 10. You may prefer to group the "outer" level first and then group the "inner" levels.

•	If the  [image] or  [image] symbols are displayed beside the wrong row or column of the outline, first display any hidden data and then select the outlined range. On the Data menu, point to Group And Outline, click Settings, and then verify that the Direction options are correct. If summary rows or columns are located above or to the left of the related detail rows and columns, clear the Summary Rows Below Detail or Summary Columns To Right Of Detail check box. You might need to remove the outline and regroup the data.


I can't see the outline symbols on my worksheet.

Make sure the symbols are displayed. On the Tools menu, click Options, click the View tab, and then select the Outline Symbols check box. If the symbols still aren't visible, use the Zoom Control box on the Standard toolbar to change the magnification to 100%.


I've ungrouped data or removed an outline, but data is still hidden.

If you ungroup or remove an outline with detail data hidden, the detail rows or columns remain hidden. To display the data, select the visible rows and columns adjacent to the hidden rows and columns. On the Format menu, point to Row or Column, and then click Unhide.


Use the Pen with Microsoft Excel

To use a pen with Microsoft Excel, you must set up Microsoft Windows with Pen Computing extensions.

To	Do this
Display a shortcut menu	Press the Barrel button on the pen, and then tap the item for which you want to see a shortcut menu.
Copy objects or cells	Press the Barrel button on the pen, and then tap and drag the object or the border of the selection.
Move objects or cells	Tap and drag the object.
Copy data to a range of adjacent cells	Press the Barrel button on the pen, and then tap and drag the fill handle.
Extend a series of numbers or dates	Tap and drag the fill handle.
Limit pen recognition to digits and punctuation	Click  [image] on the Formula toolbar.


Troubleshoot printing

What do you need help with?

When I try to print a document, nothing happens.

I've set manual page breaks, but Microsoft Excel ignores them when I print.

I can't get my printed header or footer to look the way I want.

I want my document to be printed one page wide (or tall), but I don't know how much I should scale it.

I can't scale a chart to the size I want or fit multiple charts on a single page.

When I print, only a portion of a worksheet is printed.


When I try to print a document, nothing happens.

•	First, determine whether your printer setup in Windows or in Microsoft Excel is correct by using the Windows Print Troubleshooter. On the Windows Start menu, click Help. Click the Index tab, and then enter "print troubleshooting." Click Display, and then follow the instructions in the Windows Print Troubleshooter.

•	If your Windows printer setup looks correct, check your Microsoft Excel printer settings.

Make sure that the selected printer matches the printer you're using. On the File menu, click Print, and then click the printer you want in the Printer box.


I've set manual page breaks, but Microsoft Excel ignores them when I print.

If you've set manual page breaks and then specified in the Scaling group (File menu, Page Setup command, Page tab) that Microsoft Excel prints your work on a specific number of pages, Microsoft Excel ignores the manual page breaks. To use the manual page breaks when you print, click Adjust To (File menu, Page Setup command, Page tab).


I can't get my printed header or footer to look the way I want.

•	You can choose from several built-in headers and footers or create your own. On the File menu, click Page Setup, and then click the Header/Footer tab.

•	You cannot apply color formats to header or footer text , even if you have a color printer.

•	The left and right header and footer margins are the same as the overall page margins.

To adjust the distance from the top or bottom edge of the page to the header or footer, click Page Setup on the File menu. Click the Margins tab, and then change the measurements under From Edge.


I want my document to be printed one page wide (or tall), but don't know how much I should scale it.
I want my document to be printed one page wide (or tall), but I don't know how much I should scale it.

You can prevent columns or rows from spilling over the edge of a page by scaling the document so that it's one page wide or tall. On the File menu, click Page Setup, and then click the Page tab. Click Fit To, type 1 in either the Page(s) Wide By box or the Tall box, and then delete the number (if any) from  the other box.


I can't scale a chart to the size I want or fit multiple charts on a single page.

•	If your chart is on a chart sheet, you can scale it when you print it. Activate the chart sheet, click Page Setup on the File menu, and then click the Chart tab. Under Printed Chart Size, click the scaling option you want. The chart will be printed at the size you make it when you drag its handles.

•	If your chart is embedded on a worksheet, resize the chart by clicking it, and then dragging its handles.

•	To print two or more charts on a page, create embedded worksheet charts, and then resize them to fit on a single page. You cannot fit multiple chart sheets on a single page.


When I print, only a portion of a worksheet is printed.

If your worksheet contains a print area, Microsoft Excel prints only the print area. You can determine whether your worksheet contains a print area by clicking the arrow button next to the name box at the left end of the formula bar and looking for Print_Area. You can clear the print area by using the Clear Print Area command (File menu, Print Area submenu), or you can set another print area by using the Set Print Area command (File menu, Print Area submenu).


Save a document

•	You can save the active document by clicking  [image].

•	You can save a copy of the active document with a different name or in a different location.

•	You can save a document in another file format. For example, you can save a Microsoft Excel workbook in a file format that can be read by earlier versions of Microsoft Excel, by Microsoft Works, or by Lotus 1-2-3.

•	You can open a document created in a different application, work on it in Microsoft Excel, and then save it in its original file format. For example, you can open a Lotus 1-2-3 document, edit it in Microsoft Excel, and then save it in either Microsoft Excel or Lotus 1-2-3 format.

•	You can set up Microsoft Excel to save your work automatically at a specified interval.

•	You can set up Microsoft Excel to save a backup copy each time you save a document.

What do you want to do?

Save an existing document

Save a new, unnamed document

Save another copy of a document

Save a document for use in another application

Save a document that was created in another application

Save documents automatically as I work

Keep the previous version of a document when I save


Save a new, unnamed document

1	Click  [image].

2	To save the document in a location other than the My Documents folder, click a different drive or folder.

To save the document in a new folder, click  [image].

3	In the File Name box, type a name for the document.

You can use long, descriptive filenames.

How?

4	Click Save.

Tip   To make it easier to find your document quickly in the future, select the document in the File Save As dialog box (File menu), click  [image],  and then click Properties. On the Summary tab, type information such as the document's title, subject, author, keywords, and comments.

Note   If you want quick access to this document, you can save it in the Favorites folder. To display the Favorites folder in the Save In box, click  [image].  If you want to keep the document in a different folder, but still want quick access to it, you can create a shortcut to the file or folder. For more information, click  [image].


Prevent losing work

You can protect your work by saving a temporary copy of a document periodically as you work, or by saving a backup version each time you save the document. To recover your work after a power failure or other problem has occurred, you must have previously selected Automatic Save or Always Create Backup Copy, or both.

What do you want to do?

Save documents automatically as I work

Keep the previous version of a document when I save

Open a backup copy of a document


Save documents automatically as I work

1	On the Tools menu, click AutoSave. If the AutoSave command is not on the Tools menu, you must install the AutoSave add-in.

How?

2	Select the Automatic Save Every check box.

3	In the Minutes box, enter the interval at which you want Microsoft Excel to save workbooks, and then select the options you want.

4	When you finish working on the workbook, click  [image]  to save it.


AutoSave dialog box options

Automatic Save Every

To turn on AutoSave, select the Automatic Save Every check box. In the Minutes box, specify how often you want your workbook to be automatically saved, from 1 to 120 minutes.

Save Active Workbook Only

To save only the active workbook during each automatic save, click Save Active Workbook Only.

Save All Open Workbooks

To save all open workbooks during each automatic save, click Save All Open Workbooks.

Prompt Before Saving?

If you want AutoSave to notify you before saving a workbook, select the Prompt Before Saving check box. AutoSave will prompt you to confirm the automatic save or skip it.

Save

To save the active workbooks, click Save.

Skip

If you don't want to save the active workbooks, click Skip.


File format converters supplied with Microsoft Excel

You can open and save files in the file formats listed in the following table.

The list of formats in the Save As dialog box varies, depending on the kind of sheet that is active. For most file formats, only the active sheet is saved. To save the other sheets, switch to each one in turn and save it separately.

Formats That Save the Entire Workbook

File formats for opening or saving	Filename extension (Windows only)
Microsoft Excel version 5.0 workbook	.xls
Microsoft Excel version 5.0 template	.xlt
Microsoft Excel version 5.0 workspace file	.xlw
Microsoft Excel version 4.0 workspace (saves worksheets, chart sheets, and  macro sheets only)	.xlw, .xla, .xlt (template), .xlb, .xll
Lotus 1-2-3 Release 3.x (saves worksheets and chart sheets only)	.wk3, .fm3
Lotus 1-2-3 Release 4.0	.wk4
Formats That Save the Active Sheet Only

File formats for opening or saving	Filename extension (Windows only)
Formatted text (space-delimited Lotus  .prn format)	.prn
Text (Windows, tab-delimited)	.txt, Text (Macintosh), Text (OS/2 or MS-DOS)
Comma-separated values (Windows, comma-delimited)	.csv (Macintosh), .csv (OS/2 or MS-DOS)
Microsoft Excel version 4.0 formats  (including Microsoft Excel macro or international macro)	.xls, .xlc, .xlm, .xlt (template), .xla, .xlb, .xll
Microsoft Excel version 3.0 formats	.xls, .xlc, .xlm, .xlw, .xla, .xlt
Microsoft Excel version 2.x formats	.xls, .xlc, .xlm, .xlw
Microsoft Excel macro  (Microsoft Excel versions 2.1, 3.0,. 4.0)	.xlm
Lotus 1-2-3	.wks, .wk1, (all, .fmt)
Quattro/Pro (DOS)	.wq1
Quattro/Pro for Windows	.wq*
dBase II, III, and IV	.dbf
Text (text file for Macintosh, OS/2, or  MS-DOS; comma delimited)	.csv
DIF (data interchange format)	.dif
SYLK (symbolic link format)	.slk
Formats That Microsoft Excel Can Open but Not Save

File formats for opening	Filename extension  (Windows only)
Microsoft Works (MS-DOS and Windows  only)	.wks
Lotus 1-2-3 Releases 3.0, 3.1+, and  1-2-3/W	.pic (when included in an Allways (.all) file)
File Formats for Lotus 1-2-3

You can open Lotus 1-2-3 files in Microsoft Excel, and you can save Microsoft Excel files as Lotus 1-2-3 files. Microsoft Excel can read files in the Lotus 1-2-3 file formats listed in the following table.

Lotus 1-2-3 file format	Release number
.wks	Releases 1 and 1A
.wk1, associated .fmt files	Release 2.0 or later
.wk3, associated .fmt files	Releases 3.0, 3.1+, and 1-2-3/W
Allways (all)
You can paste the following Clipboard formats into Microsoft Excel using the Paste command or the Paste Special command. Unless otherwise stated, formats apply to both Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh.

Format	Clipboard type identifiers
Picture	Picture (also known as Windows metafile) in Windows; PICT for the Macintosh
Bitmap	Bitmap in Windows
Microsoft Excel file formats	BIFF, BIFF3, and BIFF4
Symbolic link format	SYLK
Lotus 1-2-3 Release 2.x format	.wk1
Data interchange format	.dif
Text (tab-delimited) format	Text
Comma-separated values format	.csv
Formatted text*	Rich-text format in Windows; RTF for the Macintosh
Embedded object	Native, OwnerLink, and Picture in Windows; NATV, OLNK, and PICT for the Macintosh; or another presentation format
Linked object	OwnerLink, ObjectLink, Link, and Picture in Windows; OLNK, OJLK, LINK, and PICT for the Macintosh; or another format
Text	Display Text, OEM Text
Values	VALU for the Macintosh
* From Microsoft Excel only


Troubleshoot problems with saving and closing documents

What do you need help with?

The file format in which I want to save a document does not appear in the Save As Type box.

When I try to save a document, I get a message saying that the document is read-only.


The file format in which I want to save a document does not appear in the Save As Type box.

•	Make sure that the file format you want is included with Microsoft Excel. For more information, click  [image].

•	If the file format is included with Microsoft Excel, you can install the file format converter you need. For more information, click  [image].


Open a backup copy of a document

To be able to recover the previous version of a document after a power failure or other problem occurs, you must have previously selected the Always Create Backup Copy check box, and you must have saved the document more than once.

1	Click  [image].

2	In the Files Of Type box, click Backup Files.

3	Click the name of the folder that contains the document.

4	Click  [image].

5	Click the name of the backup copy.

6	Click Open.


Naming documents

To make it easier to find your documents, you can use long, descriptive filenames. The complete path to the file, including drive letter, server name, folder path, and filename, can contain up to 218 characters. Filenames cannot include any of the following characters: forward slash (/), backslash (\), greater-than sign (>), less-than sign (<), asterisk (*), question mark (?), quotation mark ("), pipe symbol (|), colon (:), or semicolon (;).


What is a workspace file?

A workspace file saves the settings of the workbooks you have open, including their size, arrangement, and position on the screen. The workspace file does not contain the workbooks themselves. The size and position of the application window is saved every time you quit Microsoft Excel. You can open a group of workbooks in one step if you've first saved a workspace file.


Create and save a workspace file

1	Open the workbooks you want to save in your workspace file.

2	Position the open workbooks as you want them to appear.

3	On the File menu, click Save Workspace.

4	In the File Name box, enter the filename you want.

Tip   If you save your workspace file in the Microsoft Excel startup folder, the workspace file will open the workbooks — appearing the way you've specified — each time you start Microsoft Excel. The startup folder is named XLSTART and is located in the folder where you installed Microsoft Excel. Save only the workspace file, not the workbook files, in the startup folder.


Using a data table to project figures

You can use a data table to see how changing certain values in your formulas affects the results of the formulas on your worksheet. Data tables provide a shortcut for calculating all changes in one operation — and they make it easier to perform what-if analysis by showing the results of all changes together on your worksheet.


Effect of changing a single variable in a formula

You can use a one-input data table to show how changes in one variable affect one or more formulas on your worksheet — for example, how changes in interest rates affect a monthly mortgage payment. Using a data table, you can enter the different interest rates as input values in the same formula you use to calculate the monthly mortgage payment.


Speed up calculation of a worksheet containing a data table

1	To control when tables are calculated, click Options on the Tools menu.

2	Click the Calculation tab, and then click Automatic Except Tables.

Tip   When you're ready to calculate the table, click Calc Now [F9] on the Calculation tab.


Fill in a one-variable, column-oriented data table

1	In a single column, type the list of values you want to substitute in the input cell on your worksheet.

2	In the row above the first value and one cell to the right of the column of values, type the formula for the input cell.

3	In the same row, type additional formulas to the right of the first formula.

4	Select the range of cells that contains the formulas and values you want to substitute.

5	On the Data menu, click Table.

6	In the Column Input Cell box, enter the cell reference for the input cell.


Fill in a one-variable, row-oriented data table

1	In a single row, type the list of values you want to substitute in the input cell on your worksheet.

2	In the column to the left of the first value and one cell below the row of values, type the formula for the input cell.

3	In the same column, type additional formulas below the first formula.

4	Select the range of cells that contains the formulas and values you want to substitute.

5	On the Data menu, click Table.

6	In the Row Input Cell box, enter the cell reference for the input cell.


Add a formula to an existing data table

1	Type the new formulas in the blank cells below or to the right of the existing formulas or values.

2	Select the range of cells that contains all of the formulas and input values.

3	On the Data menu, click Table.

4	If the input values are in a column, enter the reference for the input cell in the Column Input Cell box.

If the input values are in a row, enter the reference for the input cell in the Row Input Cell box.

Note   You can add as many formulas and input values as you want; however, each formula must refer to the same input cell.


Fill in a two-variable data table

You can use a two-input data table to see how changes in two variables affect one formula.

1	In a cell on your worksheet, type the formula that refers to the substituted values in the two input cells.

2	Type one set of input values below the formula, and type a second set to the right of the formula.

3	Select the range of cells that contains the formula and both the row and column of values.

4	On the Data menu, click Table.

5	In the Row Input Cell box, enter the reference for the input cell that you want the row of values substituted for.

6	In the Column Input Cell box, enter the reference for the input cell that you want the column of values substituted for.

Note   You can use multiple values for each of the two variables, but you can use only one formula. The formula must refer directly or indirectly to the input cells.


Enter initial values for a data table

1	Enter the values you want in the blank cells adjacent to your formulas — either in the column to the left of the formulas if the formulas are in a row, or in the row above the formulas if the formulas are in a column.

2	Select the entire table, including all formulas and input values.

3	On the Data menu, click Table.

4	For a one-input table, enter the reference for the input cell — either in the Row Input Cell box if you entered values in a row, or in the Column Input Cell box if you entered values in a column.

For a two-input table, enter references for both the row and column input cells.


Clear resulting values from a data table

1	Select all resulting values in the data table.

2	On the Edit menu, point to Clear, and then click Contents.

Note   Because resulting values are in an array, you must clear all values; you cannot clear individual values. Unless you want to clear the entire data table, make sure that you do not select all formulas and input values.


Clear an entire data table

1	Select the entire data table, including all formulas, input values, and resulting values.

2	On the Edit menu, point to Clear, and then click Contents.


Convert resulting data table values to constant values

1	Select all resulting values in the data table.

2	On the Edit menu, click Copy.

3	On the Edit menu, click Paste Special.

4	Under Paste, click Values.

Note   Because the resulting values are in an array, you must convert all of the values to constant values; you cannot convert individual values.


Seek a specific solution to a formula

1	To find a specific value for a cell by adjusting the value of one other cell, click Goal Seek on the Tools menu.

2	In the Set Cell box, enter the reference for the cell that contains the formula you want to find a solution for.

3	In the To Value box, type the result you want.

4	In the By Changing Cell box, enter the reference for the cell that contains the value you want to adjust.

Tip   You can also perform goal seeking graphically by dragging data points in a chart. For more information about using Goal Seek in charts, click  [image].


Create a scenario summary report

1	On the Tools menu, click Scenarios.

2	Click Summary.

3	Click Scenario Summary or Scenario PivotTable.

4	In the Result Cells box, enter the references for the cells that contain the significant results of each scenario — separating multiple references with commas.

Note   You don't need result cells to generate a scenario summary report, but you do need them for a scenario PivotTable report.


Scenario Manager

You can use Scenario Manager to create sets of values, contained in changing cells, to use in a scenario. Each scenario represents a set of what-if assumptions you can use to forecast the outcome of a worksheet model.

Using Scenario Manager, you can:

•	Create multiple scenarios, with up to 32 sets of changing cells for each scenario.

•	Name, save, and view the results of scenarios on your worksheet.

•	Create a summary report of input values and results.

•	Merge scenarios from a group into a single model.

•	Protect scenarios from modification.

•	Hide scenarios.

•	Automatically track scenario modifications.


Create a scenario

1	On the Tools menu, click Scenarios.

2	Click Add.

3	In the Scenario Name box, type a name for your scenario.

4	In the Changing Cells box, enter the references for the cells that you want to modify.

5	Under Protection, select the options that you want.

6	In the Scenario Values dialog box, type the values you want for the changing cells.

Tip   Any cell that contains data can be a changing cell. The names you give these cells appear in related dialog boxes and reports.


Display a scenario

1	On the Tools menu, click Scenarios.

2	Click the name of the scenario you want to display.

3	Click Show.

Tip   You can also use the Scenarios box on the WorkGroup toolbar to display scenarios.


Edit a scenario

1	On the Tools menu, click Scenarios.

2	Click the name of the scenario you want to edit, and then click Edit.

3	Make the changes you want. If you keep the original name of a scenario, the new values for changing cells replace the values in the original scenario.

4	In the Scenario Values dialog box, type the values you want for the changing cells.

5	To save your changes, click OK.

To return to the Scenario Manager dialog box without changing the current scenario, click Cancel.

Tip   You can also use the Scenarios box on the WorkGroup toolbar to edit scenarios.


Delete a scenario

1	On the Tools menu, click Scenarios.

2	Click the name of the Scenario you want to delete, and then click Delete.


Merge scenarios

1	Open all of the workbooks that contain scenarios you want to merge.

2	On the Tools menu, click Scenarios.

3	Click Merge.

4	In the Book box, click a workbook name.

5	In the Sheet box, click the names of the worksheets that contain the scenarios you want to merge. All changing cells on the source sheets must refer to the corresponding changing cells on the active sheet. Microsoft Excel copies all scenarios on the source sheets to the active sheet.

Tip   It is easier to merge scenarios when all what-if models in the workbooks are identical.


Protect a scenario from unwanted changes

1	On the Tools menu, click Scenarios.

2	Click the name of the scenario you want to protect or hide from display.

3	Click Edit.

4	To prevent others from making changes to your scenarios, select the Prevent Changes check box.

To remove a scenario from the list in the Scenario Manager dialog box, select the Hide check box.

5	Click OK, click Cancel, and then click Close.

6	On the Tools menu, point to Protection, and then click Protect Sheet.

7	Select the Scenarios check box.

Note   You can add scenarios when sheet protection is activated, but you cannot edit or delete them until you clear the Prevent Changes check box in the Edit Scenario dialog box. Unless the cells are locked, you can still edit the values in changing cells directly on the worksheet.


Save changing cell values in Solver as a scenario

1	In the Solver Results dialog box, click Save Scenario.

2	In the Scenario Name box, type a name for the scenario.

Tip   To create a scenario without saving the Solver solution or displaying the results on your worksheet, save the scenario in the Solver Results dialog box, and then click Restore Original Values.


Troubleshoot what-if problems

What do you want to do?

Speed up calculation of a worksheet containing a data table.

Convert resulting data table values to constant values.

Clear resulting values from a data table.

Clear an entire data table.

Protect a scenario from unwanted changes.


Control how links are updated in Microsoft Excel

You can update links automatically or prevent links from being updated by locking them. You can lock individual links or all of the links in a workbook. When you lock a link, Microsoft Excel uses the last value from the source application.

What do you want to do?

Automatically update links to other applications when performing calculations

Change the way a link is updated

Update a manual link

Lock all links in Microsoft Excel

Lock the remote reference portion of a larger formula


Automatically update links to other applications when performing calculations

1	On the Edit menu, click Links.

2	Next to Update, select the Automatic check box.

3	Click OK.

4	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Calculation tab.

5	Select the Update Remote References check box.


Lock all links in Microsoft Excel

1	Switch to the worksheet containing the links.

2	On the Tools menu, click Options.

3	On the Calculation tab, clear the Update Remote References check box.

Note   Locking all links overrides the Automatic option (for all links) in the Links dialog box.


Creating links to applications not on your computer

If you cannot use the Copy and Paste Special commands to create a link, you can create a link to specific data in other applications by entering a remote reference formula. The formula has three parts: the name of the application; the document name or topic; and the cell range, value, field, or data that's referred to. The following illustration shows the parts of a remote reference formula and the separators used.

If the name of the application, document, topic, or data is not a valid name, or if it resembles a cell reference, enclose it within single quotation marks.


Lock the remote reference portion of a larger formula

When you use remote reference formulas to retrieve data from other applications, that data is updated automatically in Microsoft Excel whenever it is changed in the other application. When you lock the data, you disconnect the link and the current value is displayed.

1	Select the cell containing the remote reference you want to lock.

2	In the formula bar, select the remote reference part of the formula.

3	Press F9.

4	Press ENTER.


Creating a picture of a chart or cell

To make graphic copies of data or embedded objects, convert them into pictures. Pictures can be moved and placed anywhere on your worksheet. When you create a picture of a chart, the chart is no longer linked to the source data. Pictures of cells, however, can be linked to the source data so that they are updated automatically whenever you update the source data.

Any picture you create can be formatted as either a bitmap or a picture. When you create a picture, you can display the item either as it appears on the screen or as it will appear when printed.


 Create pictures of cells and objects

Pictures are graphical copies of data or embedded objects. You can create a picture of cells so that the picture is updated automatically whenever you update the source data.

What do you want to do?

Create a picture of cells and retain links to the source data

Create a picture of a chart, cells,or an object


Create a picture of cells and retain links to the source data

1	On the worksheet, select the cells you want to make into a picture.

2	On the Edit menu, click Copy.

3	Click the location where you want to paste the picture.

4	While holding down SHIFT, click Paste Picture Link on the Edit menu.


Create a picture of a chart, cells, or an object

1	On the worksheet, select the cells you want to make into a picture.

2	While holding down SHIFT, click Copy Picture on the Edit menu.

3	Select the options you want under Appearance and Format, and then click OK.

4	Click where you want to paste the picture.

5	On the Edit menu, click Paste.

Tip   When you copy a picture of cells, the gridlines are also copied if they are displayed on the screen. To avoid copying the gridlines, before you copy the cells, click Options on the Tools menu, click the View tab, and then clear the Gridlines check box.


Reconnect a link in Microsoft Excel when the source file moves or is renamed

1	Switch to the worksheet containing the links.

2	On the Edit menu, click Links.

3	In the Source File box, click the link that has changed location or name.

4	Click Change Source.

5	In the Change Links To box, edit the path or name of the link.


Break a link in Microsoft Excel

1	On the worksheet, select the link.

2	In the formula bar, select all of the text.

3	Press DELETE.


Workbooks and worksheets

In Microsoft Excel, a workbook is the file in which you work and store your data. Because each workbook can contain many sheets, you can organize various kinds of related information in a single file.

Worksheets are for listing and analyzing data. You can enter and edit data on several worksheets simultaneously and perform calculations based on data from multiple worksheets. You can add chart sheets to chart your worksheet data, and modules to create and store macros for special tasks you want to perform in the workbook.

The names of the sheets appear on tabs at the bottom of the workbook window. To move from sheet to sheet, you click the sheet tabs. The name of the active sheet is always bold. You can rename the sheets, add and delete sheets, and move or copy sheets within a workbook or to another workbook.


Select cells of a worksheet

Before you can carry out most commands or tasks in Microsoft Excel, you must select the cells you want to work with. To select related data quickly, you can select the range of data contiguous with the active cell. To avoid selecting items contained in hidden rows and columns, you can select only visible cells. You can also quickly select cell ranges identified by names or cell references.

What do you want to do?

Select one or more cells, entire rows and columns, or all cells on a sheet

Select a range of data contiguous with the active cell

Select only visible cells, skipping hidden rows and columns

Select cell ranges identified by names or cell references


Select a range of contiguous data

Use this procedure to select the block of filled-in data that includes the active cell.

1	Click any cell in the range of data.

2	On the Edit menu, click Go To.

3	Click Special, and then click Current Region.

Tip  To select a range of contiguous data in a row or column, click the first or last cell in the range. Then hold down SHIFT and double-click the side of the active cell in the direction that you want to select. For example, to select the range of filled cells above the active cell, double-click the top of the cell. Note that the selection extends only to the next blank cell in the row or column.


Go to and select specific ranges or cells

To select	Do this
A named range of cells	Select the range from the Name box.
Two or more named ranges	Select the first range from the Name box. Then hold down CTRL and select the other ranges.
Specific cells not in a named range	On the Edit menu, click Go To. In the Reference box, type the cell reference for the cell or range of cells.
Tip   Microsoft Excel keeps track of the last four ranges you selected by using the Name box or the Go To command. To return to a previous selection, click Go To on the Edit menu and then double-click the cell reference in the Go To list.


Move and scroll within a worksheet

To move between cells of a worksheet, click any cell. Clicking a cell makes it the active cell. To bring a different area of the sheet into view, use the scroll bars.

To scroll	Do this
One row up or down	Click the arrows in the vertical scroll bar.
One column left or right	Click the arrows in the horizontal scroll bar.
One window up or down	Click above or below the scroll box in the vertical scroll bar.
One window left or right	Click to the left or right of the scroll box in the horizontal scroll bar.
A large distance	Drag the scroll box to the approximate relative position.
Tip  The position of a scroll box indicates the relative location of the displayed area within the worksheet, including unused rows and columns. To have the position reflect only the filled-in part of a worksheet, delete the unused rows and columns.


Switch to another sheet in a workbook

•	Click the sheet tab for the sheet you want to work on.

If you don't see the tab you want, click the tab scrolling buttons to display the tab. Then click the tab.

Tip   If your workbook contains many sheets, use the right mouse button to click the tab scrolling buttons. Then click the sheet you want.


Display more or fewer sheet tabs

•	To display more sheet tabs, drag the tab split bar to the right.

To display fewer sheet tabs, drag the tab split bar to the left.

To display the default number of sheet tabs, double-click the tab split bar.


Select cells, rows, and columns

To select	Do this
A single cell	Click the cell, or press the arrow keys to move to the cell.
A range of cells	Click the first cell of the range, and then drag to the last.
Nonadjacent cells or cell ranges	Select the first cell or range of cells, and then hold down CTRL and select the other cells or ranges.
A large range of cells	Click the first cell in the range, and then hold down SHIFT and click the last cell in the range. You can scroll to make the last cell visible.
An entire row	Click the row heading.
An entire column	Click the column heading.
Adjacent rows or  columns	Drag across the row or column headings. Or select the first row or column; then hold down SHIFT and select the last row or column.
Nonadjacent rows or columns	Select the first row or column, and then hold down CTRL and select the other rows or columns.
All cells of a worksheet	Click the button at the upper-left corner of the worksheet where the row and column headings intersect.
More or fewer cells than currently selected	Hold down SHIFT and click the last cell you want to include in the new selection. The rectangular range between the active cell and the cell you click becomes the new selection.


Select sheets in a workbook

To select	Do this
A single sheet	Click the sheet tab.
Two or more adjacent sheets	Click the tab for the first sheet, and then hold down SHIFT and click the tab for the last sheet.
Two or more nonadjacent sheets	Click the tab for the first sheet, and then hold down CTRL and click the tabs for the other sheets.
All sheets in a workbook	Point to a sheet tab and click the right mouse button. Then click Select All Sheets on the shortcut menu.


Select only visible cells

Use this procedure to select a range that crosses hidden rows or columns but does not include the hidden cells in the selection.

1	Select the cells.

2	On the Edit menu, click Go To.

3	Click the Special button.

4	Click Visible Cells Only.


Cancel a selection

•	To cancel a selection of cells on a worksheet, click any cell.

•	To cancel a selection of multiple sheets in a workbook, click any unselected sheet.

If no unselected sheet is visible, use the right mouse button to click the tab of a selected sheet. Then click Ungroup Sheets on the shortcut menu.


Troubleshoot selecting and moving in a workbook

What do you want help with?

The sheets in my workbook aren't listed at the bottom of the screen.

Arrow keys don't work to select cells.

I want to scroll using keys but not select any cells.

More than one sheet is selected. How do I select just one?

I want to select more or fewer cells without canceling my original selection.


I want to select more or fewer cells without canceling my original selection.

Hold down SHIFT and click the last cell you want to include in the new selection. The rectangular range between the active cell and the cell you click becomes the new selection.

To select additional nonadjacent cells or cell ranges, hold down CTRL and click or drag over the additional cells.


The sheets in my workbook aren't listed at the bottom of the screen.

To display the sheet tabs, click Options on the Tools menu. On the View tab, select the Sheet Tabs check box.


Arrow keys don't work to select cells.

Make sure scroll lock is off.


I want to scroll using keys but not select any cells.

Make sure scroll lock is on.


More than one sheet is selected. How do I select just one?

Cancel the selection of the group of sheets. Then click the sheet you want. For more information, click  [image].


Define and solve a problem using Solver

1	On the Tools menu, click Solver. If the Solver command is not on the Tools menu, you need to install the Solver add-in.

How?

2	In the Set Target Cell box, type a cell reference or name for the target cell.

3	To have the value of the target cell be as large as possible, click Max.

To have the value of the target cell be as small as possible, click Min.

To have the target cell be a certain value, click Value Of and then type the value in the box.

4	In the By Changing Cells box, type a name or reference for each changing cell, separating multiple references with commas.

To have Solver automatically propose the changing cells based on the target cell, click Guess.

5	In the Subject To The Constraints box, enter any constraints you want to apply.

6	Click Solve.

7	To keep the solution values on the worksheet, click Keep Solver Solution in the Solver Results dialog box.

To restore the original data, click Restore Original Values.

Tip   You can interrupt the solution process by pressing ESC. The worksheet is recalculated with the last values found for the changing cells.

For more information about options in the Solver Parameters dialog box, click  [image].

For more information about options in the Solver Results dialog box, click  [image].


Create a report using Solver

1	Solve a problem.

How?

2	In the Reports box, click the report you want to create. To select more than one report, hold down CTRL as you click the reports.

For more information about the three types of reports you can create, click  [image].


Add a constraint in Solver

1	On the Tools menu, click Solver.

2	Click Add.

3	In the Cell Reference box, type the reference or name of the cell range whose value you want to constrain.

4	Click the relationship (<=, =, >=, or Int) that you want between the referenced cell and the constraint. If you click Int, "integer" appears in the Constraint box.

5	In the Constraint box, type a number, a cell reference or name, or a formula.

6	To accept the constraint and add another, click Add.

To accept the constraint and return to the Solver Parameters dialog box, click OK.

Note   You can specify up to 500 constraints — one upper limit and one lower limit for each changing cell, plus 100 additional constraints — however, you can apply constraints to no more than 1000 cells.

For more information about options in the Add Constraint dialog box, click  [image].


Change a constraint in Solver

1	On the Tools menu, click Solver.

2	In the Subject To The Constraints box, click the constraint that you want to change.

3	Click Change, and then make the changes you want.

For information about options in the Change Constraint dialog box, click  [image].


Delete a constraint in Solver

1	On the Tools menu, click Solver.

2	In the Subject To The Constraints box, click the constraint that you want to delete.

3	Click Delete.


Save a problem model using Solver

1	Define a problem.

How?

2	On the Tools menu, click Solver.

3	Click Options.

4	Click Save Model.

5	Enter the reference for the first cell of a vertical range of empty cells in which you want to place the problem model.

Tip   You can click Save on the File menu to save the last selections in the Solver Parameters dialog box with your worksheet. You can also define more than one problem for a worksheet by using the Save Model button to individually save problems.

For more information about the Save Model dialog box, click  [image].


Load a problem model using Solver

Before loading a problem, you must have previously saved a model.

1	On the Tools menu, click Solver.

2	Click Options.

3	Click Load Model.

4	Enter the reference for the entire range of cells that contains the problem model.

For more information about the Load Model dialog box, click  [image].


Set Solver solution time and iterations

1	On the Tools menu, click Solver.

2	Click Options.

3	In the Max Time box, enter the number of seconds that you want to limit the solution time.

4	In the Iterations box, enter the maximum number of iterations that you want to make.

Note   If the solution process reaches the maximum time or number of iterations, the Show Trial Solution dialog box appears.

For more information about options in the Show Trial Solution dialog box, click  [image].


Set the degree of precision in Solver

1	On the Tools menu, click Solver.

2	Click Options.

3	In the Precision box, enter the degree of precision that you want — the smaller the number, the higher the precision.

For more information about the Solver Options dialog box, click  [image].


Set the integer tolerance in Solver

1	On the Tools menu, click Solver.

2	Click Options.

3	In the Tolerance box, enter the tolerance that you want.

For more information about the Solver Options dialog box, click  [image].


Reset Solver settings

1	On the Tools menu, click Solver.

2	Click Reset All.


Step through Solver trial solutions

1	Define a problem.

How?

2	In the Solver Parameters dialog box, click Options.

3	To see the values of each trial solution, select the Show Iteration Results check box, click OK, and then click Solve.

Solver enters the values for the first trial solution on the worksheet and displays the Show Trial Solution dialog box.

4	To stop the solution process and display the Solver Results dialog box, click Stop.

To continue the solution process and display the next trial solution, click Continue.


Solver completion messages

When Solver reaches a solution, it displays one of these two messages in the Solver Results dialog box:

•	Solver found a solution. All constraints and optimality conditions are satisfied.

All constraints within the precision setting are satisfied and, when appropriate, a maximum or minimum value has been found for the target cell.

•	Solver has converged to the current solution. All constraints are satisfied.

The value for the target cell is virtually unchanged for the last five trial solutions. A solution might have been found, or it might be that the iterative solution process is progressing slowly.

When Solver is unable to reach an optimal solution, it displays one of the following messages in the Solver Results dialog box:

•	Solver cannot improve the current solution. All constraints are satisfied.

Only an approximate solution has been found, but the iterative process cannot find a better set of values than those displayed. Either further accuracy is not achievable or the precision setting is too low. Try changing the precision setting to a larger number, and then run the problem again.

•	Stop chosen when the maximum time limit was reached.

The maximum amount of time has elapsed without finding a satisfactory solution. To save the values found so far and also save future recalculation time, click Keep Solver Solution or Save Scenario.

•	Stop chosen when the maximum iteration limit was reached.

The maximum number of iterations has been reached without finding a satisfactory solution. Increasing the number of iterations might help, but you should examine the final values for insights into the problem. To save the values found so far and also save future recalculation time, click Keep Solver Solution or Save Scenario.

•	The Set Target Cell values do not converge.

The value for the target cell is increasing (or decreasing) without bound, even though all constraints are satisfied. You might have omitted one or more constraints in setting up the problem. Check the current worksheet values to see how the solution is diverging, check the constraints, and then run the problem again.

•	Solver could not find a feasible solution.

Solver was unable to find a trial solution that satisfies all constraints within the precision setting. It is likely that the constraints are inconsistent. Examine the worksheet for a possible mistake in the constraint formulas or in the choice of constraints.

•	Solver stopped at user's request.

You clicked the Stop button in the Show Trial Solution dialog box either after interrupting the solution process, or when stepping through trial solutions.

•	The conditions for Assume Linear Model are not satisfied.

You selected the Assume Linear Model check box, but the final calculation yields values that do not agree with the linear model. The solution is not valid for the actual worksheet formulas. Clear the Assume Linear Model check box, and then run the problem again.

•	Solver encountered an error value in a target or constraint cell.

One or more formulas yielded an error value on the latest calculation. Find the target or constraint cell containing the error and modify its formula to yield an appropriate numeric value.

You typed "integer" in the Constraint box in the Add Constraint dialog box. This tells Solver that the number must be a whole number or zero. To constrain a value to an integer, click Int in the list of comparison operators in the Add Constraint dialog box.

•	There is not enough memory available to solve the problem.

Microsoft Excel couldn't allocate the memory needed by Solver. Close some files or applications and try again.

•	Another Excel instance is using SOLVER.DLL.

More than one Microsoft Excel session is running, with one session using Solver.dll.


Solving for a value to maximize another value

Use Solver to determine the maximum value of one cell by changing another cell — for example, the maximum profit you can generate by changing advertising expenditures. The two cells you select must be related through formulas on the worksheet. If not related, changing one will not change the other.

Note   The Solverex.xls workbook — included with Microsoft Excel — demonstrates Solver features, including how to solve for one value to maximize or minimize another value.

For more information about Solver workbooks, click  [image].


Solver sample worksheets

Microsoft Excel includes workbooks in the Examples\Solver folder that demonstrate features in Solver (Solverex.xls) and the types of problems you can solve (Solvsamp.xls).

You can open Solverex.xls and find out how to solve for values to maximize or minimize another value, how to enter and change constraints, and how to save a problem model.

You can use the sample worksheets in Solvsamp.xls to help you set up your problems. To use any of the six worksheets — Product Mix, Shipping Routes, Staff Scheduling, Maximizing Income, Portfolio of Securities, and Engineering Design — open the workbook, switch to the worksheet you want to use, and then click Solver on the Tools menu. The target cell, changing cells, and constraints for the worksheet are already specified.


Troubleshoot problems using Solver

What do you need help with?

Solver stops before a solution is found.

I received a message that the set cell must be a cell on the active sheet.

My changing cells and target cells differ in magnitude.

When do I start from different Initial solutions?

Solver completion messages.


Solver Parameters dialog box

Set Target Cell

Specifies the target cell that you want to set to a certain value or that you want to maximize or minimize.

Equal To

Specifies whether you want the target cell to be maximized, minimized, or set to a certain value.

By Changing Cells

Specifies the cells that can be adjusted until the constraints in the problem are satisfied and the cell in the Set Target Cell box reaches its target.

Guess

Guesses all nonformula cells referred to by the formula in the Set Target Cell box, and places their references in the By Changing Cells box.

Subject To The Constraints

Lists the current restrictions on the problem.

Add

Displays the Add Constraint dialog box.

Change

Displays the Change Constraint dialog box.

Delete

Removes the selected constraint.

Solve

Starts the solution process for the defined problem.

Close

Closes the dialog box without solving the problem. Retains changes made with the Options, Add, Change, or Delete buttons; does not retain changes made after using these buttons.

Options

Displays the Solver Options dialog box, where you can load and save problem models and control advanced features of the solution process.

Reset All

Clears the current problem settings and resets all options to their defaults.


Add Constraint dialog box

Cell Reference

Specifies the cell or range of cells whose values you want to constrain.

Constraint

Specifies the restriction you want placed on the contents of the Cell Reference box. Select the relationship you want (<=, =, >=, or Int) between the referenced cell and the constraint, and then enter the constraint — a number, cell or range reference, or formula — in the box to the right.

Add

Click to add another constraint without returning to the Solver Parameters dialog box.


 Change Constraint dialog box

Cell Reference

Specifies the cell or range of cells whose values you want to constrain.

Constraint

Specifies a restriction on the contents of the Cell Reference box. Select the relationship that you want to change (<=, =, >=, or Int), and then enter the constraint — a number, cell or range reference, or formula — in the box to the right.

Add

Click to change another constraint without returning to the Solver Parameters dialog box.


Solver Results dialog box

Displays a completion message and the resulting values that are nearest the solution you want. For more information about Solver completion messages, click  [image].

Keep Solver Solution

Click to accept the solution and place the resulting values in the adjustable cells.

Restore Original Values

Click to restore the original values in the adjustable cells.

Save Scenario

Opens the Save Scenario dialog box, where you can save your problem for use with the Microsoft Excel Scenario Manager. For more information about the Save Scenario dialog box, click  [image].

Reports

Creates the type of report you specify, placing each on a separate sheet in the workbook.

Answer

Lists the target cell and the adjustable cells with their original and final values, constraints, and information about the constraints.

Sensitivity

Provides information about how sensitive the solution is to small changes in the Set Target Cell formula or the constraints.

Limits

Lists the target cell and the adjustable cells with their respective values, lower and upper limits, and target values.


Save Scenario dialog box

You can save your problem to use with the Microsoft Excel Scenario Manager. If you have not defined a scenario, the Scenario Manager uses the reference in the By Changing Cells box.

Scenario Name

Type a name for the scenario that you want to save.


Solver Options dialog box

You can control advanced features of the solution process, load or save problem definitions, and define parameters for both linear and nonlinear problems. Each option has a default setting that is appropriate for most problems.

Max Time

Limits the time taken by the solution process. While you can enter a value as high as 32,767, the default value of 100 (seconds) is adequate for most small problems.

Iterations

Limits the time taken by the solution process by limiting the number of interim calculations. While you can enter a value as high as 32,767, the default value of 100 is adequate for most small problems.

Precision

Controls the precision of solutions by using the number you enter to determine whether the value of a constraint cell meets a target or satisfies a lower or upper bound. Precision must be indicated by a fractional number between 0 (zero) and 1. Lower precision is indicated when the number you enter has fewer decimal places — for example, 0.0001. The higher the precision, the more time it will take to reach a solution. Specifying a trial value that is close to the solution speeds up the solution process.

Tolerance

Represents an allowable percentage of error in the optimal solution when the constraint used on the problem is an integer. A higher tolerance tends to speed up the solution process.

Assume Linear Model

Speeds the solution process when all relationships in the model are linear and you are solving either a linear optimization problem or a linear approximation to a nonlinear problem.

Show Iteration Results

Interrupts Solver to show the results of each iteration.

Use Automatic Scaling

Turns on automatic scaling for use when inputs and outputs have large differences in magnitude — for example, when maximizing the percentage of profit based on million-dollar investments.

Estimates

Specifies the approach used — Tangent or Quadratic — to obtain initial estimates of the basic variables in each one-dimensional search.

Tangent

Uses linear extrapolation from a tangent vector.

Quadratic

Uses quadratic extrapolation, which can improve the results on highly nonlinear problems.

Derivatives

Specifies the differencing used — Forward or Central — to estimate partial derivatives of the objective and constraint functions.

Forward

Use with functions whose graphical representations are smooth and continuous.

Central

Use with functions whose graphical representations are not smooth and continuous. Although this option requires more calculations, using it might help when Solver returns a message that it could not improve the solution.

Search

Specifies the algorithm used at each iteration — Newton or Conjugate — to determine the direction to search.

Newton

Uses a quasi-Newton method that typically requires more memory but fewer iterations than the conjugate method.

Conjugate

Requires less memory than the Newton method, but typically more iterations to reach a particular level of accuracy. Try this option when you have a large problem and memory usage is a concern, or when stepping through iterations reveals slow progress.

Load Model

Displays the Load Model dialog box, where you can specify the reference for the model you want to load.

Save Model

Displays the Save Model dialog box, where you can specify where to save the model. Click only when you want to save more than one model with your worksheet — the first model is automatically saved.


Load Model dialog box

Select Model Area

Displays the reference for the model you want to load. The reference must be for the entire range that contains the model — not just the first cell of the range.


Save Model dialog box

Select Model Area

Displays the default selection — based on the active cell — as the area for saving the problem model. The suggested range includes a cell for each constraint plus three additional cells.

You can also enter a reference for the upper-left cell of the vertical range in which you want the model to appear.


Install Solver

1	On the Tools menu, click Add-Ins. If Solver is not listed in the Add-Ins dialog box, click Browse and locate the drive, folder, and filename for the add-in — or run the Setup program.

2	In the Add-Ins dialog box, select the Solver Add-In check box.


Solver stops before a solution is found.

Solver might stop before reaching a solution for any of the following reasons:

•	You interrupted the solution process.

•	You clicked Stop while stepping through iterations or when the maximum time or number of iterations was reached.

•	The Assume Linear Model option is selected, but the problem is nonlinear.

•	The Set Target Cell value is increasing or decreasing without limit.

•	You need to adjust the Max Time, Iterations, or Tolerance settings.

•	You need to select the Use Automatic Scaling check box because some input values are several orders of magnitude apart, or input and output values differ by several orders of magnitude.

When Solver stops, a completion message appears in the Solver Results dialog box. Click Keep Solver Solution or Restore Original Values, make the changes you want, and then try again. For more information, about Solver completion messages, click  [image].


Show Trial Solution dialog box

Save Scenario

Displays the Save Scenario dialog box, where you can save your problem to use with the Microsoft Excel Scenario Manager.

Continue

Continues the solution process.

Stop

Displays the Solver Results dialog box without completing the solution.


Solver reports

Answer

Lists the target cell and the adjustable cells, with their original and final values, constraints, and information about the constraints.

Sensitivity

Provides information about how sensitive the solution is to small changes in the Set Target Cell formula or the constraints. For nonlinear models, the report provides values for reduced gradients and Lagrange multipliers. For linear models, the report includes reduced costs, shadow prices, objective coefficient (with allowable increase and decrease), and constraint right-hand side ranges.

Limits

Lists the target cell and the adjustable cells, with their respective values, lower and upper limits, and target values. The lower limit is the smallest value that the adjustable cell can take while holding all other adjustable cells fixed and still satisfying the constraints. The upper limit is the greatest value.


Algorithm used by Solver

Microsoft Excel Solver uses the Generalized Reduced Gradient (GRG2) nonlinear optimization code developed by Leon Lasdon, University of Texas at Austin, and Allan Waren, Cleveland State University.

Linear and integer problems use the simplex method with bounds on the variables, and the branch-and-bound method, implemented by John Watson and Dan Fylstra, Frontline Systems, Inc. For more information on the internal solution process used by Solver, contact:

Frontline Systems, Inc.
PO Box 4288
Incline Village, NV 89450-4288
(702) 831-0300

Portions of the Microsoft Excel Solver program code are copyright 1990, 1991, and 1992 by Frontline Systems, Inc. Portions are copyright 1989 by Optimal Methods, Inc.


I received a message that the set cell must be a cell on the active sheet.

This message occurs when you use Solver on a worksheet whose filename contains an apostrophe — for example, Tax'95.xls. Rename the document so that the filename does not contain an apostrophe — for example, Taxes1995.


My changing cells and target cells differ in magnitude.

When changing cells differ from the target cell by more than one order of magnitude, select the Use Automatic Scaling check box in the Solver Options dialog box. Before clicking Solve, make sure that the initial values of the changing cells are the same order of magnitude as those expected for the final values.


When do I start from different initial solutions?

If Solver finds a solution that is significantly different from what you expected, try rerunning the problem with different starting values for the changing cells. Setting these cells to values that you suspect are close to optimal can reduce the solution time — especially when you have applied integer constraints or selected the Use Automatic Scaling option.


Sort a list

You can sort rows in a list based on values in a single column or on several columns. You can also sort columns based on rows, if your list is set up that way. When you sort, Microsoft Excel rearranges rows, columns, or individual cells using the column and sort order that you specify.

What do you want to do?

Sort rows in ascending order by one column

Sort rows in descending order by one column

Sort rows by two or three columns

Sort rows by four or more columns

Sort columns from left to right


Sort rows by two or three columns

For best results, your list should have column labels. If you're sorting outlined data, click  [image]  for more information.

1	Click a cell in the list that you want to sort.

2	On the Data menu, click Sort.

3	Select the sort options you want.

Note   When you sort by more than one column, the rows with duplicate items in the first column are sorted according to the second column you specify. The rows with duplicate items in the second column are sorted according to the third column you specify.


Sort rows by four or more columns

You can sort up to three columns at a time. To sort a list by four or more columns, sort the list repeatedly. Start with the least important columns, and then work up to the more important columns. If you're sorting outlined data, click  [image]  for more information.

1	Select a cell or range in the list you want to sort.

2	On the Data menu, click Sort.

3	In the Sort By and Then By boxes, select the three least important columns.

4	Select any other sort options you want, and then click OK.

5	Repeat steps 2 through 4, using the next most important columns.

Note   When you sort by more than one column, the rows with duplicate items in the first column are sorted according to the second column you specify. Rows with duplicate items in the second column are sorted according to the third column you specify, and so on.


Sort columns from left to right

Use this procedure only if your list has been created with headings to the left of your data in a column instead of on top of your data in a row. If you're sorting outlined data, click  [image]  for more information.

1	Click a cell in the list you want to sort.

2	On the Data menu, click Sort.

3	Click Options.

4	Under Orientation, click Sort Left To Right, and then click OK.

5	Select any other sort options you want.


Create a custom sort order

1	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Custom Lists tab.

2	Under Custom Lists, click New List.

3	Under List Entries, type the first item in the sort order you want to create, and then press ENTER.

4	Type the rest of the list items you want to create.

5	Click Add.


Apply a custom sort order

1	Select a cell or range in the list you want to sort.

2	On the Data menu, click Sort.

3	Click Options.

4	Under First Key Sort Order, select the custom sort order you want, and then click OK.

5	Select any other sort options you want.

Note   A custom sort order applies only to the column you specify in the Sort By box. To use a custom sort order when sorting multiple columns, you need to sort the list based on each column. For example, to sort by columns A and B in that order, sort by column B, and specify the custom sort order using the Sort Options dialog box. Next, sort the list by column A.


Sorting data in an outline

When you sort rows that are part of a worksheet outline, the highest-level groups (level 1) are sorted so that the detail rows or columns stay together, even if the detail rows or columns are hidden.

If the outline was created by inserting automatic subtotals, hide the detail rows before you sort. Otherwise, Microsoft Excel will sort all rows, not just the summary rows.


Default sort orders

Microsoft Excel uses specific sort orders to arrange data according to the value, not the format, of the data. In an ascending sort, Microsoft Excel uses this order:

•	Numbers are sorted from the smallest negative number to the largest positive number.

•	Text, and text that includes numbers, is sorted in this order:

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ' - (space) ! " # $ % & ( ) * , . / : ; ? @ [ \ ] ^ _ ` { | } ~ + < = > A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

•	In logical values, FALSE is sorted before TRUE.

•	All error values are equal.

•	Blanks are always sorted last.

In a descending sort, Microsoft Excel reverses the order of everything except blank cells, which are always sorted last.

Note   Microsoft Excel will use any custom sort order you select instead of the default sort order.


Troubleshoot sorting problems

If a sort did not produce the results you expected, be sure that:

•	All cells in a column contain the same type of data. You can enter the data as numbers or text, but avoid having a number in one cell and text in the following cell. If you need to combine numbers and text in a column, format the numbers as text. On the Format menu, click Cells, and then click the Number tab. In the Category box, click Text.

•	There are no leading spaces in front of the data. Instead of leading spaces, use the alignment buttons on the Formatting toolbar to adjust alignment.

•	You have the proper country setting in the Regional Settings dialog box in the Windows Control Panel. Sort orders vary by country setting. For information about changing the country setting, see your Windows documentation.


Microsoft Excel for Windows 95 specifications

What do you want to know about?

Application workspace specifications

Worksheet and workbook specifications

Charting specifications


Application workspace specifications

Feature	Specification
Maximum number of custom toolbars	Limited by available memory
Maximum number of custom buttons	Limited by available memory
Maximum number of open documents	Limited by available memory and system resources
Maximum sheet size	16,384 rows by 256 columns
Column width	0 to 255 characters
Row height	0 to 409 points
Maximum length of cell contents (text)	255 characters
Maximum length of formula contents	1024 characters
Maximum number of sheets in a single workbook	Limited by available memory (maximum sheets in default workbook is 255)


Worksheet and workbook specifications

Feature	Specification
Maximum number of scenarios	Limited by available memory, although a summary report shows the first 251 scenarios only
Maximum number of views	Limited by available memory, although the View Manager dialog box lists the first 256 views only
Number precision	15 digits
Largest allowed positive number	9.99999999999999E307
Smallest allowed negative number	-9.99999999999999E307
Smallest allowed positive number	1E-307
Largest allowed negative number	-1E-307
Maximum number of iterations	32,767
Maximum size of worksheet arrays	6553 elements
Maximum number of pivot tables per sheet	Limited by available memory
Maximum number of items per pivot table	256
Maximum number of pages per pivot table	8000
Maximum number of colors per workbook	56
Maximum number of cell styles per workbook	4000
Maximum number of custom number formats	Limited by available memory
Maximum number of selected ranges	2048
Maximum number of names per workbook	Limited by available memory
Maximum number of arguments per function	30
Maximum number of nested levels of functions	7
Number of worksheet functions included	320
Maximum number of custom functions	Limited by available memory
Maximum number of windows per workbook	Limited only by system resources
Maximum number of panes per window	4
Maximum number of linked sheets	Limited by available memory
Zoom range	10% to 400%
Maximum number of named views	Limited by available memory
Maximum number of reports	Limited by available memory
Maximum number of scenarios	Limited by available memory
Maximum number of sort references	3 in a single sort; unlimited using sequential sorts
Maximum number of fields in a data form	32


 Charting specifications

Feature	Specification
Maximum number of charts linked to a worksheet	Limited by available memory
Maximum number of worksheets referred to by a chart	255
Maximum number of data series in one chart	255
Maximum number of data points per data series	4000
Maximum number of data points for all data series in one chart	32,000
Maximum number of fonts in a chart	255
Maximum number of line styles	8
Maximum number of line weights	4
Maximum number of area patterns (screen display)	18
Total area pattern and color combinations (color display)	56,448
Maximum number of pattern and color combinations (color printer)*	56,448
* Actual number depends on your printer and its software.


Open workbooks when Microsoft Excel starts

1	Create or open the workbooks you want to open automatically when you start Microsoft Excel.

2	Save the workbooks in the Xlstart folder.

3	Restart Microsoft Excel.


Control what happens when you start Microsoft Excel

1	In Windows 95, click the shortcut icon for Microsoft Excel using the right mouse button, click Properties, and then click the Shortcut tab.

In Windows NT, click the Microsoft Excel program icon, and then click Properties on the File menu.

2	In the Target box or the Command Line box, enter the path to Microsoft Excel.

3	Add a startup switch to the end of the path.

•	To start Microsoft Excel and then open a specific workbook, type the name of the workbook.

•	To start Microsoft Excel without opening a specific document, type /e

•	To start Microsoft Excel and specify the working folder, type /p followed by a space and the path.

If you've specified a working folder on the General tab in the Options dialog box (Tools menu), that folder is used instead of the folder in the startup switch path.

•	To start Microsoft Excel and then open a specific document as a read-only document, type /r followed by a space and the name of the document.


Use the Analysis ToolPak

Before using an analysis tool, you must arrange the data you want to analyze in columns or rows on your worksheet. This is your input range.

1	On the Tools menu, click Data Analysis. If the Data Analysis command is not on the Tools menu, you will need to enable the Analysis ToolPak in Microsoft Excel.

How?

2	In the Analysis Tools box, click the tool you want to use.

3	Enter the input range and the output range, and then select the options you want.


Enable the Analysis ToolPak

1	On the Tools menu, click Add-Ins. If Analysis ToolPak is not listed in the Add-Ins dialog box, click the Browse button and locate the drive, directory, and filename for the Analysis ToolPak add-in — or run the Setup program.

2	Select the Analysis ToolPak check box.

Note   Add-ins you install in Microsoft Excel remain active until you remove them.


Anova: Single-Factor analysis tool

Performs simple analysis of variance (anova) to test the hypothesis that means from two or more samples are equal (drawn from populations with the same mean). This technique expands on the tests for two means, such as the t-test. For more information about dialog box options, click  [image].


Anova: Single-Factor dialog box options

Input Range

Enter the cell reference for the data you want to analyze. The reference must consist of two or more adjacent ranges of data arranged in columns or rows.

Output Range

Enter the reference for the upper-left cell of the output table. Microsoft Excel will automatically determine the size of the output area and display a message if the output table will replace existing data or extend beyond the bounds of the worksheet.

New Worksheet

Click to insert a new worksheet into the current workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of the new worksheet. To name the new worksheet, type a name in the box.

New Workbook

Click to create a new workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of a new worksheet in the new workbook.

Grouped By

To indicate whether the data in the input range is arranged in rows or in columns, click the Rows or Columns button.

Labels In First Row/Labels in First Column

If the first row of your input range contains labels, select the Labels In First Row check box. If the labels are in the first column of your input range, select the Labels In First Column check box. Clear if your input range has no labels; Microsoft Excel generates the appropriate data labels for the output table.

Alpha

Enter the significance level at which you want to evaluate critical values for the F statistic.


Anova: Two-Factor With Replication analysis tool

Performs an extension of the single-factor anova to include more than one sample for each group of data. For more information about dialog box options, click  [image].


Anova: Two-Factor With Replication dialog box options

Input Range

Enter the cell reference for the data you want to analyze. The reference must consist of two or more adjacent ranges of data arranged in columns or rows.

Output Range

Enter the reference for the upper-left cell of the output table. Microsoft Excel will automatically determine the size of the output area and display a message if the output table will replace existing data or extend beyond the bounds of the worksheet.

New Worksheet

Click to insert a new worksheet into the current workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of the new worksheet. To name the new worksheet, type a name in the box.

New Workbook

Click to create a new workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of a new worksheet in the new workbook.

Rows Per Sample

Enter the number of rows contained in each sample. Each sample must contain the same number of rows, because each row represents a replication of the data.

Alpha

Enter the significance level at which you want to evaluate critical values for the F statistic.


Anova: Two-Factor Without Replication analysis tool

Performs two-factor anova that does not include more than one sampling per group, testing the hypothesis that means from two or more samples are equal (drawn from populations with the same mean). This technique expands on tests for two means, such as the t-test. For more information about dialog box options, click  [image].


Anova: Two-Factor Without Replication dialog box options

Input Range

Enter the cell reference for the data you want to analyze. The reference must consist of two or more adjacent ranges of data arranged in columns or rows.

Output Range

Enter the reference for the upper-left cell of the output table. Microsoft Excel will automatically determine the size of the output area and display a message if the output table will replace existing data or extend beyond the bounds of the worksheet.

New Worksheet

Click to insert a new worksheet into the current workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of the new worksheet. To name the new worksheet, type a name in the box.

New Workbook

Click to create a new workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of a new worksheet in the new workbook.

Labels

Clear if your input range does not contain labels; Microsoft Excel generates the appropriate data labels for the output table.

Alpha

Enter the significance level at which you want to evaluate critical values for the F statistic.


Correlation analysis tool

Measures the relationship between two data sets that are scaled to be independent of the unit of measurement. The population correlation calculation returns the covariance of two data sets divided by the product of their standard deviations.

You can use the Correlation tool to determine whether two ranges of data move together — that is, whether large values of one set are associated with large values of the other (positive correlation), whether small values of one set are associated with large values of the other (negative correlation), or whether values in both sets are unrelated (correlation near zero). For more information about dialog box options, click  [image].

Note   To return the correlation coefficient for two cell ranges, use the CORREL worksheet function.


Correlation dialog box options

Input Range

Enter the cell reference for the range of data you want to analyze. The reference must consist of two or more adjacent ranges of data arranged in columns or rows.

Output Range

Enter the reference for the upper-left cell of the output table. Microsoft Excel populates only half of the table because correlation between two ranges of data is independent of the order in which the ranges are processed. Cells in the output table with matching row and column coordinates contain the value 1 because each data set correlates perfectly with itself.

New Worksheet

Click to insert a new worksheet into the current workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of the new worksheet. To name the new worksheet, type a name in the box.

New Workbook

Click to create a new workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of a new worksheet in the new workbook.

Grouped By

To indicate whether the data in the input range is arranged in rows or in columns, click the Rows or Columns button.

Labels In First Row/Labels in First Column

If the first row of your input range contains labels, select the Labels In First Row check box. If the labels are in the first column of your input range, select the Labels In First Columns check box. Clear if your input range has no labels; Microsoft Excel generates the appropriate data labels for the output table.


Covariance analysis tool

Returns the average of the product of deviations of data points from their respective means. Covariance is a measure of the relationship between two ranges of data.

You can use the Covariance tool to determine whether two ranges of data move together — that is, whether large values of one set are associated with large values of the other (positive covariance), whether small values of one set are associated with large values of the other (negative covariance), or whether values in both sets are unrelated (covariance near zero). For more information about dialog box options, click  [image].

Note To return the covariance for individual data point pairs, use the COVAR worksheet function.


Covariance dialog box options

Input Range

Enter the cell reference for the data you want to analyze. The reference must consist of two or more adjacent ranges of data arranged in columns or rows.

Output Range

Enter the reference for the upper-left cell of the output table. Microsoft Excel populates only half of the table because covariance between two ranges of data is independent of the order in which the ranges are processed. The table's diagonal contains the variance of each range.

New Worksheet

Click to insert a new worksheet into the current workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of the new worksheet. To name the new worksheet, type a name in the box.

New Workbook

Click to create a new workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of a new worksheet in the new workbook.

Grouped By

To indicate whether the data in the input range is arranged in rows or in columns, click either the Rows or Columns button.

Labels In First Row/Labels in First Column

If the first row of your input range contains labels, select the Labels In First Row check box. If the labels are in the first column of your input range, select the Labels In First Columns check box. Clear if your input range has no labels; Microsoft Excel generates the appropriate data labels for the output table.


Descriptive Statistics analysis tool

Generates a report of univariate statistics for data in the input range, providing information about the central tendency and variability of your data. For more information about dialog box options, click  [image].


Descriptive Statistics dialog box options

Input Range

Enter the cell reference for the data you want to analyze. The reference must consist of two or more adjacent ranges of data arranged in columns or rows.

Output Range

Enter the reference for the upper-left cell of the output table. This tool produces two columns of information for each data set. The left column contains statistics labels, and the right column contains the statistics. Microsoft Excel writes a two-column table of statistics for each column or row in the input range, depending on the Grouped By option selected.

New Worksheet

Click to insert a new worksheet into the current workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of the new worksheet. To name the new worksheet, type a name in the box.

New Workbook

Click to create a new workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of a new worksheet in the new workbook.

Grouped By

To indicate whether the data in the input range is arranged in rows or in columns, click the Rows or Columns button.

Labels In First Row/Labels in First Column

If the first row of your input range contains labels, select the Labels In First Row check box. If the labels are in the first column of your input range, select the Labels In First Columns check box. Clear if your input range has no labels; Microsoft Excel generates the appropriate data labels for the output table.

Summary Statistics

Select if you want Microsoft Excel to produce one field for each of the following statistics in the output table: Mean, Standard Error (of the mean), Median, Mode, Standard Deviation, Variance, Kurtosis, Skewness, Range, Minimum, Maximum, Sum, Count, Largest (#), Smallest (#), and Confidence Level.

Kth Largest

Select if you want to include a row in the output table for the kth largest value for each range of data. In the box, enter the number to use for k. If k is 1, this row contains the maximum of the data set.

Kth Smallest

Select if you want to include a row in the output table for the kth smallest value for each range of data. In the box, enter the number to use for k. If k is 1, this row contains the minimum of the data set.

Confidence Level For Mean

Select if you want to include a row in the output table for the confidence level of the mean. In the box, enter the confidence level you want to use. For example, a value of 95% calculates the confidence level of the mean at a significance of 5%.


Exponential Smoothing analysis tool

Predicts a value based on the forecast for the prior period, adjusted for the error in that prior forecast. Uses the smoothing constant a, the magnitude of which determines how strongly forecasts respond to errors in the prior forecast. For more information about dialog box options, click  [image].

Note   Values of 0.2 to 0.3 are reasonable smoothing constants. These values indicate that the current forecast should be adjusted 20 to 30 percent for error in the prior forecast. Larger constants yield a faster response but can produce erratic projections. Small constants can result in long lags for forecast values.


Exponential Smoothing dialog box options

Input Range

Enter the cell reference for the data you want to analyze. The range must contain a single column or row with four or more cells of data.

Output Range

Enter the reference for the upper-left cell of the output table. If the Standard Errors check box is selected, Microsoft Excel generates a two-column output table with standard error values in the right column. If there are insufficient historical values to project a forecast or calculate a standard error, Microsoft Excel returns the #N/A error value.

Note   The output range must be on the same worksheet as the data used in the input range.

Damping Factor

Enter the damping factor you want to use as the exponential smoothing constant. The default damping factor is 0.3.

Standard Errors

Select if you want to include a column that contains standard error values in the output table. Clear if you want a single-column output table without standard error values.

Chart Output

Select to automatically generate an embedded chart for the actual and forecast values in the output table.

Labels

Select if the first row and column of your input range contain labels. Clear if your input range has no labels; Microsoft Excel generates the appropriate data labels for the output table.


F-Test: Two-Sample For Variances analysis tool

Performs a two-sample F-test to compare two population variances. For example, you can use an F-test to determine whether the time scores in a swimming meet have a difference in variance for samples from two teams. For more information about dialog box options, click  [image].


F-Test: Two-Sample For Variances dialog box options

Variable 1 Range

Enter the reference for the first column or row of data you want to analyze.

Variable 2 Range

Enter the reference for the second column or row of data you want to analyze.

Output Range

Enter the reference for the upper-left cell of the output table. Microsoft Excel will automatically determine the size of the output area and display a message if the output table will replace existing data.

New Worksheet

Click to insert a new worksheet into the current workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of the new worksheet. To name the new worksheet, type a name in the box.

New Workbook

Click to create a new workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of a new worksheet in the new workbook.

Labels

Select if the first row or column of your input range contains labels. Clear if your input range has no labels; Microsoft Excel generates the appropriate data labels for the output table.

Alpha

Enter the confidence level for the test. This value must be in the range 0...1.


t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Equal Variances analysis tool

Performs a two-sample student's t-test. This t-test form assumes that the means of both data sets are equal; it is referred to as a homoscedastic t-test. You can use t-tests to determine whether two sample means are equal. For more information about dialog box options, click  [image].


t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Equal Variances dialog box options

Variable 1 Range

Enter the cell reference for the first range of data you want to analyze. The range must consist of a single column or row.

Variable 2 Range

Enter the cell reference for the second range of data you want to analyze. The range must consist of a single column or row.

Output Range

Enter the reference for the upper-left cell of the output table. Microsoft Excel will automatically determine the size of the output area and display a message if the output table will replace existing data.

New Worksheet

Click to insert a new worksheet into the current workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of the new worksheet. To name the new worksheet, type a name in the box.

New Workbook

Click to create a new workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of a new worksheet in the new workbook.

Labels

Select if the first row or column of your input range contains labels. Clear if your input range has no labels; Microsoft Excel generates the appropriate data labels for the output table.

Alpha

Enter the confidence level for the test. This value must be in the range 0...1.

Hypothesized Mean Difference

Enter the number that you want for the shift in sample means. A value of 0 (zero) indicates that the sample means are hypothesized to be equal.


t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Unequal Variances analysis tool

Performs a two-sample student's t-test. This t-test form assumes that the variances of both ranges of data are unequal; it is referred to as a heteroscedastic t-test. You can use a t-test to determine whether two sample means are equal. Use this test when the groups under study are distinct. Use a paired test when there is one group before and after a treatment. For more information about dialog box options, click  [image].

The formula used to determine the test statistic value t is:

The following formula is used to approximate the degrees of freedom. Because the result of the calculation is usually not an integer, use the nearest integer to obtain a critical value from the t table.


t-Test: Two-Sample Assuming Unequal Variances dialog box options

Variable 1 Range

Enter the cell reference for the first range of data you want to analyze. The range must consist of a single column or row.

Variable 2 Range

Enter the cell reference for the second range of data you want to analyze. The range must consist of a single column or row.

Output Range

Enter the reference for the upper-left cell of the output table. Microsoft Excel will automatically determine the size of the output area and display a message if the output table will replace existing data.

New Worksheet

Click to insert a new worksheet into the current workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of the new worksheet. To name the new worksheet, type a name in the box.

New Workbook

Click to create a new workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of a new worksheet in the new workbook.

Labels

Select if the first row or column of your input range contains labels. Clear if your input range has no labels; Microsoft Excel generates the appropriate data labels for the output table.

Alpha

Enter the confidence level for the test. This value must be in the range 0...1.

Hypothesized Mean Difference

Enter the number you want for the shift in sample means. A value of 0 (zero) indicates that the sample means are hypothesized to be equal.


t-Test: Paired Two-Sample For Means analysis tool

Performs a paired two-sample student's t-test to determine whether a sample's means are distinct. This t-test form does not assume that the variances of both populations are equal. You can use a paired test when there is a natural pairing of observations in the samples, such as when a sample group is tested twice — before and after an experiment. For more information about dialog box options, click  [image].

Note   Among the results generated by this tool is pooled variance, derived from the formula:


t-Test: Paired Two-Sample For Means dialog box options

Variable 1 Range

Enter the cell reference for the first range of data you want to analyze. The range must consist of a single column or row, containing the same number of data points as the second range.

Variable 2 Range

Enter the cell reference for the second range of data you want to analyze. The range must consist of a single column or row, containing the same number of data points as the first range.

Output Range

Enter the reference for the upper-left cell of the output table. Microsoft Excel will automatically determine the size of the output area and display a message if the output table will replace existing data.

New Worksheet

Click to insert a new worksheet into the current workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of the new worksheet. To name the new worksheet, type a name in the box.

New Workbook

Click to create a new workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of a new worksheet in the new workbook.

Labels

Select if the first row or column of your input range contains labels. Clear if your input range has no labels; Microsoft Excel generates the appropriate data labels for the output table.

Alpha

Enter the confidence level for the test. This value must be in the range 0...1.

Hypothesized Mean Difference

Enter the number you want for the shift in sample means. A value of 0 (zero) indicates that the sample means are hypothesized to be equal.


z-Test: Two-Sample For Means analysis tool

Performs a two-sample z-test for means with known variances. This tool is used to test hypotheses about the difference between two population means. For example, you can use this test to determine differences between the performance of two car models. For more information about dialog box options, click  [image].


z-Test: Two-Sample For Means dialog box options

Variable 1 Range

Enter the cell reference for the first range of data you want to analyze. The range must consist of a single column or row.

Variable 2 Range

Enter the cell reference for the second range of data you want to analyze. The range must consist of a single column or row.

Output Range

Enter the reference for the upper-left cell of the output table. Microsoft Excel will automatically determine the size of the output area and display a message if the output table will replace existing data.

New Worksheet

Click to insert a new worksheet into the current workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of the new worksheet. To name the new worksheet, type a name in the box.

New Workbook

Click to create a new workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of a new worksheet in the new workbook.

Labels

Select if the first row or column of your input range contains labels. Clear if your input range has no labels; Microsoft Excel generates the appropriate data labels for the output table.

Alpha

Enter the confidence level for the test. This value must be in the range 0...1.

Variable 1 Variance (Known)

Enter the known population variance for the Variable 1 input range.

Variable 2 Variance (Known)

Enter the known population variance for the Variable 2 input range.


Histogram analysis tool

Calculates individual and cumulative frequencies for a cell range of data and data bins. This tool generates data for the number of occurrences of a value in a data set. For example, in a class of 20 students, you might be interested in the distribution of scores in letter-grade categories. A histogram table presents the letter-grade boundaries and the number of scores between the lowest bound and the current bound. The single most-frequent score is the mode of the data. For more information about dialog box options, click  [image].


Histogram dialog box options

Input Range

Enter the reference for the range of data you want to analyze.

Bin Range (optional)

Enter a cell range with an optional set of boundary values that define bin ranges. These values should be in ascending order. Microsoft Excel counts the number of data points between the current bin number and the adjoining higher bin, if any. A number is counted in a particular bin if it is equal to or less than the bin number down to the last bin. All values below the first bin value and above the last bin value are counted. If you omit the bin range, Microsoft Excel creates a set of evenly distributed bins between the data's minimum and maximum values.

Output Range

Enter the reference for the upper-left cell of the output table. Microsoft Excel will automatically determine the size of the output area and display a message if the output table will replace existing data.

New Worksheet

Click to insert a new worksheet into the current workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of the new worksheet. To name the new worksheet, type a name in the box.

New Workbook

Click to create a new workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of a new worksheet in the new workbook.

Pareto (Sorted Histogram)

Select to present data in the output table in descending order of frequency. If cleared, Microsoft Excel presents the data in ascending order and omits the three rightmost columns containing the sorted data.

Cumulative Percentage

Select to generate an output table column for cumulative percentages and to include a cumulative percentage line in the histogram chart. Clear to omit the cumulative percentages.

Chart Output

Select to automatically generate an embedded histogram chart with the output table.

Labels

Select if the first row or column of your input range contains labels. Clear if your input range has no labels; Microsoft Excel generates the appropriate data labels for the output table.


Moving Average analysis tool

Projects values in the forecast period, based on the average value of the variable over a specific number of preceding periods. Each forecast value is based on the formula:

where

•	 N is the number of prior periods to include in the moving average

•	 Aj  is the actual value at time j

•	 Fj  is the forecasted value at time j

A moving average provides trend information that a simple average of all historic data would mask. Use this tool to forecast sales, inventory, or other trends. For more information about dialog box options, click  [image].


Moving Average dialog box options

Input Range

Enter the cell reference for the range of data you want to analyze. The range must consist of a single column or row containing four or more cells of data.

Output Range

Enter the reference for the upper-left cell of the output table. If the Standard Errors check box is selected, Microsoft Excel generates a two-column output table with standard error values in the right column. If there are insufficient historical values to project a forecast or calculate a standard error, Microsoft Excel returns the #N/A error value.

Note   The output range must be on the same worksheet as the data used in the Input range.

Interval

Enter the number of values you want to include in the moving average. The default interval is 3.

Standard Errors

Select if you want to include a column that contains standard error values in the output table. Clear if you want a single-column output table without standard error values.

Chart Output

Select if you want an embedded histogram chart with the output table.

Labels

Select if the first row or column of your input range contains labels. Clear if your input range has no labels; Microsoft Excel generates the appropriate data labels for the output table.


Random Number Generation analysis tool

Fills a range with independent random numbers drawn from one of several distributions. You can use this tool to characterize subjects in a population with a probability distribution. For example, you might use a normal distribution to characterize the population of individuals' heights, or you might use a Bernoulli distribution of two possible outcomes to characterize the population of coin-flip results. For more information about dialog box options, click  [image].

Note   To return an evenly distributed random number greater than or equal to 0 and less than 1 every time the worksheet is calculated, use the RAND() function. To return a random number between numbers you specify every time the worksheet is calculated, use the RANDBETWEEN () function.


Random Number Generation dialog box options

Output Range

Enter the reference for the upper-left cell of the output table. Microsoft Excel will automatically determine the size of the output area and display a message if the output table will replace existing data.

New Worksheet

Click to insert a new worksheet into the current workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of the new worksheet. To name the new worksheet, type a name in the box.

New Workbook

Click to create a new workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of a new worksheet in the new workbook.

Number Of Variables

Enter the number of columns of values you want in the output table. If you do not enter a number, Microsoft Excel fills all output table columns.

Number Of Random Numbers

Enter the number of data points you want to see. Each data point appears in a row of the output table. If you do not enter a number, Microsoft Excel fills all output table rows.

Distribution

Select the distribution you want to use to create random variables.

Parameters

Enter a value for an option under Parameters that characterizes the distribution selected.

Uniform

Characterized by lower and upper bounds. Variables are drawn with equal probability from all values in the range. A common application uses a uniform distribution in the range 0...1.

Normal

Characterized by a mean and a standard deviation. A common application uses a mean of 0 and a standard deviation of 1 for the standard normal distribution.

Bernoulli

Characterized by a probability of success (p value) on a given trial. Bernoulli random variables have the value 0 or 1. For example, you can draw a uniform random variable in the range 0...1. If the variable is less than or equal to the probability of success, the Bernoulli random variable is assigned the value 1; otherwise, it is assigned the value 0.

Binomial

Characterized by a probability of success (p value) for a number of trials. For example, you can generate number-of-trials Bernoulli random variables, the sum of which is a binomial random variable.

Poisson

Characterized by a value lambda, equal to 1/mean. Poisson distribution is often used to characterize the number of events that occur per unit of time — for example, the average rate at which cars arrive at a toll plaza.

Patterned

Characterized by a lower and upper bound, a step, repetition rate for values, and repetition rate for the sequence.

Discrete

Characterized by a value and the associated probability range. The range must contain two columns: the left column contains values, and the right column contains probabilities associated with the value in that row. The sum of the probabilities must be 1.

Random Seed

Enter an optional value from which to generate random numbers. You can reuse this value later to produce the same random numbers.


Rank And Percentile analysis tool

Produces a table that contains the ordinal and percentage rank of each value in a data set. You can use this tool to analyze the relative standing of values in a data set. For more information about dialog box options, click  [image].


Rank And Percentile dialog box options

Input Range

Enter the cell reference for the range of worksheet data you want to analyze.

Output Range

Enter the reference for the upper-left cell of the output table. Microsoft Excel generates one output table for each data set in the input range. Each output table contains four columns: the data point number, the data point value, the data point rank, and the data point percentage rank, sorted in ascending rank order.

New Worksheet

Click to insert a new worksheet into the current workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of the new worksheet. To name the new worksheet, type a name in the box.

New Workbook

Click to create a new workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of a new worksheet in the new workbook.

Grouped By

To indicate whether the data in the input range is arranged in rows or in columns, click the Rows or Columns button.

Labels In First Row/Labels in First Column

If you click the Columns button and the first row of your input range contains labels, select the Labels In First Row check box. If you click the Rows button and the first column of your input range contains labels, select the Labels In First Column check box. Clear if your input range has no labels; Microsoft Excel generates the appropriate row and column labels for the output table.


Regression analysis tool

Performs linear regression analysis by using the "least squares" method to fit a line through a set of observations. You can use this tool to analyze how a single dependent variable is affected by the values of one or more independent variables — for example, how an athlete's performance is affected by such factors as age, height, and weight. You can apportion shares in the performance measure to each of these three factors, based on a set of performance data, and then use the results to predict the performance of a new, untested athlete. For more information about dialog box options, click  [image].


Regression dialog box options

Input Y Range

Enter the reference for the range of dependent data. The range must consist of a single column.

Input X Range

Enter the reference for the range of independent data. The maximum number of input ranges is 16.

Constant Is Zero

Select to force the regression line to pass through the origin.

Labels

Select if the first row or column of your input range contains labels. Clear if your input range has no labels; Microsoft Excel generates the appropriate data labels for the output table.

Confidence Level

Select to include an additional level in the summary output table. In the box, enter the confidence level you want applied in addition to the default 95% level.

Output Range

Enter the reference for the upper-left cell of the output table. Allow at least seven columns for the summary output table, which includes an anova table, coefficients, standard error of y estimate, r2 values, number of observations, and standard error of coefficients.

New Worksheet

Click to insert a new worksheet into the current workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of the new worksheet. To name the new worksheet, type a name in the box.

New Workbook

Click to create a new workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of a new worksheet in the new workbook.

Residuals

Select to include residuals in the residuals output table.

Standardized Residuals

Select to include standardized residuals in the residuals output table.

Residual Plots

Select to generate a chart for each independent variable versus the residual.

Line Fit Plot

Select to generate a chart for predicted values versus the observed values.

Normal Probability Plot

Select to generate a chart plotting normal probability.


Fourier Analysis analysis tool

Solves problems in linear systems and analyzes periodic data, using the Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) method to transform data. This tool also supports inverse transformations, in which the inverse of transformed data returns the original data. For more information about dialog box options, click  [image].


Fourier Analysis dialog box options

Input Range

Enter the reference for the range of real or complex data you want to transform. Complex data must be in either x+yi or x+yj format. The number of input range values must be an even power of 2. If x is a negative number, precede it with an apostrophe ( ' ). The maximum number of values is 4096.

Output Range

Enter the reference for the upper-left cell of the output table. Microsoft Excel will automatically determine the size of the output area and display a message if the output table will replace existing data.

New Worksheet

Click to insert a new worksheet into the current workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of the new worksheet. To name the new worksheet, type a name in the box.

New Workbook

Click to create a new workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of the new workbook.

Inverse

If selected, the data in the input range is considered transformed and an inverse transformation is performed, returning the original inputs. If cleared, the data in the input range is transformed in the output table.

Labels

Select if the first row or column of your input range contains labels. Clear if your input range has no labels; Microsoft Excel generates the appropriate data labels for the output table.


Sampling analysis tool

Creates a sample from a population by treating the input range as a population. When the population is too large to process or chart, you can use a representative sample. You can also create a sample that contains only values from a particular part of a cycle if you believe that the input data is periodic. For example, if the input range contains quarterly sales figures, sampling with a periodic rate of four places values from the same quarter in the output range. For more information about dialog box options, click  [image].


Sampling dialog box options

Input Range

Enter the references for the block of data containing the population of values you want to draw a sample from. Microsoft Excel draws samples from the first column, then the second column, and so on.

Output Range

Enter the reference for the upper-left cell of the output table. Data is written in a single column below the output range. If you select the Periodic button, the number of values in the output table is equal to the number of values in the input range, divided by the sampling rate. If you select the Random button, the number of values in the output table is equal to the number of samples.

New Worksheet

Click to insert a new worksheet into the current workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of the new worksheet. To name the new worksheet, type a name in the box.

New Workbook

Click to create a new workbook and paste the results into cell A1 of a new worksheet in the new workbook.

Sampling

Click the Periodic or Random button to indicate the sampling interval you want.

Period

Enter the periodic interval at which you want sampling to take place. The period-th value in the input range and every period-th value thereafter is copied to the output column. Sampling stops when the end of the input range is reached.

Number Of Samples

Enter the number of random values you want in the output column. Each value is drawn from a random position in the input range, and any number can be selected more than once.

Labels

Select if the first row or column of your input range contains labels. Clear if your input range has no labels; Microsoft Excel generates the appropriate data labels for the output table.


Analyzing statistics

Microsoft Excel provides a set of data analysis tools — called the Analysis ToolPak — that you can use to save steps when developing complex statistical or engineering analyses. When you use one of these tools, you provide the data and parameters for each analysis; the tool uses the appropriate statistical or engineering macro functions and then displays the results in an output table. Some tools generate charts in addition to output tables.

To view a list of the analysis tools that are available, click Data Analysis on the Tools menu. If the Data Analysis command is not on the Tools menu, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager. For more information about enabling the Analysis ToolPak, click  [image].

To use these tools, you need to be familiar with the specific area of statistics or engineering that you want to develop analyses for.

Note   Microsoft Excel provides many other statistical, financial, and engineering worksheet functions. To see a list of available worksheet functions, click  [image]  on the Standard toolbar.


Data appears on the first worksheet only

The data analysis functions can be used on only one worksheet at a time. When you perform data analysis on grouped worksheets, results will appear on the first worksheet and empty formatted tables will appear on the remaining worksheets. To perform data analysis on the remainder of the worksheets, recalculate the analysis tool for each worksheet.


Define and save a cell style

You can define a combination of formats, known as a style, and then apply the style to other cells. In a new workbook, only the built-in styles are available. You can define new styles by applying the formats, or by selecting an example cell that already has the proper format combination. You can also save styles to an autotemplate. The autotemplate and its styles are then available when you create a new workbook.

What do you want to do?

Define a new style

Define a style by example

Save styles to an autotemplate


Define a style by example

1	Select a cell that has the combination of formats you want to include in your style.

2	On the Format menu, click Style.

3	In the Style Name box, type a name for the new style.

4	Click OK.


Define a new style

1	On the Format menu, click Style.

2	In the Style Name box, type a name for the style.

3	Click Modify.

4	Select the formats you want on any of the tabs in the dialog box.

5	To confirm your selections, click OK.

6	Clear the check box for any of the six format types that you don't want to include in the style definition.

7	To define and apply the style to the selected cells, click OK.

To define the style without applying it, click Add, and then click Close.


Apply an existing style

1	Select the cells you want to format.

2	On the Format menu, click Style.

3	In the Style box, select the name of the style you want to use.

Note   You can also use the  [image],  [image],  and  [image]  buttons to apply styles quickly to numbers.


Copy styles from another workbook

1	Open the workbook you are copying styles from and the workbook you are copying to.

2	In the workbook you are copying to, click Style on the Format menu.

3	Click Merge.

4	Select the name of the workbook that contains the styles you want to copy.

Note   If the active workbook contains any styles that have the same name as styles you are copying, Microsoft Excel asks if you want to merge the styles that have the same names. If you want to replace styles, click Yes. If you want to keep the existing styles, click No. You receive this warning only once, regardless of the number of conflicting style names.


Delete a style

1	On the Format menu, click Style.

2	In the Style Name box, select the style you want to delete.

3	Click Delete.

Note   You cannot delete the Normal style.


Apply an autoformat to a range

1	Select the range you want to format.

2	On the Format menu, click AutoFormat.

3	In the Table Format box, select the autoformat you want.

Note   You can quickly reapply the most recent autoformat you used by selecting a range, or a cell within a range, and clicking  [image].


Use only parts of an autoformat

1	Select the range you want to format.

2	On the Format menu, click AutoFormat.

3	In the Table Format box, select the autoformat you want.

4	Click Options.

5	Under Formats To Apply, clear the check boxes for the formats that you don't want to use.

If you clear a check box for a format, that format will remain unchanged from the last applied format.


Remove an autoformat from a range

1	Select the range that has the autoformat you want to remove.

2	On the Format menu, click AutoFormat.

3	In the Table Format box, click None.


Save styles to an autotemplate

1	Open a new workbook and a workbook that contains the styles you want to save.

2	Copy the styles from your workbook to the blank workbook.

 How?

3	On the File menu, click Save As.

4	In the File Name box, type SHEET.XLT

5	In the Save As Type box, click Template.

6	Change the folder to EXCEL\XLSTART.

7	Click Save.


Redefine a style

You can redefine a style in two ways: by selecting an example cell with all the correct formatting, or by specifying the formatting options you want to use.

What do you want to do?

Redefine a style by example

Redefine a style by specifying the formats


Redefine a style by example

1	Select a cell that contains the formats you want to use for a style.

2	On the Format menu, click Style.

3	In the Style Name box, type the name of the style you want to redefine.

Do not select the style name in the list. You must type it in the Style Name box.

4	Click Add.


Redefine a style by specifying the formats

1	On the Format menu, click Style.

2	In the Style Name box, select the name of the style you want to redefine.

3	Click Modify.

4	Select the formats you want on any of the tabs in the dialog box.

5	To confirm your selections, click OK.

6	Clear the check box for any of the six format types that you don't want to include in the style definition.

7	To apply the new style to the selected cells and close the dialog box, click OK.

To define the style without applying it and keep the dialog box open, click Add.


Insert subtotals into a list

1	Sort your list by the columns for which you want subtotals.

How?

2	Click a cell in the list you want to subtotal.

3	On the Data menu, click Subtotals.

4	In the At Each Change In box, select the column that contains the groups for which you want subtotals. This should be the same column by which you sorted your list in step 1.

5	In the Use Function box, select the function you want to use to summarize the data.

6	In the Add Subtotal To box, select the columns that contain the values for which you want subtotals.


Insert nested subtotals into existing subtotals

1	Insert automatic subtotals for the first column for which you want subtotals. This column will be the uppermost level of nested subtotals.

How?

After you have displayed automatic subtotals for the first column, repeat the process for the next column. Each subsequent column will be a lower level of nested subtotals.

2	On the Data menu, click Subtotals.

3	In the At Each Change In box, select the next column you want subtotals for.

4	Clear the Replace Current Subtotals check box.

5	Click OK.

6	Repeat steps 2 through 5 for every column you want subtotals for.


How subtotal and grand total values are calculated

Microsoft Excel calculates subtotal values by using a summary function, such as SUM or AVERAGE. You can display subtotals for more than one type of calculation at a time.

Grand total values are always derived from detail data, not from the subtotal rows. For example, if you use the summary function AVERAGE, the Grand Total row displays an average of all detail data in the list, not an average of the subtotal values.

Subtotal and grand total values are automatically recalculated as you edit detail data.


Settings saved in a template

The settings you save in a template determine the following characteristics of new workbooks you base on that template:

•	The number and type of sheets in a workbook

•	Page formats you set using the Page Setup command (File menu)

•	Cell formats you set using the Cells command (Format menu)

•	Row and column styles

•	Text, dates, numbers, formulas, graphics, and other information you want in a workbook

•	Custom menu commands, macros, and toolbars attached to a module sheet in the template


Create a workbook template

1	Create a workbook that contains the sheets, default text (such as column headings), formulas, macros, styles, and other formatting you want in new workbooks.

2	On the File menu, click Save As.

3	In the File Name box, type the template name.

4	In the Save In box, click the Templates folder in the folder in which you installed Office or Microsoft Excel.

5	In the Save As Type box, click Template.

Notes

•	To use macros with the workbooks you base on a template, make sure that you store the macros in the template, not in the Personal Macro Workbook.

•	To add custom toolbars and menu commands for use with the workbooks, switch to a module sheet in the template. Then use the Menu Editor and Attach Toolbars commands on the Tools menu to change the menu settings and attach custom toolbars. (If the template doesn't already contain a module sheet, point to Macro on the Insert menu, and then click Module.)


Change the default formats for new workbooks and sheets

When you start Microsoft Excel or click  [image], a new, blank workbook with default formats appears. You can change the default content and format of new workbooks by creating a workbook autotemplate.

Similarly, you can change the default content and format of new sheets you insert in a workbook by creating sheet autotemplates. To insert a variety of sheets, you can create additional custom sheet templates.

What do you want to do?

Create an autotemplate for new workbooks

Create a sheet autotemplate or a custom sheet template


Create an autotemplate for new workbooks

1	Create a workbook that has the content and formatting you'll want in most new workbooks.

2	On the File menu, click Save As.

3	In the File Name box, type Book

4	In the Save As Type box, click Template.

5	In the Save In box, click the XLStart folder in the Microsoft Excel folder.

6	Click Save, and then click Close on the File menu.


Create a sheet autotemplate or a custom sheet template

1	Create a one-sheet workbook that includes the formatting, styles, text, and other information you want to appear on all new sheets of that type.

2	On the File menu, click Save As.

3	In the Save In box, click the XLStart folder in the Microsoft Excel folder.

If you're creating a custom sheet template, click the Templates folder in either the Office or Microsoft Excel folder.

4	In the Save As Type box, click Template.

5	In the File Name box, type a name from the following table, click Save, and then click Close on the File menu.

For this type of sheet	Type
Worksheet	Sheet
Dialog	Dialog
Microsoft Excel 4.0 macro	Macro
A custom sheet of any type	Any name you want


Insert a new sheet that's based on a custom template

If you've created a template for a particular type of sheet, you can insert new sheets based on that template instead of sheets with default formatting. For information about creating a sheet template, click  [image].

1	Click a sheet tab using the right mouse button, and then click Insert.

2	Double-click a template on any tab.


Create a template to export worksheet data to a database

If you don't see Template Wizard on the Data menu, you need to install the Template Wizard With Data Tracking add-in before you can perform this procedure. For information about installing add-ins, click  [image].

1	Open the workbook in which you'll enter the data you want to copy to a database.

2	On the Data menu, click Template Wizard, and then follow the steps in the wizard.

Note   To use a database other than a Microsoft Excel list, you must also ensure that you have installed Data Access Objects for VBA and the appropriate database driver. For information about installing data access components, click  [image].


Templates included with Microsoft Excel

Microsoft Excel includes several templates you can use to automate common tasks. When you create a workbook based on the Change Request, Expense Statement, Invoice, Purchase Order, Sales Quote, or Time Card template, the data you enter in the workbook is automatically copied to a linked database. For example, each time you use the invoice template to create an invoice, Microsoft Excel adds a new record to a database for invoices.

To use the templates, click New on the File menu, and then click a template on the Spreadsheet Solutions tab. The Invoice, Loan Manager, and Purchase Order templates are included in a Typical installation of Microsoft Excel. If you don't see the template you want in the New dialog box, rerun Setup to install the template. For more information about installing templates, click  [image].

Use this template	To
Invoice	Prepare an invoice
Loan Manager	Amortize a loan and determine the interest saved by refinancing or prepaying principal
Purchase Order	Prepare a purchase order
Personal Budgeter	Itemize family income and expenses
Car Lease Manager	Compare car-lease options
Change Request	Track change requests for company products.
Expense Statement	Itemize work-related expenses
Business Planner	Analyze projected income, expenses, and other company financial data
Sales Quote	Prepare price estimates for goods and services
Timecard	Track hours worked by employees


Modify a template

1	On the File menu, click Open, and then open the template you want to modify.

2	Make any changes you want to the template's content, formatting, macros, and other characteristics.

3	Click  [image].

These changes affect only new workbooks you base on the template — existing workbooks aren't affected.

Note   You can enter information on the Customize sheet of the built-in templates in the Spreadsheet Solutions folder in your Templates folder. You should not change the templates in any other way; further changes might prevent the template's formulas and macros from working properly.


When to use the Template Wizard

You can use the Template Wizard With Data Tracking add-in to create a template that links selected cells in a workbook to fields in a database that you specify. When you base a new workbook on the template and enter data in the indicated cells, Microsoft Excel creates a new record in the database and copies the data to the corresponding data fields.

Use the Template Wizard if you want to:

•	Have multiple users enter data in a single database.

•	Avoid entering the same data twice.

For example, suppose that you want to track work-related injuries from multiple manufacturing sites that are connected by a network. First, create a workbook that sets up the information needed in each injury report. Then use the Template Wizard to create a template from that workbook and link the template to a central database. You can use any type of database in which you can move data to and from Microsoft Excel. Finally, store the database in a network location that all sites have access to, and distribute copies of the template to each site. When workers fill out a new injury report based on the template, they create both a "hard copy" report and a corresponding record in the database.


Where to store templates

Templates folder

Save your custom workbook templates in the Templates folder in the folder in which you installed Office or Microsoft Excel. Template (.xlt) files you save in the Templates folder are listed in the New dialog box (File menu). Any workbook (.xls) file you save in the Templates folder also acts as a template.

You can add a folder to the Templates folder to store your custom templates. Templates in subfolders appear on a separate tab in the New dialog box; otherwise, templates appear on the General tab.

XLStart folder

Use the XLStart folder in your Microsoft Excel program folder to store autotemplates. These templates, which have special names, set the default contents and format for new workbooks and for new sheets you insert in a workbook. For example, the autotemplate named "Book.xlt" determines the default contents and format for new workbooks.

If you save other types of templates — custom sheet templates, for example — in the XLStart folder or an alternative startup file location, these templates also appear on the General tab in the New dialog box; autotemplates, however, do not appear in the New dialog box.


Troubleshoot template problems

What do you need help with?

My template is not listed in the New dialog box.

The built-in templates are missing in my version of Microsoft Excel.

How do I get back the original settings for workbooks and new sheets?


My template is not listed in the New dialog box.

A template is listed in the New dialog box if you save it in one of the following locations:

•	The Templates folder in the folder in which you installed Office or Microsoft Excel, or a subfolder of the Templates folder

•	The XLStart folder in your Microsoft Excel folder

•	The location you specified in the Alternate Startup File Location box on the General tab in the Options dialog box (Tools menu)


The built-in templates are missing in my version of Microsoft Excel.

All of the built-in templates are available only if you performed a Complete installation of Microsoft Excel. To install missing templates, rerun Setup and change the installation options for the spreadsheet templates. For more information about installing templates, click  [image].


How do I get back the original settings for workbooks and new sheets?

Look in the XLStart folder in your Microsoft Excel folder, and remove any template files from that folder that are listed in the following table. If you don't see these files in the XLStart folder, look in the folder specified in the Alternate Startup File Location box on the General tab in the Options dialog box (Tools menu).

Remove this file	To restore original settings for
Book.xlt	Workbooks
Sheet.xlt	Worksheets
Dialog.xlt	Dialog sheets
Macro.xlt	Microsoft Excel version 4.0 macro sheets


Attach a custom toolbar to a workbook

1	On the Insert menu, point to Macro, and then click Module.

You can also switch to a module if it already exists in the workbook.

2	On the Tools menu, click Attach Toolbars.

3	Click the custom toolbar you want to attach to the workbook.

4	Click Copy.


Create a custom toolbar

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars.

2	In the Toolbar Name box, type a name for the new toolbar.

3	Click New.

4	In the Categories box, click the category that contains the buttons you want to add to the new toolbar.

5	From the Buttons area, drag the button or other item to the new toolbar.


Plot a data series along a secondary value axis

In a 2-D chart, you can plot a single data series along a secondary value axis. The secondary axis can reflect a different scale than the primary axis.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Double-click the data series whose axis you want to change.

3	Click the Axis tab.

4	Click Secondary Axis.


Plot a chart type group on a secondary axis

To plot a chart type group along a secondary axis, you must have multiple chart types in the chart.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	On the Format menu, click the chart group (such as Column Group or Line Group) you want to change.

3	Click the Axis tab.

4	Click Secondary Axis.


Apply built-in formatting to a chart

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Click the right mouse button, and then click AutoFormat on the shortcut menu.

3	Click Built-in.

4	In the Galleries box, click the chart type you want.

The Formats box contains a list of built-in autoformats for that chart type.

5	In the Formats box, double-click the autoformat you want to apply.

Note   When you apply an autoformat, the existing formatting in your chart is replaced.


Apply a previously defined chart format

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Click the right mouse button, and then click AutoFormat on the shortcut menu.

3	Click User-Defined.

4	Under Formats, double-click the custom autoformat you want.


Save a chart format to apply to other charts

You can save the format of a chart you've created and apply that formatting to other charts.

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Click the right mouse button, and then click AutoFormat on the shortcut menu.

3	Click User-Defined.

4	Click Customize, and then click Add.

5	In the Format Name box, type a name.

6	In the Description box, type a description.

7	Click OK, and then click Close.


Delete a custom chart autoformat

1	If the chart is embedded on the worksheet, double-click the chart. If the chart is on a separate sheet, click the chart sheet tab.

2	Click the right mouse button, and then click AutoFormat on the shortcut menu.

3	Click User-Defined.

4	Click Customize.

5	In the Formats box, click the format you want to delete.

6	Click Delete, click OK, and then click Close.


Share chart formats with other users

1	On the other user's machine, open the copy of the workbook that contains the chart autoformat you want to share.

2	Add the autoformat as a new custom autoformat.

How?


Splitting a window to view two parts of a worksheet at once

To scroll through your worksheet and still be able to see the headings for the columns or rows, split the worksheet into panes.

You can also "freeze" panes automatically to prevent scrolling in the upper or left pane by using the Freeze Panes command on the Window menu.

Note   Split or frozen panes do not affect printing. If you want to freeze row or column titles on a printed worksheet, set options for the print titles on the worksheet by clicking Page Setup on the File menu and then clicking the Sheet tab.


Split or remove window panes

1	At the top of the vertical scroll bar or at the right end of the horizontal scroll bar, point to the split box.

2	When the pointer changes to  [image], drag it down or to the left to the position you want.

Note   To remove splits from a window, double-click any part of the split bar.


Freeze titles in window panes

1	To freeze horizontal panes, select the row below where you want the split to appear.

To freeze vertical panes, select the column to the right of where you want the split to appear.

To freeze both the uppermost and leftmost panes, select the cell below and to the right of where you want the split to appear.

2	On the Window menu, click Freeze Panes.

Note   To unfreeze panes, click Unfreeze Panes on the Window menu.


Display a view

1	On the View menu, click View Manager. If the View Manager command is not on the View menu, load the View Manager add-in in Microsoft Excel.

How?

2	In the Views box, click the name of the view you want.

3	Click Show.


Create a view

1	Unless you want to print the entire sheet, define a print area on your sheet before creating the view.

2	On the View menu, click View Manager. If the View Manager command is not on the View menu, load the View Manager add-in in Microsoft Excel.

How?

3	Click Add.

4	In the Name box, type a name for the view.

5	Under View Includes, select the options you want to include in the view.

Tip   Because all views in the workbook are listed in the Views dialog box, you may want to include the sheet name in the name of your view.


Delete a view

1	On the View menu, click View Manager.

2	In the Views box, click the name of the view you want to delete.

3	Click Delete.


Print a view

1	On the View menu, click View Manager.

2	In the Views box, click the name of the view you want to print.

3	Click Show.

4	Click  [image].

Note   Any previously defined print area is always saved with your view. If no print area is defined, Microsoft Excel prints the entire worksheet.


View Manager command (View menu)

Creates different views of a worksheet. A view provides an easy way to see your data with different display options. You can display, print, and store different views without saving them as separate sheets.

If the View Manager command does not appear on the View menu, load the View Manager add-in in Microsoft Excel. For more information, click  [image].

Dialog Box Options

Views

Lists the views defined for the active worksheet.

Show

To display the view selected in the Views box, click Show.

Add

To create a new view, click Add.

Name

To name a new view, type a name in the Names box.

View Includes

To save the currently selected print options, select the Print Settings check box. To save hidden columns and rows as part of your view, select the Hidden Rows & Columns check box.

Delete

To delete the selected view, click Delete.


ABS

See Also

Returns the absolute value of a number. The absolute value of a number is the number without its sign.

Syntax

ABS(number)

Number    is the real number of which you want the absolute value.

Examples

ABS(2) equals 2

ABS(-2) equals 2

If A1 contains -16, then:

SQRT(ABS(A1)) equals 4


ACOS

See Also

Returns the arccosine of a number. The arccosine is the angle whose cosine is number. The returned angle is given in radians in the range 0 to π.

Syntax

ACOS(number)

Number    is the cosine of the angle you want and must be from -1 to 1.

If you want to convert the result from radians to degrees, multiply it by 180/PI().

Examples

ACOS(-0.5) equals 2.094395 (2π/3 radians)

ACOS(-0.5)*180/PI() equals 120 (degrees)


ACOSH

See Also

Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number. Number must be greater than or equal to 1. The inverse hyperbolic cosine is the value whose hyperbolic cosine is number, so ACOSH(COSH(number)) equals number.

Syntax

ACOSH(number)

Number    is any real number equal to or greater than 1.

Examples

ACOSH(1) equals 0

ACOSH(10) equals 2.993223


AND

See Also

Returns TRUE if all its arguments are TRUE; returns FALSE if one or more arguments is FALSE.

Syntax

AND(logical1, logical2, ...)

Logical1, logical2,...    are 1 to 30 conditions you want to test that can be either TRUE or FALSE.

The arguments should be logical values or arrays or references that contain logical values.

If an array or reference argument contains text or empty cells, those values are ignored.

If the specified range contains no logical values, AND returns the #VALUE! error value.

Examples

AND(TRUE, TRUE) equals TRUE

AND(TRUE, FALSE) equals FALSE

AND(2+2=4, 2+3=5) equals TRUE

If B1:B3 contains the values TRUE, FALSE, and TRUE, then:

AND(B1:B3) equals FALSE

If B4 contains a number between 1 and 100, then:

AND(1<B4, B4<100) equals TRUE

Suppose you want to display B4 if it contains a number strictly between 1 and 100, and you want to display a message if it is not. If B4 contains 104, then:

IF(AND(1<B4, B4<100), B4, "The value is out of range.") equals "The value is out of range."

If B4 contains 50, then:

IF(AND(1<B4, B4<100), B4, "The value is out of range.") equals 50


ASIN

See Also

Returns the arcsine of a number. The arcsine is the angle whose sine is number. The returned angle is given in radians in the range -π/2 to π/2.

Syntax

ASIN(number)

Number    is the sine of the angle you want and must be from -1 to 1.

Remarks

To express the arcsine in degrees, multiply the result by 180/PI( ).

Examples

ASIN(-0.5) equals -0.5236 (-π/6 radians)

ASIN(-0.5)*180/PI() equals -30 (degrees)


ASINH

See Also

Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number. The inverse hyperbolic sine is the value whose hyperbolic sine is number, so ASINH(SINH(number)) equals number.

Syntax

ASINH(number)

Number    is any real number.

Examples

ASINH(-2.5) equals -1.64723

ASINH(10) equals 2.998223


ATAN

See Also

Returns the arctangent of a number. The arctangent is the angle whose tangent is number. The returned angle is given in radians in the range -π/2 to π/2.

Syntax

ATAN(number)

Number    is the tangent of the angle you want.

Remarks

To express the arctangent in degrees, multiply the result by 180/PI( ).

Examples

ATAN(1) equals 0.785398 (π/4 radians)

ATAN(1)*180/PI() equals 45 (degrees)


ATAN2

See Also

Returns the arctangent of the specified x- and y- coordinates. The arctangent is the angle from the x-axis to a line containing the origin (0, 0)) and a point with coordinates (x_num, y_num). The angle is given in radians between -π and π, excluding -π.

Syntax

ATAN2(x_num, y_num)

X_num    is the x-coordinate of the point.

Y_num    is the y-coordinate of the point.

Remarks

A positive result represents a counterclockwise angle from the x-axis; a negative result represents a clockwise angle.

ATAN2(a,b) equals ATAN(b/a), except that a can equal 0 in ATAN2.

If both x_num and y_num are 0, ATAN2 returns the #DIV/0! error value.

To express the arctangent in degrees, multiply the result by 180/PI( ).

Examples

ATAN2(1, 1) equals 0.785398 (π/4 radians)

ATAN2(-1, -1) equals -2.35619 (-3π/4 radians)

ATAN2(-1, -1)*180/PI() equals -135 (degrees)


ATANH

See Also

Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number. Number must be between -1 and 1 (excluding -1 and 1). The inverse hyperbolic tangent is the value whose hyperbolic tangent is number, so ATANH(TANH(number)) equals number.

Syntax

ATANH(number)

Number    is any real number between 1 and -1.

Examples

ATANH(0.76159416) equals 1, approximately

ATANH(-0.1) equals -0.10034


AVEDEV

See Also

Returns the average of the absolute deviations of data points from their mean. AVEDEV is a measure of the variability in a data set.

Syntax

AVEDEV(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 30 arguments for which you want the average of the absolute deviations. You can also use a single array or a reference to an array instead of arguments separated by commas.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

The equation for average deviation is:

AVEDEV is influenced by the unit of measurement in the input data.

Example

AVEDEV(4, 5, 6, 7, 5, 4, 3) equals 1.020408


AVERAGE

See Also

Returns the average (arithmetic mean) of the arguments.

Syntax

AVERAGE(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 30 numeric arguments for which you want the average.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

Tip	When averaging cells, keep in mind the difference between empty cells and those containing the value zero, especially if you have cleared the Zero Values check box in the View tab of the Options dialog box. Empty cells are not counted, but zero values are. To see the Options dialog box, click Options on the Tools menu.

Examples

If A1:A5 is named Scores and contains the numbers 10, 7, 9, 27, and 2, then:

AVERAGE(A1:A5) equals 11

AVERAGE(Scores) equals 11

AVERAGE(A1:A5, 5) equals 10

AVERAGE(A1:A5) equals SUM(A1:A5)/COUNT(A1:A5) equals 11

If C1:C3 is named OtherScores and contains the numbers 4, 18, and 7, then:

AVERAGE(Scores, OtherScores) equals 10.5


BESSELI

See Also

Returns the modified Bessel function, which is equivalent to the Bessel function evaluated for purely imaginary arguments.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

BESSELI(x, n)

X    is the value at which to evaluate the function.

N    is the order of the Bessel function. If n is not an integer, it is truncated.

Remarks

If x is non-numeric, BESSELI returns the #VALUE! error value.

If n is non-numeric, BESSELI returns the #VALUE! error value.

If n < 0, BESSELI returns the #NUM! error value.

The n-th order modified Bessel function of the variable x is:

Example

BESSELI(1.5, 1) equals 0.981666


BESSELJ

See Also

Returns the Bessel function.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

BESSELJ(x, n)

X    is the value at which to evaluate the function.

N    is the order of the Bessel function. If n is not an integer, it is truncated.

Remarks

If x is non-numeric, BESSELJ returns the #VALUE! error value.

If n is non-numeric, BESSELJ returns the #VALUE! error value.

If n < 0, BESSELJ returns the #NUM! error value.

The n-th order Bessel function of the variable x is:

where:

is the Gamma function.

Example

BESSELJ(1.9, 2) equals 0.329926


BESSELK

See Also

Returns the modified Bessel function, which is equivalent to the Bessel functions evaluated for purely imaginary arguments.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

BESSELK(x, n)

X    is the value at which to evaluate the function.

N    is the order of the function. If n is not an integer, it is truncated.

Remarks

If x is non-numeric, BESSELK returns the #VALUE! error value.

If n is non-numeric, BESSELK returns the #VALUE! error value.

If n < 0, BESSELK returns the #NUM! error value.

The n-th order modified Bessel function of the variable x is:

where Jn and Yn  are the J and Y Bessel functions, respectively.

Example

BESSELK(1.5, 1) equals 0.277388


BESSELY

See Also

Returns the Bessel function, which is also called the Weber function or the Neumann function.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

BESSELY(x, n)

X    is the value at which to evaluate the function.

N    is the order of the function. If n is not an integer, it is truncated.

Remarks

If x is non-numeric, BESSELY returns the #VALUE! error value.

If n is non-numeric, BESSELY returns the #VALUE! error value.

If n < 0, BESSELY returns the #NUM! error value.

The n-th order Bessel function of the variable x is:

where:

Example

BESSELY(2.5, 1) equals 0.145918


BIN2DEC

See Also

Converts a binary number to decimal.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

BIN2DEC(number)

Number    is the binary number you want to convert. Number may not contain more than 10 characters (10 bits). The most significant bit of number is the sign bit. The remaining 9 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Remarks

If number is not a valid binary number, or if number contains more than 10 characters (10 bits), BIN2DEC returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

BIN2DEC(1100100) equals 100

BIN2DEC(1111111111) equals -1


BIN2HEX

See Also

Converts a binary number to hexadecimal.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

BIN2HEX(number, places)

Number    is the binary number you want to convert. Number may not contain more than 10 characters (10 bits). The most significant bit of number is the sign bit. The remaining 9 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Places    is the number of characters to use. If places is omitted, BIN2HEX uses the minimum number of characters necessary. Places is useful for padding the return value with leading 0s (zeros).

Remarks

If number is not a valid binary number, or if number contains more than 10 characters (10 bits), BIN2HEX returns the #NUM! error value.

If number is negative, BIN2HEX ignores places and returns a 10-character hexadecimal number.

If BIN2HEX requires more than places characters, it returns the #NUM! error value.

If places is not an integer, it is truncated.

If places is non-numeric, BIN2HEX returns the #VALUE! error value.

If places is negative, BIN2HEX returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

BIN2HEX(11111011, 4) equals 00FB

BIN2HEX(1110) equals E

BIN2HEX(1111111111) equals FFFFFFFFFF


BIN2OCT

See Also

Converts a binary number to octal.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

BIN2OCT(number, places)

Number    is the binary number you want to convert. Number may not contain more than 10 characters (10 bits). The most significant bit of number is the sign bit. The remaining 9 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Places    is the number of characters to use. If places is omitted, BIN2OCT uses the minimum number of characters necessary. Places is useful for padding the return value with leading 0s (zeros).

Remarks

If number is not a valid binary number, or if number contains more than 10 characters (10 bits), BIN2OCT returns the #NUM! error value.

If number is negative, BIN2OCT ignores places and returns a 10-character octal number.

If BIN2OCT requires more than places characters, it returns the #NUM! error value.

If places is not an integer, it is truncated.

If places is non-numeric, BIN2OCT returns the #VALUE! error value.

If places is negative, BIN2OCT returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

BIN2OCT(1001, 3) equals 011

BIN2OCT(01100100) equals 144

BIN2OCT(1111111111) equals 7777777777


CEILING

See Also

Returns number rounded up, away from zero, to the nearest multiple of significance. For example, if you want to avoid using pennies in your prices and your product is priced at $4.42, use the formula =CEILING(4.42,0.05) to round prices up to the nearest nickel.

Syntax

CEILING(number, significance)

Number    is the value you want to round.

Significance    is the multiple to which you want to round.

Remarks

If either argument is non-numeric, CEILING returns the #VALUE! error value.

Regardless of the sign of number, a value is rounded up when adjusted away from zero. If number is an exact multiple of significance, no rounding occurs.

If number and significance have different signs, CEILING returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

CEILING(2.5, 1) equals 3

CEILING(-2.5, -2) equals -4

CEILING(-2.5, 2) equals #NUM!

CEILING(1.5, 0).1) equals 1.5

CEILING(0.234, 0).01) equals 0.24


CHAR

See Also

Returns the character specified by the code number. Use CHAR to translate code numbers you might get from files on other types of computers into characters.

Syntax

CHAR(number)

Number    is a number between 1 and 255 specifying which character you want. The character is from the character set used by your computer.

Operating environment	Character set

Macintosh	Macintosh character set

Windows	ANSI

Examples

CHAR(65) equals "A"

CHAR(33) equals "!"


CLEAN

See Also

Removes all nonprintable characters from text. Use CLEAN on text imported from other applications which contains characters that may not print with your operating system. For example, you can use CLEAN to remove some low-level computer code that is frequently at the beginning and end of data files and cannot be printed.

Syntax

CLEAN(text)

Text    is any worksheet information from which you want to remove nonprintable characters.

Example

Since CHAR(7) returns a nonprintable character:

CLEAN(CHAR(7)&"text"&CHAR(7)) equals "text"


COMBIN

See Also

Returns the number of combinations for a given number of objects. Use COMBIN to determine the total possible number of groups for a given number of objects.

Syntax

COMBIN(number, number_chosen)

Number    is the number of objects.

Number_chosen    is the number of objects in each combination.

Remarks

Numeric arguments are truncated to integers.

If either argument is non-numeric, COMBIN returns the #NAME? error value.

If number < 0, number_chosen < 0, or number < number_chosen, COMBIN returns the #NUM! error value.

A combination is any set or subset of objects, regardless of their internal order. Combinations are distinct from permutations, for which the internal order is significant.

The number of combinations is as follows, where number = n and number_chosen = k:

where:

Example

Suppose you want to form a two-person team from eight candidates and you want to know how many possible teams can be formed. COMBIN(8, 2) equals 28 teams.


COS

See Also

Returns the cosine of the given angle.

Syntax

COS(number)

Number    is the angle in radians for which you want the cosine. If the angle is in degrees, multiply it by PI()/180 to convert it to radians.

Examples

COS(1.047) equals 0.500171

COS(60*PI()/180) equals 0.5, the cosine of 60 degrees


COSH

See Also

Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a number.

Syntax

COSH(number)

The formula for the hyperbolic cosine is:

Examples

COSH(4) equals 27.30823

COSH(EXP(1)) equals 7.610125, where EXP(1) is e, the base of the natural logarithm.


COUNT

See Also

Counts how many numbers are in the list of arguments. Use COUNT to get the number of entries in a number field in a range or array of numbers.

Syntax

COUNT(value1, value2, ...)

Value1, value2,...    are 1 to 30 arguments that can contain or refer to a variety of data types, but only numbers are counted.

Arguments that are numbers, null, logical values, dates, or text representations of numbers are counted; arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers are ignored.

If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in that array or reference are counted. Empty cells, logical values, text, or error values in the array or reference are ignored.

Examples

If A3 contains "Sales," A4 contains "12/8/90," A6 contains "19," A7 contains "22.24," and A9 contains "#DIV/0!", then:

COUNT(A6:A7) equals 2

COUNT(A4:A7) equals 3

COUNT(A2, A6:A9, "Twelve", 5) equals 3

COUNT(A1:A9, , "2"), where "2" is a text representation of a number, equals 5

COUNT(0.1, TRUE, "three", 4, , 6.6666, 700, , 9, #DIV/0!) equals 8


COUNTA

See Also

Counts the number of nonblank values in the list of arguments. Use COUNTA to count the number of cells with data in a range or array.

Syntax

COUNTA(value1, value2, ...)

Value1, value2,...    are 1 to 30 arguments representing the values you want to count. In this case, a value is any type of information, including empty text ("") but not including empty cells. If an argument is an array or reference, empty cells within the array or reference are ignored.

Examples

If A3 contains "Sales," A4 contains "12/8/90," A6 contains "19," A7 contains "22.24," and A9 contains "#DIV/0!", then:

COUNTA(A6:A7) equals 2

COUNTA(A4:A7) equals 3

COUNTA(A3, A6:A9) equals 4

COUNTA(A1:A9) equals 5

COUNTA(1, , 1) equals 3

COUNTA(A4:A7, 10) equals 4


COVAR

See Also

Returns covariance, the average of the products of deviations for each data point pair. Use covariance to determine the relationship between two data sets. For example, you can examine whether greater income accompanies greater levels of education.

Syntax

COVAR(array1, array2)

Array1    is the first cell range of integers.

Array2    is the second cell range of integers.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If array1 and array2 have a different number of data points, COVAR returns the #N/A error value.

If either array1 or array2 are empty, COVAR returns the #DIV/0! error value.

The covariance is:

Example

COVAR({3, 2, 4, 5, 6}, {9, 7, 12, 15, 17}) equals 5.2


DATE

See Also

Returns the serial number of a particular date. For more information about serial numbers, see NOW.

Syntax

DATE(year, month, day)

Year    is a number from 1900 to 2078 in Microsoft Excel for Windows or 1904 to 2078 in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh.

Month    is a number representing the month of the year. If month is greater than 12, then month adds that number of months to the first month in the year specified. For example, DATE(90,14,2) returns the serial number representing February 2, 1991.

Day    is a number representing the day of the month. If day is greater than the number of days in the month specified, then day adds that number of days to the first day in the month. For example, DATE(91,1,35) returns the serial number representing February 4, 1991.

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information, see NOW.

The DATE function is most useful in formulas where year, month, and day are formulas, not constants.

Examples

Using the 1900 Date System (the default in Microsoft Excel for Windows), DATE(91, 1, 1) equals 33239, the serial number corresponding to January 1, 1991.

Using the 1904 Date System (the default in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh), DATE(91, 1, 1) equals 31777, the serial number corresponding to January 1, 1991.


DATEVALUE

See Also

Returns the serial number of the date represented by date_text. Use DATEVALUE to convert a date represented by text to a serial number.

Syntax

DATEVALUE(date_text)

Date_text    is text that returns a date in a Microsoft Excel date format. Using the default date system in Microsoft Excel for Windows, date_text must represent a date from January 1, 1900 to December 31, 2078. Using the default date system in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh, date_text must represent a date from January 1, 1904 to December 31, 2078. DATEVALUE returns the #VALUE! error value if date_text is out of this range.

If the year portion of date_text is omitted, DATEVALUE uses the current year from your computer's built-in clock. Time information in date_text is ignored.

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information, see NOW.

Most functions automatically convert date values to serial numbers.

Examples

The following examples use the 1900 Date System:

DATEVALUE("8/22/55") equals 20323

DATEVALUE("22-AUG-55") equals 20323

Assuming your computer's built-in clock is set to 1993 and you are using the 1900 Date System:

DATEVALUE("5-JUL") equals 34155


DAY

See Also

Returns the day of the month corresponding to serial_number. The day is given as an integer ranging from 1 to 31.

Syntax

DAY(serial_number)

Serial_number    is the date-time code used by Microsoft Excel for date and time calculations. You can give serial_number as text, such as "4-15-93" or "15-Apr-1993", instead of as a number. The text is automatically converted to a serial number. For more information about serial_number, see NOW.

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information, see NOW.

Examples

DAY("4-Jan") equals 4

DAY("15-Apr-1993") equals 15

DAY("8/11/93") equals 11


DAYS360

See Also

Returns the number of days between two dates based on a 360-day year (twelve 30-day months). Use this function to help compute payments if your accounting system is based on twelve 30-day months.

Syntax

DAYS360(start_date, end_date, method)

Start_date    and end_date    are the two dates between which you want to know the number of days.

The arguments can be either text strings using numbers to represent the month, day, and year (for example, "1/30/93" or "1-30-93"), or they can be serial numbers representing the dates.

If start_date occurs after end_date, DAYS360 returns a negative number.

Method    is a logical value that specifies whether the European or US method should be used in the calculation

Method	Defined

FALSE  or omitted	US (NASD). If the starting date is the 31st of a month, it becomes equal to the 30th of the same month.  If the ending date is the 31st of a month and the starting date is less than the 30th of a month, the ending date becomes equal to the 1st of the next month, otherwise the ending date becomes equal to the 30th of the same month.

TRUE	European method. Starting dates or ending dates which occur on the 31st of a month become equal to the 30th of the same month.

Tip	To determine the number of days between two dates in a normal year, you can use normal subtraction--for example, "12/31/93"-"1/1/93" equals 364.

Example

DAYS360("1/30/93", "2/1/93") equals 1


DEC2BIN

See Also

Converts a decimal number to binary.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

DEC2BIN(number, places)

Number    is the decimal integer you want to convert. If number is negative, places is ignored and DEC2BIN returns a 10-character (10-bit) binary number in which the most significant bit is the sign bit. The remaining 9 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Places    is the number of characters to use. If places is omitted, DEC2BIN uses the minimum number of characters necessary. Places is useful for padding the return value with leading 0s (zeros).

Remarks

If number < -512 or if number > 511, DEC2BIN returns the #NUM! error value.

If number is non-numeric, DEC2BIN returns the #VALUE! error value.

If DEC2BIN requires more than places characters, it returns the #NUM! error value.

If places is not an integer, it is truncated.

If places is non-numeric, DEC2BIN returns the #VALUE! error value.

If places is negative, DEC2BIN returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

DEC2BIN(9, 4) equals 1001

DEC2BIN(-100) equals 1110011100


DEC2HEX

See Also

Converts a decimal number to hexadecimal.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

DEC2HEX(number, places)

Number    is the decimal integer you want to convert. If number is negative, places is ignored and DEC2HEX returns a 10-character (40-bit) hexadecimal number in which the most significant bit is the sign bit. The remaining 39 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Places    is the number of characters to use. If places is omitted, DEC2HEX uses the minimum number of characters necessary. Places is useful for padding the return value with leading 0s (zeros).

Remarks

If number < -549,755,813,888 or if number > 549,755,813,887, DEC2HEX returns the #NUM! error value.

If number is non-numeric, DEC2HEX returns the #VALUE! error value.

If DEC2HEX requires more than places characters, it returns the #NUM! error value.

If places is not an integer, it is truncated.

If places is non-numeric, DEC2HEX returns the #VALUE! error value.

If places is negative, DEC2HEX returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

DEC2HEX(100, 4) equals 0064

DEC2HEX(-54) equals FFFFFFFFCA


DEC2OCT

See Also

Converts a decimal number to octal.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

DEC2OCT(number, places)

Number    is the decimal integer you want to convert. If number is negative, places is ignored and DEC2OCT returns a 10-character (30-bit) octal number in which the most significant bit is the sign bit. The remaining 29 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Places    is the number of characters to use. If places is omitted, DEC2OCT uses the minimum number of characters necessary. Places is useful for padding the return value with leading 0s (zeros).

Remarks

If number < -536,870,912 or if number > 536,870,911, DEC2OCT returns the #NUM! error value.

If number is non-numeric, DEC2OCT returns the #VALUE! error value.

If DEC2OCT requires more than places characters, it returns the #NUM! error value.

If places is not an integer, it is truncated.

If places is non-numeric, DEC2OCT returns the #VALUE! error value.

If places is negative, DEC2OCT returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

DEC2OCT(58, 3) equals 072

DEC2OCT(-100) equals 7777777634


DELTA

See Also

Tests whether two values are equal. Returns 1 if number1 = number2; returns 0 otherwise. Use this function to filter a set of values. For example, by summing several DELTA functions you calculate the count of equal pairs. This function is also known as the Kronecker Delta function.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

DELTA(number1, number2)

Number1    is the first number.

Number2    is the second number. If omitted, number2 is assumed to be zero.

Remarks

If number1 is non-numeric, DELTA returns the #VALUE! error value.

If number2 is non-numeric, DELTA returns the #VALUE! error value.

Examples

DELTA(5, 4) equals 0

DELTA(5, 5) equals 1

DELTA(0.5, 0)) equals 0


DOLLAR

See Also

Converts a number to text using currency format, with the decimals rounded to the specified place. The format used is $#,##0.00_);($#,##0.00).

Syntax

DOLLAR(number, decimals)

Number    is a number, a reference to a cell containing a number, or a formula that evaluates to a number.

Decimals    is the number of digits to the right of the decimal point. If decimals is negative, number is rounded to the left of the decimal point. If you omit decimals, it is assumed to be 2.

Remarks

The major difference between formatting a cell containing a number with the Cell command from the Format menu and formatting a number directly with the DOLLAR function is that DOLLAR converts its result to text. A number formatted with the Cell command is still a number. You can continue to use numbers formatted with DOLLAR in formulas, because Microsoft Excel converts numbers entered as text values to numbers when it calculates.

Examples

DOLLAR(1234.567, 2) equals "$1234.57"

DOLLAR(1234.567, -2) equals "$1200"

DOLLAR(-1234.567, -2) equals "($1200)"

DOLLAR(-0.123, 4) equals "($0.1230)"

DOLLAR(99.888) equals "$99.89"


EOMONTH

See Also

Returns the serial number date for the last day of the month that is the indicated number of months before or after start_date. Use EOMONTH to calculate maturity dates or due dates that fall on the last day of the month.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

EOMONTH(start_date, months)

Start_date    is a serial date number that represents the start date.

Months    is the number of months before or after start_date. A positive value for months yields a future date; a negative value yields a past date.

Remarks

If either argument is non-numeric, EOMONTH returns the #VALUE! error value.

If start_date is not a valid serial date number, EOMONTH returns the #NUM! error value.

If months is not an integer, it is truncated.

If start_date plus months yields an invalid serial date number, EOMONTH returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

EOMONTH(DATEVALUE("01/01/93"), 1) equals 34028 or 2/28/93

EOMONTH(DATEVALUE("01/01/93"), -1) equals 33969 or 12/31/92


ERF

See Also

Returns the error function integrated between lower_limit and upper_limit.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

ERF(lower_limit, upper_limit)

Lower_limit    is the lower bound for integrating ERF.

Upper_limit    is the upper bound for integrating ERF. If omitted, ERF integrates between zero and lower_limit.

Remarks

If lower_limit is non-numeric, ERF returns the #VALUE! error value.

If lower_limit is negative, ERF returns the #NUM! error value.

If upper_limit is non-numeric, ERF returns the #VALUE! error value.

If upper_limit is negative, ERF returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

ERF(0.74500) equals 0.70793

ERF(1) equals 0.84270


ERFC

See Also

Returns the complementary ERF function integrated between x and  (infinity)

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

ERFC(x)

X    is the lower bound for integrating ERF.

Remarks

If x is non-numeric, ERFC returns the #VALUE! error value.

If x is negative, ERFC returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

ERFC(1) equals 0.1573


EVEN

See Also

Returns number rounded up to the nearest even integer. You can use this function for processing items that come in twos. For example, a packing crate accepts rows of one or two items. The crate is full when the number of items, rounded up to the nearest two, matches the crate's capacity.

Syntax

EVEN(number)

Number    is the value to round.

Remarks

If number is non-numeric, EVEN returns the #VALUE! error value.

Regardless of the sign of number, a value is rounded up when adjusted away from zero. If number is an even integer, no rounding occurs.

Examples

EVEN(1.5) equals 2

EVEN(3) equals 4

EVEN(2) equals 2

EVEN(-1) equals -2


EXACT

See Also

Compares two text strings and returns TRUE if they are exactly the same, FALSE otherwise. EXACT is case-sensitive but ignores formatting differences. Use EXACT to test text being entered onto a document.

Syntax

EXACT(text1, text2)

Text1    is the first text string.

Text2    is the second text string.

Examples

EXACT("word", "word") equals TRUE

EXACT("Word", "word") equals FALSE

EXACT("w ord", "word") equals FALSE

To make sure that a user-entered value matches a value in a range, enter the following formula as an array in a cell. To enter a formula as an array in a single cell, press CTRL+SHIFT+ENTER (in Microsoft Excel for Windows) or COMMAND+ENTER (in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh). The name TestValue refers to a cell containing a user-entered value; the name CompareRange refers to a list of text values to be checked.

{=OR(EXACT(TestValue, CompareRange))}


EXP

See Also

Returns e raised to the power of number. The constant e equals 2.71828182845904, the base of the natural logarithm.

Syntax

EXP(number)

Number    is the exponent applied to the base e.

Remarks

To calculate powers of other bases, use the exponentiation operator (^).

EXP is the inverse of LN, the natural logarithm of number.

Examples

EXP(1) equals 2.718282 (the approximate value of e)

EXP(2) equals e2, or 7.389056

EXP(LN(3)) equals 3


FACT

See Also

Returns the factorial of a number. The factorial of a number is equal to 1*2*3*...* number.

Syntax

FACT(number)

Number    is the nonnegative number you want the factorial of. If number is not an integer, it is truncated.

Examples

FACT(1) equals 1

FACT(1.9) equals FACT(1) equals 1

FACT(0) equals 1

FACT(-1) equals #NUM!

FACT(5) equals 1*2*3*4*5 equals 120


FACTDOUBLE

See Also

Returns the double factorial of a number.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

FACTDOUBLE(number)

Number    is the value for which to return the double factorial. If number is not an integer, it is truncated.

Remarks

If number is non-numeric, FACTDOUBLE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If number is negative, FACTDOUBLE returns the #NUM! error value.

If number is even:

If number is odd:

Examples

FACTDOUBLE(6) equals 48

FACTDOUBLE(7) equals 105


FALSE

See Also

Returns the logical value FALSE.

Syntax

FALSE( )

Remarks

You can also type the word FALSE directly into the worksheet or formula, and Microsoft Excel interprets it as the logical value FALSE.


FIXED

See Also

Rounds a number to the specified number of decimals, formats the number in decimal format using a period and commas, and returns the result as text.

Syntax

FIXED(number, decimals, no_commas)

Number    is the number you want to round and convert to text.

Decimals    is the number of digits to the right of the decimal point.

No_commas    is a logical value that, if TRUE, prevents FIXED from including commas in the returned text. If no_commas is FALSE or omitted, then the returned text includes commas as usual.

Numbers in Microsoft Excel can never have more than 15 significant digits, but decimals can be as large as 127.

If decimals is negative, number is rounded to the left of the decimal point.

If you omit decimals, it is assumed to be 2.

Remarks

The major difference between formatting a cell containing a number with the Cell command from the Format menu and formatting a number directly with the FIXED function is that FIXED converts its result to text. A number formatted with the Cell command is still a number.

Examples

FIXED(1234.567, 1) equals "1234.6"

FIXED(1234.567, -1) equals "1230"

FIXED(-1234.567, -1) equals "-1230"

FIXED(44.332) equals "44.33"


FLOOR

See Also

Rounds number down, toward zero, to the nearest multiple of significance.

Syntax

FLOOR(number, significance)

Number    is the numeric value you want to round.

Significance    is the multiple to which you want to round.

Remarks

If either argument is non-numeric, FLOOR returns the #VALUE! error value.

If number and significance have different signs, FLOOR returns the #NUM! error value.

Regardless of the sign of number, a value is rounded down when adjusted away from zero. If number is an exact multiple of significance, no rounding occurs.

Examples

FLOOR(2.5, 1) equals 2

FLOOR(-2.5, -2) equals -2

FLOOR(-2.5, 2) equals #NUM!

FLOOR(1.5, 0).1) equals 1.5

FLOOR(0.234, 0).01) equals 0.23


FV

See Also

Returns the future value of an investment based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate.

Syntax

FV(rate, nper, pmt, pv, type)

For a more complete description of the arguments in FV and for more information on annuity functions, see PV.

Rate    is the interest rate per period.

Nper    is the total number of payment periods in an annuity.

Pmt    is the payment made each period; it cannot change over the life of the annuity. Typically, pmt contains principal and interest but no other fees or taxes.

Pv    is the present value, or the lump-sum amount that a series of future payments is worth right now. If pv is omitted, it is assumed to be 0.

Type    is the number 0 or 1 and indicates when payments are due. If type is omitted, it is assumed to be 0.

Set type equal to	If payments are due

0	At the end of the period

1	At the beginning of the period

Remarks

Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying rate and nper. If you make monthly payments on a four-year loan at 12 percent annual interest, use 12%/12 for rate and 4*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 12% for rate and 4 for nper.

For all the arguments, cash you pay out, such as deposits to savings, is represented by negative numbers; cash you receive, such as dividend checks, is represented by positive numbers.

Examples

FV(0.5%, 10, -200, -500, 1) equals $2581.40

FV(1%, 12, -1000) equals $12,682.50

FV(11%/12, 35, -2000, , 1) equals $82,846.25

Suppose you want to save money for a special project occurring a year from now. You deposit $1000 into a savings account that earns 6 percent annual interest compounded monthly (monthly interest of 6%/12, or 0.5%). You plan to deposit $100 at the beginning of every month for the next 12 months. How much money will be in the account at the end of 12 months?

FV(0.5%, 12, -100, -1000, 1) equals $2301.40


GCD

See Also

Returns the greatest common divisor of two or more integers. The greatest common divisor is the largest integer that divides both number1 and number2 without a remainder.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

GCD(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 29 values. If any value is not an integer, it is truncated.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, GCD returns the #VALUE! error value.

If any argument is less than zero, GCD returns the #NUM! error value.

One divides any value evenly.

A prime number has only itself and one as even divisors.

Examples

GCD(5, 2) equals 1

GCD(24, 36) equals 12

GCD(7, 1) equals 1

GCD(5, 0)) equals 5


GESTEP

See Also

Returns 1 if number ≥ step; returns 0 otherwise. Use this function to filter a set of values. For example, by summing several GESTEP functions you calculate the count of values that exceed a threshold.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

GESTEP(number, step)

Number    is the value to test against step.

Step    is the threshold value. If you omit a value for step, GESTEP uses zero.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, GESTEP returns the #VALUE! error value.

Examples

GESTEP(5, 4) equals 1

GESTEP(5, 5) equals 1

GESTEP(-4, -5) equals 1

GESTEP(-1, 0)) equals 0


HEX2BIN

See Also

Converts a hexadecimal number to binary.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

HEX2BIN(number, places)

Number    is the hexadecimal number you want to convert. Number may not contain more than 10 characters. The most significant bit of number is the sign bit (40th bit from the right). The remaining 9 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Places    is the number of characters to use. If places is omitted, HEX2BIN uses the minimum number of characters necessary. Places is useful for padding the return value with leading 0s (zeros).

Remarks

If number is negative, HEX2BIN ignores places and returns a 10-character binary number.

If number is negative, it cannot be less than FFFFFFFE00, and if number is positive, it cannot be greater than 1FF.

If number is not a valid hexadecimal number, HEX2BIN returns the #NUM! error value.

If HEX2BIN requires more than places characters, it returns the #NUM! error value.

If places is not an integer, it is truncated.

If places is non-numeric, HEX2BIN returns the #VALUE! error value.

If places is negative, HEX2BIN returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

HEX2BIN("F", 8) equals 00001111

HEX2BIN("B7") equals 10110111

HEX2BIN("FFFFFFFFFF") equals 1111111111


HEX2DEC

See Also

Converts a hexadecimal number to decimal.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

HEX2DEC(number)

Number    is the hexadecimal number you want to convert. Number may not contain more than 10 characters (40 bits). The most significant bit of number is the sign bit. The remaining 39 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Remarks

If number is not a valid hexadecimal number, HEX2DEC returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

HEX2DEC("A5") equals 165

HEX2DEC("FFFFFFFF5B") equals -165

HEX2DEC("3DA408B9") equals 1034160313


HEX2OCT

See Also

Converts a hexadecimal number to octal.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

HEX2OCT(number, places)

Number    is the hexadecimal number you want to convert. Number may not contain more than 10 characters. The most significant bit of number is the sign bit. The remaining 39 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Places    is the number of characters to use. If places is omitted, HEX2OCT uses the minimum number of characters necessary. Places is useful for padding the return value with leading 0s (zeros).

Remarks

If number is negative, HEX2OCT ignores places and returns a 10-character octal number.

If number is negative, it cannot be less than FFE0000000, and if number is positive, it cannot be greater than 1FFFFFFF.

If number is not a valid hexadecimal number, HEX2OCT returns the #NUM! error value.

If HEX2OCT requires more than places characters, it returns the #NUM! error value.

If places is not an integer, it is truncated.

If places is non-numeric, HEX2OCT returns the #VALUE! error value.

If places is negative, HEX2OCT returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

HEX2OCT("F", 3) equals 017

HEX2OCT("3B4E") equals 35516

HEX2OCT("FFFFFFFF00") equals 7777777400


HOUR

See Also

Returns the hour corresponding to serial_number. The hour is given as an integer, ranging from 0 (12:00 A.M.) to 23 (11:00 P.M.).

Syntax

HOUR(serial_number)

Serial_number    is the date-time code used by Microsoft Excel for date and time calculations. You can give serial_number as text, such as "16:48:00" or "4:48:00 PM", instead of as a number. The text is automatically converted to a serial number. For more information about serial numbers, see NOW.

Note	Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information, see NOW.

Examples

HOUR(0.7) equals 16

HOUR(29747.7) equals 16

HOUR("3:30:30 PM") equals 15


INT

See Also

Rounds a number down to the nearest integer.

Syntax

INT(number)

Number    is the real number you want to round down to an integer.

Examples

INT(8.9) equals 8

INT(-8.9) equals -9

The following formula returns the decimal part of a positive real number in cell A1:

A1-INT(A1)


INTERCEPT

See Also

Returns the intercept of the linear regression line through data points in known_x's and known_y's. The intercept is the point at which the regression line through the values in known_x's and known_y's intersects the y-axis. Use the intercept when you want to determine the value of the dependent variable when the independent variable is zero. For example, you can use INTERCEPT to predict a metal's electrical resistance at 0°C when your data points were taken at room temperature and higher.

Syntax

INTERCEPT(known_y's, known_x's)

Known_y's    is the dependent set of observations or data.

Known_x's    is the independent set of observations or data.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If known_y's and known_x's contain a different number of data points, or contain no data points, INTERCEPT returns the #N/A error value.

The equation for the intercept of the regression line is:

where the slope is calculated as:

Example

INTERCEPT({2, 3, 9, 1, 8}, {6, 5, 11, 7, 5}) equals 0.0483871


IPMT

See Also

Returns the interest payment for a given period for an investment based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate. For a more complete description of the arguments in IPMT and for more information on annuity functions, see PV.

Syntax

IPMT(rate, per, nper, pv, fv, type)

Rate    is the interest rate per period.

Per    is the period for which you want to find the interest, and must be in the range 1 to nper.

Nper    is the total number of payment periods in an annuity.

Pv    is the present value, or the lump-sum amount that a series of future payments is worth right now.

Fv    is the future value, or a cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made. If fv is omitted, it is assumed to be 0 (the future value of a loan, for example, is 0).

Type    is the number 0 or 1 and indicates when payments are due. If type is omitted, it is assumed to be 0.

Set type equal to	If payments are due

0 	At the end of the period

1 	At the beginning of the period

Remarks

Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying rate and nper. If you make monthly payments on a four-year loan at 12 percent annual interest, use 12%/12 for rate and 4*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 12% for rate and 4 for nper.

For all the arguments, cash you pay out, such as deposits to savings, is represented by negative numbers; cash you receive, such as dividend checks, is represented by positive numbers.

Examples

The following formula calculates the interest due in the first month of a three-year $8000 loan at 10 percent annual interest:

IPMT(0.1/12, 1, 36, 8000) equals -$66.67

The following formula calculates the interest due in the last year of a three-year $8000 loan at 10 percent annual interest, where payments are made yearly:

IPMT(0.1, 3, 3, 8000) equals -$292.45


ISEVEN

See Also

Returns TRUE if number is even, or FALSE if number is odd.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

ISEVEN(number)

Number    is the value to test. If number is not an integer, it is truncated.

Remarks

If number is non-numeric, ISEVEN returns the #VALUE! error value.

Examples

ISEVEN(-1) equals FALSE

ISEVEN(2.5) equals TRUE

ISEVEN(5) equals FALSE


ISODD

See Also

Returns TRUE if number is odd, or FALSE if number is even.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

ISODD(number)

Number    is the value to test. If number is not an integer, it is truncated.

Remarks

If number is non-numeric, ISODD returns the #VALUE! error value.

Examples

ISODD(-1) equals TRUE

ISODD(2.5) equals FALSE

ISODD(5) equals TRUE


LCM

See Also

Returns the least common multiple of integers. The least common multiple is the smallest positive integer that is a multiple of all integer arguments number1, number2, and so on. Use LCM to add fractions with different denominators.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

LCM(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 29 values for which you want the least common multiple. If value is not an integer, it is truncated.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, LCM returns the #VALUE! error value.

If any argument is less than one, LCM returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

LCM(5, 2) equals 10

LCM(24, 36) equals 72


LEFT

See Also

Returns the first (or leftmost) character or characters in a text string.

Syntax

LEFT(text, num_chars)

Text    is the text string containing the characters you want to extract.

Num_chars    specifies how many characters you want LEFT to return.

Num_chars must be greater than or equal to zero.

If num_chars is greater than the length of text, LEFT returns all of text.

If num_chars is omitted, it is assumed to be 1.

Examples

LEFT("Sale Price", 4) equals "Sale"

If A1 contains "Sweden", then:

LEFT(A1) equals "S"

Suppose a hardware store assigns stock numbers to its products. The first three characters of the stock number identify the product vendor. On a worksheet, assume that Stock refers to a cell containing a stock number and that VendorTable is a sorted two-column table containing all the vendor numbers in the first column and the corresponding vendor names in the second.

You can use the LEFT function to obtain the first three characters of the stock number (a vendor number) and the VLOOKUP function to return the vendor's name as shown in the following formula:

VLOOKUP(VALUE(LEFT(Stock, 3)), VendorTable, 2)


LEN

See Also

Returns the number of characters in a text string.

Syntax

LEN(text)

Text    is the text whose length you want to find. Spaces count as characters.

Examples

LEN("Phoenix, AZ") equals 11

LEN("") equals 0

The following macro formula starts a FOR-NEXT loop on a macro sheet. The number of iterations is equal to the length of a string named CheckText:

FOR("Counter", 1, LEN(CheckText))


LN

See Also

Returns the natural logarithm of a number. Natural logarithms are based on the constant e (2.71828182845904).

Syntax

LN(number)

Number    is the positive real number for which you want the natural logarithm.

Remarks

LN is the inverse of the EXP function.

Examples

LN(86) equals 4.454347

LN(2.7182818) equals 1

LN(EXP(3)) equals 3

EXP(LN(4)) equals 4


LOG

See Also

Returns the logarithm of a number to the base you specify.

Syntax

LOG(number, base)

Number    is the positive real number for which you want the logarithm.

Base    is the base of the logarithm. If base is omitted, it is assumed to be 10.

Examples

LOG(10) equals 1

LOG(8, 2) equals 3

LOG(86, 2.7182818) equals 4.454347


LOG10

See Also

Returns the base-10 logarithm of a number.

Syntax

LOG10(number)

Number    is the positive real number for which you want the base-10 logarithm.

Examples

LOG10(86) equals 1.934498451

LOG10(10) equals 1

LOG10(1E5) equals 5

LOG10(10^5) equals 5


LOGEST

See Also

Calculates an exponential curve that fits your data and returns an array that describes the curve. The equation for the curve is

y = (b*(m1^x1)*(m2^x2)*_) or y = b*m^x

where the dependent y-value is a function of the independent x-values. The m-values are bases corresponding to each exponent x-value, and b is a constant value. Note that y, x, and m can be vectors. The array that LOGEST returns is {mn,mn-1,...,m1,b}.

Syntax

LOGEST(known_y's, known_x's, const, stats)

Known_y's    is the set of y-values you already know in the relationship y = b*m^x.

If the array known_y's is in a single column, then each column of known_x's is interpreted as a separate variable.

If the array known_y's is in a single row, then each row of known_x's is interpreted as a separate variable.

Known_x's    is an optional set of x-values that you may already know in the relationship y = b*m^x.

The array known_x's can include one or more sets of variables. If only one variable is used, known_y's and known_x's can be ranges of any shape, as long as they have equal dimensions. If more than one variable is used, known_y's must be a vector (that is, a range with a height of one row or width of one column).

If known_x's is omitted, it is assumed to be the array {1,2,3,...} that is the same size as known_y's.

Const    is a logical value specifying whether to force the constant b to equal 1.

If const is TRUE or omitted, b is calculated normally.

If const is FALSE, b is set equal to 1, and the m-values are fitted to y = m^x.

Stats    is a logical value specifying whether to return additional regression statistics.

If stats is TRUE, LOGEST returns the additional regression statistics, so the returned array is {mn,mn-1,...,m1,b;sen,sen-1,...,se1,seb;r 2,sey;
F,df;ssreg,ssresid}.

If stats is FALSE or omitted, LOGEST returns only the m-coefficients and the constant b.

For more information about the additional regression statistics, see LINEST.

Remarks

The more a plot of your data resembles an exponential curve, the better the calculated line will fit your data. Like LINEST, LOGEST returns an array of values that describes a relationship among the values, but LINEST fits a straight line to your data; LOGEST fits an exponential curve. For more information, see LINEST.

When you have only one independent x-variable, you can obtain the m and b values directly by using the following formulas:

m:
INDEX(LOGEST(known_y's,known_x's),1)

b:
INDEX(LOGEST(known_y's,known_x's),2)

You can use the y = b*m^x equation to predict future values of y, but Microsoft Excel provides the GROWTH function to do this for you. For more information, see GROWTH.

Formulas that return arrays must be entered as array formulas.

When entering an array constant such as known_x's as an argument, use commas to separate values in the same row and semicolons to separate rows. Separator characters may be different depending on your country setting.

You should note that the y-values predicted by the regression equation may not be valid if they are outside the range of y-values you used to determine the equation.

Example

After 10 months of sluggish sales, a company experiences exponential growth in sales after putting a new product on the market. In the subsequent 6 months, sales increased to 33,100, 47,300, 69,000, 102,000, 150,000, and 220,000 units per month. Assume that these values are entered into six cells named UnitsSold. When entered as a formula:

LOGEST(UnitsSold, {11;12;13;14;15;16}, TRUE, TRUE)

generates the following output in, for example, cells D1:E5:

{1.46327563, 495.30477; 0.0026334, 0).03583428; 0.99980862, 0).01101631; 20896.8011, 4; 2.53601883, 0).00048544}

y = b*m1^x1 or using the values from the array:

y = 495.3 * 1.4633x

You can estimate sales for future months by substituting the month number for x in this equation, or you can use the GROWTH function. For more information, see GROWTH.

You can use the additional regression statistics (cells D2:E5 in the above output array) to determine how useful the equation is for predicting future values.

Important	The methods you use to test an equation using LOGEST are similar to the methods for LINEST. However, the additional statistics LOGEST returns are based on the following linear model:

ln y = x1 ln m1 + ... + xn ln mn + ln b

You should keep this in mind when you evaluate the additional statistics, especially the sei and seb values, which should be compared to ln mi and ln b, not to mi and b. For more information, consult an advanced statistics manual.


LOGINV

See Also

Returns the inverse of the lognormal cumulative distribution function of x, where ln(x) is normally distributed with parameters mean and standard_dev. If p = LOGNORMDIST(x,...) then LOGINV(p,...) = x.

Use the lognormal distribution to analyze logarithmically transformed data.

Syntax

LOGINV(probability, mean, standard_dev)

Probability    is a probability associated with the lognormal distribution.

Mean    is the mean of ln(x).

Standard_dev    is the standard deviation of ln(x).

The inverse of the lognormal distribution function is:

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, LOGINV returns the #VALUE! error value.

If probability < 0 or probability > 1, LOGINV returns the #NUM! error value.

If standard_dev  0, LOGINV returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

LOGINV(0.039084, 3.5, 1.2) equals 4.000014


LOWER

See Also

Converts all uppercase letters in a text string to lowercase.

Syntax

LOWER(text)

Text    is the text you want to convert to lowercase. LOWER does not change characters in text that are not letters.

Examples

LOWER("E. E. Cummings") equals "e. e. cummings"

LOWER("Apt. 2B") equals "apt. 2b"

LOWER is similar to PROPER and UPPER. Also see examples for PROPER.


MDETERM

See Also

Returns the matrix determinant of an array.

Syntax

MDETERM(array)

Array    is a numeric array with an equal number of rows and columns.

Array can be given as a cell range, for example, A1:C3; as an array constant, such as {1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9}; or as a name to either of these.

If any cells in array are empty or contain text, MDETERM returns the #VALUE! error value.

MDETERM also returns #VALUE! if array does not have an equal number of rows and columns.

Remarks

The matrix determinant is a number derived from the values in array. For a three-row, three-column array, A1:C3, the determinant is defined as:

MDETERM(A1:C3) equals
A1*(B2*C3-B3*C2) + A2*(B3*C1-B1*C3) + A3*(B1*C2-B2*C1)

Matrix determinants are generally used for solving systems of mathematical equations that involve several variables.

MDETERM is calculated with an accuracy of approximately 16 digits, which may lead to a small numeric error when the calculation is not complete. For example, the determinant of a singular matrix may differ from zero by 1E-16.

Examples

MDETERM({1,3,8,5;1,3,6,1;1,1,1,0;7,3,10,2}) equals 88

MDETERM({3,6,1;1,1,0;3,10,2}) equals 1

MDETERM({3,6;1,1}) equals -3

MDETERM({1,3,8,5;1,3,6,1}) equals #VALUE! because the array does not have an equal number of rows and columns.


MEDIAN

See Also

Returns the median of the given numbers. The median is the number in the middle of a set of numbers; that is, half the numbers have values that are greater than the median and half have values that are less.

Syntax

MEDIAN(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 30 numbers for which you want the median.

The arguments should be numbers or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers. Microsoft Excel examines all the numbers in each reference or array argument.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

Remarks

If there is an even number of numbers in the set, then MEDIAN calculates the average of the two numbers in the middle. See the second example following.

Examples

MEDIAN(1, 2, 3, 4, 5) equals 3

MEDIAN(1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6) equals 3.5, the average of 3 and 4


MID

See Also

Returns a specific number of characters from a text string, starting at the position you specify.

Syntax

MID(text, start_num, num_chars)

Text    is the text string containing the characters you want to extract.

Start_num    is the position of the first character you want to extract in text. The first character in text has start_num 1, and so on.

If start_num is greater than the length of text, MID returns "" (empty text).

If start_num is less than the length of text, but start_num plus num_chars exceeds the length of text, MID returns the characters up to the end of text.

If start_num is less than 1, MID returns the #VALUE! error value.

Num_chars    specifies how many characters to return from text. If num_chars is negative, MID returns the #VALUE! error value.

Examples

MID("Fluid Flow", 1, 5) equals "Fluid"

MID("Fluid Flow", 7, 20) equals "Flow"

MID("1234", 5, 5) equals "" (empty text)

Also see the examples for CODE and FIND.


MIN

See Also

Returns the smallest number in the list of arguments.

Syntax

MIN(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 30 numbers for which you want to find the minimum value.

You can specify arguments that are numbers, empty cells, logical values, or text representations of numbers. Arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers cause errors.

If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in that array or reference are used. Empty cells, logical values, text, or error values in the array or reference are ignored.

If the arguments contain no numbers, MIN returns 0.

Examples

If A1:A5 contains the numbers 10, 7, 9, 27, and 2, then:

MIN(A1:A5) equals 2

MIN(A1:A5, 0)) equals 0

MIN is similar to MAX. Also see the examples for MAX.


MINUTE

See Also

Returns the minute corresponding to serial_number. The minute is given as an integer, ranging from 0 to 59.

Syntax

MINUTE(serial_number)

Serial_number    is the date-time code used by Microsoft Excel for date and time calculations. You can give serial_number as text, such as "16:48:00" or "4:48:00 PM", instead of as a number. The text is automatically converted to a serial number. For more information about serial_number, see NOW.

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information, see NOW.

Examples

MINUTE("4:48:00 PM") equals 48

MINUTE(0.01) equals 14

MINUTE(4.02) equals 28


MINVERSE

See Also

Returns the inverse matrix for the matrix stored in an array.

Syntax

MINVERSE(array)

Array    is a numeric array with an equal number of rows and columns.

Array can be given as a cell range, such as A1:C3; as an array constant, such as {1,2,3;4,5,6;7,8,9}; or as a name for either of these.

If any cells in array are empty or contain text, MINVERSE returns the #VALUE! error value.

MINVERSE also returns the #VALUE! error value if array does not have an equal number of rows and columns.

Remarks

Formulas that return arrays must be entered as array formulas.

Inverse matrices, like determinants, are generally used for solving systems of mathematical equations involving several variables. The product of a matrix and its inverse is the identity matrix—the square array in which the diagonal values equal 1 and all other values equal 0.

As an example of how a two-row, two-column matrix is calculated, suppose that the range A1:B2 contains the letters a, b, c, and d that represent any four numbers. The following table shows the inverse of the matrix A1:B2:

Column A	Column B

Row 1	d/(a*d-b*c)	b/(b*c-a*d)

Row 2	c/(b*c-a*d)	a/(a*d-b*c)

MINVERSE is calculated with an accuracy of approximately 16 digits, which may lead to a small numeric error when the cancellation is not complete.

Some square matrices cannot be inverted, and will return the #NUM! error value with MINVERSE. The determinant for a noninvertable matrix is 0.

Examples

MINVERSE({4,-1;2,0}) equals {0,0.5;-1,2}

MINVERSE({1,2,1;3,4,-1;0,2,0}) equals {0.25,0.25,-0.75;0,0,0.5;0.75,-0.25,-0.25}

Tip	Use the INDEX function to access individual elements from the inverse matrix.


MIRR

See Also

Returns the modified internal rate of return for a series of periodic cash flows. MIRR considers both the cost of the investment and the interest received on reinvestment of cash.

Syntax

MIRR(values, finance_rate, reinvest_rate)

Values    is an array or a reference to cells that contain numbers. These numbers represent a series of payments (negative values) and income (positive values) occurring at regular periods.

Values must contain at least one positive value and one negative value to calculate the modified internal rate of return. Otherwise, MIRR returns the #DIV/0! error value.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

Finance_rate    is the interest rate you pay on the money used in the cash flows.

Reinvest_rate    is the interest rate you receive on the cash flows as you reinvest them.

Remarks

MIRR uses the order of values to interpret the order of cash flows. Be sure to enter your payment and income values in the sequence you want and with the correct signs (positive values for cash received, negative values for cash paid).

If n is the number of cash flows in values, frate is the finance_rate, and rrate is the reinvest_rate, then the formula for MIRR is:

Examples

Suppose you're a commercial fisherman just completing your fifth year of operation. Five years ago, you borrowed $120,000 at 10 percent annual interest to purchase a boat. Your catches have yielded $39,000, $30,000, $21,000, $37,000, and $46,000. During these years you reinvested your profits, earning 12% annually. In a worksheet, your loan amount is entered as -$120,000 in B1, and your five annual profits are entered in B2:B6.

To calculate the investment's modified rate of return after five years:

MIRR(B1:B6, 10%, 12%) equals 12.61%

To calculate the modified rate of return after three years:

MIRR(B1:B4, 10%, 12%) equals -4.80%

To calculate the five-year modified rate of return based on a reinvest_rate of 14%

MIRR(B1:B6, 10%, 14%) equals 13.48%


MMULT

See Also

Returns the matrix product of two arrays. The result is an array with the same number of rows as array1 and the same number of columns as array2.

Syntax

MMULT(array1, array2)

Array1, array2    are the arrays you want to multiply.

The number of columns in array1 must be the same as the number of rows in array2, and both arrays must contain only numbers.

Array1 and array2 can be given as cell ranges, array constants, or references.

If any cells are empty or contain text, or if the number of columns in array1 is different from the number of rows in array2, MMULT returns the #VALUE! error value.

Remarks

The matrix product array a of two arrays b and c is:

where i is the row number and j is the column number.

Formulas that return arrays must be entered as array formulas.

Examples

MMULT({1,3;7,2}, {2,0;0,2}) equals {2,6;14,4}

MMULT({3,0;2,0}, {2,0;0,2}) equals {6,0;4,0}

MMULT({1,3,0;7,2,0;1,0,0}, {2,0;0,2}) equals #VALUE!, because the first array has three columns and the second array has only two rows.


MOD

See Also

Returns the remainder after number is divided by divisor. The result has the same sign as divisor.

Syntax

MOD(number, divisor)

Number    is the number for which you want to find the remainder.

Divisor    is the number by which you want to divide number. If divisor is 0, MOD returns the #DIV/0! error value.

Remarks

The MOD function can be expressed in terms of the INT function:

MOD(n, d) = n - d*INT(n/d)

Examples

MOD(3, 2) equals 1

MOD(-3, 2) equals 1

MOD(3, -2) equals -1

MOD(-3, -2) equals -1


MODE

See Also

Returns the most frequently occurring value in an array or range of data. Like MEDIAN, MODE is a location measure

Syntax

MODE(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 30 arguments for which you want to calculate the mode. You can also use a single array or a reference to an array instead of arguments separated by commas.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If the data set contains no duplicate data points, MODE returns the #N/A error value.

The mode is the most frequently occurring value; the median is the middle value; and the mean is the average value. No single measure of central tendency provides a complete picture of the data. Suppose data is clustered in three areas, half around a single low value, and half around two large values. Both AVERAGE and MEDIAN may return a value in the relatively empty middle, while MODE may return the dominant low value.

Example

MODE({5.6, 4, 4, 3, 2, 4}) equals 4


MONTH

See Also

Returns the month corresponding to serial_number. The month is given as an integer, ranging from 1 (January) to 12 (December).

Syntax

MONTH(serial_number)

Serial_number    is the date-time code used by Microsoft Excel for date and time calculations. You can give serial_number as text, such as "4-15-1993" or "15-Apr-1993", instead of as a number. The text is automatically converted to a serial number. For more information about serial_number, see NOW.

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information, see NOW.

Examples

MONTH("6-May") equals 5

MONTH(366) equals 12

MONTH(367) equals 1


MROUND

See Also

Returns a number rounded to the desired multiple.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

MROUND(number, multiple)

Number    is the value to round.

Multiple    is the multiple to which you want to round number.

Remarks

MROUND rounds up, away from zero, if the remainder of dividing number by multiple is greater than or equal to half the value of multiple.

Examples

MROUND(10, 3) equals 9

MROUND(-10, -3) equals -9

MROUND(1.3, 0).2) equals 1.4

MROUND(5, -2) equals #NUM!


MULTINOMIAL

See Also

Returns the ratio of the factorial of a sum of values to the product of factorials.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

MULTINOMIAL(number1, number2, ...)

Number1,number2,...    are 1 to 29 values for which you want the multinomial.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, MULTINOMIAL returns the #VALUE! error value.

If any argument is less than one, MULTINOMIAL returns the #NUM! error value.

The multinomial is:

Example

MULTINOMIAL(2, 3, 4) equals 1260


N

See Also

Returns a value converted to a number.

Syntax

N(value)

Value    is the value you want converted. N converts values listed in the following table.

If value is or refers to	N returns

A number	That number

A date, in one of Microsoft Excel's	The serial number of that date

    built-in date formats

TRUE	1

Anything else	0

Remarks

It is not generally necessary to use the N function in a formula, since Microsoft Excel automatically converts values as necessary. This function is provided for compatibility with other spreadsheet programs.

Examples

If A1 contains "7", A2 contains "Even", and A3 contains "TRUE", then:

N(A1) equals 7

N(A2) equals 0, because A2 contains text

N(A3) equals 1, because A3 contains TRUE

N("7") equals 0, because "7" is text

N("4/17/91") equals 0, because "4/17/91" is text


NA

See Also

Returns the error value #N/A. #N/A is the error value that means "no value is available." Use NA to mark empty cells. By entering #N/A in cells where you are missing information, you can avoid the problem of unintentionally including empty cells in your calculations. (When a formula refers to a cell containing #N/A, the formula returns the #N/A error value.)

Syntax

NA( )

Remarks

You must include the empty parentheses with the function name. Otherwise, Microsoft Excel will not recognize it as a function.

You can also type the value #N/A directly into a cell. The NA function is provided for compatibility with other spreadsheet programs.


NETWORKDAYS

See Also

Returns the number of whole working days between start_date and end_date. Working days exclude weekends and any dates identified in holidays. Use NETWORKDAYS to calculate employee benefits that accrue based on the number of days worked during a specific term.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

NETWORKDAYS(start_date, end_date, holidays)

Start_date    is a serial date number that represents the start date.

End_date    is a serial date number that represents the end date.

Holidays    is an optional set of one or more serial date numbers to exclude from the working calendar, such as state and federal holidays and floating holidays.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, NETWORKDAYS returns the #VALUE! error value.

If any argument is not a valid serial date number, NETWORKDAYS returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

NETWORKDAYS(DATEVALUE("10/01/91"), DATEVALUE("12/01/91"),
DATEVALUE("11/28/91")) equals 43


NOT

See Also

Reverses the value of its argument. Use NOT when you want to make sure a value is not equal to one particular value.

Syntax

NOT(logical)

Logical    is a value or expression that can be evaluated to TRUE or FALSE. If logical is FALSE, NOT returns TRUE; if logical is TRUE, NOT returns FALSE.

Examples

NOT(FALSE) equals TRUE

NOT(1+1=2) equals FALSE


NOW

See Also

Returns the serial number of the current date and time.

Syntax

NOW( )

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different default date systems. Microsoft Excel for Windows uses the 1900 Date System, in which serial numbers range from 1 to 65,380, corresponding to the dates January 1, 1900, through December 31, 2078. Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh uses the 1904 Date System, in which serial numbers range from 0 to 63,918, corresponding to the dates January 1, 1904, through December 31, 2078.

Numbers to the right of the decimal point in the serial number represent the time; numbers to the left represent the date. For example, in the 1900 Date System, the serial number 367.5 represents the date-time combination 12:00 P.M., January 1, 1901.

You can change the date system by selecting or clearing the 1904 Date System check box in the Calculation tab of the Options dialog box, which appears when you click Options on the Tools menu.

The date system is changed automatically when you open a document from another platform. For example, if you are working in Microsoft Excel for Windows and you open a document created in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh, the 1904 Date System check box is selected automatically.

The NOW function changes only when the worksheet is calculated or when the macro containing the function is run. It is not updated continuously.

Examples

If you are using the 1900 Date System and your computer's built-in clock is set to 12:30:00 P.M., 1-Jan-1987, then:

NOW() equals 31778.52083

Ten minutes later:

NOW() equals 31778.52778


NPER

See Also

Returns the number of periods for an investment based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate.

Syntax

NPER(rate, pmt, pv, fv, type)

For a more complete description of the arguments in NPER and for more information about annuity functions, see PV.

Rate    is the interest rate per period.

Pmt    is the payment made each period; it cannot change over the life of the annuity. Typically, pmt contains principal and interest but no other fees or taxes.

Pv    is the present value, or the lump-sum amount that a series of future payments is worth right now.

Fv    is the future value, or a cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made. If fv is omitted, it is assumed to be 0 (the future value of a loan, for example, is 0).

Type    is the number 0 or 1 and indicates when payments are due.

Set type equal to	If payments are due

0 or omitted	At the end of the period

1	At the beginning of the period

Examples

NPER(12%/12, -100, -1000, 10000, 1) equals 60

NPER(1%, -100, -1000, 10000) equals 60

NPER(1%, -100, 1000) equals 11


NPV

See Also

Returns the net present value of an investment based on a series of periodic cash flows and a discount rate. The net present value of an investment is today's value of a series of future payments (negative values) and income (positive values).

Syntax

NPV(rate, value1, value2, ...)

Rate    is the rate of discount over the length of one period.

Value1, value2,...    are 1 to 29 arguments representing the payments and income.

Value1, value2,... must be equally spaced in time and occur at the end of each period.

NPV uses the order of value1, value2,... to interpret the order of cash flows. Be sure to enter your payment and income values in the correct sequence.

Arguments that are numbers, empty cells, logical values, or text representations of numbers are counted; arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers are ignored.

If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in that array or reference are counted. Empty cells, logical values, text, or error values in the array or reference are ignored.

Remarks

The NPV investment begins one period before the date of the value1 cash flow and ends with the last cash flow in the list. The NPV calculation is based on future cash flows. If your first cash flow occurs at the beginning of the first period, the first value must be added to the NPV result, not included in the values arguments. For more information, see the examples below.

If n is the number of cash flows in the list of values, the formula for NPV is:

NPV is similar to the PV function (present value). The primary difference between PV and NPV is that PV allows cash flows to begin either at the end or at the beginning of the period. Unlike the variable NPV cash flow values, PV cash flows must be constant throughout the investment. For information about annuities and financial functions, see PV.

NPV is also related to the IRR function (internal rate of return). IRR is the rate for which NPV equals zero: NPV(IRR(...), ...)=0.

Examples

Suppose you're considering an investment in which you pay $10,000 one year from today and receive an annual income of $3000, $4200, and $6800 in the three years that follow. Assuming an annual discount rate of 10 percent, the net present value of this investment is:

NPV(10%, -10000, 3000, 4200, 6800) equals $1188.44

In the preceding example, you include the initial $10,000 cost as one of the values, because the payment occurs at the end of the first period.

Consider an investment that starts at the beginning of the first period. Suppose you're interested in buying a shoe store. The cost of the business is $40,000, and you expect to receive the following income for the first five years of operation: $8000, $9200, $10,000, $12,000, and $14,500. The annual discount rate is 8%. This might represent the rate of inflation or the interest rate of a competing investment.

If the cost and income figures from the shoe store are entered in B1 through B6 respectively, then net present value of the shoe store investment is given by:

NPV(8%, B2:B6)+B1 equals $1922.06

In the preceding example, you don't include the initial $40,000 cost as one of the values, because the payment occurs at the beginning of the first period.

Suppose your shoe store's roof collapses during the sixth year and you assume a loss of $9000 for that year. The net present value of the shoe store investment after six years is given by:

NPV(8%, B2:B6, -9000)+B1 equals -$3749.47


OCT2BIN

See Also

Converts an octal number to binary.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

OCT2BIN(number, places)

Number    is the octal number you want to convert. Number may not contain more than 10 characters. The most significant bit of number is the sign bit. The remaining 29 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Places    is the number of characters to use. If places is omitted, OCT2BIN uses the minimum number of characters necessary. Places is useful for padding the return value with leading 0s (zeros).

Remarks

If number is negative, OCT2BIN ignores places and returns a 10-character binary number.

If number is negative, it cannot be less than equal to 7777777000, and if number is positive, it cannot be greater than 777.

If number is not a valid octal number, OCT2BIN returns the #NUM! error value.

If OCT2BIN requires more than places characters, it returns the #NUM! error value.

If places is not an integer, it is truncated.

If places is non-numeric, OCT2BIN returns the #VALUE! error value.

If places is negative, OCT2BIN returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

OCT2BIN(3, 3) equals 011

OCT2BIN(7777777000) equals 1000000000


OCT2DEC

See Also

Converts an octal number to decimal.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

OCT2DEC(number)

Number    is the octal number you want to convert. Number may not contain more than 10 octal characters (30 bits). The most significant bit of number is the sign bit. The remaining 29 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Remarks

If number is not a valid octal number, OCT2DEC returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

OCT2DEC(54) equals 44

OCT2DEC(7777777533) equals -165


OCT2HEX

See Also

Converts an octal number to hexadecimal.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

OCT2HEX(number, places)

Number    is the octal number you want to convert. Number may not contain more than 10 octal characters (30 bits). The most significant bit of number is the sign bit. The remaining 29 bits are magnitude bits. Negative numbers are represented using two's-complement notation.

Places    is the number of characters to use. If places is omitted, OCT2HEX uses the minimum number of characters necessary. Places is useful for padding the return value with leading 0s (zeros).

Remarks

If number is negative, OCT2HEX ignores places and returns a 10-character hexadecimal number.

If number is not a valid octal number, OCT2HEX returns the #NUM! error value.

If OCT2HEX requires more than places characters, it returns the #NUM! error value.

If places is not an integer, it is truncated.

If places is non-numeric, OCT2HEX returns the #VALUE! error value.

If places is negative, OCT2HEX returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

OCT2HEX(100, 4) equals 0040

OCT2HEX(7777777533) equals FFFFFFFF5B


ODD

See Also

Returns number rounded up to the nearest odd integer.

Syntax

ODD(number)

Number    is the value to round.

Remarks

If number is non-numeric, ODD returns the #VALUE! error value.

Regardless of the sign of number, a value is rounded up when adjusted away from zero. If number is an odd integer, no rounding occurs.

Examples

ODD(1.5) equals 3

ODD(3) equals 3

ODD(2) equals 3

ODD(-1) equals -1

ODD(-2) equals -3


PI

See Also

Returns the number 3.14159265358979, the mathematical constant π, accurate to 15 digits.

Syntax

PI( )

Examples

PI()/2 equals 1.57079...

SIN(PI()/2) equals 1

If the radius of a circle is stored in a cell named Radius, the following macro formula calculates the area of the circle:

PI()*(Radius^2)


PMT

See Also

Returns the periodic payment for an annuity based on constant payments and a constant interest rate.

Syntax

PMT(rate, nper, pv, fv, type)

For a more complete description of the arguments in PMT, see PV.

Rate    is the interest rate per period.

Nper    is the total number of payment periods in an annuity.

Pv    is the present value—the total amount that a series of future payments is worth now.

Fv    is the future value, or a cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made. If fv is omitted, it is assumed to be 0 (the future value of a loan, for example, is 0).

Type    is the number 0 or 1 and indicates when payments are due.

Set type equal to	If payments are due

0 or omitted	At the end of the period

1	At the beginning of the period

Remarks

The payment returned by PMT includes principal and interest but no taxes, reserve payments, or fees sometimes associated with annuities.

Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying rate and nper. If you make monthly payments on a four-year loan at 12 percent annual interest, use 12%/12 for rate and 4*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 12% for rate and 4 for nper.

Tip	To find the total amount paid over the duration of the annuity, multiply the returned PMT value by nper.

Examples

The following macro formula returns the monthly payment on a $10,000 loan at an annual rate of 8% that you must pay off in 10 months:

PMT(8%/12, 10, 10000) equals -$1037.03

For the same loan, if payments are due at the beginning of the period, the payment is:

PMT(8%/12, 10, 10000, 0), 1) equals -$1030.16

The following macro formula returns the amount someone must pay to you each month if you loan that person $5000 at 12% and want to be paid back in five months:

PMT(12%/12, 5, -5000) equals $1030.20

Suppose you want to save $50,000 in 18 years by saving a constant amount each month. If you assume you'll be able to earn 6% interest on your savings, you can use PMT to determine how much to save each month:

PMT(6%/12, 18*12, 0), 50000) equals -$129.08

If you pay $129.08 into a 6% savings account every month for 18 years, you will have $50,000.


PPMT

See Also

Returns the payment on the principal for a given period for an investment based on periodic, constant payments and a constant interest rate.

Syntax

PPMT(rate, per, nper, pv, fv, type)

For a more complete description of the arguments in PPMT, see PV.

Rate    is the interest rate per period.

Per    specifies the period and must be in the range 1 to nper.

Nper    is the total number of payment periods in an annuity.

Pv    is the present value—the total amount that a series of future payments is worth now.

Fv    is the future value, or a cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made. If fv is omitted, it is assumed to be 0 (the future value of a loan, for example, is 0).

Type    is the number 0 or 1 and indicates when payments are due.

Set type equal to	If payments are due

0 or omitted	At the end of the period

1	At the beginning of the period

Remarks

Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying rate and nper. If you make monthly payments on a four-year loan at 12 percent annual interest, use 12%/12 for rate and 4*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 12% for rate and 4 for nper.

Examples

The following formula returns the principal payment for the first month of a two-year $2000 loan at 10% annual interest:

PPMT(10%/12, 1, 24, 2000) equals -$75.62

The following function returns the principal payment for the last year of a 10-year $200,000 loan at 8% annual interest:

PPMT(8%, 10, 10, 200000) equals -$27,598.05


PRODUCT

See Also

Multiplies all the numbers given as arguments and returns the product.

Syntax

PRODUCT(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 30 numbers that you want to multiply.

Remarks

Arguments that are numbers, logical values, or text representations of numbers are counted; arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers cause errors.

If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in the array or reference are counted. Empty cells, logical values, text, or error values in the array or reference are ignored.

Examples

If cells A2:C2 contain 5, 15, and 30:

PRODUCT(A2:C2) equals 2250

PRODUCT(A2:C2, 2) equals 4500


PV

See Also

Returns the present value of an investment. The present value is the total amount that a series of future payments is worth now. For example, when you borrow money, the loan amount is the present value to the lender.

Syntax

PV(rate, nper, pmt, fv, type)

Rate    is the interest rate per period. For example, if you obtain an automobile loan at a 10% annual interest rate and make monthly payments, your interest rate per month is 10%/12, or 0.83%. You would enter 10%/12, or 0.83%, or 0.0083, into the formula as the rate.

Nper    is the total number of payment periods in an annuity. For example, if you get a four-year car loan and make monthly payments, your loan has 4*12 (or 48) periods. You would enter 48 into the formula for nper.

Pmt    is the payment made each period and cannot change over the life of the annuity. Typically, pmt includes principal and interest but no other fees or taxes. For example, the monthly payments on a $10,000, four-year car loan at 12% are $263.33. You would enter -263.33 into the formula as the pmt.

Fv    is the future value, or a cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made. If fv is omitted, it is assumed to be 0 (the future value of a loan, for example, is 0). For example, if you want to save $50,000 to pay for a special project in 18 years, then $50,000 is the future value. You could then make a conservative guess at an interest rate and determine how much you must save each month.

Type    is the number 0 or 1 and indicates when payments are due.

Set type equal to	If payments are due

0 or omitted	At the end of the period

1	At the beginning of the period

Remarks

Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying rate and nper. If you make monthly payments on a four-year loan at 12% annual interest, use 12%/12 for rate and 4*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 12% for rate and 4 for nper.

The following functions apply to annuities:

CUMIPMT	PPMT

CUMPRINC	PV

FV	RATE

FVSCHEDULE	XIRR

IPMT	XNPV

PMT

An annuity is a series of constant cash payments made over a continuous period. For example, a car loan or a mortgage is an annuity. For more information, see the description for each annuity function.

In annuity functions, cash you pay out, such as a deposit to savings, is represented by a negative number; cash you receive, such as a dividend check, is represented by a positive number. For example, a $1000 deposit to the bank would be represented by the argument -1000 if you are the depositor and by the argument 1000 if you are the bank.

Microsoft Excel solves for one financial argument in terms of the others. If rate is not 0, then:

If rate is 0, then:

(pmt * nper) + pv + fv = 0

Example

Suppose you're thinking of buying an insurance annuity that pays $500 at the end of every month for the next 20 years. The cost of the annuity is $60,000 and the money paid out will earn 8%. You want to determine whether this would be a good investment. Using the PV function you find that the present value of the annuity is:

PV(0.08/12, 12*20, 500, , 0)) equals -$59,777.15

The result is negative because it represents money that you would pay, an outgoing cash flow. The present value of the annuity ($59,777.15) is less than what you are asked to pay ($60,000). Therefore, you determine this would not be a good investment.


QUOTIENT

See Also

Returns the integer portion of a division. Use this function when you want to discard the remainder of a division.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

QUOTIENT(numerator, denominator)

Numerator    is the dividend.

Denominator    is the divisor.

Remarks

If either argument is non-numeric, QUOTIENT returns the #VALUE! error value.

Examples

QUOTIENT(5, 2) equals 2

QUOTIENT(4.5, 3.1) equals 1

QUOTIENT(-10, 3) equals -3


RAND

See Also

Returns an evenly distributed random number greater than or equal to 0 and less than 1. A new random number is returned every time the worksheet is calculated.

Syntax

RAND( )

Remarks

To generate a random real number between a and b, use:

RAND()*(b-a)+a

If you want to use RAND to generate a random number but don't want the numbers to change every time the cell is calculated, you can enter =RAND() in the formula bar and press F9 (or COMMAND + = in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh) to change the formula to a random number.

Examples

To generate a random number greater than or equal to 0 but less than 100:

RAND()*100


RATE

See Also

Returns the interest rate per period of an annuity. RATE is calculated by iteration and can have zero or more solutions. If the successive results of RATE do not converge to within 0.0000001 after 20 iterations, RATE returns the #NUM! error value.

Syntax

RATE(nper, pmt, pv, fv, type, guess)

See PV for a complete description of the arguments nper, pmt, pv, fv, and type.

Nper    is the total number of payment periods in an annuity.

Pmt    is the payment made each period and cannot change over the life of the annuity. Typically, pmt includes principal and interest but no other fees or taxes.

Pv    is the present value—the total amount that a series of future payments is worth now.

Fv    is the future value, or a cash balance you want to attain after the last payment is made. If fv is omitted, it is assumed to be 0 (the future value of a loan, for example, is 0).

Type    is the number 0 or 1 and indicates when payments are due.

Set type equal to	If payments are due

0 or omitted	At the end of the period

1	At the beginning of the period

Guess    is your guess for what the rate will be.

If you omit guess, it is assumed to be 10%.

If RATE does not converge, try different values for guess. RATE usually converges if guess is between 0 and 1.

Remarks

Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying guess and nper. If you make monthly payments on a four-year loan at 12% annual interest, use 12%/12 for guess and 4*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 12% for guess and 4 for nper.

Example

To calculate the rate of a four-year $8000 loan with monthly payments of $200:

RATE(48, -200, 8000) equals 0.77%

This is the monthly rate, because the period is monthly. The annual rate is 0.77%*12, which equals 9.24%.


REPLACE

See Also

Replaces part of a text string with a different text string.

Syntax

REPLACE(old_text, start_num, num_chars, new_text)

Old_text    is text in which you want to replace some characters.

Start_num    is the position of the character in old_text that you want to replace with new_text.

Num_chars    is the number of characters in old_text that you want to replace with new_text.

New_text    is the text that will replace characters in old_text.

Examples

The following formula replaces five characters with new_text, starting with the sixth character in old_text:

REPLACE("abcdefghijk", 6, 5, "*") equals "abcde*k"

The sixth through tenth characters are all replaced by "*".

The following formula replaces the last two digits of 1990 with 91:

REPLACE("1990", 3, 2, "91") equals "1991"

If cell A2 contains "123456", then:

REPLACE(A2, 1, 3, "@") equals "@456"

If the RIGHT function returns "ABCDEF", then:

REPLACE(RIGHT(A3, 6), 1, 6, "*") equals "*"


REPT

See Also

Repeats text a given number of times. Use REPT to fill a cell with a number of instances of a text string.

Syntax

REPT(text, number_times)

Text    is the text you want to repeat.

Number_times    is a positive number specifying the number of times to repeat text. If number_times is 0, REPT returns "" (empty text). If number_times is not an integer, it is truncated. The result of the REPT function cannot be longer than 255 characters.

Tip	You can use this function to create a simple histogram on your worksheet.

Examples

REPT("*-", 3) equals "*-*-*-"

If A3 contains "Sales", then:

REPT($A$3, 2.9) equals "SalesSales"


RIGHT

See Also

Returns the last (or rightmost) character or characters in a text string.

Syntax

RIGHT(text, num_chars)

Text    is the text string containing the characters you want to extract.

Num_chars    specifies how many characters you want to extract.

Num_chars must be greater than or equal to zero.

If num_chars is greater than the length of text, RIGHT returns all of text.

If num_chars is omitted, it is assumed to be 1.

Examples

RIGHT("Sale Price", 5) equals "Price"

RIGHT("Stock Number") equals "r"

RIGHT is similar to LEFT; for more examples, see LEFT.


ROUND

See Also

Rounds a number to a specified number of digits.

Syntax

ROUND(number, num_digits)

Number    is the number you want to round.

Num_digits    specifies the number of digits to which you want to round number.

If num_digits is greater than 0, then number is rounded to the specified number of decimal places.

If num_digits is 0, then number is rounded to the nearest integer.

If num_digits is less than 0, then number is rounded to the left of the decimal point.

Examples

ROUND(2.15, 1) equals 2.2

ROUND(2.149, 1) equals 2.1

ROUND(-1.475, 2) equals -1.48

ROUND(21.5, -1) equals 20


SECOND

See Also

Returns the second corresponding to serial_number. The second is given as an integer in the range 0 to 59. Use SECOND to get the time in seconds indicated by a serial number.

Syntax

SECOND(serial_number)

Serial_number    is the date-time code used by Microsoft Excel for date and time calculations. You can give serial_number as text, such as "16:48:23" or "4:48:47 PM", instead of as a number. The text is automatically converted to a serial number. For more information on serial_number, see NOW.

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information, see NOW.

Examples

SECOND("4:48:18 PM") equals 18

SECOND(0.01) equals 24

SECOND(4.02) equals 48


SIGN

See Also

Determines the sign of a number. Returns 1 if number is positive, 0) if number is 0, and -1 if number is negative.

Syntax

SIGN(number)

Number    is any real number.

Examples

SIGN(10) equals 1

SIGN(4-4) equals 0

SIGN(-0.00001) equals -1


SIN

See Also

Returns the sine of the given angle.

Syntax

SIN(number)

Number    is the angle in radians for which you want the sine. If your argument is in degrees, multiply it by PI()/180 to convert it to radians.

Examples

SIN(PI()) equals 1.22E-16, which is approximately zero. The sine of π is zero.

SIN(PI()/2) equals 1

SIN(30*PI()/180) equals 0.5, the sine of 30 degrees


SINH

See Also

Returns the hyperbolic sine of a number.

Syntax

SINH(number)

Number    is any real number.

The formula for the hyperbolic sine is:

Examples

SINH(1) equals 1.175201194

SINH(-1) equals -1.175201194

You can use the hyperbolic sine function to approximate a cumulative probability distribution. Suppose a laboratory test value varies between 0 and 10 seconds. An empirical analysis of the collected history of experiments shows that the probability of obtaining a result, x, of less than t seconds is approximated by the following equation:

P(x<t) = 2.868 * SINH(0.0342 * t), where 0<t<10

To calculate the probability of obtaining a result of less than 1.03 seconds, substitute 1.03 for t:

2.868*SINH(0.0342*1.03) equals 0.101049063

You can expect this result to occur about 101 times for every 1000 experiments.


SLN

See Also

Returns the straight-line depreciation of an asset for one period.

Syntax

SLN(cost, salvage, life)

Cost    is the initial cost of the asset.

Salvage    is the value at the end of the depreciation (sometimes called the salvage value of the asset).

Life    is the number of periods over which the asset is being depreciated (sometimes called the useful life of the asset).

Example

Suppose you've bought a truck for $30,000 that has a useful life of 10 years and a salvage value of $7500. The depreciation allowance for each year is:

SLN(30000, 7500, 10) equals $2250


SQRT

Returns a positive square root.

Syntax

SQRT(number)

Number    is the number for which you want the square root. If number is negative, SQRT returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

SQRT(16) equals 4

SQRT(-16) equals #NUM!

SQRT(ABS(-16)) equals 4


SQRTPI

See Also

Returns the square root of (number * π).

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

SQRTPI(number)

Number    is the number by which pi is multiplied.

Remark

If number < 0, SQRTPI returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

SQRTPI(1) equals 1.772454

SQRTPI(2) equals 2.506628


SUBSTITUTE

See Also

Substitutes new_text for old_text in a text string. Use SUBSTITUTE when you want to replace specific text in a text string; use REPLACE when you want to replace any text that occurs in a specific location in a text string.

Syntax

SUBSTITUTE(text, old_text, new_text, instance_num)

Text    is the text or the reference to a cell containing text for which you want to substitute characters.

Old_text    is the text you want to replace.

New_text    is the text you want to replace old_text with.

Instance_num    specifies which occurrence of old_text you want to replace with new_text. If you specify instance_num, only that instance of old_text is replaced. Otherwise, every occurrence of old_text in text is changed to new_text.

Examples

SUBSTITUTE("Sales Data", "Sales", "Cost") equals "Cost Data"

SUBSTITUTE("Quarter 1, 1991", "1", "2", 1) equals "Quarter 2, 1991"

SUBSTITUTE("Quarter 1, 1991", "1", "2", 3) equals "Quarter 1, 1992"

To replace every occurrence of the text constant named Separator in the cell named CellCont2 with square brackets:

SUBSTITUTE(CellCont2, Separator, "] [")


SUM

See Also

Returns the sum of all the numbers in the list of arguments.

Syntax

SUM(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 30 arguments for which you want the sum.

Numbers, logical values, and text representations of numbers that you type directly into the list of arguments are counted. See the first and second examples following.

If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in that array or reference are counted. Empty cells, logical values, text, or error values in the array or reference are ignored. See the third example following.

Arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers cause errors.

Examples

SUM(3, 2) equals 5

SUM("3", 2, TRUE) equals 6 because the text values are translated into numbers, and the logical value TRUE is translated into the number 1.

Unlike the previous example, if A1 contains "3" and B1 contains TRUE, then:

SUM(A1, B1, 2) equals 2 because references to non-number values in references are not translated.

If cells A2:E2 contain 5, 15, 30, 40, and 50:

SUM(A2:C2) equals 50

SUM(B2:E2, 15) equals 150


SUMPRODUCT

See Also

Multiplies corresponding components in the given arrays and returns the sum of those products.

Syntax

SUMPRODUCT(array1, array2, array3, ...)

Array1, array2, array3,...    are 2 to 30 arrays whose components you want to multiply and then add.

The array arguments must have the same dimensions. If they do not, SUMPRODUCT returns the #VALUE! error value.

SUMPRODUCT treats array entries that are not numeric as if they were zeros.

Example

The following formula multiplies all the components of the two arrays in the preceding worksheet and then adds the products—that is, 3*2 + 4*7 + 8*6 + 6*7 + 1*5 + 9*3.

SUMPRODUCT({3,4;8,6;1,9}, {2,7;6,7;5,3}) equals 156

Remarks

The preceding example returns the same result as the formula SUM(A1:B3*D1:E3) entered as an array. Using arrays provides a more general solution for doing operations similar to SUMPRODUCT. For example, you can calculate the sum of the squares of the elements in A1:B3 by using the formula SUM(A1:B3^2) entered as an array.


SUMSQ

See Also

Returns the sum of the squares of the arguments.

Syntax

SUMSQ(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 30 arguments for which you want the sum of the squares. You can also use a single array or a reference to an array instead of arguments separated by commas.

Example

SUMSQ(3, 4) equals 25


SUMX2MY2

See Also

Returns the sum of the difference of squares of corresponding values in two arrays.

Syntax

SUMX2MY2(array_x, array_y)

Array_x    is the first array or range of values.

Array_y    is the second array or range of values.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If array_x and array_y have a different number of values, SUMX2MY2 returns the #N/A error value.

The equation for the sum of the difference of squares is:

Example

SUMX2MY2({2, 3, 9, 1, 8, 7, 5}, {6, 5, 11, 7, 5, 4, 4}) equals -55


SUMX2PY2

See Also

Returns the sum of the sum of squares of corresponding values in two arrays. The sum of the sum of squares is a common term in many statistical calculations.

Syntax

SUMX2PY2(array_x, array_y)

Array_x    is the first array or range of values.

Array_y    is the second array or range of values.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If array_x and array_y have a different number of values, SUMX2PY2 returns the #N/A error value.

The equation for the sum of the sum of squares is:

Example

SUMX2PY2({2, 3, 9, 1, 8, 7, 5}, {6, 5, 11, 7, 5, 4, 4}) equals 521


SUMXMY2

See Also

Returns the sum of squares of differences of corresponding values in two arrays.

Syntax

SUMXMY2(array_x, array_y)

Array_x    is the first array or range of values.

Array_y    is the second array or range of values.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If array_x and array_y have a different number of values, SUMXMY2 returns the #N/A error value.

The equation for the sum of squared differences is:

Example

SUMXMY2({2, 3, 9, 1, 8, 7, 5}, {6, 5, 11, 7, 5, 4, 4}) equals 79


T

See Also

Returns the text referred to by value.

Syntax

T(value)

Value    is the value you want to test. If value is or refers to text, T returns value. If value does not refer to text, T returns "" (empty text).

Remarks

You do not generally need to use the T function in a formula since Microsoft Excel automatically converts values as necessary. This function is provided for compatibility with other spreadsheet programs.

Examples

If B1 contains the text "Rainfall":

T(B1) equals "Rainfall"

If B2 contains the number 19:

T(B2) equals ""

T("True") equals "True"

T(TRUE) equals ""


TAN

See Also

Returns the tangent of the given angle.

Syntax

TAN(number)

Number    is the angle in radians for which you want the tangent. If your argument is in degrees, multiply it by PI()/180 to convert it to radians.

Examples

TAN(0.785) equals 0.99920

TAN(45*PI()/180) equals 1


TANH

See Also

Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number.

Syntax

TANH(number)

Number    is any real number

The formula for the hyperbolic tangent is:

Examples

TANH(-2) equals -0.96403

TANH(0) equals 0

TANH(0.5) equals 0.462117


TEXT

See Also

Converts a value to text in a specific number format.

Syntax

TEXT(value, format_text)

Value    is a numeric value, a formula that evaluates to a numeric value, or a reference to a cell containing a numeric value.

Format_text    is a number format in text form from the Number tab in the Cell Properties dialog box. Format_text cannot contain an asterisk (*) and cannot be "General".

Remarks

Formatting a cell with the command on the number tab from the format cells dialog box changes only the format, not the value. Using the TEXT function converts a value to formatted text, and the result is no longer calculated as a number.

Examples

TEXT(2.715, "$0.00") equals "$2.72"

TEXT("4/15/91", "mmmm dd, yyyy") equals "April 15, 1991"


TIME

See Also

Returns the serial number of a particular time. The serial number returned by TIME is a decimal fraction ranging from 0 to 0.99999999, representing the times from 0:00:00 (12:00:00 A.M.) to 23:59:59 (11:59:59 P.M.).

Syntax

TIME(hour, minute, second)

Hour    is a number from 0 to 23 representing the hour.

Minute    is a number from 0 to 59 representing the minute.

Second    is a number from 0 to 59 representing the second.

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information about date systems and serial numbers, see NOW.

Examples

TIME(12, 0), 0)) equals the serial number 0.5, which is equivalent to 12:00:00 P.M.

TIME(16, 48, 10) equals the serial number 0.700115741, which is equivalent to 4:48:10 P.M.

TEXT(TIME(23, 18, 14), "h:mm:ss AM/PM") equals "11:18:14 PM"


TIMEVALUE

See Also

Returns the serial number of the time represented by time_text. The serial number is a decimal fraction ranging from 0 to 0.99999999, representing the times from 0:00:00 (12:00:00 A.M.) to 23:59:59 (11:59:59 P.M.). Use TIMEVALUE to convert a time represented as text into a serial number.

Syntax

TIMEVALUE(time_text)

Time_text    is a text string that gives a time in any one of the Microsoft Excel time formats. Date information in time_text is ignored.

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information on date systems and serial numbers, see NOW.

Examples

TIMEVALUE("2:24 AM") equals 0.1

TIMEVALUE("22-Aug-55 6:35 AM") equals 0.274305556


TODAY

See Also

Returns the serial number of the current date. The serial number is the date-time code used by Microsoft Excel for date and time calculations. For more information about serial numbers, see NOW.

Syntax

TODAY( )


TRIM

See Also

Removes all spaces from text except for single spaces between words. Use TRIM on text that you have received from another application that may have irregular spacing.

Syntax

TRIM(text)

Text    is the text from which you want spaces removed.

Example

TRIM(" First   Quarter    Earnings   ") equals "First Quarter Earnings"


TRUE

See Also

Returns the logical value TRUE.

Syntax

TRUE( )

Remarks

You can enter the value TRUE directly into cells and formulas without using this function. The TRUE function is provided primarily for compatibility with other spreadsheet programs.


TRUNC

See Also

Truncates a number to an integer by removing the fractional part of the number.

Syntax

TRUNC(number, num_digits)

Number    is the number you want to truncate.

Num_digits    is a number specifying the precision of the truncation. The default value for num_digits is zero.

Remarks

TRUNC and INT are similar in that both return integers. TRUNC removes the fractional part of the number. INT rounds numbers down to the nearest integer based on the value of the fractional part of the number. INT and TRUNC are different only when using negative numbers: TRUNC(-4.3) returns -4, but INT(-4.3) returns -5, because -5 is the lower number.

Examples

TRUNC(8.9) equals 8

TRUNC(-8.9) equals -8

TRUNC(PI()) equals 3


VALUE

See Also

Converts text to a number.

Syntax

VALUE(text)

Text    is the text enclosed in quotation marks or a reference to a cell containing the text you want to convert. Text can be in any of the constant number, date, or time formats recognized by Microsoft Excel. If text is not in one of these formats, VALUE returns the #VALUE! error value.

Remarks

You do not generally need to use the VALUE function in a formula since Microsoft Excel automatically converts text to numbers as necessary. This function is provided for compatibility with other spreadsheet programs.

Examples

VALUE("$1, 0)00") equals 1,000

VALUE("16:48:00")-VALUE("12:00:00") equals "16:48:00"-"12:00:00" equals 0.2, the serial number equivalent to 4 hours and 48 minutes.


VDB

See Also

Returns the depreciation of an asset for any period you specify, including partial periods, using the double-declining balance method or some other method you specify. VDB stands for variable declining balance.

Syntax

VDB(cost, salvage, life, start_period, end_period, factor, no_switch)

Cost    is the initial cost of the asset.

Salvage    is the value at the end of the depreciation (sometimes called the salvage value of the asset).

Life    is the number of periods over which the asset is being depreciated (sometimes called the useful life of the asset).

Start_period    is the starting period for which you want to calculate the depreciation. Start_period must use the same units as life.

End_period    is the ending period for which you want to calculate the depreciation. End_period must use the same units as life.

Factor    is the rate at which the balance declines. If factor is omitted, it is assumed to be 2 (the double-declining balance method). Change factor if you do not want to use the double-declining balance method. For a description of the double-declining balance method, see DDB.

No_switch    is a logical value specifying whether to switch to straight-line depreciation when depreciation is greater than the declining balance calculation.

If no_switch is TRUE, Microsoft Excel does not switch to straight-line depreciation even when the depreciation is greater than the declining balance calculation.

If no_switch is FALSE or omitted, Microsoft Excel switches to straight-line depreciation when depreciation is greater than the declining balance calculation.

All arguments except no_switch must be positive numbers.

Examples

Suppose a factory purchases a new machine. The machine costs $2400 and has a lifetime of 10 years. The salvage value of the machine is $300. The following examples show depreciation over several periods. The results are rounded to two decimal places.

VDB(2400, 300, 3650, 0), 1) equals $1.32, the first day's depreciation. Microsoft Excel automatically assumes that  factor is 2.

VDB(2400, 300, 120, 0), 1) equals $40.00, the first month's depreciation.

VDB(2400, 300, 10, 0), 1) equals $480.00, the first year's depreciation.

VDB(2400, 300, 120, 6, 18) equals $396.31, the depreciation between the 6th month and the 18th month.

VDB(2400, 300, 120, 6, 18, 1.5) equals $311.81, the depreciation between the 6th month and the 18th month using a factor of 1.5 instead of the double-declining balance method.

Suppose instead that the $2400 machine is purchased in the middle of the first quarter of the fiscal year. The following macro formula determines the amount of depreciation for the first fiscal year that you own the asset, assuming that tax laws limit you to 150% depreciation of the declining balance:

VDB(2400, 300, 10, 0), 0).875, 1.5) equals $315.00


WEEKDAY

See Also

Returns the day of the week corresponding to serial_number. The day is given as an integer, ranging from 1 (Sunday) to 7 (Saturday).

Syntax

WEEKDAY(serial_number, return_type)

Serial_number    is the date-time code used by Microsoft Excel for date and time calculations. You can give serial_number as text, such as "15-Apr-1993" or "4-15-93", instead of as a number. The text is automatically converted to a serial number. For more information about serial_number, see NOW.

Return_type    is a number that determines the type of return value.

Return_type	Number returned

1 or omitted	Numbers 1 (Sunday) through 7 (Saturday). Behaves like previous versions of Microsoft Excel.

2	Numbers 1 (Monday) through 7 (Sunday)

3	Numbers 0 (Monday) through 6 (Sunday)

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information, see NOW.

You can also use the TEXT function to convert a value to a specified number format when using the 1900 Date System:

TEXT("4/16/90", "dddd") equals Monday

Examples

WEEKDAY("2/14/90") equals 4 (Wednesday)

If you are using the 1900 Date System (the default in Microsoft Excel for Windows), then:

WEEKDAY(29747.007) equals 4 (Wednesday)

If you are using the 1904 Date System (the default in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh), then:

WEEKDAY(29747.007) equals 3 (Tuesday)


WORKDAY

See Also

Returns the serial number date that is the indicated number of working days before or after start_date. Working days exclude weekends and any dates identified in holidays. Use WORKDAY to exclude weekends or holidays when you calculate invoice due dates, expected delivery times, or the number of days of work performed.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

WORKDAY(start_date, days, holidays)

Start_date    is a serial date number that represents the start date.

Days    is the number of nonweekend and non-holiday days before or after start_date. A positive value for days yields a future date; a negative value yields a past date.

Holidays    is an optional array of one or more serial date numbers to exclude from the working calendar, such as state and federal holidays and floating holidays.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, WORKDAY returns the #VALUE! error value.

If start_date is not a valid serial date number, WORKDAY returns the #NUM! error value.

If start_date plus days yields an invalid serial date number, WORKDAY returns the #NUM! error value.

If days is not an integer, it is truncated.

Examples

WORKDAY(DATEVALUE("01/03/91"), 5) equals 33248 or 01/10/91

If January 7, 1991 and January 8, 1991 are holidays, then:
WORKDAY(DATEVALUE("01/03/91"), 5, {33245, 33246}) equals 33252
or 01/14/91


YEAR

See Also

Returns the year corresponding to serial_number. The year is given as an integer in the range 1900-2078.

Syntax

YEAR(serial_number)

Serial_number    is the date-time code used by Microsoft Excel for date and time calculations. You can give serial_number as text, such as "15-Apr-1993" or "4-15-93", instead of as a number. The text is automatically converted to a serial number. For more information about serial_number, see NOW.

Remarks

Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different date systems as their default. For more information, see NOW.

Examples

YEAR("7/5/90") equals 1990

If you are using the 1900 Date System (the default in Microsoft Excel for Windows), then:

YEAR(0.007) equals 1900

YEAR(29747.007) equals 1981

If you are using the 1904 Date System (the default in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh), then:

YEAR(0.007) equals 1904

YEAR(29747.007) equals 1985


ACCRINT

See Also

Returns the accrued interest for a security that pays periodic interest.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

ACCRINT(issue, first_interest, settlement, rate, par, frequency, basis)

Issue    is the security's issue date, expressed as a serial date number.

First_interest    is the security's first interest date, expressed as a serial date number.

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Rate    is the security's annual coupon rate.

Par    is the security's par value. If you omit par, ACCRINT uses $1000.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, ACCRINT returns the #VALUE! error value.

Issue, first_interest, settlement, frequency, and basis are truncated to integers.

If issue, first_interest, or settlement is not a valid serial date number, ACCRINT returns the #NUM! error value.

If coupon ≤ 0 or if par ≤ 0, ACCRINT returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, ACCRINT returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, ACCRINT returns the #NUM! error value.

If issue ≥ settlement, ACCRINT returns the #NUM! error value.

ACCRINT is calculated as follows:

where:

Ai=number of accrued days for the ith quasi-coupon period within odd period.

NC=number of quasi-coupon periods that fit in odd period.  If this number contains a fraction, raise it to the next whole number.

NLi=normal length in days of the ith quasi-coupon period within odd period.

Example

A Treasury bond has the following terms:

February 28, 1993 issue date
May 1, 1993 settlement date
August 31, 1993 first interest date
10.0% coupon
$1000 par value
Frequency is semiannual
30/360 basis

The accrued interest (in the 1900 Date System) is:

ACCRINT(34028,34212,34090,0.1,1000,2,0) equals 16.85083.


ACCRINTM

See Also

Returns the accrued interest for a security that pays interest at maturity.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

ACCRINTM(issue, maturity, rate, par, basis)

Issue    is the security's issue date, expressed as a serial date number.

Settlement    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Rate    is the security's annual coupon rate.

Par    is the security's par value. If you omit par, ACCRINTM uses $1000.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Issue, settlement, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, ACCRINTM returns the #VALUE! error value.

If issue or settlement is not a valid serial date number, ACCRINTM returns the #NUM! error value.

If rate ≤ 0 or if par ≤ 0, ACCRINTM returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, ACCRINTM returns the #NUM! error value.

If issue ≥ settlement, ACCRINTM returns the #NUM! error value.

ACCRINTM is calculated as follows:

where:

A=Number of accrued days counted according to a monthly basis. For interest at maturity items, the number of days from the issue date to the maturity date is used.

D=Annual Year Basis.

Example

A note has the following terms:

April 1, 1993 issue date
June 15, 1993 maturity date
10.0% coupon
$1000 par value
Actual/365 basis

The accrued interest (in the 1900 Date System) is:

ACCRINTM(34060,34135,0.1,1000,3) equals 20.54795


COMPLEX

See Also

Converts real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number of the form x + yi or x + yj.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

COMPLEX(real_num, i_num, suffix)

Real_num    is the real coefficient of the complex number.

I_num    is the imaginary coefficient of the complex number.

Suffix    is the suffix for the imaginary component of the complex number. If omitted, suffix is assumed to be "i".

Note  All complex number functions accept "i" and "j" for suffix, but neither "I" nor "J". Using uppercase results in the #VALUE! error value. All functions that accept two or more complex numbers require that all suffixes match.

Remarks

If real_num is non-numeric, COMPLEX returns the #VALUE! error value.

If i_num is non-numeric, COMPLEX returns the #VALUE! error value.

If suffix is neither "i" nor "j", COMPLEX returns the #VALUE! error value.

Examples

COMPLEX(3,4) equals 3 + 4i

COMPLEX(3,4,"j") equals 3 + 4j

COMPLEX(0,1) equals i

COMPLEX(1,0) equals 1


COUPDAYBS

See Also

Returns the number of days from the beginning of the coupon period to the settlement date.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

COUPDAYBS(settlement, maturity, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

All arguments are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, COUPDAYBS returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, COUPDAYBS returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, COUPDAYBS returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, COUPDAYBS returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, COUPDAYBS returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

January 25, 1993 settlement date
November 15, 1994 maturity date
Semiannual coupon
Actual/actual basis

The number of days from the beginning of the coupon period to the settlement date (in the 1900 Date System) is:

COUPDAYBS(33994,34653,2,1) equals 71


COUPDAYS

See Also

Returns the number of days in the coupon period that contains the settlement date.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

COUPDAYS(settlement, maturity, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

All arguments are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, COUPDAYS returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, COUPDAYS returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, COUPDAYS returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, COUPDAYS returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, COUPDAYS returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

January 25, 1993 settlement date
November 15, 1994 maturity date
Semiannual coupon
Actual/actual basis

The number of days in the coupon period that contains the settlement date (in the 1900 Date System) is:

COUPDAYS(33994,34653,2,1) equals 181


COUPDAYSNC

See Also

Returns the number of days from the settlement date to the next coupon date.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

COUPDAYSNC(settlement, maturity, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

All arguments are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, COUPDAYSNC returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, COUPDAYSNC returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, COUPDAYSNC returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, COUPDAYSNC returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, COUPDAYSNC returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

January 25, 1993 settlement date
November 15, 1994 maturity date
Semiannual coupon
Actual/actual basis

The number of days from the settlement date to the next coupon date (in the 1900 Date System) is:

COUPDAYSNC(33994,34653,2,1) equals 110


COUPNCD

See Also

Returns the next coupon date after the settlement date.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

COUPNCD(settlement, maturity, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

All arguments are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, COUPNCD returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, COUPNCD returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, COUPNCD returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, COUPNCD returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, COUPNCD returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

January 25, 1993 settlement date
November 15, 1994 maturity date
Semiannual coupon
Actual/actual basis

The next coupon date after the settlement date (in the 1900 Date System) is:

COUPNCD(33994,34653,2,1) equals 34104 or May 15, 1993


COUPNUM

See Also

Returns the number of coupons payable between the settlement date and maturity date, rounded up to the nearest whole coupon.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

COUPNUM(settlement, maturity, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

All arguments are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, COUPNUM returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, COUPNUM returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, COUPNUM returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, COUPNUM returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, COUPNUM returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

January 25, 1993 settlement date
November 15, 1994 maturity date
Semiannual coupon
Actual/actual basis

The number of coupon payments (in the 1900 Date System) is:

COUPNUM(33994,34653,2,1) equals 4


COUPPCD

See Also

Returns the previous coupon date before the settlement date.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

COUPPCD(settlement, maturity, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

All arguments are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, COUPPCD returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, COUPPCD returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, COUPPCD returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, COUPPCD returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, COUPPCD returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

January 25, 1993 settlement date
November 15, 1994 maturity date
Semiannual coupon
Actual/actual basis

The previous coupon date before the settlement date (in the 1900 Date System) is:

COUPPCD(33994,34653,2,1) equals 33923 or November 15, 1992


CUMIPMT

See Also

Returns the cumulative interest paid on a loan between start_period and end_period.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

CUMIPMT(rate, nper, pv, start_period, end_period, type)

Rate    is the interest rate.

Nper    is the total number of payment periods.

Pv    is the present value.

Start_period    is the first period in the calculation. Payment periods are numbered beginning with 1.

End_period    is the last period in the calculation.

Type    is the timing of the payment.

Type	Timing

0	Payment at the end of the period

1	Payment at the beginning of the period

Remarks

Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying rate and nper. If you make monthly payments on a four-year loan at 12% annual interest, use 12%/12 for rate and 4*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 12% for rate and 4 for nper.

Nper, start_period, end_period, and type are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, CUMIPMT returns the #VALUE! error value.

If rate ≤ 0, nper ≤ 0, or pv ≤ 0, CUMIPMT returns the #NUM! error value.

If start_period < 1, end_period < 1, or start_period > end_period, CUMIPMT returns the #NUM! error value.

If type is any number other than 0 or 1, CUMIPMT returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A home mortgage loan has the following terms:

Interest rate, 9.00% per annum (rate = 9.00%  12 = 0.0075)
Term, 30 years (nper = 30  12 = 360)
Present value, $125,000

The total interest paid in the second year of payments (periods 13 through 24) is:

CUMIPMT(0.0075,360,125000,13,24,0) equals -11135.23

The interest paid in a single payment, in the first month, is:

CUMIPMT(0.0075,360,125000,1,1,0) equals -937.50


CUMPRINC

See Also

Returns the cumulative principal paid on a loan between start_period and end_period.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

CUMPRINC(rate, nper, pv, start_period, end_period, type)

Rate    is the interest rate.

Nper    is the total number of payment periods.

Pv    is the present value.

Start_period    is the first period in the calculation. Payment periods are numbered beginning with 1.

End_period    is the last period in the calculation.

Type    is the timing of the payment.

Type	Timing

0	Payment at the end of the period

1	Payment at the beginning of the period

Remarks

Make sure that you are consistent about the units you use for specifying rate and nper. If you make monthly payments on a four-year loan at 12% annual interest, use 12%/12 for rate and 4*12 for nper. If you make annual payments on the same loan, use 12% for rate and 4 for nper.

Nper, start_period, end_period, and type are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, CUMPRINC returns the #VALUE! error value.

If rate ≤ 0, nper ≤ 0, or pv ≤ 0, CUMPRINC returns the #NUM! error value.

If start_period < 1, end_period < 1, or start_period > end_period, CUMPRINC returns the #NUM! error value.

If type is any number other than 0 or 1, CUMPRINC returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A home mortgage loan has the following terms:

Interest rate, 9.00% per annum (rate = 9.00%  12 = 0.0075)
Term, 30 years (nper = 30  12 = 360)
Present value, $125,000

The total principal paid in the second year of payments (periods 13 through 24) is:

CUMPRINC(0.0075,360,125000,13,24,0) equals -934.1071

The principal paid in a single payment, in the first month, is:

CUMPRINC(0.0075,360,125000,1,1,0) equals -68.27827


DEGREES

See Also

Converts radians into degrees.

Syntax

DEGREES(angle)

Angle    is the angle in radians that you want to convert.

Example

DEGREES(PI()) equals 180


DISC

See Also

Returns the discount rate for a security.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

DISC(settlement, maturity, pr, redemption, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Pr    is the security's price per $100 face value.

Redemption    is the security's redemption value per $100 face value.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, DISC returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, DISC returns the #NUM! error value.

If pr ≤ 0 or if redemption ≤ 0, DISC returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, DISC returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, DISC returns the #NUM! error value.

DISC is calculated as follows:

Where:

B=number of days in a year, depending on the year basis.

DSM=number of days detween settlement and maturity.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

February 15, 1993 settlement date
June 10, 1993 maturity date
$97.975 price
$100 redemption value
Actual/360 basis

The bond discount rate (in the 1900 Date System) is:

DISC(34015,34130,97.975,100,2) equals 0.063391 or 6.3391%


DOLLARDE

See Also

Converts a dollar price expressed as a fraction into a dollar price expressed as a decimal number. Use DOLLARDE to convert fractional dollar numbers, such as securities prices, to decimal numbers.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

DOLLARDE(fractional_dollar, fraction)

Fractional_dollar    is a number expressed as a fraction.

Fraction    is the integer to use in the denominator of the fraction.

Remarks

If either argument is non-numeric, DOLLARDE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If fraction is not an integer, it is truncated.

If fraction ≤ 0, DOLLARDE returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

DOLLARDE(1.02,16) equals 1.125

DOLLARDE(1.1,8) equals 1.125


DOLLARFR

See Also

Converts a dollar price expressed as a decimal number into a dollar price expressed as a fraction. Use DOLLARFR to convert decimal numbers to fractional dollar numbers, such as securities prices.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

DOLLARFR(decimal_dollar, fraction)

Decimal_dollar    is a decimal number.

Fraction    is the integer to use in the denominator of a fraction.

Remarks

If either argument is non-numeric, DOLLARFR returns the #VALUE! error value.

If fraction is not an integer, it is truncated.

If fraction ≤ 0, DOLLARFR returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

DOLLARFR(1.125,16) equals 1.02

DOLLARFR(1.125,8) equals 1.1


DURATION

See Also

Returns the annual duration of a security with periodic interest payments. Duration is defined as the weighted average of the present value of the cash flows, and is used as a measure of a bond price's response to changes in yield.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

DURATION(settlement, maturity, coupon, yld, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Coupon    is the security's annual coupon rate.

Yld    is the security's annual yield.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, frequency, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, DURATION returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, DURATION returns the #NUM! error value.

If coupon < 0 or if yld < 0, DURATION returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, DURATION returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, DURATION returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, DURATION returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

January 1, 1986 settlement date
January 1, 1994 maturity date
8% coupon
9.0% yield
Frequency is semiannual
Actual/actual basis

The duration (in the 1900 Date System) is:

DURATION(31413,34335,0.08,0.09,2,1) equals 5.993775


EDATE

See Also

Returns the serial number date that is the indicated number of months before or after start_date. Use EDATE to calculate maturity dates or due dates that fall on the same day of the month as the date of issue.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

EDATE(start_date, months)

Start_date    is a serial date number that represents the start date.

Months    is the number of months before or after start_date. A positive value for months yields a future date; a negative value yields a past date.

Remarks

If either argument is non-numeric, EDATE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If start_date is not a valid serial date number, EDATE returns the #NUM! error value.

If months is not an integer, it is truncated.

Examples

EDATE(DATEVALUE("01/15/91"),1) equals 33284 or 02/15/91

EDATE(DATEVALUE("03/31/91"),-1) equals 33297 or 02/28/91


EFFECT

See Also

Returns the effective annual interest rate, given the nominal annual interest rate and the number of compounding periods per year.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

EFFECT(nominal_rate, npery)

Nominal_rate    is the nominal interest rate.

Npery    is the number of compounding periods per year.

Remarks

Npery is truncated to an integer.

If either argument is non-numeric, EFFECT returns the #VALUE! error value.

If nominal_rate ≤ 0 or if npery < 1, EFFECT returns the #NUM! error value.

EFFECT is calculated as follows:

Example

EFFECT(5.25%,4) equals 0.053543 or 5.3543%


FVSCHEDULE

See Also

Returns the future value of an initial principal after applying a series of compound interest rates. Use FVSCHEDULE to calculate future value of an investment with a variable or adjustable rate.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

FVSCHEDULE(principal, schedule)

Principal    is the present value.

Schedule    is an array of interest rates to apply.

Remarks

If principal is non-numeric, FVSCHEDULE returns the #VALUE! error value.

The values in schedule can be numbers or blank cells; any other value produces the #VALUE! error value for FVSCHEDULE. Blank cells are taken as zeros (no interest).

Example

FVSCHEDULE(1,{0.09,0.11,0.1}) equals 1.33089


IMABS

See Also

Returns the absolute value (modulus) of a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

IMABS(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the absolute value.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMABS returns the #NUM! error value.

The absolute value of a complex number is:

where:

z = x + yi

Example

IMABS("5+12i") equals 13


IMAGINARY

See Also

Returns the imaginary coefficient of a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

IMAGINARY(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the imaginary coefficient.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMAGINARY returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

IMAGINARY("3+4i") equals 4

IMAGINARY("0-j") equals -1

IMAGINARY(4) equals 0


IMARGUMENT

See Also

Returns the argument , an angle expressed in radians, such that:

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

IMARGUMENT(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the argument .

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMARGUMENT returns the #NUM! error value.

IMARGUMENT is calculated as follows:

where:

and

z = x + yi

Example

IMARGUMENT("3+4i") equals 0.927295


IMCONJUGATE

See Also

Returns the complex conjugate of a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

IMCONJUGATE(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the conjugate.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMCONJUGATE returns the #NUM! error value.

The conjugate of a complex number is:

Example

IMCONJUGATE("3+4i") equals 3 - 4i


IMCOS

See Also

Returns the cosine of a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

IMCOS(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the cosine.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not text, IMCOS returns the #VALUE! error value.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMCOS returns the #NUM! error value.

The cosine of a complex number is:

Example

IMCOS("1+i") equals 0.83373 - 0.988898i


IMDIV

See Also

Returns the quotient of two complex numbers in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

IMDIV(inumber1, inumber2)

Inumber1    is the complex numerator or dividend.

Inumber2    is the complex denominator or divisor.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber1 or inumber2 is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMDIV returns the #NUM! error value.

The quotient of two complex numbers is:

Example

IMDIV("-238+240i","10+24i") equals 5 + 12i


IMEXP

See Also

Returns the exponential of a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

IMEXP(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the exponential.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMEXP returns the #NUM! error value.

The exponential of a complex number is:

Example

IMEXP("1+i") equals 1.468694 + 2.287355i


IMLN

See Also

Returns the natural logarithm of a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

IMLN(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the natural logarithm.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMLN returns the #NUM! error value.

The natural logarithm of a complex number is:

where:

Example

IMLN("3+4i") equals 1.609438 + 0.927295i


IMLOG10

See Also

Returns the common logarithm (base 10) of a complex number in x + yi or
x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

IMLOG10(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the common logarithm.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMLOG10 returns the #NUM! error value.

The common logarithm of a complex number can be calculated from the natural logarithm as follows:

Example

IMLOG10("3+4i") equals 0.69897 + 0.402719i


IMLOG2

See Also

Returns the base-2 logarithm of a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

IMLOG2(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the base-2 logarithm.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMLOG2 returns the #NUM! error value.

The base-2 logarithm of a complex number can be calculated from the natural logarithm as follows:

Example

IMLOG2("3+4i") equals 2.321928 + 1.337804i


IMPOWER

See Also

Returns a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format raised to a power.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

IMPOWER(inumber, number)

Inumber    is a complex number you want to raise to a power.

Number    is the power to which you want to raise the complex number.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMPOWER returns the #NUM! error value.

If number is non-numeric, IMPOWER returns the #VALUE! error value.

Number can be either an integer, fractional or negative.

A complex number raised to a power is calculated as follows:

where:

and:

and:

Example

IMPOWER("2+3i", 3) equals -46 + 9i


IMPRODUCT

See Also

Returns the product of 2 to 29 complex numbers in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

IMPRODUCT(inumber1, inumber2,...)

Inumber1, inumber2    are 1 to 29 complex numbers to multiply.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber1 or inumber2 is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMPRODUCT returns the #NUM! error value.

The product of two complex numbers is:

Examples

IMPRODUCT("3+4i","5-3i") equals 27 + 11i

IMPRODUCT("1+2i",30) equals 30 + 60i


IMREAL

See Also

Returns the real coefficient of a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

IMREAL(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the real coefficient.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMREAL returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

IMREAL("6-9i") equals 6


IMSIN

See Also

Returns the sine of a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

IMSIN(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the sine.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMSIN returns the #NUM! error value.

The sine of a complex number is:

Example

IMSIN("3+4i") equals 3.853738 - 27.016813i


IMSQRT

See Also

Returns the square root of a complex number in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

IMSQRT(inumber)

Inumber    is a complex number for which you want the square root.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If inumber is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMSQRT returns the #NUM! error value.

The square root of a complex number is:

where:

and:

and:

Example

IMSQRT("1+i") equals 1.098684 + 0.45509i


IMSUB

See Also

Returns the difference of two complex numbers in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

IMSUB(inumber1, inumber2)

Inumber1    is the complex number from which to subtract inumber2.

Inumber2    is the complex number to subtract from inumber1.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If either number is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMSUB returns the #NUM! error value.

The difference of two complex numbers is:

Example

IMSUB("13+4i","5+3i") equals 8 + i


IMSUM

See Also

Returns the sum of two or more complex numbers in x + yi or x + yj text format.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

IMSUM(inumber1, inumber2,...)

Inumber1,inumber2,...    are 1 to 29 complex numbers to add.

Remarks

Use COMPLEX to convert real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number.

If any argument is not in the form x + yi or x + yj, IMSUM returns the #NUM! error value.

The sum of two complex numbers is:

Example

IMSUM("3+4i","5-3i") equals 8 + i


INTRATE

See Also

Returns the interest rate for a fully invested security.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

INTRATE(settlement, maturity, investment, redemption, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Investment    is the amount invested in the security.

Redemption    is the amount to be received at maturity.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, INTRATE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, INTRATE returns the #NUM! error value.

If investment ≤ 0 or if redemption ≤ 0, INTRATE returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, INTRATE returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, INTRATE returns the #NUM! error value.

INTRATE is calculated as follows:

Where:

B=number of days in a year, depending on the year basis.

DIM=number of days from settlement to maturity.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

February 15, 1993 settlement (issue) date
May 15, 1993 maturity date
1,000,000 investment
1,014,420 redemption value
Actual/360 basis

The bond discount rate (in the 1900 Date System) is:

INTRATE(34015,34104,1000000,1014420,2) equals 0.058328 or 5.8328%


MDURATION

See Also

Returns the modified Macauley duration for a security with an assumed par value of $100.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

MDURATION(settlement, maturity, coupon, yld, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Coupon    is the security's annual coupon rate.

Yld    is the security's annual yield.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, frequency, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, MDURATION returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, MDURATION returns the #NUM! error value.

If yld < 0 or if coupon < 0, MDURATION returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, MDURATION returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, MDURATION returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, MDURATION returns the #NUM! error value.

Modified duration is defined as follows:

Example

A bond has the following terms:

January 1, 1986 settlement date
January 1, 1994 maturity date
8.0% coupon
9.0% yield
Frequency is semiannual
Actual/actual basis

The modified duration (in the 1900 Date System) is:

MDURATION(31413,34335,0.08,0.09,2,1) equals 5.73567


NOMINAL

See Also

Returns the nominal annual interest rate given the effective rate and the number of compounding periods per year.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

NOMINAL(effect_rate, npery)

Effect_rate    is the effective interest rate.

Npery    is the number of compounding periods per year.

Remarks

Npery is truncated to an integer.

If either argument is non-numeric, NOMINAL returns the #VALUE! error value.

If effect_rate ≤ 0 or if npery < 1, NOMINAL returns the #NUM! error value.

NOMINAL is related to EFFECT as shown in the following equation:

Example

NOMINAL(5.3543%,4) equals 0.0525 or 5.25%


ODDFPRICE

See Also

Returns the price per $100 face value of a security having an odd (short or long) first period.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

ODDFPRICE(settlement, maturity, issue, first_coupon, rate, yld, redemption, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Issue    is the security's issue date, expressed as a serial date number.

First_coupon    is the security's first coupon date, expressed as a serial date number.

Rate    is the security's interest rate.

Yld    is the security's annual yield.

Redemption    is the security's redemption value per $100 face value.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, issue, first_coupon, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, ODDFPRICE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement, maturity, issue, or first_coupon is not a valid serial date number, ODDFPRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If rate < 0 or if yld < 0, ODDFPRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, ODDFPRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

The following date condition must be satisfied; otherwise, ODDFPRICE returns the #NUM! error value:

maturity > first_coupon > settlement > issue

ODDFPRICE is calculated as follows:

Odd short first coupon:

Where:

A = number of days from the beginning of the coupon period to the settlement date (accrued days).

DSC = number of days from the settlement to the next coupon date.

DFC = number of days from the the beginnning of the odd first coupon to the first coupon date.

E = number of days in the coupon period.

N = number of coupon payable between the settlement date and the redemption date. (If this number contains a fraction, it is raised to the next whole number).

Odd long first coupon:

Where:

Ai = number of days from begining of the ith quasi-coupon period within odd period.

DCi = number of days from dated date (or issue date) to first quasi-coupon (i=1) or number of days in quasi-coupon (i=2,..., i=NC).

DSC = number of days from settlement to next coupon date.

E = number of days in coupon period.

N = number of coupons payable between the first real coupon date and redemption date. (If this number contains a fraction, it is raised to the next whole number).

NC = number of quasi-coupon periods that fit in odd period. (if this number contains a fraction it will be raised to the next whole number).

NLi = normal length in days of the full ith quasi-coupon period within odd period.

Nq = number of whole quasi-coupon periods between settlement date and first coupon.

Example

A treasury bond has the following terms:

November 11, 1986 settlement date
March 1, 1999 maturity date
October 15, 1986 issue date
March 1, 1987 first coupon date
7.85% coupon
6.25% yield
$100 redemptive value
Frequency is semiannual
Actual/actual basis

the price per $100 face value of a security having an odd (short or long) first period (in the 1900 date system) is:

ODDFPRICE(31727,36220,31700,31837,0.0785,0.0625,100,2,1) equals 113.597717


ODDFYIELD

See Also

Returns the yield of a security that has an odd (short or long) first period.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

ODDFYIELD(settlement, maturity, issue, first_coupon, rate, pr, redemption, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date expressed as a serial date number.

Issue    is the security's issue date, expressed as a serial date number.

First_coupon    is the security's first coupon date, expressed as a serial date number.

Rate    is the security's interest rate.

Pr    is the security's price.

Redemption    is the security's redemption value per $100 face value.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, issue, first_coupon, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, ODDFYIELD returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement, maturity, issue, or first_coupon is not a valid serial date number, ODDFYIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If rate < 0 or if pr ≤ 0, ODDFYIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, ODDFYIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

The following date condition must be satisfied; otherwise, ODDFYIELD returns the #NUM! error value:

maturity > first_coupon > settlement > issue

Microsoft Excel uses an interative technique to calculate ODDFYIELD. This funcition uses the Newton method based on the formula used for the function ODDFPRICE. The yield is changed through 100 iterations until the estimated price with the given yield is close to the price.  See ODDFPRICE for the formula that ODDFYIELD uses.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

January 25, 1991 settlement date
January 1, 1996 maturity date
January 18, 1991 issue date
July 15, 1991 first coupon date
5.75% coupon
$84.50  price
$100 redemptive value
Frequency is semiannual
30/360 basis

The yield of a security that has an odd (short or long) first period is:

ODDFYIELD(33263,35065,33256,33434,0.0575,084.50,100,2,0) equals .09758 or 9.76%


ODDLPRICE

See Also

Returns the price per $100 face value of a security having an odd (short or long) last coupon period.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

ODDLPRICE(settlement, maturity, last_interest, rate, yld, redemption, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Last_interest    is the security's last coupon date, expressed as a serial date number.

Rate    is the security's interest rate.

Yld    is the security's annual yield.

Redemption    is the security's redemption value per $100 face value.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, last_interest, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, ODDLPRICE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement, maturity, or last_interest is not a valid serial date number, ODDLPRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If rate < 0 or if yld < 0, ODDLPRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, ODDLPRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

The following date condition must be satisfied; otherwise, ODDLPRICE returns the #NUM! error value:

maturity > settlement > last_interest

Example

A bond has the following terms:

February, 7, 1987 settlement date
June 15, 1987 maturity date
October 15, 1986 last interest date
3.75% coupon
4.05% yield
$100 redemptive value
Frequency is semiannual
30/360 basis

The price per $100 of a security having an odd (short or long) last coupon period is:

ODDLPRICE(31815,31943,31700,0.0375,0.0405,100,2,0) equals 99.87829


ODDLYIELD

See Also

Returns the yield of a security that has an odd (short or long) last period.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

ODDLYIELD(settlement, maturity, last_interest, rate, pr, redemption, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Last_interest    is the security's last coupon date, expressed as a serial date number.

Rate    is the security's interest rate.

Pr    is the security's price.

Redemption    is the security's redemption value per $100 face value.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, last_interest, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, ODDLYIELD returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement, maturity, or last_interest is not a valid serial date number, ODDLYIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If rate < 0 or if pr ≤ 0, ODDLYIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, ODDLYIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

The following date condition must be satisfied; otherwise, ODDLYIELD returns the #NUM! error value:

maturity > settlement > last_interest

ODDLYIELD is calculated as follows:

Where:

Ai = number of accrued days for the ith quasi-coupon period within odd period counting forward from last interest date before redemption.

DCi = number of days counted in each ith quasi-coupon period as delimited by the length of the actual coupon period.

NC = number of quasi-coupon periods that fit in odd period; if this number contains a fraction it will be raised to the next whole number.

NLi = normal length in days of the ith quasi-coupon period within odd coupon period.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

April 20, 1987 settlement date
June 15, 1987 maturity date
December 24, 1986 last interest date
3.75% coupon
$99.875 price
$100 redemptive value
Frequency is semiannual
30/360 basis

The yield of a security that has an odd (short or long) first period is:

ODDLYIELD(31887,31943,31770,0.0375,99.875,100,2,0) equals 0.045192.


PRICE

See Also

Returns the price per $100 face value of a security that pays periodic interest.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

PRICE(settlement, maturity, rate, yld, redemption, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Rate    is the security's annual coupon rate.

Yld    is the security's annual yield.

Redemption    is the security's redemption value per $100 face value.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, frequency, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, PRICE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, PRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If yld < 0 or if rate < 0, PRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If redemption ≤ 0, PRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, PRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, PRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, PRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

PRICE is calculated as follows:

Where:

DSC = number of days from settlement to next coupon date.

E = number of days in coupon period in which the settlement date falls.

N = number of coupons payable between settlement date and redemption date.

A = number of days from beginning of coupon period to settlement date.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

February 15, 1991 settlement date
November 15, 1999 maturity date
5.75% semiannual coupon
6.50% yield
$100 redemption value
Frequency in semiannual
30/360 basis

The bond price (in the 1900 Date System) is:

PRICE(33284,36479,0.0575,0.065,100,2,0) equals 95.04287


PRICEDISC

See Also

Returns the price per $100 face value of a discounted security.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

PRICEDISC(settlement, maturity, discount, redemption, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Discount    is the security's discount rate.

Redemption    is the security's redemption value per $100 face value.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, PRICEDISC returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, PRICEDISC returns the #NUM! error value.

If discount ≤ 0 or if redemption ≤ 0, PRICEDISC returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, PRICEDISC returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, PRICEDISC returns the #NUM! error value.

PRICEDISC is calculated as follows:

Where:

B = number of days in year, depending on year basis.

DSM = number of days from settlement to maturity.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

February 15, 1993 settlement date
March 1, 1993 maturity date
5.25% discount rate
$100 redemption value
Actual/360 basis

The bond price (in the 1900 Date System) is:

PRICEDISC(34015,34029,0.0525,100,2) equals 99.79583


PRICEMAT

See Also

Returns the price per $100 face value of a security that pays interest at maturity.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

PRICEMAT(settlement, maturity, issue, rate, yld, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Issue    is the security's issue date, expressed as a serial date number.

Rate    is the security's interest rate at date of issue.

Yld    is the security's annual yield.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US )NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, issue, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, PRICEMAT returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement, maturity, or issue is not a valid serial date number, PRICEMAT returns the #NUM! error value.

If rate < 0 or if yld < 0, PRICEMAT returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, PRICEMAT returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, PRICEMAT returns the #NUM! error value.

PRICEMAT is calculated as follows:

Where:

B = number of days in year, depending on year basis.

DSM = number of days from settlement to maturity.

DIM = number of days from issue to maturity.

A = number of days from issue to settlement.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

February 15, 1993 settlement date
April 13, 1993 maturity date
November 11, 1992 issue date
6.1% semiannual coupon
6.1% yield
30/360 basis

The price (in the 1900 Date System) is:

PRICEMAT(34015,34072,33919,0.061,0.061,0) equals 99.98449888


RADIANS

See Also

Converts degrees to radians.

Syntax

RADIANS(angle)

Angle    is an angle in degrees that you want to convert.

Example

RADIANS(270) equals 4.712389 (3π/2 radians)


RANDBETWEEN

See Also

Returns a random number between the numbers you specify. A new random number is returned every time the worksheet is calculated.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

RANDBETWEEN(bottom, top)

Bottom    is the smallest integer RANDBETWEEN will return.

Top    is the largest integer RANDBETWEEN will return.


RECEIVED

See Also

Returns the amount received at maturity for a fully invested security.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

RECEIVED(settlement, maturity, investment, discount, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Investment    is the amount invested in the security.

Discount    is the security's discount rate.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, RECEIVED returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, RECEIVED returns the #NUM! error value.

If investment ≤ 0 or if discount ≤ 0, RECEIVED returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, RECEIVED returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, RECEIVED returns the #NUM! error value.

RECEIVED is calculated as follows:

Where:

B = number of days in a year, depending on the year basis.

DIM = number of days from issue to maturity.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

February 15, 1993 settlement (issue) date
May 15, 1993 maturity date
1,000,000 investment
5.75% discount rate
Actual/360 basis

The total amount to be receivedat maturity(in the 1900 Date System) is:

RECEIVED(34015,34104,1000000,0.0575,2) equals 1,014,420.266


SERIESSUM

See Also

Returns the sum of a power series based on the formula:

Many functions can be approximated by a power series expansion.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

SERIESSUM(x, n, m, coefficients)

X    is the input value to the power series.

N    is the initial power to which you want to raise x.

M    is the step by which to increase n for each term in the series.

Coefficients    is a set of coefficients by which each successive power of x is multiplied. The number of values in coefficients determines the number of terms in the power series. For example, if there are three values in coefficients, then there will be three terms in the power series.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, SERIESSUM returns the #VALUE! error value.

Example

Given that cell A1 contains the formula =PI()/4, and cells E1:E4 contain the following set of values for coefficients (calculated using the FACT function):

The following macro formula returns an approximation to the cosine of π/4 radians (45 degrees):

SERIESSUM(A1,0,2,E1:E4) equals .707103


TBILLEQ

See Also

Returns the bond-equivalent yield for a Treasury bill.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

TBILLEQ(settlement, maturity, discount)

Settlement    is the Treasury bill's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the Treasury bill's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Discount    is the Treasury bill's discount rate.

Remarks

Settlement and maturity are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, TBILLEQ returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, TBILLEQ returns the #NUM! error value.

If discount ≤ 0, TBILLEQ returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement > maturity, or if maturity is more than one year after settlement, TBILLEQ returns the #NUM! error value.

TBILLEQ is calucated as TBILLEQ = (365 x rate)/360-(rate x DSM), where DSM is the number of days between settlement and maturity computed according to the 360 days per year basis.

Example

A Treasury bill has the following terms:

March 31, 1993 settlement date
June 1, 1993 maturity date
9.14% discount rate

The bond equivalent yield for a treasury bill (in the 1900 Date System) is:

TBILLEQ(34059,34121,0.0914) equals 0.094151 or 9.4151%


TBILLPRICE

See Also

Returns the price per $100 face value for a Treasury bill.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

TBILLPRICE(settlement, maturity, discount)

Settlement    is the Treasury bill's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the Treasury bill's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Discount    is the Treasury bill's discount rate.

Remarks

Settlement and maturity are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, TBILLPRICE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, TBILLPRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If discount ≤ 0, TBILLPRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement > maturity, or if maturity is more than one year after settlement, TBILLPRICE returns the #NUM! error value.

TBILLPRICE is calculated as follows:

Where:

DSM = number of days from settlement to maturity, excluding any maturity date that is more than one calendar year after the settlement date.

Example

A Treasury bill has the following terms:

March 31, 1993 settlement date
June 1, 1993 maturity date
9% discount rate

The Treasury bill price (in the 1900 Date System) is:

TBILLPRICE(34059,34121,0.09) equals 98.45


TBILLYIELD

See Also

Returns the yield for a Treasury bill.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

TBILLYIELD(settlement, maturity, pr)

Settlement    is the Treasury bill's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the Treasury bill's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Pr    is the Treasury bill's price per $100 face value.

Remarks

Settlement and maturity are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, TBILLYIELD returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, TBILLYIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If pr ≤ 0, TBILLYIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, or if maturity is more than one year after settlement, TBILLYIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

TBILLYIELD is calculated as follows:

Where:

DSM = number of days from settlement to maturity, excluding any maturity date that is more than one calendar year after the settlement date.

Example

A Treasury bill has the following terms:

March 31, 1993 settlement date
June 1, 1993 maturity date
98.45 price per $100 face value

The Treasury bill yield (in the 1900 Date System) is:

TBILLYIELD(34059,34121,98.45) equals 9.1417%


XIRR

See Also

Returns the internal rate of return for a schedule of cash flows that is not necessarily periodic.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

XIRR(values, dates, guess)

Values    is a series of cash flows that correspond to a schedule of payments in dates. The first payment is optional, and corresponds to a cost or payment that occurs at the beginning of the investment. All succeeding payments are discounted based on a 365-day year.

Dates    is a schedule of payment dates that corresponds to the cash flow payments. The first payment date indicates the beginning of the schedule of payments. All other dates must be later than this date, but they may occur in any order.

Guess    is a number that you guess is close to the result of XIRR.

Remarks

Numbers in dates are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, XIRR returns the #VALUE! error value.

XIRR expects at least one positive cash flow and one negative cash flow; otherwise, XIRR returns the #NUM! error value.

If any number in dates is not a valid serial date number, XIRR returns the #NUM! error value.

If any number in dates precedes the starting date, XIRR returns the #NUM! error value.

If values and dates contain a different number of values, XIRR returns the #NUM! error value.

In most cases you do not need to provide guess for the XIRR calculation. If omitted, guess is assumed to be 0.1 (10%).

XIRR is closely related to XNPV, the net present value function. The rate of return calculated by XIRR is the interest rate corresponding to XNPV = 0.

Microsoft Excel uses an iterative technique for calculating XIRR. Using a changing rate (starting with guess), XIRR cycles through the calculation until the result is accurate within 0.000001%. If XIRR can't find a result that works after 100 tries, the #NUM! error value is returned.  The rate is changed until:

Where:

di = the ith payment date.

d1 = the 0th payment date.

Pi = the ith payment.

Example

Consider an investment that requires a $10,000 cash payment on January 1, 1992, and returns $2750 on March 1, 1992, $4250 on October 30, 1992, $3250 on February 15, 1993, and $2750 on April 1, 1993. The internal rate of return (in the 1900 Date System) is:

XIRR({-10000,2750,4250,3250,2750},
{33604,33664,33907,34015,34060},0.1) equals 0.373363 or 37.3363%


XNPV

See Also

Returns the net present value for a schedule of cash flows that is not necessarily periodic.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

XNPV(rate, values, dates)

Rate    is the discount rate to apply to the cash flows.

Values    is a series of cash flows that correspond to a schedule of payments in dates. The first payment is optional, and corresponds to a cost or payment that occurs at the beginning of the investment. All succeeding payments are discounted based on a 365-day year.

Dates    is a schedule of payment dates that corresponds to the cash flow payments. The first payment date indicates the beginning of the schedule of payments. All other dates must be later than this date, but they may occur in any order.

Remarks

Numbers in dates are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, XNPV returns the #VALUE! error value.

If any number in dates is not a valid serial date number, XNPV returns the #NUM! error value.

If any number in dates precedes the starting date, XNPV returns the #NUM! error value.

If values and dates contain a different number of values, XNPV returns the #NUM! error value.

XNPV is calculated as follows:

Where:

di = the ith payment date.

d1 = the 0th payment date.

Pi = the ith payment.

Example

Consider an investment that requires a $10,000 cash payment on January 1, 1992, and returns $2750 on March 1, 1992, $4250 on October 30, 1992, $3250 on February 15, 1993, and $2750 on April 1, 1993. Assume that the cash flows are discounted at 9%. The net present value is:

XNPV(0.09,{-10000,2750,4250,3250,2750},{33604,33664,33907,34015,34060}) equals 2086.647602


YEARFRAC

See Also

Returns the year fraction representing the number of whole days between start_date and end_date. Use YEARFRAC to identify the proportion of a whole year's benefits or obligations to assign to a specific term.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

YEARFRAC(start_date, end_date, basis)

Start_date    is a serial date number that represents the start date.

End_date    is a serial date number that represents the end date.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

All arguments are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, YEARFRAC returns the #VALUE! error value.

If start_date or end_date are not valid serial date numbers, YEARFRAC returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, YEARFRAC returns the #NUM! error value.

Examples

YEARFRAC(DATEVALUE("01/01/93"),DATEVALUE("06/30/93"),0) equals 0.5

YEARFRAC(DATEVALUE("01/01/93"),DATEVALUE("07/01/93"),3) equals 0.49863


YIELD

See Also

Returns the yield on a security that pays periodic interest. Use YIELD to calculate bond yield.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

YIELD(settlement, maturity, rate, pr, redemption, frequency, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Rate    is the security's annual coupon rate.

Pr    is the security's price per $100 face value.

Redemption    is the security's redemption value per $100 face value.

Frequency    is the number of coupon payments per year. For annual payments, frequency = 1; for semiannual, frequency = 2; for quarterly, frequency = 4.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, frequency, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, YIELD returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, YIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If rate < 0, YIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If pr ≤ 0 or if redemption ≤ 0, YIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If frequency is any number other than 1, 2, or 4, YIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, YIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, YIELD returns the #NUM! error value.

If there is one coupon period or less until redemption, YIELD is calculated as follows:

Where:

A = number of days from the beginning of the coupon period to the settlement date (accrued days).

DSR = number of days from the settlement date to the redemption date.

E = number of days in the coupon period.

If there is more than one coupon period until redemption, YIELD is calculated through a hundred iterations. The resolution uses the Newton method based on the formula used for the function PRICE. The yield is changed until the estimated price given the yield is close to price.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

February 15, 1991 settlement date
November 15, 1999 maturity date
5.75% coupon
95.04287 price
$100 redemption value
Frequency is semiannual
30/360 basis

The bond yield (in the 1900 Date System) is:

YIELD(33284,36479,0.0575,95.04287,100,2,0) equals 0.065 or 6.5%


YIELDDISC

See Also

Returns the annual yield for a discounted security.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

YIELDDISC(settlement, maturity, pr, redemption, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Pr    is the security's price per $100 face value.

Redemption    is the security's redemption value per $100 face value.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, YIELDDISC returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement or maturity is not a valid serial date number, YIELDDISC returns the #NUM! error value.

If pr ≤ 0 or if redemption ≤ 0, YIELDDISC returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, YIELDDISC returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, YIELDDISC returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

February 15, 1993 settlement date
March 1, 1993 maturity date
99.795 price
$100 redemption value
Actual/360 basis

The bond yield (in the 1900 Date System) is:

YIELDDISC(34015,34029,99.795,100,2) equals 5.2823%


YIELDMAT

See Also

Returns the annual yield of a security that pays interest at maturity.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

YIELDMAT(settlement, maturity, issue, rate, pr, basis)

Settlement    is the security's settlement date, expressed as a serial date number.

Maturity    is the security's maturity date, expressed as a serial date number.

Issue    is the security's issue date, expressed as a serial date number.

Rate    is the security's interest rate at date of issue.

Pr    is the security's price per $100 face value.

Basis    is the type of day count basis to use.

Basis	Day count basis

0 or omitted	US (NASD) 30/360

1	Actual/actual

2	Actual/360

3	Actual/365

4	European 30/360

Remarks

Settlement, maturity, issue, and basis are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, YIELDMAT returns the #VALUE! error value.

If settlement, maturity, or issue is not a valid serial date number, YIELDMAT returns the #NUM! error value.

If rate < 0 or if pr ≤ 0, YIELDMAT returns the #NUM! error value.

If basis < 0 or if basis > 4, YIELDMAT returns the #NUM! error value.

If settlement ≥ maturity, YIELDMAT returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

A bond has the following terms:

March 15, 1993 settlement date
November 3, 1993 maturity date
November 8, 1992 issue date
6.25% semiannual coupon
100.0123 price
30/360 basis

The yield (in the 1900 Date System) is:

YIELDMAT(34043,34276,33916,0.0625,100.0123,0) equals 0.060954 or 6.0954%


BETADIST

See Also

Returns the cumulative beta probability density function. The cumulative beta probability density function is commonly used to study variation in the percentage of something across samples, such as the fraction of the day people spend watching television.

Syntax

BETADIST(x, alpha, beta, A, B)

X    is the value between A and B at which to evaluate the function.

Alpha    is a parameter to the distribution.

Beta    is a parameter to the distribution.

A    is an optional lower bound to the interval of x.

B    is an optional upper bound to the interval of x.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, BETADIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If alpha ≤ 0 or beta ≤ 0, BETADIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If x < A, x > B, or A = B, BETADIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If you omit values for A and B, BETADIST uses the standard cumulative beta distribution, so that A = 0 and B = 1.

Example

BETADIST(2,8,10,1,3) equals 0.685470581


BETAINV

See Also

Returns the inverse of the cumulative beta probability density function. That is, if probability = BETADIST(x,...), then BETAINV(probability,...) = x. The cumulative beta distribution can be used in project planning to model probable completion times given an expected completion time and variability.

Syntax

BETAINV(probability, alpha, beta, A, B)

Probability    is a probability associated with the beta distribution.

Alpha    is a parameter to the distribution.

Beta    is a parameter to the distribution.

A    is an optional lower bound to the interval of x.

B    is an optional upper bound to the interval of x.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, BETAINV returns the #VALUE! error value.

If alpha ≤ 0 or beta ≤ 0, BETAINV returns the #NUM! error value.

If probability ≤ 0 or probability > 1, BETAINV returns the #NUM! error value.

If you omit values for A and B, BETAINV uses the standard cumulative beta distribution, so that A = 0 and B = 1.

BETAINV uses an iterative technique for calculating the function. Given a probability value, BETAINV iterates until the result is accurate to within ±3x10-7. If BETAINV does not converge after 100 iterations, the function returns the #N/A error value.

Example

BETAINV(0.685470581,8,10,1,3) equals 2


BINOMDIST

See Also

Returns the individual term binomial distribution probability. Use BINOMDIST in problems with a fixed number of tests or trials, when the outcomes of any trial are only success or failure, when trials are independent, and when the probability of success is constant throughout the experiment. For example, BINOMDIST can calculate the probability that two of the next three babies born are male.

Syntax

BINOMDIST(number_s, trials, probability_s, cumulative)

Number_s    is the number of successes in trials.

Trials    is the number of independent trials.

Probability_s    is the probability of success on each trial.

Cumulative    is a logical value that determines the form of the function. If cumulative is TRUE, then BINOMDIST returns the cumulative distribution function, which is the probability that there are at most number_s successes; if FALSE, it returns the probability mass function, which is the probability that there are number_s successes.

Remarks

Number_s and trials are truncated to integers.

If number_s, trials, or probability_s is non-numeric, BINOMDIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If number_s < 0 or number_s > trials, BINOMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If probability_s < 0 or probability_s > 1, BINOMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

The binomial probability mass function is:

where:

is COMBIN(n,x).

The cumulative binomial distribution is:

Example

The flip of a coin can only result in heads or tails. The probability of the first flip being heads is 0.5, and the probability of exactly 6 of 10 flips being heads is:

BINOMDIST(6,10,0.5,FALSE) equals 0.205078


CHIDIST

See Also

Returns the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared distribution. The χ2 distribution is associated with a χ2 test. Use the χ2 test to compare observed and expected values. For example, a genetic experiment might hypothesize that the next generation of plants will exhibit a certain set of colors. By comparing the observed results with the expected ones, you can decide if your original hypothesis is valid.

Syntax

CHIDIST(x, degrees_freedom)

X    is the value at which you want to evaluate the distribution.

Degrees_freedom    is the number of degrees of freedom.

Remarks

If either argument is non-numeric, CHIDIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If x is negative, CHIDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If degrees_freedom is not an integer, it is truncated.

If degrees_freedom < 1 or degrees_freedom ≥ 1010, CHIDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

CHIDIST * mergeformat is calculated as cHIDIST = P(X>x), where X is a χ2  random variable.

Example

CHIDIST(18.307,10) equals 0.050001


CHIINV

See Also

Returns the inverse of the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared distribution. If probability = CHIDIST(x,…), then CHIINV(probability,…) = x. Use this funciton to compare observed results with expected ones to decide if your original hypothesis is valid.

Syntax

CHIINV(probability, degrees_freedom)

Probability    is a probability associated with thechi-squared distribution.

Degrees_freedom    is the number of degrees of freedom.

Remarks

If either argument is non-numeric, CHIINV returns the #VALUE! error value.

If probability < 0 or probability > 1, CHIINV returns the #NUM! error value.

If degrees_freedom is not an integer, it is truncated.

If degrees_freedom < 1 or degrees_freedom ≥ 10^10, CHIINV returns the #NUM! error value.

CHIINV uses an iterative technique for calculating the function. Given a probability value, CHIINV iterates until the result is accurate to within ± 3x10^-7. If CHIINV does not converge after 100 iterations, the function returns the #N/A error value.

Example

CHIINV(0.05,10) equals 18.30703


CHITEST

See Also

Returns the test for independence. CHITEST returns the value from the chi-squared (χ2) distribution for the statistic and the appropriate degrees of freedom. You can use χ2 tests to determine if hypothesized results are verified by an experiment.

Syntax

CHITEST(actual_range, expected_range)

Actual_range    is the range of data that contains observations to test against expected values.

Expected_range    is the range of data that contains the ratio of the product of row totals and column totals to the grand total.

Remarks

If actual_range and expected_range have a different number of data points, CHITEST returns the #N/A error value.

The χ2 test first calculates a χ2 statistic and then sums the differences of actual values from the expected values.  The equation for this function is CHITEST=p( X>χ2 ), where:

and where:

Aij = actual frequency in the i-th row, j-th column

Eij = expected frequency in the i-th row, j-th column

r = number or rows

c = number of columns

CHITEST returns the probability for a χ2 statistic and degrees of freedom, df, where df = (r - 1)(c - 1).

Example

The χ2 statistic for the data above is 16.16957 with 2 degrees of freedom.

CHITEST(B3:C5,B9:C11) equals 0.000308


CONFIDENCE

See Also

Returns the confidence interval for a population mean. The confidence interval is a range on either side of a sample mean. For example, if you order a product through the mail, you can determine, with a particular level of confidence, the earliest and latest the product should arrive.

Syntax

CONFIDENCE(alpha, standard_dev, size)

Alpha    is the significance level used to compute the confidence level. The confidence level equals 100(1 - alpha)%, or in other words, an alpha of 0.05 indicates a 95% confidence level.

Standard_dev    is the population standard deviation for the data range, and is assumed to be known.

Size    is the sample size.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, CONFIDENCE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If alpha ≤ 0 or alpha ≥ 1, CONFIDENCE returns the #NUM! error value.

If standard_dev ≤ 0, CONFIDENCE returns the #NUM! error value.

If size is not an integer, it is truncated.

If size < 1, CONFIDENCE returns the #NUM! error value.

If we assume alpha equals 0.05, we need to calculate the area under the standard normal curve that equals (1 - alpha), or 95%. This value is ± 1.96. The confidence interval is therefore:

Example

Suppose we observe that, in our sample of 50 commuters, the average length of travel to work is 30 minutes with a population standard deviation of 2.5. We can be 95 percent confident that the population mean is in the interval:

or:

CONFIDENCE(0.05,2.5,50) equals 0.692951.

= 30 ± 0.692951 minutes,

= 29.3 to 30.7 minutes.


CORREL

See Also

Returns the correlation coefficient of the array1 and array2 cell ranges. Use the correlation coefficient to determine the relationship between two properties. For example, you can examine the relationship between a location's average temperature and the use of air conditioners.

Syntax

CORREL(array1, array2)

Array1    is a cell range of values.

Array2    is a second cell range of values.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If array1 and array2 have a different number of data points, CORREL returns the #N/A error value.

If either array1 or array2 are empty, or if s (the standard deviation) of their values equals zero, CORREL returns the #DIV/0! error value.

The equation for the correlation coefficient is:

where:

and:

Example

CORREL({3,2,4,5,6},{9,7,12,15,17}) equals 0.997054


CRITBINOM

See Also

Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is greater than or equal to a criterion value. Use this function for quality assurance applications. For example, use CRITBINOM to determine the greatest number of defective parts that are allowed to come off an assembly line run without rejecting the entire lot.

Syntax

CRITBINOM(trials, probability_s, alpha)

Trials    is the number of Bernoulli trials.

Probability_s    is the probability of a success on each trial.

Alpha    is the criterion value.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, CRITBINOM returns the #VALUE! error value.

If trials is not an integer, it is truncated.

If trials < 0, CRITBINOM returns the #NUM! error value.

If probability_s is < 0 or probability_s > 1, CRITBINOM returns the #NUM! error value.

If alpha < 0 or alpha > 1, CRITBINOM returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

CRITBINOM(6,0.5,0.75) equals 4


Database Functions

See Also

This section describes the 12 worksheet functions used for Microsoft Excel database (or list) calculations. Each of these functions, referred to collectively as Dfunction, uses three arguments: database, field, and criteria. These arguments refer to the worksheet ranges that are used in the database function.

Syntax

Dfunction(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

In all database functions, if the database reference is to a cell inside a pivot table, then the calculation is done on only the pivot table data.

A Microsoft Excel database is a contiguous range of cells organized into records (rows) and fields (columns). The database reference can be entered as a cell range, or as a name assigned to a range.

Tips

You can use any range that includes field headings at the top of each row of data as the database argument. This is useful if you want to perform Dfunction calculations on more than one range of data on a worksheet.

When you use a field heading, you must use double quotation marks.

If all you want to do is generate subtotals within your list, use SUBTOTALinstead of these database functions.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function. Database fields are columns of data with an identifying field name in the first row. The field argument can be given as text, such as "Age" or "Yield" in the example database table below or as a field number: 1 for the first field (Tree), in the example below), 2 for the second (Height), and so on.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria. The criteria reference can be entered as a cell range, such as A9:F10 in the example database table below, or as a name assigned to a range.

Tips

You can use any range for the criteria argument, as long as it includes at least one field name and at least one cell below the field name for specifying a criteria comparison value.

For example, if the range G1:G2 contains the field heading Income in G1 and the amount 10,000 in G2, you could define the range as MatchIncome and use that name as the criteria argument in your database functions.

To perform an operation on an entire column in a database, enter a blank line below the field names in the criteria range.

Examples

The following illustration shows a database for a small orchard. Each record contains information about one tree. The database is defined as A1:E7, and the criteria are defined as A9:F11.

DCOUNT(Database,"Age",A9:F10) equals 1. This function looks at the records of apple trees between a height of 10 and 16 and counts how many of the Age fields in those records contain numbers.

DCOUNTA(Database,"Profit",A9:F10) equals 1.  This function looks at the records of apple trees between a height of 10 and 16 and counts how many of the Profit fields in those records are not blank.

DMAX(Database,"Profit",A9:A11) equals $105.00, the maximum profit of apple and pear trees.

DMIN(Database,"Profit",A9:B10) equals $75.00, the minimum profit of apple trees over 10.

DSUM(Database,"Profit",A9:A10) equals $225.00, the total profit from apple trees.

DSUM(Database,"Profit",A9:F10) equals $75.00, the total profit from apple trees with a height between 10 and 16.

DPRODUCT(Database,"Yield",A9:F10) equals 10, the product of the yields from apple trees with a height between 10 and 16.

DAVERAGE(Database,"Yield",A9:B10) equals 12, the average yield of apple trees over 10 feet in height.

DAVERAGE(Database,3,Database) equals 13, the average age of all trees in the database.

DSTDEV(Database,"Yield",A9:A11) equals 2.97, the estimated standard deviation in the yield of apple and pear trees if the data in the database is only a sample of the total orchard population.

DSTDEVP(Database,"Yield",A9:A11) equals 2.65, the true standard deviation in the yield of apple and pear trees if the data in the database is the entire population.

DVAR(Database,"Yield",A9:A11) equals 8.8, the estimated variance in the yield of apple and pear trees if the data in the database is only a sample of the total orchard population.

DVARP(Database,"Yield",A9:A11) equals 7.04, the true variance in the yield of apple and pear trees if the data in the database is the entire orchard population.

DGET(Database,"Yield",Criteria) returns the #NUM! error value because more than one record meets the criteria.


DAVERAGE

See Also

Averages the values in the field column of records in the database which match the criteria.

Syntax

DAVERAGE(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.


DB

See Also

Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the fixed-declining balance method.

Syntax

DB(cost, salvage, life, period, month)

Cost    is the initial cost of the asset.

Salvage    is the value at the end of the depreciation (sometimes called the salvage value of the asset).

Life    is the number of periods over which the asset is being depreciated (sometimes called the useful life of the asset).

Period    is the period for which you want to calculate the depreciation. Period must use the same units as life.

Month    is the number of months in the first year. If month is omitted, it is assumed to be 12.

Remarks

The fixed-declining balance method computes depreciation at a fixed rate. DB uses the following formulas to calculate depreciation for a period:

(cost - total depreciation from prior periods) * rate

where:

rate = 1 - ((salvage / cost) ^ (1 / life)), rounded to three decimal places

Depreciation for the first and last periods are special cases. For the first period, DB uses this formula:

cost * rate * month / 12

For the last period, DB uses this formula:

((cost - total depreciation from prior periods) * rate * (12 - month)) / 12

Examples

Suppose a factory purchases a new machine. The machine costs $1,000,000 and has a lifetime of six years. The salvage value of the machine is $100,000. The following examples show depreciation over the life of the machine. The results are rounded to whole numbers.

DB(1000000,100000,6,1,7) equals $186,083
DB(1000000,100000,6,2,7) equals $259,639
DB(1000000,100000,6,3,7) equals $176,814
DB(1000000,100000,6,4,7) equals $120,411
DB(1000000,100000,6,5,7) equals $82,000
DB(1000000,100000,6,6,7) equals $55,842
DB(1000000,100000,6,7,7) equals $15,845


DCOUNT

See Also

Counts the cells that contain numbers that match the criteria in the field column of records in the database.

The field argument is optional. If field is omitted, DCOUNT counts all records in the database which match the criteria.

Syntax

DCOUNT(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.


DCOUNTA

See Also

Counts the cells that are not blank and that satisfy the criteria in the field column of records in the database.

Syntax

DCOUNTA(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.


DDB

See Also

Returns the depreciation of an asset for a spcified period using the double-declining balance method or some other method you specify.

Syntax

DDB(cost, salvage, life, period, factor)

Cost    is the initial cost of the asset.

Salvage    is the value at the end of the depreciation (sometimes called the salvage value of the asset).

Life    is the number of periods over which the asset is being depreciated (sometimes called the useful life of the asset).

Period    is the period for which you want to calculate the depreciation. Period must use the same units as life.

Factor    is the rate at which the balance declines. If factor is omitted, it is assumed to be 2 (the double-declining balance method).

All five arguments must be positive numbers.

Remarks

The double-declining balance method computes depreciation at an accelerated rate. Depreciation is highest in the first period and decreases in successive periods. DDB uses the following formula to calculate depreciation for a period:

cost - salvage(total depreciation from prior periods) * factor / life

Change factor if you do not want to use the double-declining balance method.

Examples

Suppose a factory purchases a new machine. The machine costs $2400 and has a lifetime of 10 years. The salvage value of the machine is $300. The following examples show depreciation over several periods. The results are rounded to two decimal places.

DDB(2400,300,3650,1) equals $1.32, the first day's depreciation. Microsoft Excel automatically assumes that  factor is 2.

DDB(2400,300,120,1,2) equals $40.00, the first month's depreciation.

DDB(2400,300,10,1,2) equals $480.00, the first year's depreciation.

DDB(2400,300,10,2,1.5) equals $306.00, the second year's depreciation using a factor of 1.5 instead of the double-declining balance method.

DDB(2400,300,10,10) equals $22.12, the 10th year's depreciation. Microsoft Excel automatically assumes that  factor is 2.


DEVSQ

See Also

Returns the sum of squares of deviations of data points from their sample mean.

Syntax

DEVSQ(number1, number2, ...)

Number1,number2,...    are 1 to 30 arguments for which you want to calculate the sum of squared deviations. You can also use a single array or a reference to an array instead of arguments separated by commas.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

The equation for the sum of squared deviations is:

Example

DEVSQ(4,5,8,7,11,4,3) equals 48


DGET

See Also

Extracts single values from a database. Use DGET to extract a single field that matches the criteria from a database.

Syntax

DGET(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.

Remarks

If no record matches the criteria, DGET returns the #VALUE! error value.

If more than one record matches the criteria, DGET returns the #NUM! error value.


  DPRODUCT

See Also

Multiplies the values in the field column of records in the database that match the criteria.

Syntax

DPRODUCT(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.


DMAX

See Also

Returns the largest number in the field column of records in the database that match the criteria.

Syntax

DMAX(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.


DSTDEV

See Also

Estimates the standard deviation of a population based on a sample, using the numbers in the field column of records in the database that match the criteria.

Syntax

DSTDEV(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.


DSTDEVP

See Also

Calculates the standard deviation of a population based on the entire population, using the numbers in the field column of records in the database that match the criteria.

Syntax

DSTDEVP(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.


DSUM

See Also

Adds the numbers in the field column of records in the database that match the criteria.

Syntax

DMAX(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.


DMIN

See Also

Returns the smallest number in the field column of records in the database that match the criteria.

Syntax

DMIN(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.


DVAR

See Also

Estimates the variance of a population based on a sample, using the numbers in the field column of records in the database that match the criteria.

Syntax

DVAR(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.


DVARP

See Also

Calculates the variance of a population based on the entire population, using the numbers in the field column of records in the database that match the criteria.

Syntax

DVARP(database, field, criteria)

Database    is the range of cells that make up the database.

Field    indicates which field is used in the function.

Criteria    is the range of cells that contains the database criteria.


EXPONDIST

See Also

Returns the exponential distribution. Use EXPONDIST to model the time between events, such as how long an automated bank teller takes to deliver cash. For example, you can use EXPONDIST to determine the probability that the process takes at most one minute.

Syntax

EXPONDIST(x, lambda, cumulative)

X    is the value of the function.

Lambda    is the parameter value.

Cumulative    is a logical value that indicates which form of the exponential function to provide. If cumulative is TRUE, EXPONDIST returns the cumulative distribution function; if FALSE, it returns the probability density function.

Remarks

If x or lambda is non-numeric, EXPONDIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If x < 0, EXPONDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If lambda ≤ 0, EXPONDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

The equation for the probability density function is:

The equation for the cumulative distribution function is:

Examples

EXPONDIST(0.2,10,TRUE) equals 0.864665

EXPONDIST(0.2,10,FALSE) equals 1.353353


FDIST

See Also

Returns the F probability distribution. You can use this function to determine whether two data sets have different degrees of diversity. For example, you can examine test scores given to men and women entering high school and determine if the variability in the females is different from that found in the males.

Syntax

FDIST(x, degrees_freedom1, degrees_freedom2)

X    is the value at which to evaluate the function.

Degrees_freedom1    is the numerator degrees of freedom.

Degrees_freedom2    is the denominator degrees of freedom.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, FDIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If x is negative, FDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If degrees_freedom1 or degrees_freedom2 is not an integer, it is truncated.

If degrees_freedom1 < 1 or degrees_freedom1 ≥ 1010, FDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If degrees_freedom2 < 1 or degrees_freedom2 ≥ 1010, FDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

FDIST is calculated as FDIST=P( F<x ), where F is a random variable that has an F distribution.

Example

FDIST(15.20675,6,4) equals 0.01


FINV

See Also

Returns the inverse of the F probability distribution. If p = FDIST(x,...), then FINV(p,...) = x.

The F distribution can be used in an F-test that compares the degree of variability in two data sets. For example, you can analyze income distributions in the United States and Canada to determine whether the two countries have a similar degree of diversity.

Syntax

FINV(probability, degrees_freedom1, degrees_freedom2)

Probability    is a probability associated with the F cumulative distribution.

Degrees_freedom1    is the numerator degrees of freedom.

Degrees_freedom2    is the denominator degrees of freedom.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, FINV returns the #VALUE! error value.

If probability < 0 or probability > 1, FINV returns the #NUM! error value.

If degrees_freedom1 or degrees_freedom2 is not an integer, it is truncated.

If degrees_freedom1 < 1 or degrees_freedom1 ≥ 10^10, FINV returns the #NUM! error value.

If degrees_freedom2 < 1 or degrees_freedom2 ≥ 10^10, FINV returns the #NUM! error value.

FINV can be used to return critical values from the F distribution. For example, the output of an ANOVA calculation often includes data for the F statistic, F probability, and F critical value at the 0.05 significance level. To return the critical value of F, use the significance level as the probability argument to FINV.

FINV uses an iterative technique for calculating the function. Given a probability value, FINV iterates until the result is accurate to within ± 3x10^-7. If FINV does not converge after 100 iterations, the function returns the #N/A error value.

Example

FINV(0.01,6,4) equals 15.20675


FISHER

See Also

Returns the Fisher transformation at x. This transformation produces a function that is approximately normally distributed rather than skewed. Use this function to perform hypothesis testing on the correlation coefficient.

Syntax

FISHER(x)

X    is a numeric value for which you want the transformation.

Remarks

If x is non-numeric, FISHER returns the #VALUE! error value.

If x ≤ -1 or if x ≥ 1, FISHER returns the #NUM! error value.

The equation for the Fisher transformation is:

Example

FISHER(0.75) equals 0.972955


FISHERINV

See Also

Returns the inverse of the Fisher transformation. Use this transformation when analyzing correlations between ranges or arrays of data. If y = FISHER(x), then FISHERINV(y) = x.

Syntax

FISHERINV(y)

Y    is the value for which you want to perform the inverse of the transformation.

Remarks

If y is non-numeric, FISHERINV returns the #VALUE! error value.

The equation for the inverse of the Fisher transformation is:

Example

FISHERINV(0.972955) equals 0.75


FORECAST

See Also

Returns a predicted value for x based on a linear regression of known x- and y-arrays or ranges of data. You can use this function to predict future sales, inventory requirements, or consumer trends.

Syntax

FORECAST(x, known_y's, known_x's)

X    is the data point for which you want to predict a value.

Known_y's    is the dependent array or range of data.

Known_x's    is the independent array or range of data.

Remarks

If x is non-numeric, FORECAST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If known_y's and known_x's are empty or contain a different number of data points, FORECAST returns the #N/A error value.

If the variance of known_x's equals zero, then FORECAST returns the #DIV/0! error value.

The equation for FORECAST  is a+bx, where:

and:

Example

FORECAST(30,{6,7,9,15,21},{20,28,31,38,40}) equals 10.60725


FREQUENCY

See Also

Returns a frequency distribution as a vertical array. For a given set of values and a given set of bins (or intervals), a frequency distribution counts how many of the values occur in each interval.

Syntax

FREQUENCY(data_array, bins_array)

Data_array    is an array of or reference to a set of values for which you want to count frequencies. If data_array contains no values, FREQUENCY returns an array of zeros.

Bins_array    is an array of or reference to intervals into which you want to group the values in data_array. If bins_array contains no values, FREQUENCY returns the number of elements in data_array.

Remarks

FREQUENCY is entered as an array formula after selecting a range of adjacent cells into which you want the returned distribution to appear.

The number of elements in the returned array is one more than the number of elements in bins_array.

FREQUENCY ignores blank cells and text.

Formulas that return arrays must be entered as array formulas.

Example

Suppose a worksheet lists scores for a test.  The scores are 79, 85, 78, 85, 83, 81, 95, 88, 97, and are entered into A1:A9, respectively. The data_array would contain a column of these test scores. The Bins_array would be another column of intervals by which the test scores are grouped.  In this example, Bins_array would be C4:C6 and would contain the values 70, 79, 89. When entered as an array, you could use FREQUENCY to count the number of scores corresponding to the letter grade ranges 0-70, 71-79, 80-89, and 90-100.This example assumes all test scores are integers.  The following formula is entered as an array formula after selecting four vertical cells adjacent to your data.

FREQUENCY(A1:A9,C4:C6) equals {0;2;5;2}


FTEST

See Also

Returns the result of an F-test. An F-test returns the one-tailed probability that the variances in array1 and array2 are not significantly different. Use this function to determine if two samples have different variances. For example, given test scores from public and private schools, you can test if these schools have different levels of diversity.

Syntax

FTEST(array1, array2)

Array1    is the first array or range of data.

Array2    is the second array or range of data.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If the number of data points in array1 or array2 is less than 2, or if the variance of array1 or array2 is zero, FTEST returns the #DIV/0! error value.

Example

FTEST({6,7,9,15,21},{20,28,31,38,40}) equals 0.648318


GAMMADIST

See Also

Returns the gamma distribution. You can use this function to study variables that may have a skewed distribution. The gamma distribution is commonly used in queuing analysis.

Syntax

GAMMADIST(x, alpha, beta, cumulative)

X    is the value at which you want to evaluate the distribution.

Alpha    is a parameter to the distribution.

Beta    is a parameter to the distribution. If beta = 1, GAMMADIST returns the standard gamma distribution.

Cumulative    is a logical value that determines the form of the function. If cumulative is TRUE, GAMMADIST returns the cumulative distribution function; if FALSE, it returns the probability mass function.

Remarks

If x, alpha, or beta is non-numeric, GAMMADIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If x < 0, GAMMADIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If alpha ≤ 0 or if beta ≤ 0, GAMMADIST returns the #NUM! error value.

The equation for the gamma distribution is:

The standard gamma distribution is:

When alpha = 1, GAMMADIST returns the exponential distribution with:

For a positive integer n, when alpha = n/2, beta = 2, and cumulative = TRUE, GAMMADIST returns (1 - CHIDIST(x)) with n degrees of freedom.

When alpha is a positive integer, GAMMADIST is also known as the Erlang distribution.

Examples

GAMMADIST(10,9,2,FALSE) equals 0.032639

GAMMADIST(10,9,2,TRUE) equals 0.068094


GAMMAINV

See Also

Returns the inverse of the gamma cumulative distribution. If p = GAMMADIST(x,...), then GAMMAINV(p,...) = x

You can use this function to study a variable whose distribution may be skewed.

Syntax

GAMMAINV(probability, alpha, beta)

Probability    is the probability associated with the gamma distribution.

Alpha    is a parameter to the distribution.

Beta    is a parameter to the distribution. If beta = 1, GAMMAINV returns the standard gamma distribution.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, GAMMAINV returns the #VALUE! error value.

If probability < 0 or probability > 1, GAMMAINV returns the #NUM! error value.

If alpha ≤ 0 or if beta ≤ 0, GAMMAINV returns the #NUM! error value.

If beta ≤ 0, GAMMAINV returns the #NUM! error value.

GAMMAINV uses an iterative technique for calculating the function. Given a probability value, GAMMAINV iterates until the result is accurate to within ±3x10^-7. If GAMMAINV does not converge after 100 iterations, the function returns the #N/A error value.

Example

GAMMAINV(0.068094,9,2) equals 10


GAMMALN

See Also

Returns the natural logarithm of the gamma function, Γ(x).

Syntax

GAMMALN(x)

X    is the value for which you want to calculate GAMMALN.

Remarks

If x is non-numeric, GAMMALN returns the #VALUE! error value.

If x ≤ 0, GAMMALN returns the #NUM! error value.

The number e raised to the GAMMALN(i) power, where i is an integer, returns the same result as (i - 1)!.

GAMMALN is calculated as follows:

where:

Examples

GAMMALN(4) equals 1.791759

EXP(GAMMALN(4)) equals 6 or (4 - 1)!


GEOMEAN

See Also

Returns the geometric mean of an array or range of positive data. For example, you can use GEOMEAN to calculate average growth rate given compound interest with variable rates.

Syntax

GEOMEAN(number1, number2, ...)

Number1,number2,...    are 1 to 30 arguments for which you want to calculate the mean. You can also use a single array or a reference to an array instead of arguments separated by commas.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If any data point ≤ 0, GEOMEAN returns the #NUM! error value.

The equation for the geometric mean is:

Example

GEOMEAN(4,5,8,7,11,4,3) equals 5.476987


GROWTH

See Also

Fits an exponential curve to the data known_y's and known_x's, and returns the y-values along that curve for the array of new_x's that you specify.

Syntax

GROWTH(known_y's, known_x's, new_x's, const)

Known_y's    is the set of y-values you already know in the relationship y = b*m^x.

If the array known_y's is in a single column, then each column of known_x's is interpreted as a separate variable.

If the array known_y's is in a single row, then each row of known_x's is interpreted as a separate variable.

If any of the numbers in known_y's is 0 or negative, GROWTH returns the #NUM! error value.

Known_x's    is an optional set of x-values that you may already know in the relationship y = b*m^x.

The array known_x's can include one or more sets of variables. If only one variable is used, known_y's and known_x's can be ranges of any shape, as long as they have equal dimensions. If more than one variable is used, known_y's must be a vector (that is, a range with a height of one row or a width of one column).

If known_x's is omitted, it is assumed to be the array {1,2,3,...} that is the same size as known_y's.

New_x's    are new x-values for which you want GROWTH to return corresponding y-values.

New_x's must include a column (or row) for each independent variable, just as known_x's does. So, if known_y's is in a single column, known_x's and new_x's should have the same number of columns. If known_y's is in a single row, known_x's and new_x's should have the same number of rows.

If new_x's is omitted, it is assumed to be the same as known_x's.

If both known_x's and new_x's are omitted, they are assumed to be the array {1,2,3,...} that is the same size as known_y's.

Const    is a logical value specifying whether to force the constant b to equal 1.

If const is TRUE or omitted, b is calculated normally.

If const is FALSE, b is set equal to 1 and the m-values are adjusted so that y = m^x.

Remarks

Formulas that return arrays must be entered as array formulas after selecting the correct number of cells.

When entering an array constant for an argument such as known_x's, use commas to separate values in the same row and semicolons to separate rows.

Examples

This example uses the same data as the LOGEST example. The sales for the 11th through the 16th months are 33,100, 47,300, 69,000, 102,000, 150,000, and 220,000 units, respectively. Assume that these values are entered into six cells named UnitsSold.

When entered as an array formula, the following macro formula predicts sales for months 17 and 18 based on sales for the previous six months:

GROWTH(UnitsSold,{11;12;13;14;15;16},{17;18}) equals {320,197;468,536}

If the exponential trend continues, sales for months 17 and 18 will be 320197 and 468536 units, respectively.

You could use other sequential numbers for the x-value arguments, and the predicted sales would be the same. For example, you could use the default value for known_x's, {1;2;3;4;5;6}:

GROWTH(UnitsSold,,{7;8},) equals {320197;468536}


HARMEAN

See Also

Returns the harmonic mean of a data set. The harmonic mean is the reciprocal of the arithmetic mean of reciprocals.

Syntax

HARMEAN(number1, number2, ...)

Number1,number2,...    are 1 to 30 arguments for which you want to calculate the mean. You can also use a single array or a reference to an array instead of arguments separated by commas.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If any data point ≤ 0, HARMEAN returns the #NUM! error value.

The harmonic mean is always less than the geometric mean, which is always less than the arithmetic mean.

The equation for the harmonic mean is:

Example

HARMEAN(4,5,8,7,11,4,3) equals 5.028376


HYPGEOMDIST

See Also

Returns the hypergeometric distribution. HYPGEOMDIST returns the probability of a given number of sample successes, given the sample size, population successes, and population size. Use HYPGEOMDIST for problems with a finite population, where each observation is either a success or a failure, and where each subset of a given size is chosen with equal likelihood.

Syntax

HYPGEOMDIST(sample_s, number_sample, population_s, number_population)

Sample_s    is the number of successes in the sample.

Number_sample    is the size of the sample.

Population_s    is the number of successes in the population.

Number_population    is the population size.

Remarks

All arguments are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, HYPGEOMDIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If sample_s < 0 or sample_s is greater than the lesser of number_sample or population_s, HYPGEOMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If sample_s is less than the larger of 0 or (number_sample - number_population + population_s), HYPGEOMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If number_sample < 0 or number_sample > number_population, HYPGEOMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If population_s < 0 or population_s > number_population, HYPGEOMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If number_population < 0, HYPGEOMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

The equation for the hypergeometric distribution is:

where:

x = sample_s

n = number_sample

M = population_s

N = number_population

HYPGEOMDIST is used in sampling without replacement from a finite population.

Example

A sampler of chocolates contains 20 pieces. Eight pieces are caramels, and the remaining 12 are nuts. If a person selects 4 pieces at random, the following function returns the probability that exactly 1 piece is a caramel.

HYPGEOMDIST(1,4,8,20) equals 0.363261


KURT

See Also

Returns the kurtosis of a data set. Kurtosis characterizes the relative peakedness or flatness of a distribution compared to the normal distribution. Positive kurtosis indicates a relatively peaked distribution. Negative kurtosis indicates a relatively flat distribution.

Syntax

KURT(number1, number2, ...)

Number1,number2,...    are 1 to 30 arguments for which you want to calculate kurtosis. You can also use a single array or a reference to an array instead of arguments separated by commas.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If there are less than four data points, or if the standard deviation of the sample equals zero, KURT returns the #DIV/0! error value.

Kurtosis is defined as:

where:

s is the sample standard deviation.

Example

KURT(3,4,5,2,3,4,5,6,4,7) returns -0.1518


LARGE

See Also

Returns the k-th largest value in a data set. You can use this function to select a value based on its relative standing. For example, you can use LARGE to return the highest, runner-up, or third-place score.

Syntax

LARGE(array, k)

Array    is the array or range of data for which you want to determine the k-th largest value.

K    is the position (from the largest) in the array or cell range of data to return.

Remarks

If array is empty, LARGE returns the #NUM! error value.

If k ≤ 0 or if k is greater than the number of data points, LARGE returns the #NUM! error value.

If n is the number of data points in a range, then LARGE(array,1) returns the largest value and LARGE(array,n) returns the smallest value.

Examples

LARGE({3,4,5,2,3,4,5,6,4,7},3) equals 5

LARGE({3,4,5,2,3,4,5,6,4,7},7) equals 4


LINEST

See Also

Uses the "least squares" method to calculate a straight line that best fits your data and returns an array that describes the line. The equation for the line is:

y = m1x1 + m2x2 + ... + b or y = mx + b

where the dependent y-value is a function of the independent x-values. The m-values are coefficients corresponding to each x-value, and b is a constant value. Note that y, x, and m can be vectors. The array that LINEST returns is {mn,mn-1,...,m1,b}. LINEST can also return additional regression statistics.

Syntax

LINEST(known_y's, known_x's, const, stats)

Known_y's    is the set of y-values you already know in the relationship y = mx + b.

If the array known_y's is in a single column, then each column of known_x's is interpreted as a separate variable.

If the array known_y's is in a single row, then each row of known_x's is interpreted as a separate variable.

Known_x's    is an optional set of x-values that you may already know in the relationship y = mx + b.

The array known_x's can include one or more sets of variables. If only one variable is used, known_y's and known_x's can be ranges of any shape, as long as they have equal dimensions. If more than one variable is used, known_y's must be a vector (that is, a range with a height of one row or a width of one column).

If known_x's is omitted, it is assumed to be the array {1,2,3,...} that is the same size as known_y's.

Const    is a logical value specifying whether to force the constant b to equal 0.

If const is TRUE or omitted, b is calculated normally.

If const is FALSE, b is set equal to 0 and the m-values are adjusted to fit y = mx.

Stats    is a logical value specifying whether to return additional regression statistics.

If stats is TRUE, LINEST returns the additional regression statistics, so the returned array is {mn,mn-1,...,m1,b;sen,sen-1,...,se1,seb;r2,sey;F,df;ssreg,ssresid}.

If stats is FALSE or omitted, LINEST returns only the m-coefficients and the constant b.

The additional regression statistics are:

Statistic	Description

se1,se2,...,sen	The standard error values for the coefficients m1,m2,...,mn.

seb	The standard error value for the constant b (seb = #N/A when const is FALSE).

r2	The coefficient of determination. Compares estimated and actual y-values and ranges in value from 0 to 1. If it is 1, there is a perfect correlation in the sample—there is no difference between the estimated y-value and the actual y-value. At the other extreme, if the coefficient of determination is 0, the regression equation is not helpful in predicting a y-value. For information about how r2 is calculated, see "Remarks" later in this topic.

sey	The standard error for the y estimate.

F	The F statistic, or the F-observed value. Use the F statistic to determine whether the observed relationship between the dependent and independent variables occurs by chance.

df	The degrees of freedom. Use the degrees of freedom to help you find F-critical values in a statistical table. Compare the values you find in the table to the F statistic returned by LINEST to determine a confidence level for the model.

ssreg	The regression sum of squares.

ssresid	The residual sum of squares.

The following illustration shows the order in which the additional regression statistics are returned.

Remarks

You can describe any straight line with the slope and the y-intercept:

Slope (m):
To find the slope of a line, often written as m, take two points on the line, (x1,y1) and (x2,y2); the slope is equal to (y2 - y1)/(x2 - x1).

Y-intercept (b):
The y-intercept of a line, often written as b, is the value of y at the point where the line crosses the y-axis.

The equation of a straight line is y = mx + b. Once you know the values of m and b, you can calculate any point on the line by plugging the y- or x-value into that equation. You can also use the TREND function. For more information, see TREND.

When you have only one independent x-variable, you can obtain the slope and y-intercept values directly by using the following formulas:

Slope:
INDEX(LINEST(known_y's,known_x's),1)

Y-intercept:
INDEX(LINEST(known_y's,known_x's),2)

The accuracy of the line calculated by LINEST depends on the degree of scatter in your data. The more linear the data, the more accurate the LINEST model. LINEST uses the method of least squares for determining the best fit for the data. When you have only one independent x-variable, the calculations for m and b are based on the following formulas:

The line- and curve-fitting functions LINEST and LOGEST can calculate the best straight line or exponential curve that fits your data. However, you have to decide which of the two results best fits your data. You can calculate TREND(known_y's,known_x's) for a straight line, or GROWTH(known_y's, known_x's) for an exponential curve. These functions, without the new_x's argument, return an array of y-values predicted along that line or curve at your actual data points. You can then compare the predicted values with the actual values. You may want to chart them both for a visual comparison.

In regression analysis, Microsoft Excel calculates for each point the squared difference between the y-value estimated for that point and its actual y-value. The sum of these squared differences is called the residual sum of squares. Microsoft Excel then calculates the sum of the squared differences between the actual y-values and the average of the y-values, which is called the total sum of squares (regression sum of squares + residual sum of squares). The smaller the residual sum of squares is compared with the total sum of squares, the larger the value of the coefficient of determination, r2, which is an indicator of how well the equation resulting from the regression analysis explains the relationship among the variables.

Formulas that return arrays must be entered as array formulas.

When entering an array constant such as known_x's as an argument, use commas to separate values in the same row and semicolons to separate rows. Separator characters may be different depending on your country settings.

You should note that the y-values predicted by the regression equation may not be valid if they are outside the range of the y-values you used to determine the equation.

Example 1    Slope and Y-intercept

LINEST({1,9,5,7},{0,4,2,3}) equals {2,1}, the slope = 2 and y-intercept = 1.

Example 2    Simple Linear Regression

Suppose a small business has sales of $3100, $4500, $4400, $5400, $7500, and $8100 during the first six months of the fiscal year. Assuming that the values are entered in the range B2:B7,respectively, you can use the following simple linear regression model to estimate sales for the ninth month.

SUM(LINEST(B2:B7)*{9,1}) equals SUM({1000,2000}*{9,1}) equals $11,000

In general, SUM({m,b}*{x,1}) equals mx + b, the estimated y-value for a given x-value. You can also use the TREND function.

Example 3    Multiple Linear Regression

Suppose a commercial developer is considering purchasing a group of small office buildings in an established business district.

The developer can use multiple linear regression analysis to estimate the value of an office building in a given area based on the following variables.

Variable	Refers to the

y	Assessed value of the office building

x1	Floor space in square feet

x2	Number of offices

x3	Number of entrances

x4	Age of the office building in years

This example assumes that a straight-line relationship exists between each of the independent variables (x1, x2, x3, and x4) and the dependent variable (y), the value of office buildings in the area.

The developer randomly chooses a sample of 11 office buildings from a possible 1500 office buildings and obtains the following data.

"Half an entrance" means an entrance for deliveries only. When entered as an array, the following formula:

LINEST(E2:E12,A2:D12,TRUE,TRUE)

returns the following output.

The multiple regression equation, y = m1*x1 + m2*x2 + m3*x3 + m4*x4 + b, can now be obtained using the values from row 14:

y = 27.64*x1 + 12,530*x2 + 2,553*x3+ 234.24*x4 + 52,318

The developer can now estimate the assessed value of an office building in the same area which has 2500 square feet, three offices, and two entrances, and which is 25 years old, by using the following equation:

y = 27.64*2500 + 12530*3 + 2553*2 - 234.24*25 + 52318 = $158,261

You can also use the TREND function to calculate this value. For more information, see TREND.

Example 4    Using the F and R2 Statistics

In the previous example, the coefficient of determination, or r2, is 0.99675 (see cell A16 in the output for LINEST), which would indicate a strong relationship between the independent variables and the sale price. You can use the F statistic to determine whether these results, with such a high r2 value, occurred by chance.

Assume for the moment that in fact there is no relationship among the variables, but that you have drawn a rare sample of 11 office buildings which causes the statistical analysis to demonstrate a strong relationship. The term "Alpha" is used for the probability of erroneously concluding that there is a relationship.

There is a relationship among the variables if the F-observed statistic is greater than the F-critical value. The F-critical value can be obtained by referring to a table of F-critical values in many statistics textbooks. To read the table, assume a single-tailed test, use an Alpha value of 0.05, and for the degrees of freedom (abbreviated in most tables as v1 and v2), use v1 = k = 4 and v2 = n - (k + 1) = 11 - (4 + 1) = 6, where k is the number of variables in the regression analysis and n is the number of data points. The F-critical value is 4.53.

The F-observed value is 459.753674 (cell A17), which is substantially greater than the F-critical value of 4.53. Therefore, the regression equation is useful in predicting the assessed value of office buildings in this area.

Example 5    Calculating the t-Statistics

Another hypothesis test will determine whether each slope coefficient is useful in estimating the assessed value of an office building in example 3. For example, to test the age coefficient for statistical significance, divide -234.24 (age slope coefficient) by 13.268 (the estimated standard error of age coefficients in cell A15). The following is the t-observed value:

t = m4 ÷ se4 = -234.24 ÷ 13.268 = -17.7

If you consult a table in a statistics manual, you will find that t-critical, single tail, with 6 degrees of freedom and Alpha = 0.05 is 1.94 . Since the absolute value of t, 17.7, is greater than 1.94, age is an important variable when estimating the assessed value of an office building. Each of the other independent variables can be tested for statistical significance in a similar manner. The following are the t-observed values for each of the independent variables:

Variable	t-observed value

Floor space	5.1

Number of offices	31.3

Number of entrances	4.8

Age	17.7

These values all have an absolute value greater than 1.94; therefore, all the variables used in the regression equation are useful in predicting the assessed value of office buildings in this area.


LOGNORMDIST

See Also

Returns the cumulative lognormal distribution of x, where ln(x) is normally distributed with parameters mean and standard_dev. Use this function to analyze data that has been logarithmically transformed.

Syntax

LOGNORMDIST(x, mean, standard_dev)

X    is the value at which to evaluate the function.

Mean    is the mean of ln(x).

Standard_dev    is the standard deviation of ln(x).

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, LOGNORMDIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If x ≤ 0 or if standard_dev ≤ 0, LOGNORMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

The equation for the lognormal cumulative distribution function is:

Example

LOGNORMDIST(4,3.5,1.2) equals 0.039084


NEGBINOMDIST

See Also

Returns the negative binomial distribution. NEGBINOMDIST returns the probability that there will be number_f failures before the number_s-th success, when the constant probability of a success is probability_s. This function is similar to the binomial distribution, except that the number of successes is fixed and the number of trials is variable. Like the binomial, trials are assumed to be independent.

For example, you need to find 10 people with excellent reflexes, and you know the probability that a candidate has these qualifications is 0.3. NEGBINOMDIST calculates the probability that you will interview a certain number of unqualified candidates before finding all 10 qualified candidates.

Syntax

NEGBINOMDIST(number_f, number_s, probability_s)

Number_f    is the number of failures.

Number_s    is the threshold number of successes.

Probability_s    is the probability of a success.

Remarks

Number_f and number_s are truncated to integers.

If any argument is non-numeric, NEGBINOMDIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If probability_s < 0 or if probability > 1, NEGBINOMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If (number_f + number_s - 1) ≤ 0, NEGBINOMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

The equation for the negative binomial distribution is:

where:

 x is number_f, r is number_s, and p is probability_s.

Example

NEGBINOMDIST(10,5,0.25) equals 0.055049


NORMDIST

See Also

Returns the normal cumulative distribution for the specified mean and standard deviation. This function has a very wide range of applications in statistics, including hypothesis testing.

Syntax

NORMDIST(x, mean, standard_dev, cumulative)

X    is the value for which you want the distribution.

Mean    is the arithmetic mean of the distribution.

Standard_dev    is the standard deviation of the distribution.

Cumulative    is a logical value that determines the form of the function. If cumulative is TRUE, NORMDIST returns the cumulative distribution function; if FALSE, it returns the probability mass function.

Remarks

If mean or standard_dev is non-numeric, NORMDIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If standard_dev ≤ 0, NORMDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

If mean = 0 and standard_dev = 1, NORMDIST returns the standard normal distribution, NORMSDIST.

The equation for the normal density function is:

Example

NORMDIST(42,40,1.5,TRUE) equals 0.908789


NORMINV

See Also

Returns the inverse of the normal cumulative distribution for the specified mean and standard deviation.

Syntax

NORMINV(probability, mean, standard_dev)

Probability    is a probability corresponding to the normal distribution.

Mean    is the arithmetic mean of the distribution.

Standard_dev    is the standard deviation of the distribution.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, NORMINV returns the #VALUE! error value.

If probability < 0 or if probability > 1, NORMINV returns the #NUM! error value.

If standard_dev ≤ 0, NORMINV returns the #NUM! error value.

NORMINV uses the standard normal distribution if mean = 0 and standard_dev = 1 (see NORMSINV).

NORMINV uses an iterative technique for calculating the function. Given a probability value, NORMINV iterates until the result is accurate to within ± 3x10^-7. If NORMINV does not converge after 100 iterations, the function returns the #N/A error value.

Example

NORMINV(0.908789,40,1.5) equals 42


NORMSDIST

See Also

Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution function. The distribution has a mean of zero and a standard deviation of one. Use this function in place of a table of standard normal curve areas.

Syntax

NORMSDIST(z)

Z    is the value for which you want the distribution.

Remarks

If z is non-numeric, NORMSDIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

The equation for the standard normal density function is:

Example

NORMSDIST(1.333333) equals 0.908789


NORMSINV

See Also

Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution. The distribution has a mean of zero and a standard deviation of one.

Syntax

NORMSINV(probability)

Probability    is a probability corresponding to the normal distribution.

Remarks

If probability is non-numeric, NORMSINV returns the #VALUE! error value.

If probability < 0 or if probability > 1, NORMINV returns the #NUM! error value.

NORMSINV uses an iterative technique for calculating the function. Given a probability value, NORMSINV iterates until the result is accurate to within ± 3x10^-7. If NORMSINV does not converge after 100 iterations, the function returns the #N/A error value.

Example

NORMSINV(0.908789) equals 1.3333


PEARSON

See Also

Returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient, r, a dimensionless index that ranges from -1.0 to 1.0 inclusive, and reflects the extent of a linear relationship between two data sets.

Syntax

PEARSON(array1, array2)

Array1    is a set of independent values.

Array2    is a set of dependent values.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, array constants, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If array1 and array2 are empty or have a different number of data points, PEARSON returns the #N/A error value.

The r value of the regression line is:

Example

PEARSON({9,7,5,3,1},{10,6,1,5,3}) equals 0.699379


PERCENTILE

See Also

Returns the k-th percentile of values in a range. You can use this function to establish a threshold of acceptance. For example, you can decide to examine candidates that score above the 90th percentile.

Syntax

PERCENTILE(array, k)

Array    is the array or range of data that defines relative standing.

K    is the percentile value in the range 0..1, inclusive.

Remarks

If array is empty or contains more than 8191 data points, PERCENTILE returns the #NUM! error value.

If k is non-numeric, PERCENTILE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If k is < 0 or if k > 1, PERCENTILE returns the #NUM! error value.

If k is not a multiple of 1/(n - 1), PERCENTILE interpolates to determine the value at the kth percentile.

Example

PERCENTILE({1,2,3,4},0.3) equals 1.9


PERCENTRANK

See Also

Returns the percentage rank of a value in a data set. This function can be used to evaluate the relative standing of an observation in a data set. For example, you can use PERCENTRANK to evaluate the standing of an aptitude test score among the population of scores for the test.

Syntax

PERCENTRANK(array, x, significance)

Array    is the array or range of data with numeric values that defines relative standing.

X    is the value for which you want to know the rank.

Significance    is an optional value that identifies the number of significant digits for the returned percentage value. If omitted, PERCENTRANK uses three digits (0.xxx%).

Remarks

If array is empty, PERCENTRANK returns the #NUM! error value.

If significance < 1, PERCENTRANK returns the #NUM! error value.

If x does not match one of the values in array, PERCENTRANK interpolates to return the correct percentage rank.

Example

PERCENTRANK({1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10},4) equals 0.333


PERMUT

See Also

Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects that can be selected from number objects. A permutation is any set or subset of objects or events where internal order is significant. Permutations are different than combinations, for which the internal order is not significant. Use this function for lottery-style probability calculations.

Syntax

PERMUT(number, number_chosen)

Number    is an integer that describes the number of objects.

Number_chosen    is an integer that describes the number of objects in each permutation.

Remarks

Both arguments are truncated to integers.

If number or number_chosen is non-numeric, PERMUT returns the #VALUE! error value.

If number ≤ 0 or if number_chosen < 0, PERMUT returns the #NUM! error value.

If number < number_chosen, PERMUT returns the #NUM! error value.

The equation for the number of permutations is:

Example

Suppose you want to calculate the odds of selecting a winning lottery number. Each lottery number contains three numbers, each of which can be between 0 and 99, inclusive. The following function calculates the number of possible permutations.

PERMUT(100,3) equals 970,200


POISSON

See Also

Returns the Poisson distribution. A common application of the Poisson distribution is predicting the number of events over a specific time, such as the number of cars arriving at a toll plaza in one minute.

Syntax

POISSON(x, mean, cumulative)

X    is the number of events.

Mean    is the expected numeric value.

Cumulative    is a logical value that determines the form of the probability distribution returned. If cumulative is TRUE, POISSON returns the cumulative Poisson probability that the number of random events occurring will be between zero and x inclusive; if FALSE, it returns the Poisson probability mass function that the number of events occurring will be exactly x.

Remarks

If x is not an integer, it is truncated.

If x or mean is non-numeric, POISSON returns the #VALUE! error value.

If x ≤ 0, POISSON returns the #NUM! error value.

If mean ≤ 0, POISSON returns the #NUM! error value.

POISSON is calculated as follows.

For cumulative = FALSE:

For cumulative =TRUE:

Examples

POISSON(2,5,FALSE) equals 0.084224

POISSON(2,5,TRUE) equals 0.124652


PROB

See Also

Returns the probability that values in a range are between two limits. If upper_limit is not supplied, returns the probability that values in x_range are equal to lower_limit.

Syntax

PROB(x_range, prob_range, lower_limit, upper_limit)

X_range    is the range of numeric values of x with which there are associated probabilities.

Prob_range    is a set of probabilities associated with values in x_range.

Lower_limit    is the lower bound on the value for which you want a probability.

Upper_limit    is the optional upper bound on the value for which you want a probability.

Remarks

If any value in prob_range ≤ 0 or if any value in prob_range > 1, PROB returns the #NUM! error value.

If the sum of the values in prob_range ≠ 1, PROB returns the #NUM! error value.

If upper_limit is omitted, PROB returns the probability of being equal to lower_limit.

If x_range and prob_range contain a different number of data points, PROB returns the #N/A error value.

Examples

PROB({0,1,2,3},{0.2,0.3,0.1,0.4},2) equals 0.1

PROB({0,1,2,3},{0.2,0.3,0.1,0.4},1,3) equals 0.8


QUARTILE

See Also

Returns the quartile of a data set. Quartiles often are used in sales and survey data to divide populations into groups. For example, you can use QUARTILE to find the top 25% of incomes in a population.

Syntax

QUARTILE(array, quart)

Array    is the array or cell range of numeric values for which you want the quartile value.

Quart    indicates which value to return.

If quart equals	QUARTILE returns

0	Minimum value

1	First quartile (25th percentile)

2	Median value (50th percentile)

3	Third quartile (75th percentile)

4	Maximum value

Remarks

If array is empty or contains more than 8191 data points, QUARTILE returns the #NUM! error value.

If quart is not an integer, it is truncated.

If quart < 0 or if quart > 4, QUARTILE returns the #NUM! error value.

MIN, MEDIAN, and MAX return the same value as QUARTILE when quart is equal to 0, 2, and 4, respectively.

Example

QUARTILE({1,2,4,7,8,9,10,12},1) equals 3.5


RANK

See Also

Returns the rank of a number in a list of numbers. The rank of a number is its size relative to other values in a list. (If you were to sort the list, the rank of the number would be its position.)

Syntax

RANK(number, ref, order)

Number    is the number whose rank you want to find.

Ref    is an array of, or a reference to, a list of numbers. Non-numeric values in ref are ignored.

Order    is a number specifying how to rank number.

If order is 0 or omitted, Microsoft Excel ranks number as if ref were a list sorted in descending order.

If order is any non-zero value, Microsoft Excel ranks number as if ref were a list sorted in ascending order.

Remarks

RANK gives duplicate numbers the same rank. However, the presence of duplicate numbers affects the ranks of subsequent numbers. For example, in a list of integers, if the number 10 appears twice and has a rank of 5, then 11 would have a rank of 7 (no number would have a rank of 6).

Examples

If A1:A5 contain the numbers 7, 3.5, 3.5, 1, and 2, respectively, then:

RANK(A2,A1:A5,1) equals 3
RANK(A1,A1:A5,1) equals 5


RSQ

See Also

Returns the square of the Pearson product moment correlatin coefficient through data points in known_y's and known_x's. For more information, see PEARSON. The  r-squared value can be interpreted as the proportion of the variance in y attributable to the variance in x.

Syntax

RSQ(known_y's, known_x's)

Known_y's    is an array or range of data points.

Known_x's    is an array or range of data points.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If known_y's and known_x's are empty or have a different number of data points, RSQ returns the #N/A error value.

The equation for the r value of the regression line is:

Example

RSQ({2,3,9,1,8,7,5},{6,5,11,7,5,4,4}) equals 0.05795


 SKEW

See Also

Returns the skewness of a distribution. Skewness characterizes the degree of asymmetry of a distribution around its mean. Positive skewness indicates a distribution with an asymmetric tail extending towards more positive values. Negative skewness indicates a distribution with an asymmetric tail extending towards more negative values.

Syntax

SKEW(number1, number2, ...)

Number1,number2...    are 1 to 30 arguments for which you want to calculate skewness. You can also use a single array or a reference to an aray instead of arguments separated by commas.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If there are less than three data points, or the sample standard deviation is zero, SKEW returns the #DIV/0! error value.

The equation for skewness is defined as:

Example

SKEW(3,4,5,2,3,4,5,6,4,7) equals 0.359543


SLOPE

See Also

Returns the slope of the linear regression line through data points in known_y's and known_x's. The slope is the vertical distance divided by the horizontal distance between any two points on the line, which is the rate of change along the regression line.

Syntax

SLOPE(known_y's, known_x's)

Known_y's    is an array or cell range of numeric dependent data points.

Known_x's    is the set of independent data points.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If known_y's and known_x's are empty or have a different number of data points, SLOPE returns the #N/A error value.

The equation for the slope of the regression line is:

Example

SLOPE({2,3,9,1,8,7,5},{6,5,11,7,5,4,4}) equals 0.305556


SMALL

See Also

Returns the k-th smallest value in a data set. Use this function to return values with a particular relative standing in a data set.

Syntax

SMALL(array, k)

Array    is an array or range of numerical data for which you want to determine the k-th smallest value.

K    is the position (from the smallest) in the array or range of data to return.

Remarks

If array is empty, SMALL returns the #NUM! error value.

If k ≤ 0 or if k exceeds the number of data points, SMALL returns the #NUM! error value.

If n is the number of data points in array, SMALL(array,1) equals the smallest value, and SMALL(array,n) equals the largest value.

Example

SMALL({3,4,5,2,3,4,5,6,4,7},4) equals 4

SMALL({1,4,8,3,7,12,54,8,23},2) equals 3


STANDARDIZE

See Also

Returns a normalized value from a distribution characterized by mean and standard_dev.

Syntax

STANDARDIZE(x, mean, standard_dev)

X    is the value you want to normalize.

Mean    is the arithmetic mean of the distribution.

Standard_dev    is the standard deviation of the distribution.

Remarks

If standard_dev ≤ 0, STANDARDIZE returns the #NUM! error value.

The equation for the normalized value is:

Example

STANDARDIZE(42,40,1.5) equals 1.333333


STDEV

See Also

Estimates standard deviation based on a sample. The standard deviation is a measure of how widely values are dispersed from the average value (the mean).

Syntax

STDEV(number1,number2,...)

Number1,number2,...    are 1 to 30 number arguments corresponding to a sample of a population. You can also use a single array or a reference to an aray instead of arguments separated by commas.

Remarks

STDEV assumes that its arguments are a sample of the population. If your data represents the entire population, you should compute the standard deviation using STDEVP.

The standard deviation is calculated using the "nonbiased" or "n-1" method.

STDEV uses the following formula:

Example

Suppose 10 tools stamped from the same machine during a production run are collected as a random sample and measured for breaking strength. The sample values (1345, 1301, 1368, 1322, 1310, 1370, 1318, 1350, 1303, 1299) are stored in A2:E3, respectively. STDEV estimates the standard deviation of breaking strengths for all the tools.

STDEV(A2:E3) equals 27.46


STDEVP

See Also

Calculates standard deviation based on the entire population given as arguments. The standard deviation is a measure of how widely values are dispersed from the average value (the mean).

Syntax

STDEVP(number1,number2],...

Number1,number2,...    are 1 to 30 number arguments corresponding to a population. You can also use a single array or a reference to an aray instead of arguments separated by commas.

Remarks

STDEVP assumes that its arguments are the entire population. If your data represents a sample of the population, you should compute the standard deviation using STDEV.

For large sample sizes, STDEV and STDEVP return approximately equal values.

The standard deviation is calculated using the "biased" or "n" method.

STDEVP uses the following formula:

Example

Using the same data from the STDEV example and assuming that only 10 tools are produced during the production run, STDEVP measures the standard deviation of breaking strengths for all the tools.

STDEVP(A2:E3) equals 26.05


STEYX

See Also

Returns the standard error of the predicted y-value for each x in the regression. The standard error is a measure of the amount of error in the prediction of y for an individual x.

Syntax

STEYX(known_y's, known_x's)

Known_y's    is an array or range of dependent data points.

Known_x's    is an array or range of independent data points.

Remarks

The arguments should be numbers, or names, arrays, or references that contain numbers.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored; however, cells with the value zero are included.

If known_y's and known_x's are empty or have a different number of data points, STEYX returns the #N/A error value.

The equation for the standard error of the predicted y is:

Example

STEYX({2,3,9,1,8,7,5},{6,5,11,7,5,4,4}) equals 3.305719


SYD

See Also

Returns the sum-of-years' digits depreciation of an asset for a specified period.

Syntax

SYD(cost, salvage, life, per)

Cost    is the initial cost of the asset.

Salvage    is the value at the end of the depreciation (sometimes called the salvage value of the asset).

Life    is the number of periods over which the asset is being depreciated (sometimes called the useful life of the asset).

Per    is the period and must use the same units as life.

Remark

SYD is calculated as follows:

Examples

If you've bought a truck for $30,000 that has a useful life of 10 years and a salvage value of $7500, the yearly depreciation allowance for the first year is:

SYD(30000,7500,10,1) equals $4090.91

The yearly depreciation allowance for the 10th year is:

SYD(30000,7500,10,10) equals $409.09


TDIST

See Also

Returns the Student's t-distribution. The t-distribution is used in the hypothesis testing of small sample data sets. Use this function in place of a table of critical values for the t-distribution.

Syntax

TDIST(x, degrees_freedom, tails)

X    is the numeric value at which to evaluate the distribution.

Degrees_freedom    is an integer indicating the number of degrees of freedom.

Tails    specifies the number of distribution tails to return. If tails = 1, TDIST returns the one-tailed distribution. If tails = 2, TDIST returns the two-tailed distribution.

Remarks

If any argument is non-numeric, TDIST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If degrees_freedom < 1, TDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

The degrees_freedom and tails arguments are truncated to integers.

If tails is any value other than 1 or 2, TDIST returns the #NUM! error value.

TDIST is calculated as TDIST=p( x<X ), where X is a random variable that follows the t-distribution.

Example

TDIST(1.96,60,2) equals 0.054645


TINV

See Also

Returns the inverse of the Student's t-distribution for the specified degrees of freedom.

Syntax

TINV(probability, degrees_freedom)

Probability    is the probability associated with the two- tailed Student's t-distribution.

Degrees_freedom    is the number of degrees of freedom to characterize the distribution.

Remarks

If either argument is non-numeric, TINV returns the #VALUE! error value.

If probability < 0 or if probability > 1, TINV returns the #NUM! error value.

If degrees_freedom is not an integer, it is truncated.

If degrees_freedom < 1, TINV returns the #NUM! error value.

TINV is calculated as TINV=p( t<X ), where X is a random variable that follows the tdistribution.

TINV uses an iterative technique for calculating the function. Given a probability value, TINV iterates until the result is accurate to within ± 3x10^-7. If TINV does not converge after 100 iterations, the function returns the #N/A error value.

Example

TINV(0.054645,60) equals 1.96


TREND

See Also

Returns values along a linear trend. Fits a straight line (using the method of least squares) to the arrays known_y's and known_x's. Returns the y-values along that line for the array of new_x's that you specify.

Syntax

TREND(known_y's, known_x's, new_x's, const)

Known_y's    is the set of y-values you already know in the relationship y = mx + b.

If the array known_y's is in a single column, then each column of known_x's is interpreted as a separate variable.

If the array known_y's is in a single row, then each row of known_x's is interpreted as a separate variable.

Known_x's    is an optional set of x-values that you may already know in the relationship y = mx + b.

The array known_x's can include one or more sets of variables. If only one variable is used, known_y's and known_x's can be ranges of any shape, as long as they have equal dimensions. If more than one variable is used, known_y's must be a vector (that is, a range with a height of one row or a width of one column).

If known_x's is omitted, it is assumed to be the array {1,2,3,...} that is the same size as known_y's.

New_x's    are new x-values for which you want TREND to return corresponding y-values.

New_x's must include a column (or row) for each independent variable, just as known_x's does. So, if known_y's is in a single column, known_x's and new_x's should have the same number of columns. If known_y's is in a single row, known_x's and new_x's should have the same number of rows.

If you omit new_x's, it is assumed to be the same as known_x's.

If you omit both known_x's and new_x's, they are assumed to be the array {1,2,3,...} that is the same size as known_y's.

Const    is a logical value specifying whether to force the constant b to equal 0.

If const is TRUE or omitted, b is calculated normally.

If const is FALSE, b is set equal to 0 and the m-values are adjusted so that y = mx.

Remarks

For information on how Microsoft Excel fits a line to data, see LINEST.

You can use TREND for polynomial curve fitting by regressing against the same variable raised to different powers. For example, suppose column A contained y-values and column B contained x-values. You could enter x^2 in column C, x^3 in column D, and so on, and then regress columns B through D against column A.

Formulas that return arrays must be entered as array formulas.

When entering an array constant for an argument such as known_x's, use commas to separate values in the same row and semicolons to separate rows.

Example

Suppose a business wants to purchase a tract of land in July, the start of the next fiscal year. The business collected cost information that covers the most recent 12 months for a typical tract in the desired area. known_y's contains the set of known values ($133,890, $135,000, $135,790, $137,300, $138,130, $139,100, $139900, $141,120, $141,890, $143,230, $144,000, $145,290), and are stored in B2:B13, respectively.

When entered as a vertical array in the range C2:C6, the following formula returns the predicted prices for March, April, May, June, and July:

TREND(B2:B13,,{13;14;15;16;17}) equals {146172;147190;148208;149226;150244}

The company can expect a typical tract of land to cost about $150,244 if it waits until July. The preceding formula uses the default array {1;2;3;4;5;6;7;8;9;10;11;12} for the known_x's argument, corresponding to the 12 months of sales data. The array {13;14;15;16;17} corresponds to the next five months.


TRIMMEAN

See Also

Returns the mean of the interior of a data set.  TRIMMEAN calculates the mean taken by excluding a percentage of data points from the top and bottom tails of a data set. You can use this function when you wish to exclude outlying data from your analysis.

Syntax

TRIMMEAN(array, percent)

Array    is the array or range of values to trim and average.

Percent    is the fractional number of data points to exclude from the calculation. For example, if percent = 0.2, 4 points are trimmed from a data set of 20 points (20 x 0.2), 2 from the top and 2 from the bottom of the set.

Remarks

If percent < 0 or percent > 1, TRIMMEAN returns the #NUM! error value.

TRIMMEAN rounds the number of excluded data points down to the nearest multiple of 2. If percent = 0.1, 10% of 30 data points equals 3 points. For symmetry, TRIMMEAN excludes a single value from the top and bottom of the data set.

Example

TRIMMEAN({4,5,6,7,2,3,4,5,1,2,3},0.2) equals 3.777778


TTEST

See Also

Returns the probability associated with a Student's t-Test. Use TTEST to determine whether two samples are likely to have come from the same two underlying populations that have the same mean.

Syntax

TTEST(array1, array2, tails, type)

Array1    is the first data set.

Array2    is the second data set.

Tails    specifies the number of distribution tails. If tails = 1, TTEST uses the one-tailed distribution. If tails = 2, TTEST uses the two-tailed distribution.

Type    is the kind of t-test to perform.

If type equals	This test is performed

1	Paired

2	Two-sample equal variance (homoscedastic)

3	Two-sample unequal variance (heteroscedastic)

Remarks

If array1 and array2 have a different number of data points, and type = 1 (paired), TTEST returns the #N/A error value.

The tails and type arguments are truncated to integers.

If tails or type is non-numeric, TTEST returns the #VALUE! error value.

If tails is any value other than 1 or 2, TTEST returns the #NUM! error value.

Example

TTEST({3,4,5,8,9,1,2,4,5},{6,19,3,2,14,4,5,17,1},2,1)
equals 0.196016


VAR

See Also

Estimates variance based on a sample.

Syntax

VAR(number1, number2, ...)

Number1,number2,...    are 1 to 30 number arguments corresponding to a sample of a population.

Remarks

VAR assumes that its arguments are a sample of the population. If your data represents the entire population, you should compute the variance using VARP.

VAR uses the following formula:

Example

Suppose 10 tools stamped from the same machine during a production run are collected as a random sample and measured for breaking strength. The sample values (1345, 1301, 1368, 1322, 1310, 1370, 1318, 1350, 1303, 1299) are stored in A2:E3, respectively. VAR estimates the variance for the breaking strength of the tools.

VAR(A2:E3) equals 754.3


VARP

See Also

Calculates variance based on the entire population.

Syntax

VARP(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 30 number arguments corresponding to a population.

Remarks

VARP assumes that its arguments are the entire population. If your data represents a sample of the population, you should compute the variance using VAR.

The equation for VARP is :

Example

Using the data from the VAR example and assuming that only 10 tools are produced during the production run, VARP measures the variance of breaking strengths for all the tools.

VARP(A2:E3) equals 678.8


WEIBULL

See Also

Returns the Weibull distribution. Use this distribution in reliability analysis, such as calculating a device's mean time to failure.

Syntax

WEIBULL(x, alpha, beta, cumulative)

X    is the value at which to evaluate the function.

Alpha    is a parameter to the distribution.

Beta    is a parameter to the distribution.

Cumulative    determines the form of the function.

Remarks

If x, alpha, or beta is non-numeric, WEIBULL returns the #VALUE! error value.

If x < 0, WEIBULL returns the #NUM! error value.

If alpha ≤ 0 or if beta ≤ 0, WEIBULL returns the #NUM! error value.

The equation for the Weibull cumulative distribution function is:

The equation for the Weibull probability density function is:

When alpha = 1, WEIBULL returns the exponential distribution with:

Examples

WEIBULL(105,20,100,TRUE) equals 0.929581

WEIBULL(105,20,100,FALSE) equals 0.035589


ZTEST

See Also

Returns the two-tailed P-value of a z-test. The z-test generates a standard score for x with respect to the data set, array, and returns the two-tailed probability for the normal distribution. You can use this function to assess the likelihood that a particular observation is drawn from a particular population.

Syntax

ZTEST(array, x, sigma)

Array    is the array or range of data against which to test x.

X    is the value to test.

Sigma    is the population (known) standard deviation. If omitted, the sample standard deviation is used.

Remarks

If array is empty, ZTEST returns the #N/A error value.

ZTEST is calculated as follows:

Example

ZTEST({3,6,7,8,6,5,4,2,1,9},4) equals 0.090574


CODE

See Also

Returns a numeric code for the first character in a text string. The returned code corresponds to the character set used by your computer.

Syntax

CODE(text)

Operating environment	Character set

Macintosh	Macintosh character set

Windows	ANSI

Text    is the text for which you want the code of the first character.

Examples

CODE("A") equals 65

CODE("Alphabet") equals 65


CONVERT

See Also

Converts a number from one measurement system to another. For example, CONVERT can translate a table of distances in miles to a table of distances in kilometers.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

CONVERT(number, from_unit, to_unit)

Number    is the value in from_units to convert.

From_unit    is the units for number.

To_unit    is the units for the result.

CONVERT accepts the following text values for from_unit and to_unit:

Weight and mass	From_unit or to_unit

Gram	"g"

Slug	"sg"

Pound mass (avoirdupois)	"lbm"

U (atomic mass unit)	"u"

Ounce mass (avoirdupois)	"ozm"

Distance	From_unit or to_unit

Meter	"m"

Statute mile	"mi"

Nautical mile	"Nmi"

Inch	"in"

Foot	"ft"

Yard	"yd"

Angstrom	"ang"

Pica (1/72 in.)	"Pica"

Time	From_unit or to_unit

Year	"yr"

Day	"day"

Hour	"hr"

Minute	"mn"

Second	"sec"

Pressure	From_unit or to_unit

Pascal	"Pa"

Atmosphere	"atm"

mm of Mercury	"mmHg"

Force	From_unit or to_unit

Newton	"N"

Dyne	"dyn"

Pound force	"lbf"

Energy	From_unit or to_unit

Joule	"J"

Erg	"e"

Thermodynamic calorie	"c"

IT calorie	"cal"

Electron volt	"eV"

Horsepower-hour	"HPh"

Watt-hour	"Wh"

Foot-pound	"flb"

BTU	"BTU"

Power	From_unit or to_unit

Horsepower	"HP"

Watt	"W"

Magnetism	From_unit or to_unit

Tesla	"T"

Gauss	"ga"

Temperature	From_unit or to_unit

Degree Celsius	"C"

Degree Fahrenheit	"F"

Degree Kelvin	"K"

Liquid measure	From_unit or to_unit

Teaspoon	"tsp"

Tablespoon	"tbs"

Fluid ounce	"oz"

Cup	"cup"

Pint	"pt"

Quart	"qt"

Gallon	"gal"

Liter	"l"

The following abbreviated unit prefixes can be prepended to any metric from_unit or to_unit.

Prefix	Multiplier	Abbreviation
exa	1E+18	"E"
peta	1E+15	"P"
tera	1E+12	"T"
giga	1E+09	"G"
mega	1E+06	"M"
kilo	1E+03	"k"
hecto	1E+02	"h"
dekao	1E+01	"e"
deci	1E-01	"d"
centi	1E-02	"c"
milli	1E-03	"m"
micro	1E-06	"u"
nano	1E-09	"n"
pico	1E-12	"p"
femto	1E-15	"f"
atto	1E-18	"a"
Remarks

If the input data types are incorrect, CONVERT returns the #VALUE! error value.

If the unit does not exist, CONVERT returns the #N/A error value.

If the unit does not support an abbreviated unit prefix, CONVERT returns the #N/A error value.

If the units are in different groups, CONVERT returns the #N/A error value.

Unit names and prefixes are case-sensitive.

Examples

CONVERT(1.0, "lbm", "kg") equals 0.453592

CONVERT(68, "F", "C") equals 20

CONVERT(2.5, "ft", "sec") equals #N/A


IRR

See Also

Returns the internal rate of return for a series of cash flows represented by the numbers in values. These cash flows do not have to be even, as they would be for an annuity. The internal rate of return is the interest rate received for an investment consisting of payments (negative values) and income (positive values) that occur at regular periods.

Syntax

IRR(values, guess)

Values    is an array or a reference to cells that contain numbers for which you want to calculate the internal rate of return.

Values must contain at least one positive value and one negative value to calculate the internal rate of return.

IRR uses the order of values to interpret the order of cash flows. Be sure to enter your payment and income values in the sequence you want.

If an array or reference argument contains text, logical values, or empty cells, those values are ignored.

Guess    is a number that you guess is close to the result of IRR.

Microsoft Excel uses an iterative technique for calculating IRR. Starting with guess, IRR cycles through the calculation until the result is accurate within 0.00001 percent. If IRR can't find a result that works after 20 tries, the #NUM! error value is returned.

In most cases you do not need to provide guess for the IRR calculation. If guess is omitted, it is assumed to be 0.1 (10 percent).

If IRR gives the #NUM! error value, or if the result is not close to what you expected, try again with a different value for guess.

Examples

Suppose you want to start a restaurant business. You estimate it will cost $70,000 to start the business and expect to net the following income in the first five years: $12,000, $15,000, $18,000, $21,000, and $26,000. B1:B6 contain the following values: $-70,000, $12,000, $15,000, $18,000, $21,000 and $26,000, respectively.

To calculate the investment's internal rate of return after four years:

IRR(B1:B5) equals -2.12%

To calculate the internal rate of return after five years:

IRR(B1:B6) equals 8.66%

To calculate the internal rate of return after two years, you need to include a guess:

IRR(B1:B3,-10%) equals -44.35%

Remarks

IRR is closely related to NPV, the net present value function. The rate of return calculated by IRR is the interest rate corresponding to a zero net present value. The following macro formula demonstrates how NPV and IRR are related:

NPV(IRR(B1:B6),B1:B6) equals 3.60E-08 (Within the accuracy of the IRR calculation, the value 3.60E-08 is effectively 0.)


IS Functions

See Also

This section describes the nine worksheet functions used for testing the type of a value or reference.

Each of these functions, referred to collectively as the IS functions, checks the type of value and returns TRUE or FALSE depending on the outcome. For example, the ISBLANK function returns the logical value TRUE if value is a reference to an empty cell; otherwise it returns FALSE.

Syntax

ISBLANK(value)
ISERR(value)
ISERROR(value)
ISLOGICAL(value)
ISNA(value)
ISNONTEXT(value)
ISNUMBER(value)
ISREF(value)
ISTEXT(value)

Value    is the value you want tested. Value can be a blank (empty cell), error, logical, text, number, or reference value, or name referring to any of these, that you want to test.

Function	Returns TRUE if

ISBLANK	Value refers to an empty cell.

ISERR	Value refers to any error value except #N/A.

ISERROR	Value refers to any error value (#N/A, #VALUE!, #REF!, #DIV/0!, #NUM!, #NAME?, or #NULL!).

ISLOGICAL	Value refers to a logical value.

ISNA	Value refers to the #N/A (value not available) error value.

ISNONTEXT	Value refers to any item that is not text. (Note that this function returns TRUE if value refers to a blank cell.)

ISNUMBER	Value refers to a number.

ISREF	Value refers to a reference.

ISTEXT	Value refers to text.

Remarks

The value arguments to the IS functions are not converted. For example, in most other functions where a number is required, the text value "19" is converted to the number 19. However, in the formula ISNUMBER("19"), "19" is not converted from a text value, and the ISNUMBER function returns FALSE.

The IS functions are useful in formulas and macros for testing the outcome of a calculation. When combined with the IF function, they provide a method for locating errors in formulas (see the following examples).

Examples

ISLOGICAL(TRUE) equals TRUE

ISLOGICAL("TRUE") equals FALSE

ISNUMBER(4) equals TRUE

Suppose C1:C5 in a worksheet of Gold prices in different regions shows the following text values, number values and error values:  "Gold", "Region1", #REF!, , $330.92, #N/A, respectivly.

ISBLANK(C1) equals FALSE

ISERROR(C3) equals TRUE

ISNA(C3) equals FALSE

ISNA(C5) equals TRUE

ISERR(C5) equals FALSE

ISNUMBER(C4) equals TRUE (if the $330.92 was entered as a number and not as text)

ISREF(Region1) equals TRUE (if Region1 is defined as a range name)

ISTEXT(C2) equals TRUE (if Region1 is formatted as text)

On another worksheet, suppose you want to calculate the average of the range A1:A4, but you can't be sure that the cells contain numbers. The formula AVERAGE(A1:A4) returns the #DIV/0! error value if A1:A4 does not contain any numbers. To allow for this case, you could use the following formula to locate potential errors:

IF(ISERROR(AVERAGE(A1:A4)),"No Numbers",AVERAGE(A1:A4))


MAX

See Also

Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments.

Syntax

MAX(number1, number2, ...)

Number1, number2,...    are 1 to 30 numbers for which you want to find the maximum value.

You can specify arguments that are numbers, empty cells, logical values, or text representations of numbers. Arguments that are error values or text that cannot be translated into numbers cause errors.

If an argument is an array or reference, only numbers in that array or reference are used. Empty cells, logical values, text, or error values in the array or reference are ignored.

If the arguments contain no numbers, MAX returns 0.

Examples

If A1:A5 contains the numbers 10, 7, 9, 27, and 2, then:

MAX(A1:A5) equals 27

MAX(A1:A5,30) equals 30


OR

See Also

Returns TRUE if any argument is TRUE; returns FALSE if all arguments are FALSE.

Syntax

OR(logical1, logical2, ...)

Logical1, logical2,...    are 1 to 30 conditions you want to test that can be either TRUE or FALSE.

The arguments should be logical values or arrays or references that contain logical values.

If an array or reference argument contains text, numbers, or empty cells, those values are ignored.

If the specified range contains no logical values, OR returns the #VALUE! error value.

You can use an OR array formula to see if a value occurs in an array. To enter the OR formula as an array, press CTRL+SHIFT (in Microsoft Excel for Windows) or COMMAND+SHIFT (in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh).

Examples

OR(TRUE) equals TRUE

OR(1+1=1,2+2=5) equals FALSE

If A1:A3 contains the values TRUE, FALSE, and TRUE, then:

OR(A1:A3) equals TRUE

The following macro formula checks the contents of the active cell. If the cell contains the single character "c" or "s", the OR formula returns TRUE and the macro branches to an area named FinishRefresh:

IF(OR(ACTIVE.CELL()="c",ACTIVE.CELL()="s"),GOTO(FinishRefresh))

The preceding example shows how to use the worksheet form of the IF function on a macro sheet. You could also use the macro sheet form. For more information, see IF.

Also see the example for EXACT.


PROPER

See Also

Capitalizes the first letter in text and any other letters in text that follow any character other than a letter. Converts all other letters to lowercase.

Syntax

PROPER(text)

Text    is text enclosed in quotation marks, a formula that returns text, or a reference to a cell containing the text you want to partially capitalize.

Examples

PROPER("this is a TITLE") equals "This Is A Title"

PROPER("2-cent's worth") equals "2-Cent'S Worth"

PROPER("76BudGet") equals "76Budget"


TYPE

See Also

Returns the type of value. Use TYPE when the behavior of another function depends on the type of value in a particular cell.

Syntax

TYPE(value)

Value    can be any Microsoft Excel value, such as a number, text, logical value, and so on.

If value is	TYPE returns

Number	1

Text	2

Logical value	4

Formula	8

Error value	16

Array	64

Remarks

TYPE is most useful when you are using functions that can accept a variety of different types of data, such as ARGUMENT and INPUT. Use TYPE to find out what type of data was returned by the function.

Examples

If A1 contains the text "Smith", then:

TYPE(A1) equals TYPE("Smith") equals 2

TYPE("MR. "&A1) equals 2

TYPE(2+A1) equals TYPE(#VALUE!) equals 16

TYPE({1,2;3,4}) equals 64


UPPER

See Also

Converts text to uppercase.

Syntax

UPPER(text)

Text    is the text you want converted to uppercase.  Text can be a reference or text string.

Examples

UPPER("total") equals "TOTAL"

If E5 contains "yield", then

UPPER(E5) equals "YIELD"

The following macro formula converts the contents of the active cell to uppercase:

FORMULA(UPPER(ACTIVE.CELL()),ACTIVE.CELL())


ADDRESS

See Also

Creates a cell address as text, given specified row and column numbers.

Syntax

ADDRESS(row_num, column_num, abs_num, a1, sheet_text)

Row_num    is the row number to use in the cell reference.

Column_num    is the column number to use in the cell reference.

Abs_num    specifies the type of reference to return.

Abs_num	Returns this type of reference

1 or omitted	Absolute

2	Absolute row; relative column

3	Relative row; absolute column

4	Relative

A1    is a logical value that specifies the A1 or R1C1 reference style. If a1 is TRUE or omitted, ADDRESS returns an A1-style reference; if FALSE, ADDRESS returns an R1C1-style reference.

Sheet_text    is text specifying the name of the worksheet or macro sheet to be used as the external reference. If sheet_text is omitted, no sheet name is used.

Examples

ADDRESS(2,3) equals "$C$2"

ADDRESS(2,3,2) equals "C$2"

ADDRESS(2,3,2,FALSE) equals "R2C[3]"

ADDRESS(2,3,1,FALSE,"[Book1]Sheet1") equals "[Book1]Sheet1!R2C3"

ADDRESS(2,3,1,FALSE,"EXCEL SHEET") equals "'EXCEL SHEET'!R2C3"


AREAS

See Also

Returns the number of areas in a reference. An area is a range of contiguous cells or a single cell.

Syntax

AREAS(reference)

Reference    is a reference to a cell or range of cells and can refer to multiple areas. If you want to specify several references as a single argument, then you must include extra sets of parentheses so that Microsoft Excel will not interpret the comma as a field separator. See the second example following.

Tip   This function is useful in a macro for testing whether or not a reference is a nonadjacent selection. See the fourth example following.

Examples

AREAS(B2:D4) equals 1

AREAS((B2:D4,E5,F6:I9)) equals 3

If the name Prices refers to the areas B1:D4, B2, and E1:E10, then:

AREAS(Prices) equals 3

The following macro formula branches to an error routine if the current selection is not contiguous:

IF(AREAS(SELECTION())>1,GOTO(Error))


CELL

See Also

Returns information about the formatting, location, or contents of the upper-left cell in a reference.

Syntax

CELL(info_type, reference)

Info_type    is a text value that specifies what type of cell information you want. The following list shows the possible values of info_type and the corresponding results.

Info_type	Returns

"address"	Reference of the first cell in reference, as text.

"col"	Column number of the cell in reference.

"color"	1 if the cell is formatted in color for negative values; otherwise returns 0.

"contents"	Contents of the upper-left cell in reference.

"filename"	Filename (including full path) of the file that contains reference, as text. Returns empty text ("") if the worksheet that contains reference has not yet been saved.

"format"	Text value corresponding to the number format of the cell. The text values for the various formats are shown in the following table. Returns "-" at the end of the text value if the cell is formatted in color for negative values. Returns "()" at the end of the text value if the cell is formatted with parentheses for positive or all values.

"parentheses"	1 if the cell is formatted with parentheses for positive or all values; otherwise returns 0.

"prefix"	Text value corresponding to the "label prefix" of the cell. Returns single quotation mark (') if the cell contains left-aligned text, double quotation mark (") if the cell contains right-aligned text, caret (^) if the cell contains centered text, backslash (\) if the cell contains fill-aligned text, and empty text ("") if the cell contains anything else.

"protect"	0 if the cell is not locked, and 1 if the cell is locked.

"row"	Row number of the cell in reference. .

"type"	Text value corresponding to the type of data in the cell. Returns "b" for blank if the cell is empty, "l" for label if the cell contains a text constant, and "v" for value if the cell contains anything else.

"width"	Column width of the cell rounded off to an integer. Each unit of column width is equal to the width of one character in the default font size.

Reference    is the cell that you want information about.

The following list describes the text values CELL returns when info_type is "format" and reference is a cell formatted with a built-in number format.

If the Microsoft Excel format is	CELL returns

General 	"G"

0	"F0"

#,##0 	",0"

0.00	"F2"

#,##0.00 	",2"

$#,##0_);($#,##0) 	"C0'

$#,##0_);[Red]($#,##0) 	"C0-"

$#,##0.00_);($#,##0.00)	"C2"

$#,##0.00_);[Red]($#,##0.00) 	"C2-"

0% 	"P0"

0.00% 	"P2"

0.00E+00 	"S2"

# ?/? or # ??/??	"G"

m/d/yy or m/d/yy h:mm or mm/dd/yy.	"D4"

d-mmm-yy or dd-mmm-yy	"D1"

d-mmm or dd-mmm	"D2"

mmm-yy 	"D3"

mm/dd	"D5"

h:mm AM/PM 	"D7"

h:mm:ss AM/PM 	"D6"

h:mm 	"D9"

h:mm:ss 	"D8"

If the info_type argument in the CELL formula is "format", and if the cell is formatted later with a custom format, then you must recalculate the worksheet to update the CELL formula.

Remarks

The CELL function is provided for compatibility with other spreadsheet programs.

Examples

CELL("row",A20) equals 20

If B12 has the format "d-mmm", then:

CELL("format",B12) equals "D2"

If A3 contains TOTAL, then:

CELL("contents", A3) equals "TOTAL"


CHOOSE

See Also

Uses index_num to return a value from the list of value arguments. Use CHOOSE to select one of up to 29 values based on the index number. For example, if value1 through value7 are the days of the week, CHOOSE returns one of the days when a number between 1 and 7 is used as index_num.

Syntax

CHOOSE(index_num, value1, value2, …)

Index_num    specifies which value argument is selected. Index_num must be a number between 1 and 29, or a formula or reference to a cell containing a number between 1 and 29.

If index_num is 1, CHOOSE returns value1; if it is 2, CHOOSE returns value2; and so on.

If index_num is less than 1 or greater than the number of the last value in the list, CHOOSE returns the #VALUE! error value.

If index_num is a fraction, it is truncated to the lowest integer before being used.

Value1, value2,…    are 1 to 29 value arguments from which CHOOSE selects a value or an action to perform based on index_num. The arguments can be numbers, cell references, defined names, formulas, macro functions, or text.

Remarks

If you are using CHOOSE in a macro, the value arguments can be GOTO functions or action-taking functions. For example, the following formulas are allowed in a macro, where Level is a name referring to a value or a cell containing a value between 1 and 3:

CHOOSE(Level,GOTO(Begin),GOTO(Intermed),GOTO(Adv))

CHOOSE(Level,ACTIVATE.NEXT(),ACTIVATE.PREV())

If index_num is an array, every value is evaluated when CHOOSE is executed. If some of those value arguments are action-taking functions, all the actions are taken. For example, the following formula opens both a new worksheet and a new chart:

CHOOSE({1,2},NEW(1),NEW(2))

The value arguments to CHOOSE can be range references as well as single values. For example, the formula:

SUM(CHOOSE(2,A1:A10,B1:B10,C1:C10))

evaluates to:

SUM(B1:B10)

which then returns a value based on the values in the range B1:B10.

The CHOOSE function is evaluated first, returning the reference B1:B10. The SUM function is then evaluated using B1:B10, the result of the CHOOSE function, as its argument.

Examples

CHOOSE(2,"1st","2nd","3rd","Finished") equals "2nd"

SUM(A1:CHOOSE(3,A10,A20,A30)) equals SUM(A1:A30)

If A10 contains 4, then:

CHOOSE(A10,"Nails","Screws","Nuts","Bolts") equals "Bolts"

If A10-3 equals 3, then:

CHOOSE(A10-3,"1st","2nd","3rd","Finished") equals "3rd"

If SalesOld is a name defined to refer to the value 10,000, then:

CHOOSE(2,SalesNew,SalesOld,SalesBudget) equals 10,000


COLUMN

See Also

Returns the column number of the given reference.

Syntax

COLUMN(reference)

Reference    is the cell or range of cells for which you want the column number.

If reference is omitted, it is assumed to be the reference of the cell in which the COLUMN function appears.

If reference is a range of cells and if COLUMN is entered as a horizontal array, COLUMN returns the column numbers of reference as a horizontal array.

Reference cannot refer to multiple areas.

Examples

COLUMN(A3) equals 1

When entered as an array in any three horizontally contiguous cells:

COLUMN(A3:C5) equals {1,2,3}

If COLUMN is entered in C5, then:

COLUMN() equals COLUMN(C5) equals 3


COLUMNS

See Also

Returns the number of columns in an array or reference.

Syntax

COLUMNS(array)

Array    is an array or array formula, or a reference to a range of cells for which you want the number of columns.

Examples

COLUMNS(A1:C4) equals 3

COLUMNS({1,2,3;4,5,6}) equals 3

The following macro formula returns the number of columns in a contiguous selection:

COLUMNS(SELECTION())

If the selection is not contiguous, the following macro formula returns the number of columns in a particular area (specified by AreaNum) of the selection. An "area" is a contiguous region within a nonadjacent selection, so a nonadjacent selection consists of multiple areas.

COLUMNS(INDEX(SELECTION(),,,AreaNum))


ERROR.TYPE

See Also

Returns a number corresponding to one of Microsoft Excel's error values. Use ERROR.TYPE to determine what type of error occurred so that your macro can run an appropriate error-handling subroutine. ERROR.TYPE can also be used on a worksheet.

Syntax

ERROR.TYPE(error_val)

Error_val    is the error value whose identifying number you want to find. Although error_val can be the actual error value, it will usually be a reference to a cell containing a formula that you want to test.

If error_val is	ERROR.TYPE returns

#NULL!	1

#DIV/0!	2

#VALUE!	3

#REF!	4

#NAME?	5

#NUM!	6

#N/A	7

Anything else	#N/A

Example

The following macro formula checks the cell named Ratio to see if it contains a #DIV/0! error value. If it does, a subroutine named DivisionByZero is run.

IF(ERROR.TYPE(Ratio)=2,DivisionByZero())


FIND

See Also

Finds one string of text within another string of text and returns the number of the character at which find_text first occurs. You can also use SEARCH to find one string of text within another, but unlike SEARCH, FIND is case-sensitive and doesn't allow wildcard characters.

Syntax

FIND(find_text, within_text, start_num)

Find_text    is the text you want to find.

If find_text is "" (empty text), FIND matches the first character in the search string (that is, the character numbered start_num or 1).

Find_text cannot contain any wildcard characters.

Within_text    is the text containing the text you want to find.

Start_num    specifies the character at which to start the search. The first character in within_text is character number 1. If you omit start_num, it is assumed to be 1.

Remarks

If find_text does not appear in within_text, FIND returns the #VALUE! error value.

If start_num is not greater than zero, FIND returns the #VALUE! error value.

If start_num is greater than the length of within_text, FIND returns the #VALUE! error value.

Examples

FIND("M","Miriam McGovern") equals 1

FIND("m","Miriam McGovern") equals 6

FIND("M","Miriam McGovern",3) equals 8

Suppose you have a list of parts and serial numbers in a worksheet, and you want to extract the names of the parts, but not the serial numbers, from each cell. You can use the FIND function to find the # symbol, and the MID function to omit the serial number. A2:A4 contain the following parts with serial numbers, respectively: "Ceramic Insulators #124-TD45-87", "Copper Coils #12-671-6772", "Variable Resistors #116010".

MID(A2,1,FIND(" #",A2,1)-1) returns "Ceramic Insulators"

MID(A3,1,FIND(" #",A3,1)-1) returns "Copper Coils"

MID(A4,1,FIND(" #",A4,1)-1) returns "Variable Resistors"


HLOOKUP

See Also

Searches the top row of an array for a particular value, and returns the value in the indicated cell. Use HLOOKUP when your comparison values are located in a row across the top of a table of data and you want to look down a specified number of rows. Use VLOOKUP when your comparison values are located in a column to the left or right of the data you want to find.

Syntax

HLOOKUP(lookup_value, table_array, row_index_num, range_lookup)

Lookup_value    is the value to be found in the first row of the table. Lookup_value can be a value, a reference, or a text string

Table_array    is a table of information in which data is looked up. Use a reference to a range or a range name.

The values in the first row of table_array can be text, numbers, or logical values.

If range_lookup is TRUE, the values in the first row of table_array must be placed in ascending order: ...-2, -1, 0), 1, 2,... , A-Z, FALSE, TRUE; otherwise, HLOOKUP may not give the correct value. If range_lookup is FALSE, table_array does not need to be sorted.

Uppercase and lowercase text are equivalent.

You can put values in ascending order by selecting the values, choosing the Sort command from the Data menu, and selecting Sort By Columns and Ascending.

Row_index_num    is the row number in table_array from which the matching value should be returned. A row_index_num of 1 returns the first row value in table_array, a row_index_num of 2 returns the second row value in table_array, and so on. If row_index_num is less than 1, HLOOKUP returns the #VALUE! error value; if row_index_num is greater than the number of rows on table_array, HLOOKUP returns the #REF! error value.

Range_lookup    Is a logical value that specifies whether you want HLOOKUP to find an exact match or an approximate match.  If TRUE or omitted, an approximate match is returned; in other words, if an exact match is not found, the next largest value that is less than lookup_value is returned. If FALSE, HLOOKUP will find an exact match.  If one is not found, the error value #N/A is returned.

Remarks

If HLOOKUP can't find lookup_value, and range_lookup is TRUE, it uses the largest value that is less than lookup_value.

If lookup_value is smaller than the smallest value in the first row of table_array, HLOOKUP returns the #N/A error value.

Examples

Suppose you have an inventory worksheet of auto parts. A1:A4 contain "Axles", 4, 5, 6. B1:B4 contain "Bearings", 4, 7, 8. C1:C4 contain "Bolts", 9, 10, 11.

HLOOKUP("Axles", A1:C4,2,TRUE) equals 4

HLOOKUP("Bearings",A1:C4,3,FALSE) equals 7

HLOOKUP("Bearings",A1:C4,3,TRUE) equals 7

HLOOKUP("Bolts",A1:C4,4,) equals 11

Table_array can also be an array constant:

HLOOKUP(3,{1,2,3;"a","b","c";"d","e","f"},2,TRUE) equals "c"


IF

See Also

Returns one value if logical_test evaluates to TRUE and another value if it evaluates to FALSE.

There are two syntax forms of the IF function. Syntax 1 can be used on worksheets and macro sheets. Syntax 2 can only be used on macro sheets in conjunction with the ELSE, ELSE.IF, and END.IF functions.

Use IF to conduct conditional tests on values and formulas and to branch based on the result of that test. The outcome of the test determines the value returned by the IF function.

Syntax 1

Worksheets and macro sheets

IF(logical_test, value_if_true, value_if_false)

Logical_test    is any value or expression that can be evaluated to TRUE or FALSE.

Value_if_true    is the value that is returned if logical_test is TRUE. If logical_test is TRUE and value_if_true is omitted, TRUE is returned.

Value_if_false    is the value that is returned if logical_test is FALSE. If logical_test is FALSE and value_if_false is omitted, FALSE is returned.

Remarks

Up to seven IF functions can be nested as value_if_true and value_if_false arguments to construct more elaborate tests. See the following last example.

If you are using IF in a macro, value_if_true and value_if_false can also be GOTO functions, other macros, or action-taking functions.

For example, the following formula is allowed in a macro:

IF(Number>10,GOTO(Large),GOTO(Small))

In the preceding example, if Number is greater than 10, then logical_test is TRUE, the value_if_true statement is evaluated, and the macro function GOTO(Large) is run. If Number is less than or equal to 10, then logical_test is FALSE, value_if_false is evaluated, and the macro function GOTO(Small) is run.

When the value_if_true and value_if_false arguments are evaluated, IF returns the value returned by those statements. In the preceding example, if the number is not greater than 10, TRUE is still returned if the second GOTO statement is successful.

If any of the arguments to IF are arrays, every element of the array is evaluated when the IF statement is carried out. If some of the value_if_true and value_if_false arguments are action-taking functions, all of the actions are taken. For example, the following macro formula runs both ALERT functions:

IF({TRUE,FALSE},ALERT("One",2),ALERT("Two",2))

Examples

In the following example, if the value referred to by the name File is equal to "Chart", logical_test is TRUE and the macro function NEW(2) is carried out, otherwise, logical_test is FALSE and NEW(1) is carried out:

IF(File="Chart",NEW(2),NEW(1))

Suppose an expense worksheet contains in B2:B4 the following data for "Actual Expenses" for January, February, and March: 1500, 500, 500. C2:C4 contains the following data for "Predicted Expenses" for the same periods: 900, 900, 925.

You could write a macro to check whether you are over budget for a particular month, generating text for a message with the following formulas:

IF(B2>C2,"Over Budget","OK") equals "Over Budget"

IF(B3>C3,"Over Budget","OK") equals "OK"

Suppose you want to assign letter grades to numbers referenced by the name Average. See the following table.

If Average is	Then return

Greater than 89	A

From 80 to 89	B

From 70 to 79	C

From 60 to 69	D

Less than 60	F

You could use the following nested IF function:

IF(Average>89,"A",IF(Average>79,"B",
IF(Average>69,"C",IF(Average>59,"D","F"))))

In the preceding example, the second IF statement is also the value_if_false argument to the first IF statement. Similarly, the third IF statement is the value_if_false argument to the second IF statement. For example, if the first logical_test (Average>89) is TRUE, "A" is returned. If the first logical_test is FALSE, the second IF statement is evaluated, and so on.


INDEX

See Also

There are two forms of the INDEX() function: array and reference.  The array form always returns a value or an array of values; the reference form always returns a reference.

INDEX(reference,row_num,column_num,area_num) returns a reference to a specified cell or cells within reference.

INDEX(array,row_num,column_num) returns the value of a specified cell or array of cells within array.

Syntax 1 (array)

Syntax 2 (reference)


   INDEX

See Also

Returns the reference of the cell at the intersection of a particular row and column. If the reference is made up of nonadjacent selections, you can pick the selection to look in.

The INDEX function has two syntax forms: array and reference. The array form always returns a value or an array of values; the reference form always returns a reference.

Syntax 2

Reference form

INDEX(reference, row_num, column_num, area_num)

Reference    is a reference to one or more cell ranges.

If you are entering a nonadjacent selection for reference, enclose reference in parentheses. For an example of using INDEX with a nonadjacent selection, see the fifth example following.

If each area in reference contains only one row or column, the row_num or column_num argument, respectively, is optional. For example, for a single row reference, use INDEX(reference,,column_num).

Row_num    is the number of the row in reference from which to return a reference.

Column_num    is the number of the column in reference from which to return a reference.

Area_num    selects a range in reference from which to return the intersection of row_num and column_num. The first area selected or entered is numbered 1, the second is 2, and so on. If area_num is omitted, INDEX uses area 1.

For example, if reference describes the cells (A1:B4,D1:E4,G1:H4), then area_num 1 is the range A1:B4, area_num 2 is the range D1:E4, and area_num 3 is the range G1:H4.

After reference and area_num have selected a particular range, row_num and column_num select a particular cell: row_num 1 is the first row in the range, column_num 1 is the first column, and so on. The reference returned by INDEX is the intersection of row_num and column_num.

If you set row_num or column_num to 0, INDEX returns the reference for the entire column or row, respectively.

Remarks

Row_num, column_num, and area_num must point to a cell within reference; otherwise, INDEX returns the #REF! error value. If row_num and column_num are omitted, INDEX returns the area in reference specified by area_num.

The result of the INDEX function is a reference and is interpreted as such by other formulas. Depending on the formula, the return value of INDEX may be used as a reference or as a value. For example, the macro formula CELL("width",INDEX(A1:B2,1,2)) is equivalent to CELL("width",B1). The CELL function uses the return value of INDEX as a cell reference. On the other hand, a formula such as 2*INDEX(A1:B2,1,2) translates the return value of INDEX into the number in cell B1.

Examples

In the following worksheet, the range A2:C6 is named Fruit, the range A8:C11 is named Nuts, and the range A1:C11 is named Stock.

INDEX(Fruit,2,3) equals the reference C3, containing 38

INDEX(Nuts,1,1) equals the reference A8, containing "Almonds"

INDEX(Fruit,2,4) equals the #REF! error value, because the column_num argument (4) is out of range

INDEX(Stock,1,2) equals the reference B2, containing "Price"

INDEX((A1:C6,A8:C11),2,2,2) equals the reference B9, containing $3.55

SUM(INDEX(Stock,0,3,1)) equals SUM(C1:C11) equals 216

SUM(B2:INDEX(Fruit,5,2)) equals SUM(B2:B6) equals 2.42


  INDEX

See Also

Returns the value of an element in an array, selected by the row and column number indexes.

The INDEX function has two syntax forms: array and reference. The array form always returns a value or array of values; the reference form always returns a reference. Use the array form when the first argument to INDEX is an array constant.

Syntax 1

INDEX(array, row_num, column_num)

Array form

Array    is a range of cells entered as an array.

Row_num    selects the row in array from which to return a value. If row_num is omitted, column_num is required.

Column_num    selects the column in array from which to return a value. If column_num is omitted, row_num is required.

If both the row_num  and column_num arguments are used, INDEX returns the value in the cell at the intersection of row_num and column_num.

If array contains only one row or column, the corresponding row_num or column_num argument is optional.

If array has more than one row and more than one column, and only row_num or column_num is used, INDEX returns an array of the entire row or column in array.

If you set row_num or column_num to 0, INDEX returns the array of values for the entire column or row, respectively. To use values returned as an array, enter the INDEX function as an array in a horizontal array of cells. Arrays are entered by pressing CTRL+SHIFT+ENTER (in Microsoft Excel for Windows) or COMMAND+RETURN (in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh).

Remarks

Row_num and column_num must point to a cell within array; otherwise, INDEX returns the #REF! error value.

Examples

INDEX({1,2;3,4},2,2) equals 4

If entered as an array formula, then:

INDEX({1,2;3,4},0,2) equals {2;4}


INDIRECT

See Also

Returns the reference specified by ref_text. References are immediately evaluated to display their contents. Use INDIRECT to get the value stored in a cell indicated by a reference in another cell.

Syntax

INDIRECT(ref_text, a1)

Ref_text    is a reference to a cell that contains an A1- style reference, an R1C1-style reference, or a name defined as a reference. If ref_text is not a valid cell reference, INDIRECT returns the #REF! error value.

A1    is a logical value that specifies what type of reference is contained in the cell ref_text.

If a1 is TRUE or omitted, ref_text is interpreted as an A1-style reference.

If a1 is FALSE, ref_text is interpreted as an R1C1-style reference.

Examples

If cell A1 contains the text "B2", and cell B2 contains the value 1.333, then:

INDIRECT($A$1) equals 1.333

If the workspace is set to display R1C1-style references, cell R1C1 contains R2C2, and cell R2C2 contains the value 1.333, then:

INT(INDIRECT(R1C1,FALSE)) equals 1

If B3 contains the text "George", and a cell defined as George contains the value 10, then:

INDIRECT($B$3) equals 10


INFO

See Also

Returns information about the current operating environment.

Syntax

INFO(type_text)

Type_text    is text specifying what type of information you want returned.

Type_text	Returns

"directory"	Path of the current directory or folder

"memavail"	Amount of memory available, in bytes

"memused"	Amount of memory being used for data

"numfile"	Number of active worksheets

"origin"	Absolute A1-style reference, as text, prepended with "$A:" for Lotus 1-2-3 release 3.x compatibility. Returns the cell reference of the top and left most cell visible in the window based on the current scrolling position.

"osversion"	Current operating system version, as text

"recalc"	Current recalculation mode; returns "Automatic" or "Manual"

"release"	Version of Microsoft Excel, as text

"system"	Name of the operating environment:
Macintosh = "mac"
Windows = "pcdos"

"totmem"	Total memory available, including memory already in use, in bytes

Examples

The following formula returns 2 if two worksheets are currently open:

INFO("numfile")


CALL

See Also

Calls a procedure in a dynamic link library or code resource. There are two syntax forms of this function. Use syntax 1 only with a previously registered code resource, which uses arguments from the REGISTER function. Use syntax 2a or 2b to simultaneously register and call a code resource.

Important   This function is provided for advanced users only. If you use the CALL function incorrectly, you could cause errors that will require you to restart your computer.

Syntax 1

Used with REGISTER

CALL(register_id, argument1, ...)

Syntax 2a

Used alone (in Microsoft Excel for Windows)

CALL(module_text, procedure, type_text, argument1, ...)

Syntax 2b

Used alone (in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh)

CALL(file_text, resource, type_text, argument1, ...)

Register_id    is the value returned by a previously executed REGISTER or REGISTER.ID function.

Argument1,...    are the arguments to be passed to the procedure.

Module_text    is quoted text specifying the name of the dynamic link library (DLL) that contains the procedure in Microsoft Excel for Windows.

File_text     is the name of the file that contains the code resource in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh.

Procedure    is text specifying the name of the function in the DLL in Microsoft Excel for Windows. You can also use the ordinal value of the function from the EXPORTS statement in the module-definition file (.DEF). The ordinal value should not be in the form of text.

Resource    is the name of the code resource in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh. You can also use the resource ID number. The resource ID number should not be in the form of text.

Type_text    is text specifying the data type of the return value and the data types of all arguments to the DLL or code resource. The first letter of type_text specifies the return value. The codes you use for type_text are described in detail in Using the CALL and REGISTER Functions. For stand-alone DLLs or code resources (XLLs), you can omit this argument.

Example

Syntax 1 (32-bit Microsoft Excel)

IN 32-bit Microsoft Excel for Windows 95 and Microsoft Excel for Windows NT, the following macro formula registers the GetTickCount function from 32-bit Microsoft Windows. GetTickCount returns the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since Microsoft Windows was started.

REGISTER("Kernel32","GetTickCount","J")

Assuming that this REGISTER function is in cell A5, after your macro registers GetTickCount, you can use the CALL function to return the number of milliseconds that have elapsed:

CALL(A5)

Syntax 1 (16-bit Microsoft Excel)

In 16-bit Microsoft Excel for Windows, the following macro formula registers the GetTickCount function from 16-bit Microsoft Windows. GetTickCount returns the number of milliseconds that have elapsed since Microsoft Windows was started.

REGISTER("User","GetTickCount","J")

Assuming that this REGISTER function is in cell A5, after your macro registers GetTickCount, you can use the CALL function to return the number of milliseconds that have elapsed:

CALL(A5)

Example

Syntax 2a (32-bit Microsoft Excel)

On a worksheet, you can use the following CALL formula (syntax 2a) to call the GetTickCount function:

CALL("Kernel32","GetTickCount","J!")

The ! in the type_text argument forces Microsoft Excel to recalculate the CALL function every time the worksheet recalculates. This updates the elapsed time whenever the worksheet recalculates.

Syntax 2a (16-bit Microsoft Excel)

On a worksheet, you can use the following CALL formula (syntax 2a) to call the GetTickCount function:

CALL("User","GetTickCount","J!")

The ! in the type_text argument forces Microsoft Excel to recalculate the CALL function every time the worksheet recalculates. This updates the elapsed time whenever the worksheet recalculates.

Tip   You can use optional arguments to the REGISTER function to assign a custom name to a function. This name will appear in the Paste Function dialog box, and you can call the function by using its custom name in a formula. For more information, see REGISTER.


LOOKUP

Looks up values in a vector or array. The LOOKUP function has two syntax forms, vector and array. The vector form of LOOKUP looks in a vector a value, moves to the correspondint position in a second vector, and returns this value. The array form of LOOKUP looks in the first row or column of an array for the specified value, moves down or across to the last cell, and returns the value of the cell.

Syntax 1 (vector)

Syntax 2 (array)


LOOKUP Syntax 1
LOOKUP

See Also

The LOOKUP function has two syntax forms, vector and array.

A vector is an array that contains only one row or one column. The vector form of LOOKUP looks in a vector for a value, moves to the corresponding position in a second vector, and returns this value. Use this form of the LOOKUP function when you want to be able to specify the range that contains the values you want to match. The other form of LOOKUP automatically looks in the first column or row.

Syntax 1

Vector form

LOOKUP(lookup_value, lookup_vector, result_vector)

Lookup_value    is a value that LOOKUP searches for in the first vector. Lookup_value can be a number, text, a logical value, or a name or reference that refers to a value.

Lookup_vector    is a range that contains only one row or one column. The values in lookup_vector can be text, numbers, or logical values.

Important   The values in lookup_vector must be placed in ascending order: ...,-2, -1, 0), 1, 2, ..., A-Z, FALSE, TRUE; otherwise, LOOKUP may not give the correct value. Uppercase and lowercase text are equivalent.

Result_vector    is a range that contains only one row or column. It should be the same size as lookup_vector.

If LOOKUP can't find the lookup_value, it matches the largest value in lookup_vector that is less than or equal to lookup_value.

If lookup_value is smaller than the smallest value in lookup_vector, LOOKUP gives the #N/A error value.

Examples

In the preceding worksheet:

LOOKUP(4.91,A2:A7,B2:B7) equals "orange"

LOOKUP(5.00,A2:A7,B2:B7) equals "orange"

LOOKUP(7.66,A2:A7,B2:B7) equals "violet"

LOOKUP(7.66E-14,A2:A7,B2:B7) equals #N/A, because 7.66E-14 is less than the smallest value in the lookup_vector A2:A7


LOOKUP Syntax 2
LOOKUP

See Also

The LOOKUP function has two syntax forms, vector and array.

The array form of LOOKUP looks in the first row or column of an array for the specified value, moves down or across to the last cell, and returns the value of the cell. Use this form of LOOKUP when the values you want to match are in the first row or column of the array. Use the other form of LOOKUP when you want to be able to specify the location of the column or row.

Tip   In general, it's best to use the HLOOKUP or VLOOKUP function instead of the array form of LOOKUP. This form of LOOKUP is provided for compatibility with other spreadsheet programs.

Syntax 2

Array form

LOOKUP(lookup_value, array)

Lookup_value    is a value that LOOKUP searches for in an array. Lookup_value can be a number, text, a logical value, or a name or reference that refers to a value.

If LOOKUP can't find the lookup_value, it uses the largest value in the array that is less than or equal to lookup_value.

If lookup_value is smaller than the smallest value in the first row or column (depending on the array dimensions), LOOKUP returns the #N/A error value.

Array    is a range of cells that contains text, numbers, or logical values that you want to compare with lookup_value.

The array form of LOOKUP is very similar to the HLOOKUP and VLOOKUP functions. The difference is that HLOOKUP searches for lookup_value in the first row, VLOOKUP searches in the first column, and LOOKUP searches according to the dimensions of array.

If array is square, or covers an area that is wider than it is tall (more columns than rows), LOOKUP searches for lookup_value in the first row.

If array is taller than it is wide (more rows than columns), LOOKUP searches in the first column.

HLOOKUP and VLOOKUP allow you to index down or across, but LOOKUP always selects the last value in the row or column.

Important   The values must be placed in ascending order: ...,-2, -1, 0), 1, 2, ..., A-Z, FALSE, TRUE; otherwise, LOOKUP may not give the correct value. Uppercase and lowercase text are equivalent.

Examples

LOOKUP("C",{"a","b","c","d";1,2,3,4}) equals 3

LOOKUP("bump",{"a",1;"b",2;"c",3}) equals 2


MATCH

See Also

Returns the relative position of an element in an array that matches a specified value in a specified way. Use MATCH instead of one of the LOOKUP functions when you need the position of a matched item instead of the item itself.

Syntax

MATCH(lookup_value, lookup_array, match_type)

Lookup_value    is the value you use to find the value you want in a table.

Lookup_value is the value you want to match in lookup_array. For example, when you look up someone's number in a telephone book, you are using the person's name as the lookup value, but the telephone number is the value you want.

Lookup_value can be a value (number, text, or logical value) or a cell reference to a number, text, or logical value.

Lookup_array    is a contiguous range of cells containing possible lookup values. Lookup_array can be an array or an array reference.

Match_type    is the number -1, 0), or 1. Match_type specifies how Microsoft Excel matches lookup_value with values in lookup_array.

If match_type is 1, MATCH finds the largest value that is less than or equal to lookup_value. Lookup_array must be placed in ascending order: ...-2, -1, 0), 1, 2,...A-Z, FALSE, TRUE.

If match_type is 0, MATCH finds the first value that is exactly equal to lookup_value. Lookup_array can be in any order.

If match_type is -1, MATCH finds the smallest value that is greater than or equal to lookup_value. Lookup_array must be placed in descending order: TRUE, FALSE, Z-A,...2, 1, 0), -1, -2,..., and so on.

If match_type is omitted, it is assumed to be 1.

Remarks

MATCH returns the position of the matched value within lookup_array, not the value itself. For example: MATCH("b",{"a","b","c"},0) returns 2, the relative position of "b" within the array {"a","b","c"}.

MATCH does not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase letters when matching text values.

If MATCH is unsuccessful in finding a match, it returns the #N/A error value.

If match_type is 0 and lookup_value is text, lookup_value can contain the wildcard characters, asterisk (*) and question mark (?). An asterisk matches any sequence of characters; a question mark matches any single character.

Examples

Note that C2:C8 contains text formatted as percent numbers.

In the preceding worksheet:

MATCH(39000,B2:B8,1) equals 3

MATCH(38000,B2:B8,0) equals 2

MATCH(39000,B2:B8,-1) equals the #N/A error value because the range B2:B8 is ordered incorrectly for match_type -1 matching (the order must be descending to be correct).

Suppose Yen refers to A2:A8, YenDollar to A2:C8, and MyIncome to a cell containing the number ¥6,301,126.33. This formula:

"Your tax rate is "&LOOKUP(MyIncome,YenDollar)&", which places you in tax bracket number "&MATCH(MyIncome,Yen)&"."

produces this result:

"Your tax rate is 22.41%, which places you in tax bracket number 7."


OFFSET

See Also

Returns a reference of a specified height and width, offset from another reference by a specified number of rows and columns.

Syntax

OFFSET(reference, rows, cols, height, width)

Reference    is the reference from which you want to base the offset. If reference is a multiple selection, OFFSET returns the #VALUE! error value.

Rows    is the number of rows, up or down, that you want the upper-left cell to refer to. Using 5 as the rows argument specifies that the upper-left cell in the reference is five rows below reference. Rows can be positive or negative.

Cols    is the number of columns, to the left or right, that you want the upper-left cell of the result to refer to. Using 5 as the cols argument specifies that the upper-left cell in the reference is five columns to the right of reference. Cols can be positive or negative.

If rows and cols offset reference over the edge of the worksheet, OFFSET returns the #REF! error value.

Height    is the height, in number of rows, that you want the returned reference to be. Height must be a positive number.

Width    is the width, in number of columns, that you want the returned reference to be. Width must be a positive number.

If height or width is omitted, it is assumed to be the same height or width as reference.

Remarks

OFFSET doesn't actually move any cells or change the selection; it just returns a reference. OFFSET can be used with any function expecting a reference argument. For example, to select a range offset from the current selection, use OFFSET with the SELECT and SELECTION functions. You can also select a cell offset from the current selection by using a relative reference with the SELECT function, for example, SELECT("R[1]C").

Examples

OFFSET(C3,2,3,1,1) equals F5. If you enter this formula on a worksheet, Microsoft Excel displays the value contained in cell F5.

OFFSET(C3:E5,-1,0,3,3) equals C2:E4

OFFSET(C3:E5,0,-3,3,3) equals #REF!

The following macro formula selects a range of the same size as the current selection one row down:

SELECT(OFFSET(SELECTION(),1,0))

The following macro formula puts the result of the DOCUMENTS function into a range with a height of one row and a width corresponding to the number of columns returned by the COLUMNS function, and offset from the active cell by one row and one column:

FORMULA.ARRAY(DOCUMENTS(),OFFSET(ACTIVE.CELL(),1,1,1,
COLUMNS(DOCUMENTS())))


ROW

See Also

Returns the row number of a reference.

Syntax

ROW(reference)

Reference    is the cell or range of cells for which you want the row number.

If reference is omitted, it is assumed to be the reference of the cell in which the ROW function appears.

If reference is a range of cells and if ROW is entered as a vertical array, ROW returns the row numbers of reference as a vertical array.

Reference cannot refer to multiple areas.

Examples

ROW(A3) equals 3

When entered as an array formula in three vertical cells:

ROW(A3:B5) equals {3;4;5}

If ROW is entered in C5, then:

ROW() equals ROW(C5) equals 5

The following macro formula tells you which row the active cell is in:

ROW(ACTIVE.CELL())


ROWS

See Also

Returns the number of rows in a reference or array.

Syntax

ROWS(array)

Array    is an array, an array formula, or a reference to a range of cells for which you want the number of rows.

Examples

ROWS(A1:C4) equals 4

ROWS({1,2,3;4,5,6}) equals 2

The following macro formula calculates the number of rows in the current selection:

ROWS(SELECTION())

The following macro formula calculates the number of rows in the third area in a discontinuous selection (specified by the area_num argument to INDEX) of the current multiple selection:

ROWS(INDEX(SELECTION(),,,3))


SEARCH

See Also

Returns the number of the character at which a specific character or text string is first found, reading from left to right. Use SEARCH to discover the location of a character or text string within another text string, so that you can use the MID or REPLACE functions to change the text.

Syntax

SEARCH(find_text, within_text, start_num)

Find_text    is the text you want to find. You can use the wildcard characters, question mark (?) and asterisk (*), in find_text. A question mark matches any single character; an asterisk matches any sequence of characters. If you want to find an actual question mark or asterisk, type a tilde (~) before the character. If find_text is not found, the #VALUE! error value is returned.

Within_text    is the text in which you want to search for find_text.

Start_num    is the character number in within_text, counting from the left, at which you want to start searching.

If start_num is omitted, it is assumed to be 1.

If start_num is not greater than 0 or is greater than the length of within_text, the #VALUE! error value is returned.

Tip   Use start_num to skip a specified number of characters from the left of the text. For example, suppose you are working with a text string such as "AYF0093.YoungMensApparel". To find the number of the first "Y" in the descriptive part of the text string, set start_num equal to 8 so that the serial-number portion of the text is not searched. SEARCH begins with character 8, finds find_text at the next character, and returns the number 9. SEARCH always returns the number of characters from the left of the text string, not from start_num.

Remarks

SEARCH does not distinguish between uppercase and lowercase letters when searching text.

SEARCH is similar to FIND, except that FIND is case-sensitive.

Examples

SEARCH("e","Statements",6) equals 7

If cell B17 contains the word "margin" and cell A14 contains "Profit Margin", then:

SEARCH($B$17,$A$14) equals 8

Use SEARCH with the REPLACE function to provide REPLACE with the correct start_num at which to begin inserting new text. Using the same cell references as the previous example:

REPLACE($A$14,SEARCH($B$17,$A$14),6,"Amount") returns the text "Profit Amount".


TRANSPOSE

See Also

Returns the transpose of an array. TRANSPOSE must be entered as an array formula in a range that has the same number of rows and columns, respectively, as array has columns and rows. Use TRANSPOSE to shift the vertical and horizontal orientation of an array on a worksheet or macro sheet. For example, some functions, such as DOCUMENTS, return horizontal arrays. The following formula would return a vertical array from DOCUMENTS:

TRANSPOSE(DOCUMENTS())

Syntax

TRANSPOSE(array)

Array    is an array on a worksheet or macro sheet that you want to transpose. Array can also be a range of cells.

The transpose of an array is created by using the first row of the array as the first column of the new array, the second row of the array as the second column of the new array, and so on.

Tip   In a macro, you can transpose an array and paste only the values contained in the array, using the PASTE.SPECIAL macro function with 3 (values) as the paste_num argument and TRUE as the transpose argument.

Example

Suppose A1:C1 contain 1, 2, 3, respectively. When the following formula is entered as an array into cells A3:A5:

TRANSPOSE($A$1:$C$1) equals the same respective values in A3:A5


VLOOKUP

See Also

Searches the leftmost column of an array for a particular value, and returns the value in the cell indicated. Use VLOOKUP instead of HLOOKUP when your comparison values are located in a column to the left or right of the data you want to find.

Syntax

VLOOKUP(lookup_value, table_array, col_index_num, range_lookup)

Lookup_value    is the value to be found in the first column of the array. Lookup_value can be a value, a reference, or a text string.

Table_array    is the table of information in which data is looked up. Use a reference to a range or a range name, such as Database or List.

If range_lookup is TRUE, the values in the first column of table_array must be placed in ascending order: ..., -2, -1, 0), 1, 2, ... , A-Z, FALSE, TRUE; otherwise VLOOKUP may not give the correct value. If range_lookup is FALSE, table_array does not need to be sorted.

You can put the values in ascending order by choosing the Sort command from the Data menu and selecting Ascending.

The values in the first column of table_array can be text, numbers, or logical values.

Uppercase and lowercase text are equivalent.

Col_index_num    is the column number in table_array from which the matching value should be returned. A col_index_num of 1 returns the value in the first column in table_array; a col_index_num of 2 returns the value in the second column in table_array, and so on. If col_index_num is less than 1, VLOOKUP returns the #VALUE! error value; if col_index_num is greater than the number of columns in table_array, VLOOKUP returns the #REF! error value.

Range_lookup    is a logical value that specifies whether you want VLOOKUP to find an exact match or an approximate match.  If TRUE or omitted, an approximate match is returned; in other words, if an exact match is not found, the next largest value that is less than lookup_value is returned. If FALSE, VLOOKUP will find an exact match.  If one is not found, the error value #N/A is returned.

Remarks

If VLOOKUP can't find lookup_value, and range_lookup is TRUE, it uses the largest value that is less than or equal to lookup_value.

If lookup_value is smaller than the smallest value in the first column of table_array, VLOOKUP returns the #N/A error value.

if VLOOKUP can't find lookup_value and range_lookup is FALSE, VLOOKUP returns the #N/A value.

Examples

In the preceding worksheet, where the range A4:C12 is named Range:

VLOOKUP(1,Range,1,TRUE) equals 0.946

VLOOKUP(1,Range,2) equals 2.17

VLOOKUP(1,Range,3,TRUE) equals 100

VLOOKUP(.746,Range,3,FALSE) equals 200

VLOOKUP(0.1,Range,2,TRUE) equals #N/A, because 0.1 is less than the smallest value in column A

VLOOKUP(2,Range,2,TRUE) equals 1.71


CONCATENATE

See Also

Joins several text items into one text item.

Syntax

CONCATENATE (text1, text2, ...)

Text1, text2,...    are 1 to 30 text items to be joined into a single text item.  The text items can be text strings, numbers, or single-cell references.

Remarks

The "&" operator can be used instead of CONCATENATE to join text items.

Examples

CONCATENATE("Total ", "Value") equals "Total Value".  This is equivalent to typing
 "Total"&" "&"Value" .

Suppose in a stream survey worksheet, C2 contains "species", C5 contains " brook trout", and C8 contains the total 32.

CONCATENATE("Stream population for ",C5," ",C2," is ",C8,"/mile") equals "Stream population for brook trout species is 32/mile"


COUNTBLANK

See Also

Counts blank cells in the specified range.

Syntax

COUNTBLANK(range)

Range    is the range from which you want to count the blank cells.

Remarks

Cells with formulas that return "" (or empty text) are also counted.  Cells with zero values are not counted.

Example

Suppose in the above worksheet, B3 contains the following formula: IF(C3<30,"",C3), which returns "" (empty text).

COUNTBLANK(B2:C5) equals 2


COUNTIF

See Also

Counts the number of cells within a range which meet the given criteria.

Syntax

COUNTIF(range, criteria)

Range    is the range of cells from which you want to count cells.

Criteria    is the criteria in the form of a number, expression, or text that defines which cells will be counted.  For example, criteria can be expressed as 32, "32", ">32", "apples".

Examples

Suppose A3:A6 contains "apples", "oranges", "peaches", "apples", respectively.

COUNTIF(A3:A6,"apples") equals 2

Suppose B3:B6 contains 32, 54, 75, 86, respectively.

COUNTIF(B3:B6,">55") equals 2


POWER

See Also

Returns the result of a number raised to a power.

Syntax

POWER(number, power)

Number    is the base number.  It can be any real number.

Power    is the exponent, to which the base number is raised.

Remark

The "^" operator can be used instead of POWER to indicate to what power the base number is to be raised, such as in 5^2

Examples

POWER(5,2) equals 25

POWER(98.6,3.2) equals 2401077

POWER(4,5/4) equals 5.656854


ROUNDUP

See Also

Rounds a number up, away from zero.

Syntax

ROUNDUP(number, num_digits)

Number    is any real number that you want rounded up.

Num_digits    is the number of digits to which you want to round number.

Remarks

ROUNDUP behaves like ROUND, except that it always rounds a number up.

If num_digits is greater than 0, then number is rounded up to the specified number of decimal places.

If num_digits is 0 or omitted, then number is rounded up to the nearest integer.

If num_digits is less than 0, then number is rounded up to the left of the decimal point.

Examples

ROUNDUP(3.2,0) equals 4

ROUNDUP(76.9,0) equals 77

ROUNDUP(3.14159, 3) equals 3.142

ROUNDUP(-3.14159, 1) equals -3.2

ROUNDUP(31415.92654, -2) equals 31500


ROUNDDOWN

See Also

Rounds a number down, toward zero.

Syntax

ROUNDDOWN(number, num_digits)

Number    is any real number that you want rounded down.

Num_digits    is the number of digits to which you want to round number.

Remark

ROUNDDOWN behaves like ROUND, except that it always rounds a number down.

If num_digits is greater than 0, then number is rounded down to the specified number of decimal places.

If num_digits is 0 or omitted, then number is rounded down to the nearest integer.

If num_digits is less than 0, then number is rounded down to the left of the decimal point.

Examples

ROUNDDOWN(3.2, 0)) equals 3

ROUNDDOWN(76.9,0) equals 76

ROUNDDOWN(3.14159, 3) equals 3.141

ROUNDDOWN(-3.14159, 1) equals -3.1

ROUNDDOWN(31415.92654, -2) equals 31400


SQL.REQUEST

See Also

Connects with an external data source and runs a query from a worksheet. SQL.REQUEST then returns the result as an array without the need for macro programming. If this function is not available, you must install the Microsoft Excel ODBC add-in (XLODBC.XLA).

Syntax

SQL.REQUEST(connection_string, output_ref, driver_prompt, query_text, col_names_logical)

Connection_string    supplies information, such as the data source name, user ID, and passwords, required by the driver being used to connect to a data source and must follow the driver's format. The following table provides three example connection strings for three drivers.

Driver	connection_string

dBASE	DSN=NWind;PWD=test

SQL Server	DSN=MyServer;UID=dbayer;PWD=123;Database=Pubs

ORACLE	DNS=My Oracle Data Source;DBQ=MYSER VER;
UID=JohnS;PWD=Sesame

You must define the data source name (DSN) used in connection_string before you try to connect to it.

You can enter connection_string as an array or a string.  If connection_string exceeds 250 characters, you must enter it as an array.

If SQL.REQUEST is unable to access the data source using connection_string, it returns the #N/A error value.

Output_ref    is a cell reference where you want the completed connection string placed. If you enter SQL.REQUEST on a worksheet, then Output_ref is ignored.

Use output_ref when you want SQL.REQUEST to return the completed connection string (you must enter SQL.REQUEST on a macro sheet in this case).

If you omit the output_ref, SQL.REQUEST does not return a completed connection string.

Driver_prompt     specifies when the driver dialog box is displayed and which options are available.  Use one of the numbers described in the following table.  If driver_prompt is omitted, SQL.REQUEST uses 2 as the default.

Driver_prompt	Description

1	Driver dialog box is always displayed.

2	Driver dialog box is displayed only if information provided by the connection string and the data source specification is not sufficient to complete the connection.  All dialog box options are available.

3	Driver dialog box is displayed only if information provided by the connection string and the data source specification is not sufficient to complete the connection.  Dialog box options are dimmed and unavailable if they are not required.

4	Dialog box is not displayed.  If the connection is not successful, it returns an error.

Query_text     is the SQL statement that you want to execute on the data source.

If SQL.REQUEST is unable to execute query_text on the specified data source, it returns the #N/A error value.

You can update a query by concatenating references into query_text.  In the following example, every time $A$3 changes, SQL.REQUEST uses the new value to update the query.

"SELECT Name FROM Customers WHERE Balance > "&$A$3&"".

Microsoft Excel limits strings to a length of 255 characters.  If query_text exceeds that length, enter the query in a vertical range of cells and use the entire range as the query_text.  The values of the cells are concatenated to form the complete SQL statement.

Column_names_logical    indicates whether column names are returned as the first row of the results.  Set this argument to TRUE if you want the column names to be returned as the first row of the results.  Use FALSE if you do not want the column names returned.  If column_names_logical is omitted, SQL.REQUEST does not return column names.

Return Value

If this function completes all of its actions, it returns an array of query results or the number of rows affected by the query.

If SQL.REQUEST is unable to access the data source using connection_string, it returns the #N/A error value.

Remarks

SQL.REQUEST can be entered as an array.  When you enter SQL.REQUEST as an array, it returns an array to fit that range.

If the range of cells is larger than the result set, SQL.REQUEST adds empty cells to the returned array to increase it to the necessary size.

If the result set is larger than the range entered as an array, SQL.REQUEST returns the whole array.

The arguments to SQL.REQUEST are in a different order than the arguments to the SQLRequest function in Visual Basic.

Examples

Suppose you want to make a query of a dBASE database named DBASE4.  When you enter the following formula in a cell, an array of query results is returned, with the first row being the column names.

SQL.REQUEST("DSN=NWind;DBQ=c:\msquery;FIL=dBASE4", c15, 2,
"Select Custmr_ID, Due_Date from Orders WHERE order_Amt>100", TRUE)


SUBTOTAL

See Also

Returns a subtotal in a list or database.  It is generally easier to create a list with subtotals using the SUBTOTAL command on the Data menu.  Once the subtotal list is created, you can modify it by editing the SUBTOTAL formula.

Syntax

SUBTOTAL(function_num, ref)

Function_num    is the number 1 to 11 that specifies which function to use in calculating subtotals within a list.

Function_Num	Function

1	AVERAGE

2	COUNT

3	COUNTA

4	MAX

5	MIN

6	PRODUCT

7	STDEV

8	STDEVP

9	SUM

10	VAR

11	VARP

Ref    is range or reference for which you want the subtotal.

Remarks

If there are other subtotals within ref (or nested subtotals), these nested subtotals are ignored to avoid double counting.

SUBTOTAL will ignore any hidden rows that result from a list being filtered.  This is important when you want to subtotal only the visible data that results from a list that you have filtered.

Example

SUBTOTAL(9,C3:C5) will generate a subtotal of the cells C3:C5 using the SUM function


SUMIF

See Also

Adds the cells specified by a given criteria.

Syntax

SUMIF(range, criteria, sum_range)

Range    is the range of cells you want evaluated.

Criteria    is the criteria in the form of a number, expression, or text that defines which cells will be added.  For example, Criteria can be expressed as 32, "32", ">32", "apples".

Sum_range    are the actual cells to sum.  The cells in sum_range are summed only if their corresponding cells in range match the criteria.  If Sum_range is omitted, the cells in range are summed.

Example

Suppose A1:A4 contains the following property values for four homes: $100000, $200000, $300000, $400000, respectively.  B1:B4 contains the following sales commissions on each of the corresponding property values: $7000, $14000, $21000, $28000.

SUMIF(A1:A4,">160000",B1:B4) equals $63000


Using the CALL and REGISTER Functions

See Also

The following describes the argument and return value data types used by the CALL, REGISTER, and REGISTER.ID functions. Arguments and return values differ slightly depending on your operating environment, and these differences are noted in the data type table.

The Microsoft Excel Developer's Kit contains detailed information about dynamic link libraries (DLLs) and code resources, the Microsoft Excel application programming interface (API), file formats, and many other technical aspects of Microsoft Excel. It also contains code samples and programming tools that you can use to develop custom applications. To obtain a copy of the Microsoft Excel Developer's Kit, contact your software supplier or Microsoft Corporation. In the United States, contact the Microsoft Developer Services Team at (800) 227-4679 for more information.

Data Types

In the CALL, REGISTER, and REGISTER.ID functions, the type_text argument specifies the data type of the return value and the data types of all arguments to the DLL function or code resource. The first character of type_text specifies the data type of the return value. The remaining characters indicate the data types of all the arguments. For example, a DLL function that returns a floating-point number and takes an integer and a floating-point number as arguments would require "BIB" for the type_text argument.

The following table contains a complete list of the data type codes that Microsoft Excel recognizes, a description of each data type, how the argument or return value is passed, and a typical declaration for the data type in the C programming language.

Code	Description	Pass by	C Declaration

A	Logical  (FALSE = 0), TRUE = 1)	Value	short int
B	IEEE 8-byte floating-point number	Value (Windows) Reference (Macintosh)	double  (Windows) double * (Macintosh)
C	Null-terminated string (maximum string length = 255)	Reference	char *
D	Byte-counted string (first byte contains length of string, maximum string length = 255 characters)	Reference	Unsigned char *
E	IEEE 8-byte floating-point number	Reference	double *
F	Null-terminated string (maximum string length = 255 characters)	Reference (modify in place)	char *
G	Byte-counted string (first byte contains length of string, maximum string length = 255 characters)	Reference (modify in place)	unsigned char *
H	Unsigned 2-byte integer	Value	unsigned short int
I	Signed 2-byte integer	Value	short int
J	Signed 4-byte integer	Value	long int
K	Array	Reference	FP *
L	Logical  (FALSE =  0, TRUE = 1)	Reference	short int *
M	Signed 2-byte integer	Reference	short int *
N	Signed 4-byte integer	Reference	long int *
O	Array	Reference	Three arguments are passed: unsigned short int * unsigned short int * double [ ]
P	Microsoft Excel OPER data structure	Reference	OPER *
R	Microsoft Excel XLOPER data structure	Reference	XLOPER *
Remarks

The C-language declarations are based on the assumption that your compiler defaults to 8-byte doubles, 2-byte short integers, and 4-byte long integers.

In the Microsoft Windows programming environment, all pointers are far pointers. For example, you should declare the D data type code as unsigned char far * in Microsoft Windows.

All functions in DLLs and code resources are called using the Pascal calling convention. Most C compilers allow you to use the Pascal calling convention by adding the pascal keyword to the function declaration, as shown in the following example:

pascal void main (rows,columns,a)

If a function uses a pass-by-reference data type for its return value, you can pass a null pointer as the return value. Microsoft Excel will interpret the null pointer as the #NUM! error value.

Additional Data Type Information

This section contains detailed information about the F, G, K, O, P, and R data types, and other information about the type_text argument.

F and G Data Types

With the F and G data types, a function can modify a string buffer that is allocated by Microsoft Excel. If the return value type code is F or G, then Microsoft Excel ignores the value returned by the function. Instead, Microsoft Excel searches the list of function arguments for the first corresponding data type (F or G) and then takes the current contents of the allocated string buffer as the return value. Microsoft Excel allocates 256 bytes for the argument, so the function may return a larger string than it received.

K Data Type

The K data type uses a pointer to a variable-size FP structure. You should define this structure in the DLL or code resource as follows:

typedef struct _FP

{

unsigned short int rows;

unsigned short int columns;

double array[1];	/* Actually, array[rows][columns] */

} FP;

The declaration double array[1] allocates storage for only a single-element array. The number of elements in the actual array equals the number of rows multiplied by the number of columns.

O Data Type

The O data type can be used only as an argument, not as a return value. It passes three items: a pointer to the number of rows in an array, a pointer to the number of columns in an array, and a pointer to a two-dimensional array of floating-point numbers.

Instead of returning a value, a function can modify an array passed by the O data type. To do this, you could use ">O" as the type_text argument. For more information, see "Modifying in Place--Functions Declared as Void" below.

The O data type was created for direct compatibility with FORTRAN DLLs, which pass arguments by reference.

P Data Type

The P data type is a pointer to an OPER structure. The OPER structure contains eight bytes of data, followed by a two-byte identifier that specifies the type of data. With the P data type, a DLL function or code resource can take and return any Microsoft Excel data type.

The OPER structure is defined as follows:

typedef struct _oper

{

union

{

double num;

unsigned char *str;

unsigned short int bool;

unsigned short int err;

struct

{

struct _oper *lparray;

unsigned short int rows;

unsigned short int columns;

} array;

} val;

unsigned short int type;

} OPER;

The type field contains one of these values:

Type	Description	Val field to use

1	Numeric	num
2	String (first byte contains length of string)	str
4	Boolean (logical)	bool
16	Error: the error values are:   0 #NULL!   7 #DIV/0!   15 #Value!   23 #REF!   29 #NAME?   36 #NUM!   42 #N/A	err
64	Array	array
128	Missing argument
256	Empty cell
The last two values can be used only as arguments, not return values. The missing argument value (128) is passed when the caller omits an argument. The empty cell value (256) is passed when the caller passes a reference to an empty cell.

R Data Type—Calling Microsoft Excel Functions from DLLs

The R data type is a pointer to an XLOPER structure, which is an enhanced version of the OPER structure. In Microsoft Excel version 4.0 and later, you can use the R data type to write DLLs and code resources that call Microsoft Excel functions. With the XLOPER structure, a DLL function can pass sheet references and implement flow control, in addition to passing data. A complete description of the R data type and the Microsoft Excel application programming interface (API) is beyond the scope of this topic. The Microsoft Excel Developer's Kit contains detailed information about the R data type, the Microsoft Excel API, and many other technical aspects of Microsoft Excel.

Volatile Functions and Recalculation

Microsoft Excel usually calculates a DLL function (or a code resource) only when it is entered into a cell, when one of its precedents changes, or when the cell is calculated during a macro. On a worksheet, you can make a DLL function or code resource volatile, which means that it recalculates every time the worksheet recalculates. To make a function volatile, add an exclamation point (!) as the last character in the type_text argument.

For example, in Microsoft Excel for Windows 95 and Microsoft Excel for Windows NT, the following worksheet formula recalculates every time the worksheet recalculates:

CALL("Kernel32","GetTickCount","J!")

Modifying in Place—Functions Declared as Void

You can use a single digit n for the return type code in type_text, where n is a number from 1 to 9. This tells Microsoft Excel to modify the variable in the location pointed to by the nth argument in type_text, instead of returning a value. This is also known as modifying in place. The nth argument must be a pass-by-reference data type (C, D, E, F, G, K, L, M, N, O, P, or R). The DLL function or code resource must also be declared with the void keyword in the C language (or the procedure keyword in the Pascal language).

For example, a DLL function that takes a null-terminated string and two pointers to integers as arguments can modify the string in place. Use "1FMM" as the type_text argument, and declare the function as void.

Versions prior to Microsoft Excel 4.0 used the > character to modify the first argument in place--there was no way to modify any argument other than the first. The > character is equivalent to n = 1 in Microsoft Excel version 4.0 and later.


REGISTER.ID

See Also

Returns the register ID of the specified dynamic link library (DLL) or code resource that has been previously registered.  If the DLL or code resource has not been registered, this function registers the DLL or code resource, and then returns the register ID.

REGISTER.ID can be used on worksheets (unlike REGISTER), but you cannot specify a function name and argument names with REGISTER.ID.

For more information about DLLs and code resources and data types, see Using the CALL and REGISTER Functions.

Note    Because Microsoft Excel for Windows and Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh use different types of code resources, REGISTER.ID has a slightly different syntax for each operating environment.

Syntax 1

For Microsoft Excel for Windows

REGISTER.ID(module_text, procedure, type_text)

Syntax 2

For Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh

REGISTER.ID(file_text, resource, type_text)

Module_text    is text specifying the name of the DLL that contains the function in Microsoft Excel for Windows.

Procedure    is text specifying the name of the function in the DLL in Microsoft Excel for Windows. You can also use the ordinal value of the function from the EXPORTS statement in the module-definition file (.DEF). The ordinal value or resource ID number should not be in text form.

Type_text    is text specifying the data type of the return value and the data types of all arguments to the DLL. The first letter of type_text specifies the return value.  If the function or code resource is already registered, you can omit this argument

File_text    is text specifying the name of the file that contains the code resource in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh.

Resource    is text specifying the name of the function in the code resource in Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh. You can also use the resource ID number.  The ordinal value or resource ID number should not be in text form.

Examples (32-bit Microsoft Excel)

The following formula registers the GetTickCount function from 32-bit Microsoft Windows (Windows 95 or Windows NT), and returns the register ID:

REGISTER.ID("Kernel32", "GetTickCount", "J!")

Assuming that GetTickCount was already registered on another sheet using the preceding formula, the following formula returns the register ID for GetTickCount:

REGISTER.ID("Kernel32", "GetTickCount")

Examples (16-bit Microsoft Excel)

The following formula registers the GetTickCount function from 16-bit Microsoft Windows, and returns the register ID:

REGISTER.ID("User", "GetTickCount", "J!")

Assuming that GetTickCount was already registered on another sheet using the preceding formula, the following formula returns the register ID for GetTickCount:

REGISTER.ID("User", "GetTickCount")


 WEEKNUM

See Also

Returns a number that indicates where the week falls numerically within a year.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

WEEKNUM(serial_num, return_type)

Serial_num    is the date expressed as a serial date number.

Return_type    is a number that determines on what day the week begins.  The default is one.

Serial num	Week Begins

1	Week begins on Sunday. Weekdays are numbered 1 through 7.

2	Week begins on Monday. Weekdays are numbered 1 through 7.

Examples

If date is Sunday, January 9, 1994, then

WEEKNUM(34343, 1) equals 3

WEEKNUM(34343, 2) equals 2


AMORLINC

See Also

Returns the depreciation for each accounting period. This function is provided for the French accounting system. If an asset is purchased in the middle of the accounting period, then the prorated depreciation is taken into account.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

AMORLINC(cost, date_purchased, first_period, salvage, period, rate, basis)

Cost    is the cost of the asset.

Date_purchased     is the date of the purchase of the asset.

First_period    is the date of the end of the first period

Salvage    is the salvage value at the end of the life of the asset.

Period    is the period.

Rate    is the rate of depreciation.

Basis    is the year_basis to be used.

Basis	Date System

0	360 days (NASD method).

1	Actual

3	365 days in a year

4	360 days in a year (European method)

Example

Suppose a machine bought on August 19, 1993 costs $2400 and has a salvage value of $300, with a 15% depreciation rate. December 31, 1993 is the end of the first period.

AMORLINC(2400,34199,34334,300,1,0.15,1) equals a first period depreciation of $360.


AMORDEGRC

See Also

Returns the depreciation for each accounting period. This function is provide for the French accounting system. If an asset is purchased in the middle of the accounting period, then the prorated depreciation is taken into account. The function is similar to AMORLINC, except that a depreciation coefficient is applied in the calculation depending on the life of the assets.

If this function is not available, run the Setup program to install the Analysis ToolPak. After you install the Analysis ToolPak, you must select and enable it in the Add-In Manager.

How?

Syntax

AMORDEGRC(cost, date_purchased, first_period, salvage, period, rate, basis)

Cost    is the cost of the asset.

Date_purchased     is the date of the purchase of the asset.

First_period    is the date of the end of the first period

Salvage    is the salvage value at the end of the life of the asset.

Period    is the period.

Rate    is the rate of depreciation.

Basis    is the year_basis to be used.

Basis	Date System

0	360 days (NASD method).

1	Actual

3	365 days in a year

4	360 days in a year (European method)

Remarks

This function will return the depreciation until the last period of the life of the assets or until the cumulated value of depreciation is greater than the cost of the assets minus the salvage value.

The depreciation coefficients are:

Life of Assets (1/rate)	Depreciation Coefficient

Between 3 and 4 years	1.5

Between 5 and 6 years	2

More than 6 years	2.5

The depreciation rate will grow to 50 percent for the period preceding the last period, and will grow to 100 percent for the last period.

If the Life of Assets is between 0 and 1, 1 and 2, or 2 and 3, or 4 and 5, the #NUM! error value is returned.

Example

Suppose a machine bought on August 19, 1993 costs $2400 and has a salvage value of $300, with a 15% depreciation rate. December 31, 1993 is the end of the first period.

AMORDEGRC(2400,34199,34334,300,1,0.15,1) equals a first period depreciation of $775.


ROMAN

See Also

Converts an Arabic numeral to Roman, as text.

Syntax

ROMAN(number, form)

Number    is the Arabic numeral you want converted.

Form    is a number specifying the type of Roman numeral you want. The Roman numeral style ranges from Classic to Simplified, becoming more concise as the value of form increases. See the example following ROMAN(499,0) below.

Form	Type

0 or omitted	Classic

1	More concise. See example below

2	More concise. See example below

3	More concise. See example below

4	Simplified

TRUE	Classic

FALSE	Simplified

Remarks

If number is negative the #value! error value is returned.

If number is greater than 3999, the #value error value is returned.

Examples

ROMAN(499,0) equals "CDXCIX"

ROMAN(499,1) equals "LDVLIV"

ROMAN(499,2) equals "XDIX"

ROMAN(499,3) equals "VDIV"

ROMAN(499,4) equals "ID"

ROMAN(1993,0) equals "MCMXCIII"


For More Information

See Also

The following books provide detailed information on financial, statistical, and engineering methods.

Milton Abramowitz and Irene A. Stegun, Handbook of Mathematical Functions with Formulas, Graphs, and Mathematical Tables, Tenth Edition. Washington, D. C.: United States Government Printing Office, 1972.

Jay L. Devore, Probability and Statistics for Engineering and the Sciences, Third Edition. Pacific Grove, California: Brooks/Cole Publishing Company, 1991.

Frank J. Fabozzi and Irving M. Pollack, The Handbook of Fixed Income Securities. Homewood Illinois: Business 1 Irwin, 1986.

Hewlett-Packard Company, HP-12C Owner's Handbook and Problem-Solving Guide, 1981.

John J. Lynch, Jr. and Jan H. Mayle, Standard Securities Calculation methods, Fixed Income Securities Formulas. New York, New York: Securities Industry Association, 1986.

Robert B. McCall, Fundamental Statistics for the Behavioral Sciences, Fifth Edition. New York, New York: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, Inc., 1990.

W. H. Press, B. P. Flannery, S. A. Teukolsky, and W. T. Vetterling, Numerical Recipes in C: The Art of Scientific computing. New York, New York: Cambridge University Press, 1988.

Robert R. Sokal and F. James Rohlf, Biometry: The Principles and Practice of Statistics in Biological Research, Second Edition. New York, New York: W. H. Freeman and Company, 1981.

Marcia Stigum and John Mann, Money Market Calculations: Yields, Break-Evens, and Arbitrage. Homewood, Illinois: Business 1 Irwin, 1989.

Joseph G. Monks, Operations Management: Theory and Problems. New York, New York: McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987.


About Worksheet Functions

See Also

In Microsoft Excel, worksheet functions are calculation tools that can be used on worksheets to perform decision-making, action-taking, and value-returning operations automatically. Microsoft Excel provides a wide variety of functions that perform many different types of calculations.

The Function Wizard

The Function Wizard simplifies the entering of formulas. To start the Function Wizard, click Function on the Insert menu. The functions are listed by category, such as "Financial", "Math & Trig", or "Statistical". When you select a function from the list box, the definition of the function and of its arguments will automatically appear for you, as well as the correct placement of commas and parentheses.

Conventions

In the syntax line, required arguments are bold and optional arguments are in plain text (not bold).

In the text where functions and arguments are defined, all arguments are in plain text (not bold), whether they are required or optional. Use the format in the syntax line to determine whether an argument is required or optional. For more information about required and optional arguments, see "Syntax of Functions" later in this section.

Argument names usually use underline characters between words; for example, num_chars is an argument name.

Macro and cell names use no punctuation between words; for example, SalesTotals is a cell name.

Functions are shown without the equal sign (=). Remember to type an equal sign at the beginning of every formula, but not before functions in nested formulas. For example, PRODUCT is a nested function in =SUM(3,(PRODUCT(2,4))).

Syntax of Functions

Every function description includes a syntax line. For example, the syntax line for the CELL function looks like this:

CELL(info_type, reference)

In the syntax line, the required arguments are bold; optional arguments are not bold. If you do not provide required arguments to a function, you will not be able to enter the function in a cell. In the preceding example, the argument info_type is bold, and therefore it is required. Reference is not bold and therefore is optional, so either of the following is allowed:

CELL("format", B12)

CELL("format")

CELL() is not allowed, because info_type is a required argument.

When an argument is followed by an ellipsis (...), you can have more than one argument of that data type. You can have up to 30 arguments for some functions, as long as the total number of characters in the formula does not exceed 1024. Also, no individual string can be larger than 255 characters. For example, here is the syntax for the MAX function:

MAX(number1,number2,...)

Any of the following formulas would be allowed:

MAX(26)

MAX(26,31)

MAX(26,31,29)

Functions with an empty set of parentheses after the name take no arguments, although you must include the parentheses in order for Microsoft Excel to recognize the function.

Argument Names

Many argument names tell you what kind of information to use as the argument. If the abbreviation num, ref, or logical appears in the name of the argument, that argument must be a number, a reference, or a logical value, respectively. For example, in the function ROUND(number, num_digits), the first argument must be a number, and the second argument must be a number.

Similarly, the words number, reference, logical, text, and array in the name of an argument specify that the argument must be of that data type. Value means that the argument can be anything that results in a single value. That value can be a number, text, logical, or error value.

Using Arguments

Arguments are the information that a function uses to produce a new value or perform an action. Arguments are always located to the right of the function name and are enclosed in parentheses. Most arguments are expected to be of a certain data type. The argument you give should be either the appropriate type or another type that Microsoft Excel can convert to the appropriate type.

An argument can be anything that produces a desired data type. For example, the SUM function, which adds its arguments, can take from 1 to 30 arguments. You can give the SUM function any of the following four kinds of arguments, which produce a number or numbers:

A value that is a number, such as:

SUM(1,10,100)

A formula that results in a number, such as:

SUM(0.5+0.5,AVERAGE(5,5),10^2)

Using a function as an argument to a function, as in the preceding example, is called nesting functions. In this example, the AVERAGE function is an argument to the SUM function. You can nest up to seven levels of functions in a formula.

A reference to a cell or range of cells that contains a number or a formula that results in a number, such as:

SUM(A1,A2)

SUM(A1:A5)

The second example above is equivalent to the formula SUM(A1,A2,A3,A4,A5). An advantage of using the range form is that the argument A1:A5 counts as only one argument, while the other form counts as five arguments. If you wanted to add more than 30 numbers, you would have to use the range form, because you can only use 30 arguments with this function.

A name that refers to a value, a formula, or a cell or range containing a value or formula, such as:

SUM(AdjustingValue,Inflation)

Types of Arguments

Arguments to a function can be any of the following:

Numbers

Text

Logical values

Error values

References

Arrays

You can also use the reference and array types of arguments to provide numbers, text, logical values, and error values to a function.

Numbers   examples of numbers are 5.003, 0), 150.286, and -30.05. Numbers without decimals are called integers. Examples of integers are 5, 0), 150, and -30. Numbers are accurate to 15 digits.

Text   Examples of text are "a", "Word", "w/punc.", or "". Text values used in formulas must be enclosed in double quotation marks. If the text itself contains quotation marks, use two double quotation marks for each double quotation mark in the text. For example, to find the length in characters for "in the "good" old days", enter the formula:

LEN("in the ""good"" old days")

Text values can be a maximum of 255 characters long including quotation marks. A text constant that contains no characters is written as "" and is called "empty text."

Note   If text used as an argument is not enclosed in quotation marks, Microsoft Excel assumes it is a name and tries to replace it with the value that the name refers to. If the unquoted text is not a name, and therefore has no associated value, Microsoft Excel returns the #NAME? error value.

Logical values   The logical values are TRUE and FALSE. Logical arguments can also be statements, such as B10>20, that evaluate to TRUE or FALSE.

Error values   Examples of error values are #DIV/0!, #N/A, #NAME?, #NULL!, #NUM!, #REF!, and #VALUE!.

References   Examples of references are $A$10, A10, $A10, A$10, R1C1, or R[10]C[-10]. References can refer to single cells, ranges, or multiple selections, and can be relative, absolute, or mixed. When you use a reference as an argument that is supposed to be a number, text, error value, or logical value, the contents of the cells specified by the reference are used as the argument.

Functions that return references display the value contained in the reference instead of the reference.

To supply a multiple selection as a single reference argument, enclose the reference in a second set of parentheses, for example:

SUM((E5:E8,E10:E18), AVERAGE(A1:A5))

Arrays   Arrays allow you to customize how arguments and functions are entered in cells.  Arrays can be used as arguments, and formulas can be entered as array formulas, as in ={SUM(B2:D2*B3:d3)}. Using arrays can simplify the design of some worksheet formulas, and it can save memory.

Using Commas in a List of Arguments

You must separate individual arguments with commas, but be careful not to type extra commas. If you use a comma to hold a place for an argument, but you don't enter the argument, Microsoft Excel substitutes the default value for that argument, unless the argument is required. For example, if you enter (,arg2,arg3) as the arguments for a worksheet function that takes three arguments, Microsoft Excel substitutes an appropriate value for arg1. If you enter (arg1,,), it substitutes appropriate values for arg2 and arg3.

In worksheet functions, particularly in functions that count the number of arguments before calculating, extra commas will affect the count of arguments and therefore the way the function is calculated. For example, AVERAGE(1,2,3,4,5) returns 3, but AVERAGE(,,1,2,3,4,5) returns 2.14.

For most arguments, the value substituted for an omitted argument is 0, FALSE, or "" (empty text), depending on what the data type of the argument should be. For omitted reference arguments, the default value is usually the active cell or selection.

For example, in the CELL function  if you omit the second argument and specify "format" for the first, the cell that is currently selected will be entered as the default reference. If an omitted argument is assumed to be some other value, the description of the argument will tell you so.

Note   If you are using a reference as an argument and that reference uses a comma as a union operator, enclose the reference in parentheses. The AREAS function, for example, takes one argument: a reference. If you try to enter the formula AREAS(A1,C1), Microsoft Excel interprets A1 and C1 as two separate arguments and displays the "Too many arguments" message. The correct form would be AREAS((A1,C1)).


View multiple sheets or workbooks at the same time

1	Open the workbooks you want to view.

To view multiple sheets within the same workbook, click New Window on the Window menu. Switch to the new window and click a sheet you want to view. Repeat for each sheet you want to view.

2	On the Window menu, click Arrange.

3	Under Arrange, select the option you want.

To arrange only windows for the active workbook, select the Windows Of Active Workbook check box.

Tip   To restore a workbook window to full size, click  [image] at the upper-right corner of the window.


Arrange workbook icons on the screen

•	On the Window menu, click Arrange Icons.

The workbook icons are arranged left to right across the bottom of the application window.

Note   If no workbooks are displayed as icons, the Arrange Icons command is not available.


Close workbooks or workbook windows

To close	Do this
The active workbook window	Double-click  [image] in the upper-left corner of the window. If the window is the only open window of the workbook, the workbook is closed.
All open windows of a workbook	On the File menu, click Close.
All open workbooks	Hold down SHIFT and click Close All on the File menu.


Minimize a workbook window to an icon

•	On the workbook Control menu ( [image] ), click Minimize.

The icon, which looks like a small title bar, is displayed at the bottom of the application window.


Restore a workbook icon to a window

•	Click  [image] on the workbook icon.


Worksheet Functions Listed by Category

Database & List Management

Date & Time

DDE & External

Engineering

Financial

Information

Logical

Lookup & Reference

Math & Trigonometry

Statistical

Text


Database and List Management Functions
Database & List Management Functions

DAVERAGE	Returns the average of selected database entries

DCOUNT	Counts the cells containing numbers from a specified database and criteria

DCOUNTA	Counts nonblank cells from a specified database and criteria

DGET	Extracts from a database a single record that matches the specified criteria

DMAX	Returns the maximum value from selected database entries

DMIN	Returns the minimum value from selected database entries

DPRODUCT	Multiplies the values in a particular field of records that match the criteria in a database

DSTDEV	Estimates the standard deviation based on a sample of selected database entries

DSTDEVP	Calculates the standard deviation based on the entire population of selected database entries

DSUM	Adds the numbers in the field column of records in the database that match the criteria

DVAR	Estimates variance based on a sample from selected database entries

DVARP	Calculates variance based on the entire population of selected database entries

SQLREQUEST	Connects with an external data source and runs a query from a worksheet, then returns the result as an array without the need for macro programming

SUBTOTAL	Returns a subtotal in a list or list or database


Date & Time Functions

DATE	Returns the serial number of a particular date

DATEVALUE	Converts a date in the form of text to a serial number

DAY	Converts a serial number to a day of the month

DAYS360	Calculates the number of days between two dates based on a 360-day year

EDATE	Returns the serial number of the date that is the indicated number of months before or after the start date

EOMONTH	Returns the serial number of the last day of the month before or after a specified number of months

HOUR	Converts a serial number to an hour

MINUTE	Converts a serial number to a minute

MONTH	Converts a serial number to a month

NETWORKDAYS	Returns the number of whole workdays between two dates

NOW	Returns the serial number of the current date and time

SECOND	Converts a serial number to a second

TIME	Returns the serial number of a particular time

TIMEVALUE	Converts a time in the form of text to a serial number

TODAY	Returns the serial number of today's date

WEEKDAY	Converts a serial number to a day of the week

WORKDAY	Returns the serial number of the date before or after a specified number of workdays

YEAR	Converts a serial number to a year

YEARFRAC	Returns the year fraction representing the number of whole days between start_date and end_date


DDE & External Functions

CALL	Calls a procedure in a dynamic link library or code resource

REGISTER.ID	Returns the register ID of the specified dynamic link library (DLL) or code resource that has been previously registered

SQLREQUEST	Connects with an external data source and runs a query from a worksheet, then returns the result as an array without the need for macro programming

More on the CALL and REGISTER functions


Engineering Functions

BESSELI	Returns the modified Bessel function In(x)

BESSELJ	Returns the Bessel function Jn(x)

BESSELK	Returns the modified Bessel function Kn(x)

BESSELY	Returns the Bessel function Yn(x)

BIN2DEC	Converts a binary number to decimal

BIN2HEX	Converts a binary number to hexadecimal

BIN2OCT	Converts a binary number to octal

COMPLEX	Converts real and imaginary coefficients into a complex number

CONVERT	Converts a number from one measurement system to another

DEC2BIN	Converts a decimal number to binary

DEC2HEX	Converts a decimal number to hexadecimal

DEC2OCT	Converts a decimal number to octal

DELTA	Tests whether two values are equal

ERF	Returns the error function

ERFC	Returns the complementary error function

GESTEP	Tests whether a number is greater than a threshold value

HEX2BIN	Converts a hexadecimal number to binary

HEX2DEC	Converts a hexadecimal number to decimal

HEX2OCT	Converts a hexadecimal number to octal

IMABS	Returns the absolute value (modulus) of a complex number

IMAGINARY	Returns the imaginary coefficient of a complex number

IMARGUMENT	Returns the argument theta, an angle expressed in radians

IMCONJUGATE	Returns the complex conjugate of a complex number

IMCOS	Returns the cosine of a complex number

IMDIV	Returns the quotient of two complex numbers

IMEXP	Returns the exponential of a complex number

IMLN	Returns the natural logarithm of a complex number

IMLOG10	Returns the base-10 logarithm of a complex number

IMLOG2	Returns the base-2 logarithm of a complex number

IMPOWER	Returns a complex number raised to an integer power

IMPRODUCT	Returns the product of two complex numbers

IMREAL	Returns the real coefficient of a complex number

IMSIN	Returns the sine of a complex number

IMSQRT	Returns the square root of a complex number

IMSUB	Returns the difference of two complex numbers

IMSUM	Returns the sum of complex numbers

OCT2BIN	Converts an octal number to binary

OCT2DEC	Converts an octal number to decimal

OCT2HEX	Converts an octal number to hexadecimal

SQRTPI	Returns the square root of (number * PI)


Financial Functions

ACCRINT	Returns the accrued interest for a security that pays periodic interest

ACCRINTM	Returns the accrued interest for a security that pays interest at maturity

AMORDEGRC	Returns the depreciation for each accounting period

AMORLINC	Returns the depreciation for each accounting period

COUPDAYBS	Returns the number of days from the beginning of the coupon period to the settlement date

COUPDAYS	Returns the number of days in the coupon period that contains the settlement date

COUPDAYSNC	Returns the number of days from the settlement date to the next coupon date

COUPNCD	Returns the next coupon date after the settlement date

COUPNUM	Returns the number of coupons payable between the settlement date and maturity date

COUPPCD	Returns the previous coupon date before the settlement date

CUMIPMT	Returns the cumulative interest paid between two periods

CUMPRINC	Returns the cumulative principal paid on a loan between two periods

DB	Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified period using the fixed-declining balance method

DDB	Returns the depreciation of an asset for a spcified period using the double-declining balance method or some other method you specify

DISC	Returns the discount rate for a security

DOLLARDE	Converts a dollar price, expressed as a fraction, into a dollar price, expressed as a decimal number

DOLLARFR	Converts a dollar price, expressed as a decimal number, into a dollar price, expressed as a fraction

DURATION	Returns the annual duration of a security with periodic interest payments

EFFECT	Returns the effective annual interest rate

FV	Returns the future value of an investment

FVSCHEDULE	Returns the future value of an initial principal after applying a series of compound interest rates

INTRATE	Returns the interest rate for a fully invested security

IPMT	Returns the interest payment for an investment for a given period

IRR	Returns the internal rate of return for a series of cash flows

MDURATION	Returns the Macauley modified duration for a security with an assumed par value of $100

MIRR	Returns the internal rate of return where positive and negative cash flows are financed at different rates

NOMINAL	Returns the annual nominal interest rate

NPER	Returns the number of periods for an investment

NPV	Returns the net present value of an investment based on a series of periodic cash flows and a discount rate

ODDFPRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value of a security with an odd first period

ODDFYIELD	Returns the yield of a security with an odd first period

ODDLPRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value of a security with an odd last period

ODDLYIELD	Returns the yield of a security with an odd last period

PMT	Returns the periodic payment for an annuity

PPMT	Returns the payment on the principal for an investment for a given period

PRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value of a security that pays periodic interest

PRICEDISC	Returns the price per $100 face value of a discounted security

PRICEMAT	Returns the price per $100 face value of a security that pays interest at maturity

PV	Returns the present value of an investment

RATE	Returns the interest rate per period of an annuity

RECEIVED	Returns the amount received at maturity for a fully invested security

SLN	Returns the straight-line depreciation of an asset for one period

SYD	Returns the sum-of-years' digits depreciation of an asset for a specified period

TBILLEQ	Returns the bond-equivalent yield for a Treasury bill

TBILLPRICE	Returns the price per $100 face value for a Treasury bill

TBILLYIELD	Returns the yield for a Treasury bill

VDB	Returns the depreciation of an asset for a specified or partial period using a declining balance method

XIRR	Returns the internal rate of return for a schedule of cash flows that is not necessarily periodic

XNPV	Returns the net present value for a schedule of cash flows that is not necessarily periodic

YIELD	Returns the yield on a security that pays periodic interest

YIELDDISC	Returns the annual yield for a discounted security. For example, a treasury bill

YIELDMAT	Returns the annual yield of a security that pays interest at maturity


Information Functions

CELL	Returns information about the formatting, location, or contents of a cell

COUNTBLANK	Counts the number of blank cells within a range

ERROR.TYPE	Returns a number corresponding to an error type

INFO	Returns information about the current operating environment

ISBLANK	Returns TRUE if the value is blank

ISERR	Returns TRUE if the value is any error value except #N/A

ISERROR	Returns TRUE if the value is any error value

ISEVEN	Returns TRUE if the number is even

ISLOGICAL	Returns TRUE if the value is a logical value

ISNA	Returns TRUE if the value is the #N/A error value

ISNONTEXT	Returns TRUE if the value is not text

ISNUMBER	Returns TRUE if the value is a number

ISODD	Returns TRUE if the number is odd

ISREF	Returns TRUE if the value is a reference

ISTEXT	Returns TRUE if the value is text

N	Returns a value converted to a number

NA	Returns the error value #N/A

TYPE	Returns a number indicating the data type of a value


Logical Functions

AND	Returns TRUE if all its arguments are TRUE

FALSE	Returns the logical value FALSE

IF	Specifies a logical test to perform

NOT	Reverses the logic of its argument

OR	Returns TRUE if any argument is TRUE

TRUE	Returns the logical value TRUE


Lookup & Reference Functions

ADDRESS	Returns a reference as text to a single cell in a worksheet

AREAS	Returns the number of areas in a reference

CHOOSE	Chooses a value from a list of values

COLUMN	Returns the column number of a reference

COLUMNS	Returns the number of columns in a reference

HLOOKUP	Looks in the top row of an array and returns the value of the indicated cell

INDEX	Uses an index to choose a value from a reference or array

INDIRECT	Returns a reference indicated by a text value

LOOKUP	Looks up values in a vector or array

MATCH	Looks up values in a reference or array

OFFSET	Returns a reference offset from a given reference

ROW	Returns the row number of a reference

ROWS	Returns the number of rows in a reference

TRANSPOSE	Returns the transpose of an array

VLOOKUP	Looks in the first column of an array and moves across the row to return the value of a cell


Math & Trigonometry Functions

ABS	Returns the absolute value of a number

ACOS	Returns the arccosine of a number

ACOSH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic cosine of a number

ASIN	Returns the arcsine of a number

ASINH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic sine of a number

ATAN	Returns the arctangent of a number

ATAN2	Returns the arctangent from x- and y- coordinates

ATANH	Returns the inverse hyperbolic tangent of a number

CEILING	Rounds a number to the nearest integer or to the nearest multiple of significance

COMBIN	Returns the number of combinations for a given number of objects

COS	Returns the cosine of a number

COSH	Returns the hyperbolic cosine of a number

COUNTIF	Counts the number of non-blank cells within a range which meet the given criteria

DEGREES	Converts radians to degrees

EVEN	Rounds a number up to the nearest even integer

EXP	Returns e raised to the power of a given number

FACT	Returns the factorial of a number

FACTDOUBLE	Returns the double factorial of a number

FLOOR	Rounds a number down, toward zero

GCD	Returns the greatest common divisor

INT	Rounds a number down to the nearest integer

LCM	Returns the least common multiple

LN	Returns the natural logarithm of a number

LOG	Returns the logarithm of a number to a specified base

LOG10	Returns the base-10 logarithm of a number

MDETERM	Returns the matrix determinant of an array

MINVERSE	Returns the matrix inverse of an array

MMULT	Returns the matrix product of two arrays

MOD	Returns the remainder from division

MROUND	Returns a number rounded to the desired multiple

MULTINOMIAL	Returns the multinomial of a set of numbers

ODD	Rounds a number up to the nearest odd integer

PI	Returns the value of Pi

POWER	Returns the result of a number raised to a power

PRODUCT	Multiplies its arguments

QUOTIENT	Returns the integer portion of a division

RADIANS	Converts degrees to radians

RAND	Returns a random number between 0 and 1

RANDBETWEEN	Returns a random number between the numbers you specify

ROMAN	Converts an Arabic numeral to Roman, as text

ROUND	Rounds a number to a specified number of digits

ROUNDDOWN	Rounds a number down, toward zero

ROUNDUP	Rounds a number up, away from zero

SERIESSUM	Returns the sum of a power series based on the formula

SIGN	Returns the sign of a number

SIN	Returns the sine of the given angle

SINH	Returns the hyperbolic sine of a number

SQRT	Returns a positive square root

SQRTPI	Returns the square root of (number * PI)

SUM	Adds its arguments

SUMIF	Adds the cells specified by a given criteria

SUMPRODUCT	Returns the sum of the products of corresponding array components

SUMSQ	Returns the sum of the squares of the arguments

SUMX2MY2	Returns the sum of the difference of squares of corresponding values in two arrays

SUMX2PY2	Returns the sum of the sum of squares of corresponding values in two arrays

SUMXMY2	Returns the sum of squares of differences of corresponding values in two arrays

TAN	Returns the tangent of a number

TANH	Returns the hyperbolic tangent of a number

TRUNC	Truncates a number to an integer


Statistical Functions

AVEDEV	Returns the average of the absolute deviations of data points from their mean

AVERAGE	Returns the average of its arguments

BETADIST	Returns the cumulative beta probability density function

BETAINV	Returns the inverse of the cumulative beta probability density function

BINOMDIST	Returns the individual term binomial distribution probability

CHIDIST	Returns the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared distribution

CHIINV	Returns the inverse of the one-tailed probability of the chi-squared distribution

CHITEST	Returns the test for independence

CONFIDENCE	Returns the confidence interval for a population mean

CORREL	Returns the correlation coefficient between two data sets

COUNT	Counts how many numbers are in the list of arguments

COUNTA	Counts how many values are in the list of arguments

COVAR	Returns covariance, the average of the products of paired deviations

CRITBINOM	Returns the smallest value for which the cumulative binomial distribution is less than or equal to a criterion value

DEVSQ	Returns the sum of squares of deviations

EXPONDIST	Returns the exponential distribution

FDIST	Returns the F probability distribution

FINV	Returns the inverse of the F probability distribution

FISHER	Returns the Fisher transformation

FISHERINV	Returns the inverse of the Fisher transformation

FORECAST	Returns a value along a linear trend

FREQUENCY	Returns a frequency distribution as a vertical array

FTEST	Returns the result of an F-test

GAMMADIST	Returns the gamma distribution

GAMMAINV	Returns the inverse of the gamma cumulative distribution

GAMMALN	Returns the natural logarithm of the gamma function, Γ(x)

GEOMEAN	Returns the geometric mean

GROWTH	Returns values along an exponential trend

HARMEAN	Returns the harmonic mean

HYPGEOMDIST	Returns the hypergeometric distribution

INTERCEPT	Returns the intercept of the linear regression line

KURT	Returns the kurtosis of a data set

LARGE	Returns the k-th largest value in a data set

LINEST	Returns the parameters of a linear trend

LOGEST	Returns the parameters of an exponential trend

LOGINV	Returns the inverse of the lognormal distribution

LOGNORMDIST	Returns the cumulative lognormal distribution

MAX	Returns the maximum value in a list of arguments

MEDIAN	Returns the median of the given numbers

MIN	Returns the minimum value in a list of arguments

MODE	Returns the most common value in a data set

NEGBINOMDIST	Returns the negative binomial distribution

NORMDIST	Returns the normal cumulative distribution

NORMINV	Returns the inverse of the normal cumulative distribution

NORMSDIST	Returns the standard normal cumulative distribution

NORMSINV	Returns the inverse of the standard normal cumulative distribution

PEARSON	Returns the Pearson product moment correlation coefficient

PERCENTILE	Returns the k-th percentile of values in a range

PERCENTRANK	Returns the percentage rank of a value in a data set

PERMUT	Returns the number of permutations for a given number of objects

POISSON	Returns the Poisson distribution

PROB	Returns the probability that values in a range are between two limits

QUARTILE	Returns the quartile of a data set

RANK	Returns the rank of a number in a list of numbers

RSQ	Returns the square of the Pearson product moment correlatin coefficient

SKEW	Returns the skewness of a distribution

SLOPE	Returns the slope of the linear regression line

SMALL	Returns the k-th smallest value in a data set

STANDARDIZE	Returns a normalized value

STDEV	Estimates standard deviation based on a sample

STDEVP	Calculates standard deviation based on the entire population

STEYX	Returns the standard error of the predicted y-value for each x in the regression

TDIST	Returns the Student's t-distribution

TINV	Returns the inverse of the Student's t-distribution

TREND	Returns values along a linear trend

TRIMMEAN	Returns the mean of the interior of a data set

TTEST	Returns the probability associated with a Student's t-Test

VAR	Estimates variance based on a sample

VARP	Calculates variance based on the entire population

WEIBULL	Returns the Weibull distribution

ZTEST	Returns the two-tailed P-value of a z-test


Text Functions

CHAR	Returns the character specified by the code number

CLEAN	Removes all nonprintable characters from text

CODE	Returns a numeric code for the first character in a text string

CONCATENATE	Joins several text items into one text item

DOLLAR	Converts a number to text, using currency format

EXACT	Checks to see if two text values are identical

FIND	Finds one text value within another (case-sensitive)

FIXED	Formats a number as text with a fixed number of decimals

LEFT	Returns the leftmost characters from a text value

LEN	Returns the number of characters in a text string

LOWER	Converts text to lowercase

MID	Returns a specific number of characters from a text string starting at the position you specify

PROPER	Capitalizes the first letter in each word of a text value

REPLACE	Replaces characters within text

REPT	Repeats text a given number of times

RIGHT	Returns the rightmost characters from a text value

SEARCH	Finds one text value within another (not case-sensitive)

SUBSTITUTE	Substitutes new text for old text in a text string

T	Converts its arguments to text

TEXT	Formats a number and converts it to text

TRIM	Removes spaces from text

UPPER	Converts text to uppercase

VALUE	Converts a text argument to a number


Type numbers or text

1	Double-click the cell in which you want to enter data.

2	If the cell already contains data, click where you want to type.

3	Type the number or text and press ENTER.

For more information about entering numbers, click  [image].

For more information about entering text, click  [image].


Type a date or a time

1	Double-click the cell in which you want to enter a date or a time.

2	If the cell already contains data, click where you want to type.

3	Type the date or time and press ENTER.

Use either a slash or a hyphen to enter dates—for example, type 9/5/95 or Jun-95.

To display the time using the 12-hour clock, type a or p after the time; you must include a space between the time and the letter. Otherwise, Microsoft Excel interprets the time based on the 24-hour clock.

For more information, click  [image].

Tip   To enter today's date, press CTRL+; (semicolon). To enter the current time, press CTRL+SHIFT+: (colon).


Quickly fill in repeated entries in a column

If the first few characters you type in a cell match an existing entry in that column, Microsoft Excel fills in the remaining characters for you.

•	To accept the entry, press ENTER.

The completed entry exactly matches the pattern of uppercase and lowercase letters of the existing entries.

•	To replace the automatically entered characters, continue typing.

•	To delete the automatically entered characters, press BACKSPACE.

If Microsoft Excel cannot determine the correct entry to fill in, you can select an entry. Type at least one character in the cell. Then press ALT+DOWN ARROW to display a list of entries already in the column. Or click the cell with the right mouse button and then click Pick List on the shortcut menu.

Note   Microsoft Excel automatically completes only entries that contain text or text combined with numbers. Entries that contain only numbers, dates, or times are not completed.


Type data in a range of cells

1	Select the cell range in which you want to enter data.

How?

2	Type the number or text in the first selected cell.

3	Press ENTER to move through a selected range from top to bottom, SHIFT+ENTER to move from bottom to top, TAB to move from left to right, or SHIFT+TAB to move from right to left.


Type the same data into several cells at once

1	Select the cells in which you want to enter data.

The cells can be adjacent or nonadjacent.

How?

2	Type the data and press CTRL+ENTER.


Type and edit the same data on multiple worksheets

1	Select the worksheets on which you want to enter data.

How?

2	Select the cell or cell range in which you want to enter data.

How?

3	Type or edit the data in the first selected cell.

4	Press ENTER to move through a selected range from top to bottom, SHIFT+ENTER to move from bottom to top, TAB to move from left to right, or SHIFT+TAB to move from right to left.

Excel automatically enters the data on all selected sheets.

Tip   If you've already entered the data on one worksheet, you can quickly copy the data to the corresponding cells on other worksheets. Select the sheet that contains the data and the sheets to which you want to copy the data. Select the cells that contain the data you want to copy. On the Edit menu, point to Fill, and then click Across Worksheets.


Turn on or off automatic completion of entries in columns

1	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Edit tab.

2	To allow automatic completion of entries, select the Enable AutoComplete For Cell Values check box.

To prevent automatic completion, clear the check box.


Cancel or undo an entry

•	To cancel an entry before you press ENTER, press ESC or click  [image] on the formula bar.

To undo a completed entry, click  [image].


Entering text

•	In Microsoft Excel, text is any combination of numbers, spaces, and nonnumeric characters—for example, the following entries are treated as text:

10AA109, 127AXY, 12-976, 208 4675.

•	All text is left-aligned in a cell. To change the alignment, use the Cells command (Alignment tab) on the Format menu. Only characters that fit in a column are normally shown. To display all the text on multiple lines in the cell, select the Wrap Text check box on the Alignment tab.

•	To include text in a formula, enclose the text in quotation marks; for example: the formula
="Totals for "&1995 displays the text "Totals for 1995."

•	To enter a "hard" carriage return in a cell, press ALT+ENTER.


Entering numbers

•	Numbers that you type in a cell are entered as constant values.

•	In Microsoft Excel, a number can contain only these characters:

0  1  2  3  4  5  6  7  8  9  +  -  (  )  ,  /  $  %  .  E  e

Leading plus (+) signs are ignored, and a single period is treated as a decimal. All other combinations of numbers and nonnumeric characters are treated as text.

•	Type integer fractions as mixed to avoid entering the number as a date; for example, type 0 1/2.

•	Precede negative numbers with a minus sign (-) or enclose the numbers in parentheses ( ).

•	All numbers are right-aligned in a cell. To change the alignment, use the Cells command (Alignment tab) on the Format menu.

•	If a cell is formatted with the General format, Microsoft Excel uses a built-in number format based on the way you type the number. The number format of a cell determines the way a number is displayed in the cell. For example, to display leading zeros in numbers, you must change the number format. To change the number format, use the Cells command (Number tab) on the Format menu.

•	To format numbers such as postal codes and serial numbers as text, change the cell number format to text. You might want to do this, for example, if you are sorting by a column of data that includes both numbers and text. To ensure the proper sort order, format all cells in the column as text.

You can also precede the number with an apostrophe ('). This technique is not recommended, however, if you will be using your Microsoft Excel data with other applications.


Entering dates and times

•	In Microsoft Excel, dates and times are treated as numbers. The way that a time or date is displayed in your worksheet depends on the number format applied to the cell. When you type a date or time that Microsoft Excel recognizes, the cell's format changes from the General number format to a built-in date or time format. The format is based on the way you typed the date or time. If Microsoft Excel cannot recognize the date or time format, the date or time is entered as text.

•	To type the date and time in the same cell, separate the date and time with a space.

•	To type a time based on the 12-hour clock, type a space and then am or pm (or a or p) after the time. Otherwise, Microsoft Excel interprets the time using the 24-hour clock. For example, if you type 3:00 instead of 3:00 pm, the time is stored as 3:00 AM.

•	Regardless of the format used to display a date or time, Microsoft Excels stores all dates as serial numbers and stores all times as decimal fractions. To display a date as a serial number or display a time as a fraction, change the cell number format to General.

•	Times and dates can be added, subtracted, and included in other calculations. To use a date or time in a formula, enter the date or time as text enclosed in quotation marks. For example, this formula would display a difference of 68:

="5/12/94"-"3/5/94"

•	In Microsoft Excel for Windows (and Lotus 1-2-3), days are numbered from the beginning of the century; the date serial number 1 corresponds to the date January 1, 1900. Microsoft Excel for the Macintosh uses the 1904 date system; the date serial number 1 corresponds to January 2, 1904. To change the date system for use in calculations, select the 1904 Date System check box on the Calculation tab of the Options command (Tools menu). Use the 1904 date system for a workbook if you use that workbook with other workbooks that use the 1904 date system.

If you open in Microsoft Excel for Windows a file created in Microsoft Excel version 2.0 or later for the Macintosh, Microsoft Excel recognizes the file format and changes dates to the 1900 date system for you. Similarly, if you open a Microsoft Excel for Windows file on a Macintosh, Microsoft Excel changes dates to the 1904 date system.


AutoFill option

The following table shows samples of AutoFill operations on a selected cell or cells.

Data in selection	Series created
1, 2	3, 4, 5, 6,...
1, 3	5, 7, 9, 11,...
Mon	Tue, Wed, Thu,...
Qtr2	Qtr3, Qtr4, Qtr1, Qtr2,...
text1, textA	text2, textA, text3, textA,...
1-Jan, 1-Mar	1-May, 1-Jul, 1-Sep,...


Trend option

As an example of how the Trend option affects a linear or growth series, suppose beginning values in a selected row are 1, 4, 5. If you enter a step value of 2 with the Linear option selected, the resulting series will be as follows.

Linear	Resulting series
Trend check box cleared	1, 3, 5, 7, 9, . . .
Trend check box selected	1.33, 3.33, 5.33, 7.33, 9.33, 11.33, . . .

Using the same example with the Growth option selected, the resulting series will be as follows.

Growth	Resulting series
Trend check box cleared	1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, . . .
Trend check box selected	1.21, 2.71, 6.07, 13.57, 30.35, 67.86, . . .


Troubleshoot entering data

What do you need help with?

Dates and times aren't displayed as I typed them.

All the text I type in a cell doesn't show.

Leading zeros are not displayed in numbers such as zip codes.

I don't want Microsoft Excel to complete column entries for me.

Microsoft Excel doesn't always complete my column entries.


Dates and times aren't displayed as I typed them.

Microsoft Excel displays dates and times according to the date and time format selected for the cells. If you type 5/4/95, for example, Microsoft Excel might display the date as 5-Sep-95. To use the default date format, select the cell and press CTRL+SHIFT+#; to use the default time format, press CTRL+SHIFT+@.

Number format codes for dates and times

Create a custom number format


All the text I type in a cell doesn't show.

To wrap the text inside of cells, select the cells and click Cells on the Format menu. On the Alignment tab, select the Wrap Text check box.


Leading zeros are not displayed in numbers such as zip codes.

Select the cells in which you want leading zeros to appear. On the Format menu, click Cells, click the Number tab, and then click the Special category. In the Type box, click the type of number. Numbers in the selected cells are converted to text data.

If you want the numbers to remain numeric data, click the Custom category. In the Type list, select a format similar to the one you want to use. In the Type box, type 0's (zeros) in as many places as you want zeros displayed. For example, if the numbers in your data are integers that contain as many as six digits, click 0 in the Type list and then type 000000 in the Type box.


Microsoft Excel doesn't always complete my column entries.

•	Make sure the Enable AutoComplete For Cell Values check box is selected on the Edit tab of the Options dialog box (Tools menu).

•	Position the insertion point after the last character in the cell. Microsoft Excel completes an entry only when the insertion point is at the end of the current cell contents.

•	The characters you typed might not match an existing entry in the column, or the characters might match two or more entries. For example, if you type AXY and the possible entries are AXY1 and AXY2, Microsoft Excel does not complete the entry. To select the entry you want, type at least one character in the cell. Then press ALT+DOWN ARROW and select an entry from the list. Or click the cell with the right mouse button and then click Pick List on the shortcut menu.

•	Microsoft Excel bases the list of potential entries on the column that contains the active cell. If your entries are repeated within a row, not a column, the entries are not completed.

•	Only text entries are completed. Entries that contain only numbers, dates, and times are not completed.


Change what Microsoft Excel displays on the screen

1	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the View tab.

2	Select the options you want.


Change the way I enter and edit data

1	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Edit tab.

2	Select the options you want.


Change the default font and other default settings

1	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the General tab.

2	Select the options you want.


Change chart settings

1	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Chart tab.

2	Select the options you want.

Note   The options on the Chart tab are available only when an embedded chart or chart sheet is active.


Working with drawing objects

You can draw lines, arrows, ellipses, rectangles, arcs, and polygons on a worksheet or chart to highlight important data or add visual interest. Ellipses, rectangles, arcs, and polygons can have either a filled (opaque) or an unfilled (transparent) background. Once you've created a drawing object, you can change its border style, line style, fill pattern, or color.

To create lines, arrows, and shapes, click a button on the Drawing toolbar and then drag. To display the Drawing toolbar, click  [image].

A freeform shape is a freehand drawing you create using  [image] or a polygon you create using  [image]. A freeform shape can be made entirely of freehand lines, straight lines, or a combination of the two. The Freeform tool  [image] lets you create a variety of shapes such as clouds, maps, even your name in cursive.

Once you've created a freeform shape, you can edit it using  [image]. When you click  [image], black squares called vertexes appear on the selected object. You move, add, or delete vertexes to change the shape of the freeform.

You can copy drawing objects to other locations on a worksheet, to another worksheet, or to another application. They can be anchored to cells on a worksheet so they will move, resize, and sort with the cells.


Draw a line, rectangle, ellipse, arc, or arrow

1	To display the Drawing toolbar, click  [image].

2	Click the tool for the shape you want to draw.

3	Drag until the object is the size and shape you want.

Tip   To reuse a drawing tool without selecting it again, double-click the tool, and then draw as many shapes as you want. When you finish, click in a blank area to deselect the tool.


Add a freeform drawing object

1	To display the Drawing toolbar, click  [image].

2	Click  [image].

3	Click where you want the drawing to begin, and then drag.

To draw a straight line, click where you want the line to begin, and then click where you want the line to end.

4	Repeat any combination of freehand lines and straight lines to create your drawing.

5	Double-click to complete the drawing.

Tip   If you want to create a freehand drawing without straight lines, use  [image].


Add, change, or remove a line, arrow, or border on a drawing object

1	Select the drawing object.

2	On the Format menu, click Object, and then click the Patterns tab.

3	In the Border box, select the options you want.


Add, change, or remove a fill color or pattern of a drawing object

1	Select the drawing object.

2	On the Format menu, click Object, and then click the Patterns tab.

3	In the Fill box, click the options you want.

4	In the Patterns box, click a fill pattern and color.


Add or remove a shadow on a drawing object

1	Click the drawing object.

2	On the Format menu, click Object, and then click the Patterns tab.

3	To add a shadow, select the Shadow check box.

To remove a shadow, clear the Shadow check box.


Troubleshoot creating drawing objects

What do you need help with?

I can't create multiple lines and shapes.

When I try to move a drawing object, it resizes instead.

When I resize a drawing object, the shape becomes distorted.

When I try to resize a drawing object, it moves instead.


I can't find or select a graphic
I can't find or select a graphic.

•	The drawing object may have no fill or border. Select another drawing object (or draw one), and then press TAB, which selects the next drawing object in your worksheet. Press TAB until you find the missing object. Now you can use the Object command on the Format menu to give the object a border and fill.

•	If you've stacked drawing objects, the missing object may be behind another object. Select the top object and click  [image] on the Drawing toolbar. If there are more than two objects in the stack, you may need to click  [image] several times to find the missing object.

•	The Show All check box in the Options dialog box may not be selected. Click Options on the Tools menu, and then click the View tab. Select the Show All check box.

•	The object may be grouped with other objects. To ungroup objects so you can select an object, select the group, click  [image] on the Drawing toolbar, and then click in an open area. Now you can click the object you want to select.


I can't create multiple lines and shapes
I can't create multiple lines and shapes.

•	To draw multiple lines or shapes, double-click the line or shape button on the Drawing toolbar. When you finish drawing, click in an open area to deselect the drawing tool.

•	You can't double-click the buttons on the Drawing palette.


Graphic file types Microsoft Excel can use

By using the graphic filters, or translators, that come with Microsoft Excel, you can insert many popular graphic file formats into your worksheet. You don't need a filter to insert Windows metafiles or Windows bitmaps. If you didn't install the filter you need when you installed Microsoft Excel on your computer, you can run Setup and add the filter.

What do you want to insert?

Computer Graphics Metafile (.CGM)

Encapsulated PostScript (.EPS) file

HP Graphics Language (HPGL) file

Lotus 1-2-3 graphic (.PIC) file

Micrografx Designer/Draw (.DRW) file

Tagged Image File Format (.TIF) file

WordPerfect Graphics (.WPG) file

PC Paintbrush (.PCX) file

CorelDRAW 3.0 (.CDR) file

The Macintosh PICT (.PCT) filter


The Macintosh PICT (.PCT) filter

The PICT filter is used to import Macintosh PICT graphics.


Computer Graphics Metafiles (.CGM)

You can use the Computer Graphics Metafile (.CGM) filter to import .CGM graphic files that conform to version 1 of the CGM specification.

The following types are supported:

•	Line type: standard ANSI set.

•	Marker type: standard ANSI set.

•	Edge type: standard ANSI set.

•	Line elements: polyline, disjoint polyline, circular arc 3 point, circular arc center, and elliptical arc. Pens with a physical width greater than one pixel will always have a solid style. A nonsolid-style pen always has a width of 1 pixel.

•	Fill elements: polygon, polygon set, rectangle, circle, circular arc 3, point close, circular arc center close, elliptical arc close, and ellipse.

•	Interior style: solid, pattern, hatch, and empty.

•	Text elements: text, restricted text, and append text. Attribute changes within a text string are not recognized.

•	Polygon set.


The Encapsulated PostScript (.EPS) filter

This .EPS graphic filter supports the Adobe Systems Encapsulated PostScript Specification versions 1.0 and 2.0. The .EPS filter supports .EPS images with tagged image file format (TIFF) 5.0 or Windows metafile (.WMF) embedded display images.

If an .EPS file contains an embedded TIFF or .WMF display image, a representation of the image is displayed. The quality of the display image depends on the resolution of the TIFF or .WMF image embedded in the .EPS file. Because such display images are intended primarily to be used to position images on the page, resolution is often low.

If an embedded TIFF or .WMF display image is not included, or if the image is considered invalid by the converter, a graphics bounding box appears instead of a display image.


The HP-Graphics Language (.HGL) filter

This filter supports HP-GL/2 kernel commands and command extensions. To ensure the best results when importing HP-GL/2 files, configure your application to create commands suitable for a 7595 Draft Master plotter.

The HPGL filter doesn't support Polyline Encoding or Color Table commands. The filter supports display of color images and assumes the following pen color set.

Pen number	Color
Pen 1	Black
Pen 2	Red
Pen 3	Green
Pen 4	Yellow
Pen 5	Blue
Pen 6	Magenta
Pen 7	Cyan
Pen 8	Orange


The Lotus 1-2-3 Graphics files (.PIC) filter

This filter supports .PIC files created by Lotus 1-2-3 and Borland Quattro Pro. However, the filter doesn't support Micrografx .PIC or Draw Plus .PIC.


The Micrografx Designer/Draw filter

This filter supports Micrografx Designer 3.x, Charisma 2.1, and Draw .DRW files. The .DRW filter imports only the entire first page of a file as it would appear in Micrografx Designer, because .DRW files don't contain information on the size of the image. Once the image is imported, the bounding box may be cropped to make it fit the size of the image.

Here are some limitations of the Micrografx Designer/Draw filter:

•	Text arrays are not supported.

•	Some Micrografx Designer 3.x fonts are not supported.

•	Clip paths, which require clipping regions, aren't supported in GDI metafiles.

•	Tiled paths, which permit object-oriented fills to be put behind clip paths, aren't supported.


The Tagged Image File Format (.TIF) filter

The TIFF 5.0 filter supports all image types and compressions described in the TIFF Specification Revision 5.0. These types include monochrome, grayscale, palette color, and RGB full color images. This filter does not support TIFF Revision 6.0.


The WordPerfect Graphics (.WPG) filter

This filter uses the size of the picture frame stored in the WordPerfect file to determine the size of the picture to import. The frame size of .WPG graphics created in DrawPerfect is the size of the screen.

Here are the limitations:

•	.EPS images in .WPG format don't maintain PostScript code when inserted into a presentation.

•	.WPG files with large embedded bitmaps may not display properly on computers that use the Mach series video drivers from ATI. If you think you have this problem, try running Windows Setup and changing your video driver to the 8514/a drivers supplied with Windows.


The PC Paintbrush (.PCX) filter

The .PCX graphic filter PCXIMP.FLT supports all versions of the .PCX file format through ZSoft's version 3.0, with support for 256-color images. This is the common interchange format used by Microsoft Windows Paintbrush.


The CorelDRAW 3.0 (.CDR) filter

The CorelDRAW 3.0 filter has the following limitations:

•	Rotated rounded rectangles are emulated using circular arc center.

•	Vector pattern fills are not fully supported.

•	Envelope editing and perspective editing are not supported.

•	Bitmaps are not supported.

•	Extruded object groups are not fully supported.

•	OLE objects are not supported.

•	Line scaling is not supported.

•	CorelDRAW 4.0 documents saved as CorelDRAW 3.0 may not be imported.


Import a graphic

1	On the Insert menu, click Picture.

2	Double-click the graphic you want.


Importing graphics

You can add different types of imported art to your worksheets, including clip art. If you are using Microsoft Office, you have access to the Microsoft ClipArt Gallery, which contains pictures in many different categories. You can also import bitmaps (.BMP), tagged image file format (.TIF), and many other types of graphic files.

You can add a border around imported art and add a fill color and pattern. You can also move and resize imported art the same way you move and resize other graphic objects.

Once you've imported a graphic, the changes you can make to it are limited. You may have to use the application that created it to change it.


Troubleshoot importing graphics

What do you need help with?

When I double-click my embedded object nothing happens.

Graphics don't print when I print my worksheet.

A graphic won't import.


Graphics don't print when I print my worksheet
Graphics don't print when I print my worksheet.

•	The Print Object check box is not selected. Press SHIFT and click the objects you want to print, click Object on the Format menu, and then click the Properties tab. Select the Print Objects check box.

Note   You can choose which objects you want to print and which you don't by selecting or clearing the Print Object check box for individual objects.


A graphic won't import
A graphic won't import.

•	You might not have the right filter installed.

•	The filter may be installed, but it's not in the right directory.

•	You might have a wrong version of the filter.

•	You might have a corrupted filter.


I can't find the Copy Picture or Paste Picture command
I can't find the Copy Picture or Paste Picture command.

•	Press SHIFT when you click the Edit menu to display the Copy Picture and Paste Picture commands.


Record a macro

You can a record a macro when you want to automate a repetitive task.

1	On the Tools menu, point to Record Macro, and then click Record New Macro.

2	To give the macro a name other than the one Microsoft Excel suggests, type a name in the Macro Name box.

3	To include a brief description of the macro, type whatever text you want in the Description box.

4	To set options for the macro, click Options, and then select the options you want.

5	Click OK.

6	Carry out the actions you want to record.

7	Click  [image].

To see the code you just recorded

Your macro is recorded as Visual Basic code on a module sheet.

1	On the Tools menu, click Macro.

2	In the Macro Name/Reference box, enter the name of your macro.

3	Click Edit.

To use relative recording to make a macro more flexible

By default, the macro recorder uses absolute references to cells, such as $A$1. A macro recorded this way will always act on the same cells you acted on when you originally recorded the macro.

If you want your macro to be able to act on cells anywhere on a worksheet, set the macro recorder to record relative references. This method records cell references relative to the upper-left cell in the original selection.

•	On the Tools menu, point to Record Macro, and then click Use Relative References.

This option will remain selected until you quit Microsoft Excel or until you click Use Relative References again.

Tips

•	Switch to the workbook you want, click the sheet you want, and then select the cells or objects you want before turning on the recorder.

•	To use the Record Macro button, display the Visual Basic toolbar.

•	To assign your macro to shortcut keys, click Options in the Record New Macro dialog box. Macro shortcut keys can be CTRL+ any letter or CTRL+SHIFT+ any letter. Remember, your macro shortcut keys will override Microsoft Excel shortcut keys while the workbook containing your macro is open.

•	To make a macro available all the time, store it in the Personal Macro Workbook. This is a hidden workbook that's always open. In the Record New Macro dialog box, click Options, and then click Personal Macro Workbook to store your macro in the Personal Macro Workbook.

•	On the Window menu, click New Window to open another window containing your workbook, and then click Arrange on the Window menu. You can then view the module as you record actions you perform on another sheet.

•	You can rename your Visual Basic module. Double-click the module tab to rename the sheet.

•	Use the macro recorder to see which Visual Basic objects, methods, and properties you need when writing your own Visual Basic code. For more information, see

Recording a macro to generate code.


Run a macro

When you record a macro, you're creating a Visual Basic Sub procedure.

1	On the Tools menu, click Macro.

2	In the Macro Name/Reference box, enter a macro name.

3	Click Run.

Run a macro from a Visual Basic module

1	Activate the module that contains the Sub procedure you want to run.

2	Position the insertion point anywhere inside the Sub procedure.

3	On the Visual Basic toolbar, click the Run Macro button; or press F5.

Tip

Some methods or properties, such as the Select method, may fail if the active sheet is a module. You must activate the sheet that contains what you want to select before you use the Select method. You can avoid this problem by running the macro directly from the appropriate sheet.

To stop a macro while it's running

•	Press ESC or CTRL+BREAK.


Assign a macro

You can assign a macro to run when a particular key combination is pressed, or when you click a particular graphic object, menu item, or toolbar button.

How do you want to assign your macro?

Assign a macro to a keyboard shortcut

Assign a macro to a Tools menu item

Assign a macro to a button or graphic object

Assign macros to hot spots on a graphic object

Assign a macro to a toolbar button


Assign a macro to a keyboard shortcut

1	On the Tools menu, click Macro.

2	In the Macro Name/Reference box, enter a macro name.

3	Click Options.

4	In the Ctrl+ box, type a letter or press SHIFT+ a letter.

5	Click OK.

6	Click Close.

Tips

•	Your shortcut key assignments will override any duplicate Microsoft Excel shortcut keys while the workbook containing your macro is open.

•	To make a macro available all the time, store it in the Personal Macro Workbook. This is a hidden workbook that's always open. In the Record New Macro dialog box, click Options, and then click Personal Macro Workbook to store your macro in the Personal Macro Workbook.


Assign a macro to a Tools menu item

1	On the Tools menu, click Macro.

2	In the Macro Name/Reference box, enter a macro name.

3	Click Options.

4	In the Menu Item On Tools Menu box, type a name for the menu item. Type an ampersand (&) before the character you want to use as the access key for the new menu item (for example, &New Item). Use a letter that isn't already the access key for another item on the Tools menu.

5	Click OK.

6	Click Close.

For information about changing the Microsoft Excel menus, see

Customizing menus.

Tip   To make a macro available all the time, store it in the Personal Macro Workbook. This is a hidden workbook that's always open. In the Record New Macro dialog box, click Options, and then click Personal Macro Workbook to store your macro in the Personal Macro Workbook.


Assign a macro to a button or graphic object

To learn how to create a button or a graphic object, see

Working with drawing objects.

After you've created a button or a graphic object, you can assign it to a macro. When you click the button or graphic object, your macro will run automatically.

1	Using the right mouse button, click the button or graphic object.

2	On the shortcut menu, click Assign Macro.

3	In the Macro Name/Reference box, enter a macro name.

4	To assign an existing macro to the button or graphic object, after entering the name of the macro in the Macro Name/Reference box, click OK.

-Or-

To record a new macro to assign to the button or graphic object, click Record.

Tip   To make a macro available all the time, store it in the Personal Macro Workbook. This is a hidden workbook that's always open. In the Record New Macro dialog box, click Options, and then click Personal Macro Workbook to store your macro in the Personal Macro Workbook.


Assign macros to hot spots on a graphic object

1	Create a graphic object.

For information about creating a button or a graphic object, see

Working with drawing objects.

2	Draw another graphic object over the first object in the place where you want a hot spot.

3	Using the second graphic object still selected, click Assign Macro on the Tools menu.

4	To assign an existing macro to the selected graphic object, enter the name of the macro in the Macro Name/Reference box, and then click OK.

-Or-

To record a new macro to assign to the selected graphic object, click Record.

5	On the Format menu, click Object.

6	On the Patterns tab, click None under Border, and then click None under Fill.

7	Repeat steps 2 through 6 for each hot spot you want to create.

Tip   To make a macro available all the time, store it in the Personal Macro Workbook. This is a hidden workbook that's always open. In the Record New Macro dialog box, click Options, and then click Personal Macro Workbook to store your macro in the Personal Macro Workbook.


Assign a macro to a toolbar button

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars.

2	To create a new toolbar to hold a custom toolbar button, type a name for the new toolbar in the Toolbar Name box, and then click New.

-Or-

To add a custom toolbar button to an existing toolbar, click Customize.

3	In the Categories box, click Custom.

You can edit the image on the face of any button displayed under Buttons.

Change the image on a toolbar button

4	Drag a custom toolbar button from under Buttons to any visible toolbar.

When you place the toolbar button where you want it on the toolbar, the Assign Macro dialog box appears.

5	To assign an existing macro to the custom toolbar button, enter the name of the macro in the Macro/Name Reference box, and then click OK.

-Or-

To record a new macro to assign to the custom toolbar button, click Record.

6	If necessary, click Close in the Customize dialog box.

Changing a toolbar button macro assignment

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars.

2	Using the right mouse button, click the toolbar button you want to change, and then click Assign Macro.

3	To assign an existing macro to the toolbar button, enter the name of the macro in the Macro/Name Reference box, and then click OK.

-Or-

To record a new macro to assign to the toolbar button, click Record.

Tip   To make a macro available all the time, store it in the Personal Macro Workbook. This is a hidden workbook that's always open. In the Record New Macro dialog box, click Options, and then click Personal Macro Workbook to store your macro in the Personal Macro Workbook.


Copy a macro

You can share macros by making a copy of a module sheet or by copying code into another module.

To copy a module sheet from one workbook to another

One way to share macros is to copy a module to another workbook.

1	Open both workbooks.

2	Switch to the workbook that contains the module you want to copy.

3	On the Edit menu, click Move Or Copy Sheet.

4	In the To Book box, click the name of the destination workbook.

5	In the Before Sheet box, click the name of the sheet to the left of which you want to insert the module.

6	Select the Create A Copy check box.

To copy code

You can copy a procedure from one module and paste it in another module.

1	Switch to the module that contains the procedure you want to copy.

2	Select the code you want to copy.

3	Click  [image].

4	Switch to the module where you want to place the code.

5	Click  [image].

Tip   To make a macro available all the time, store it in the Personal Macro Workbook. This is a hidden workbook that's always open. In the Record New Macro dialog box, click Options, and then click Personal Macro Workbook to store your macro in the Personal Macro Workbook.

Creating references

If you want to make the procedures in one workbook available to other workbooks without creating copies of the procedures, you can create references from the other workbooks to the workbook that contains the procedures you want to share. For more information, see

Calling procedures in other workbooks.


Single Step Dialog Box

You can display the Single Step dialog box when you want to run a Microsoft Excel version 4.0 macro one step at a time. This technique is often used for debugging a macro.

This dialog box shows you which cell in the macro is about to be calculated and what formula is in that cell.

Dialog Box Options

Step Into

Carries out the next instruction in the macro, stepping through user-defined functions when they're called.

Step Over

Carries out the next instruction in the macro, calling user-defined functions without stepping through them.

Evaluate

Evaluates each part of the formula in the active cell. You can proceed through the macro one instruction at a time, stepping into user-defined functions when they're called, by clicking Evaluate repeatedly.

Pause

Closes the dialog box and suspends the macro, allowing you to perform other tasks. To return to the Single Step dialog box, click the Resume Macro button on the Visual Basic toolbar.

Halt

Stops the macro.

Continue

Runs the rest of the macro without single-stepping.

Goto

Stops the macro and selects the cell that's currently being evaluated on the macro sheet.


Help topic not available

The Help topic cannot be displayed because Visual Basic for Applications Reference Help cannot be found or was not installed.

To correctly install Visual Basic for Applications Reference Help

1	Run Microsoft Office for Windows 95 Setup and click Add/Remove.

2	Select Microsoft Excel and then click Change Option.

3	Select Online Help And Samples and then click Change Option.

4	Make sure that the Help For Visual Basic For Microsoft Excel check box is selected.

5	Continue with Setup.


Create a new workbook.
Create a new workbook

1	On the File menu, click New.

2	To create a new, blank workbook, click the General tab, and then click the Workbook icon.

To create a workbook based on a template, click the Spreadsheet Solutions tab, and then click the icon for the template you want.

Tip   To create a new, blank workbook, click  [image].


Troubleshoot opening files

What do you need help with?

The Open dialog box doesn't list the file I'm looking for.

The password I typed to open a file doesn't work.


Change the size of a graphic

When you change the size of a graphic, you can enlarge or reduce it proportionately, or you can stretch it horizontally and/or vertically.

What do you want to do?

Maintain proportions as I resize

Change the height or width


Maintain proportions as I resize

•	To maintain a graphic's proportions as you resize it, press SHIFT and drag a corner selection handle.


Change the height or width

•	To change the height or width of an object, drag a vertical or horizontal selection handle.


Change the stacking or layering order

If you've stacked several drawing objects or imported graphics on top of each other, you can move an object to the front or the back of the stack.

What do you want to do?

Send the object to the back of a stack

Bring the object to the front of a stack


Bring the object to the front of a stack

1	To display the Drawing toolbar, click  [image].

2	Select the object you want to move in front of other objects.

3	Click  [image].


Send the object to the back of a stack

1	To display the Drawing toolbar, click  [image].

2	Select the object you want to move behind other objects.

3	Click  [image].


Change the shape of a freeform drawing object

1	To display the Drawing toolbar, click  [image].

2	Click  [image].

3	Select the drawing object you want to change.

4	To move a vertex, drag it.

To delete a vertex, press CTRL, and then click it.

To add a new vertex, press CTRL, and then drag the line where you want the new vertex.

5	When you finish, click  [image].


Creating pictures of charts and worksheets

You can create pictures of charts, cells, and drawing objects and then place the picture in another location on your worksheet, on another worksheet, or in a document created in another application. A picture can be resized, moved, and changed like a drawing object.

If you link a picture of cells to the source worksheet, the picture changes when the original worksheet changes. For example, if you add numbers to the source, a linked picture also includes those numbers.

You can't link a picture of a chart to the source worksheet. If you want a chart on your worksheet, use an embedded chart.

Pictures can be created in picture format or in bitmap format. Picture format uses less memory and disk space than bitmap format and allows Microsoft Excel to redraw the screen faster. Picture format works well when you need a high-quality printout, such as a chart for a presentation. Drawing objects copied in picture format can be displayed on a screen with any resolution.


Grouping objects

You can select multiple objects and group them as a single object so you can move them and preserve their alignment. Grouping objects also makes it easy to make global changes. For example, you can change the fill color of grouped drawing objects all at once. Once objects are grouped, you can't move or resize them individually unless you ungroup them.


Group objects

1	To display the Drawing toolbar, click  [image].

2	Hold down SHIFT, click each drawing object you want to group, and then click  [image].


Ungroup objects

•	Select the group you want to change into individual objects, and then click  [image] on the Drawing toolbar.

Note   If there are groups within groups, you may need to click  [image] several times.


Align an object with cell gridlines

•	To snap to the nearest intersection of gridlines, press ALT while you draw, move, or resize a drawing object.


Move an object or set of objects

•	To move an object, select it, and then drag it.

If a drawing object has no fill (that is, no color or pattern), click its border, and then drag it.

•	To move a set of objects, press SHIFT while you click each object, and then drag the objects.

Tip   To move a drawing object in a horizontal or vertical line, press SHIFT as you drag the object.


Copy a chart, or cells, as a picture

1	Click the chart or drawing object, or highlight the cells that you want to copy as a picture.

2	Press SHIFT, and then click Copy Picture on the Edit menu.

3	Click As Shown On Screen.

4	Click Picture.

5	Click OK.

6	Click the new worksheet or new location where you want the picture to appear.

7	Press SHIFT and, on the Edit menu, click Paste Picture.

Note   You must press SHIFT when you click the Edit menu to display the Copy Picture and Paste Picture commands.


Select a drawing object

•	To select a filled object, click anywhere within the object.

•	To select an unfilled drawing object, click the object's border.

When an object is selected, selection handles appear along its borders.

Note   Although you can select objects with the normal pointer, it is often better to use  [image] on the Drawing toolbar. Use  [image] when you want to:

•	Select only objects, not cells.

•	Select a drawing object that has a macro button.

•	Select a group of graphic objects by dragging a selection rectangle around them.


Select all drawing objects on a worksheet

1	On the Edit menu, click Go To.

2	Click Special.

3	Click Objects.


Add a label or caption to a graphic

1	Click  [image].

2	Drag until the text box is the size and shape you want.

3	Begin typing.

Tip   You can resize a label or a caption by clicking its border to select it and then dragging selection handles.


Edit a label or caption

1	Select the label or caption that contains the text you want to change.

2	Position the insertion point where you want to enter or edit text.

3	Type the new text.

Note   If you type text without placing the insertion point in the text box, all text is replaced with new text.


Change the look of a label or caption

1	Select the label or caption that contains the text you want to change.

2	Select the text you want to format.

3	On the Format menu, click Object.

4	Select the text formatting options you want.


Change the look of the box around my label or caption

1	Select the label or caption that contains the text you want to change.

2	On the Format menu, click Object, and then click the Patterns tab.

3	Select the formatting options you want.


Add, change, or remove the border, fill, or shadow of an imported graphic

1	Select the imported graphic you want to edit.

2	On the Format menu, click Object, and then click the Patterns tab.

3	Click the options you want.

Note   You can't fill an imported graphic with a color or a pattern.


Moving or resizing a graphic with underlying cells

Drawing objects can be attached or unattached to the cells beneath them. Attached drawing objects move and change size when the underlying cells move or change size. For example, if you change the row height or column width of a group of cells, the attached drawing object also moves and resizes.

Unattached drawing objects stay in the same place even if you move or resize the underlying cells. For example, if you cut the underlying cells and paste them in another part of the worksheet, the unattached drawing objects remain in their original position.

Drawing objects move and change size with the underlying cells by default. You can specify drawing objects to move but not change size with cells to ensure that text in a text box remains readable. For example, if you have a group of cells with an attached text box, you can change the size of the cells but maintain the font size of the text in the attached text box.

Imported graphics move with underlying cells but they don't resize by default. That's to prevent pictures from becoming distorted.


Keep my graphic from resizing when I resize the underlying cells

1	Select the object you want to detach from the underlying cells.

2	On the Format menu, click Object, and then click the Properties tab.

3	Select the Don't Move Or Size With Cells check box.


Display or hide drawing objects and imported graphics

1	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the View tab.

2	To display the drawing objects and imported graphics, select the Show All check box.

To hide the drawing objects and imported graphics, select the Hide All check box.


Update a linked picture

1	Double-click the linked picture.

Microsoft Excel opens the source worksheet and selects the cell range that is linked to the picture.

2	Make your changes on the source worksheet.


Print drawing objects and imported graphics

1	Select the objects you want to print as part of your worksheet.

2	On the Format menu, click Object, and then click the Properties tab.

3	Select the Print Object check box.


Include drawing objects and imported graphics when sorting

1	Make sure the objects are no larger than the cells you want to sort. For example, if you are sorting by row, objects can be no taller than a single row. If you are sorting by columns, objects can be no wider than a single column.

2	To sort by columns, select the columns underneath the objects you want to sort.

To sort by rows, select the rows underneath the objects you want to sort.

3	Click  [image] to sort cells in ascending order, or click  [image] to sort cells in descending order.


Troubleshoot working with drawing objects and imported graphics

What do you need help with?

I can't find or select a graphic.

The Format Object command isn't on the menu.

When I select an object with a macro, the macro runs.

I can't find the Copy Picture or Paste Picture command.


When I try to move a drawing object, it resizes instead
When I try to move a drawing object, it resizes instead.

•	To move a filled object, position the pointer over its body, not over a selection handle.

•	To move an unfilled drawing object, position the pointer over the border, not over a selection handle.


When I try to resize a drawing object, it moves instead
When I try to resize a drawing object, it moves instead.

•	To resize a selected drawing object, drag one of the selection handles. If you drag the center or the border of the drawing object, the drawing object will move instead.


When I resize a drawing object, the shape becomes distorted
When I resize a drawing object, the shape becomes distorted.

•	To proportionally resize a drawing object, hold down SHIFT while you drag a corner selection handle.


The Format Object command isn't on the menu

•	You need to have a drawing object or an imported picture selected to display the Format Object command.


When I select an object with a macro, the macro runs
When I select an object with a macro, the macro runs.

•	To select a drawing object with an assigned macro button, click  [image] on the Drawing toolbar, and then drag a selection rectangle around the object.


When I double-click my embedded object nothing happens
When I double-click my embedded object nothing happens.

•	The program that you used to create the embedded object is not on your computer.


Troubleshoot file importing problems between Microsoft Access and Microsoft Excel
Troubleshoot file-importing problems between Microsoft Access and Microsoft Excel

What do you need help with?

In Microsoft Excel, all of the time values in my imported Microsoft Access table appear as the date 1/0/00.

When I import a Microsoft Excel worksheet into a Microsoft Access database, the date fields are all off by four years.


In Microsoft Excel, all of the time values in my imported Microsoft Access table appear as the date 1/0/00.

Microsoft Excel and Microsoft Access interpret serial numbers differently. Microsoft Excel automatically formats all serial numbers in imported Microsoft Access tables as dates. Use the following procedure to change the format of imported serial numbers to a time format in Microsoft Excel:

1	Select the values whose format you want to change in the worksheet.

2	On the Format menu, click Cells, and then click the Number tab.

3	In the Category box, click Time. In the Type box, select the time format you want.


When I import a Microsoft Excel worksheet into a Microsoft Access database, the date fields are all off by four years.

The 1904 date system was used in the Microsoft Excel worksheet instead of the default 1900 date system used by both Microsoft Excel and Microsoft Access. To change your Microsoft Excel worksheet from the 1904 date system to the 1900 date system, follow these steps in Microsoft Excel before you import the worksheet into Microsoft Access:

1	Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet.

2	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the Calculation tab.

3	Clear the 1904 Date System check box.

Note   The 1900 date system starts numbering with 1, which represents January 1, 1900. The 1904 date system starts numbering with 0 (zero), which represents January 1, 1904.


Share information between Microsoft Excel and Microsoft Access

To import Microsoft Access data into Microsoft Excel, you must first convert the Microsoft Access file to Microsoft Excel format. The Analyze It With MS Excel button in Microsoft Access does this for you in a single step. This button saves the contents of a Microsoft Access datasheet, form, report, or module as a Microsoft Excel worksheet (.XLS) file and opens the file in Microsoft Excel.

No conversion is required to import a Microsoft Excel worksheet into Microsoft Access. When you import a Microsoft Excel worksheet, Microsoft Access creates a new table to store the imported data. If the Microsoft Excel worksheet contains field names in the first row, Microsoft Access can use these as field names in the new table.

What do you want to do?

Import Microsoft Access data into Microsoft Excel

Import Microsoft Excel data into Microsoft Access


Import Microsoft Access data into Microsoft Excel

1	In Microsoft Access, open the file you want to export to Microsoft Excel.

2	Click the arrow next to the Office Links button, and then click Analyze It With MS Excel.


Import Microsoft Excel data into Microsoft Access

Before you begin this procedure, close the Microsoft Excel worksheet you want to import.

1	On the File menu, point to Get External Data, and then click Import from the submenu.

2	In the Import dialog box, select Microsoft Excel in the Files of Type box..

3	Use the Look In list to find the file you want.

4	Double-click the file you want to import.

5	Follow the directions in the Import Spreadsheet Wizard dialog boxes.


Copy Microsoft Access records to a Microsoft Excel worksheet

1	In Microsoft Access, open the table, datasheet, or query that contains the records you want to copy.

2	Switch to Datasheet view.

3	Select the records you want to copy.

4	Click  [image].

5	Switch to Microsoft Excel.

6	Click the cell where you want the first field name to appear.

7	Click  [image].

Microsoft Excel pastes the field names into the first row and pastes the records into the rows below.


Troubleshoot problems in Microsoft Excel with linked and embedded objects

I get an error message when I use the Change Source dialog box.

I can't copy a picture link from Microsoft Excel into another application.

I can't print embedded objects.

I can't update the automatic links in my Microsoft Excel worksheet.

When I double-click an embedded Microsoft Excel object, Microsoft Excel doesn't open.

In Microsoft Excel, all of the time values in my imported Microsoft Access table appear as the date 1/0/00.


I get an error message when I use the Change Source dialog box.

If you can't use the Change Source dialog box to edit the name or location of a link that has moved, click the cell that contains the link, and then edit the link in the formula bar.


I can't copy a picture link from Microsoft Excel into another application.

You may have copied a linked picture from an unsaved workbook.

1	Save the workbook the picture was copied from.

2	Switch to the application the picture was copied to.

3	On the Edit menu, click Links.

4	Click Change Source, and then click the name of the file saved in step 1.


I can't update the automatic links in my Microsoft Excel worksheet.

The Update Remote References check box may be cleared in the Tools Options dialog box (Calculation tab). Clearing this check box overrides the Automatic updating option in the Edit Links dialog box for links to external data sources (such as Microsoft Word documents or Microsoft Access databases).

To update an automatic link to an external data source, click Options on the Tools menu, click the Calculation tab, and then select the Update Remote References check box.

Note   Microsoft Excel workbooks are not external data sources.


I can't print embedded objects.

1	Click the embedded object.

2	On the Format menu, click Object, and then click the Properties tab.

3	Select the Print Object check box.


Type ¢, £, ¥, ®, and other characters not on the keyboard

1	In Windows, click the Start button, point to Programs, point to Accessories, and then click Character Map.

2	Select the font that contains the character you want.

3	Click the character, click Select, and then click Copy.

4	Switch to your document and paste the character.

5	If the character looks different from the one you selected, select the character and apply the same font you selected in the Character Map accessory.

Tip   The Character Map accessory reports the key combination you can use to type the selected character.


Troubleshoot problems in PowerPoint with linked or embedded Microsoft Excel objects

What do you need help with?

In PowerPoint, how can I make the background of my embedded Microsoft Excel objects transparent so that the colors on my slide show through?


In PowerPoint, how can I make the background of my embedded Microsoft Excel objects transparent so the colors on my slide show through?
In PowerPoint, how can I make the background of my embedded Microsoft Excel objects transparent so that the colors on my slide show through?

Unless the background of the Microsoft Excel worksheet or chart is clear, the background color of the PowerPoint slide won't show through. Use the following procedure to set a clear background for the Microsoft Excel worksheet or chart:

1	In Microsoft Excel, select the worksheet or chart.

2	For a worksheet, click Cells on the Format menu, and then click the Patterns tab.

For a chart, click Selected Chart Area on the Format menu, and then click the Patterns tab.

3	For a worksheet, click None in the Color box.

For a chart, select the None check box under Area.


Change an AutoCorrect name

1	On the Tools menu, click AutoCorrect.

2	Click the name in the Replace list.

3	Click Delete.

4	Type a new name in the Replace box.

5	Click Add.


Change the contents of an AutoCorrect entry

1	On the Tools menu, click AutoCorrect.

2	To change the contents of an AutoCorrect entry stored as plain text, select the entry in the With list.

3	Type the new entry in the With box.

4	Click Replace.

Note   It's easier to change an AutoCorrect entry that is a long passage of text, a graphic, or an entry inserted with its original formatting by first making the changes you want in the document. When you finish entering the changes, select the revised entry, and click AutoCorrect on the Tools menu.


Delete an AutoCorrect entry

1	On the Tools menu, click AutoCorrect.

2	In the list under the Replace box, click the entry you want to remove.

3	Click Delete.


Correct typing errors automatically

You can correct typing errors automatically if you specify the word that is often mistyped in advance.

1	On the Tools menu, click AutoCorrect.

2	Make sure the Replace Text As You Type check box is selected.

3	In the Replace box, type a word that you often mistype or misspell—for example, usualy

4	In the With box, type the correct spelling of the word—for example, type usually

5	Click Add.


Send documents to review in electronic mail

You can mail a document, rather than route it, when you don't need to send it to recipients in any particular order, and you don't want it automatically returned to you.

By routing a document, you can:

•	Send the document to one recipient after another so that each recipient can see the previous revisions and annotations, or to all recipients at once.

•	Automatically receive a routing status message as each recipient forwards the document.

•	Ensure that each recipient is automatically reminded that they should forward the document to the next recipient.

•	Automatically receive the document back after all recipients have seen it.

To use document mailing and routing, you need one of the following:

•	Microsoft Exchange (or other mail system compatible with the Messaging Application Programming Interface [MAPI]).

•	Lotus cc:Mail (or other mail system compatible with Vendor Independent Messaging [VIM]).

Note   Document mailing and routing may not work across electronic mail gateways.

What do you want to do?

Mail a document

Route a document


Create a routing slip

1	Open the document you want to route.

2	On the File menu, click Add Routing Slip.

3	Select the recipients and other routing options you want.

4	To route the document, click Route.

To close the dialog box without routing the document, click Add Slip. To route the document at a later time, click Send on the File menu.

Tip   You can select a group alias as the recipient. However, all members of the group alias will be considered one recipient. To route the document to members of a group alias one after another, send it to the individual members, and not to the entire alias. If you route the document to one recipient after another, you can reorder the recipient list. Select the name of the recipient you want to move in the To box, and then click one of the Move arrows to move the name up or down in the list.


Edit the routing slip of a routed document

1	On the File menu, click Edit Routing Slip.

2	If you're the originator of a routed document, type the subject, message text, or recipient list on the routing slip.

If you're the recipient of a routed document, you can change the order of the reviewers who have not yet seen the document.

3	To route the document, click Route.

To close the dialog box without routing the document, click Add Slip.

Tip   To change the order of the reviewers, select the name of the recipient you want to move in the To box, and then click one of the Move arrows to move the name up or down in the list.


Mail a document

1	On the File menu, click Send.

2	Complete the message information in your mail system, and then send the message.

Note   If the document has a routing slip attached, you can mail the document independent of the routing slip by clicking Send Copy Of Workbook Without Using The Routing Slip (Microsoft Excel) or Send Copy Of Document Without Using The Routing Slip (Microsoft Word).


Route a document

If you're the originator of the document, first create a routing slip.

How?

If you're the recipient of a routed document, click Send on the File menu, and then click Route Document To followed by the name of the recipient.


Open a routed document

A routed document is an attachment to an electronic mail message. To open a routed document, follow the instructions of your electronic mail program. If you're using Microsoft Exchange, double-click the document icon to open the document attached to a mail message.


Troubleshoot problems sending documents to others in electronic mail

What do you need help with?

 I want to route a document, but I don't have Microsoft Exchange on my system.

What are the system requirements for sending documents by electronic mail?

The Send and the Add Routing Slip commands don't appear on the File menu.


I want to route a document, but I don't have Microsoft Exchange on my system.

You can route documents online by using any compatible mail package, not just Microsoft Exchange. If your mail system is compatible, the Add Routing Slip and Send commands appear on the File menu.

If your mail system is not compatible, you can still route documents by putting the document on a network, or giving reviewers a floppy disk.


What are the system requirements for sending documents by electronic mail?

To use document mailing and routing, you need one of the following:

•	Microsoft Exchange (or other mail system compatible with the Messaging Application Programming Interface [MAPI]).

•	Lotus cc:Mail (or other mail system compatible with Vendor Independent Messaging [VIM]).

Note   Document mailing and routing may not work across electronic mail gateways.


The Send and the Add Routing Slip commands don't appear on the File menu.

Make sure you have installed Microsoft Exchange on your system or any mail system compatible with the Messaging Application Programming Interface [MAPI], or Lotus cc:Mail or any mail system compatible with Vendor Independent Messaging [VIM].

If you have installed Microsoft Exchange or a compatible mail system, make sure the WIN.INI file contains the following lines, or add them:

[MAIL]

MAPI=1

If you have installed Lotus cc:Mail or a compatible mail system, make sure MAPIVI32.DLL and MAPIVITK.DLL are in the Windows System folder.


Add or delete a toolbar button

1	Display the toolbar you want to change, and then click Toolbars on the View menu.

2	Click Customize.

3	To add a button, click the name of the category in the Categories box, and then drag the button or item from the Buttons area to the displayed toolbar.

To delete a button, drag it off the toolbar.

Tip   When you delete a built-in toolbar button from a toolbar, the button is still available in the Customize dialog box. However, when you delete a custom toolbar button, it is permanently deleted. To delete a custom toolbar button from a toolbar but save it for later use, create a toolbar for storing unused buttons, move the button to this storage toolbar, and then hide the storage toolbar.


Move or copy a toolbar button

1	Display the toolbar that contains the toolbar button you want to move or copy, and then click Toolbars on the View menu.

2	Click Customize.

3	To move a button, drag it to the new location on the same toolbar or to another displayed toolbar.

To copy a button, hold down CTRL while you drag the button to the new location.


Restore a built-in toolbar

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars.

2	In the Toolbars box, click the name of the toolbar you want to restore to its default buttons.

3	Click Reset.

Note    You cannot reset a custom toolbar. When you select a custom toolbar in the Toolbars box, the Reset button changes to Delete.


Change the spacing between toolbar buttons

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars.

2	Click Customize.

3	To insert more space between two buttons on a toolbar, drag the rightmost button to the right. If the toolbar is docked vertically, drag the lower button downward.

To decrease the amount of space between two buttons, drag one button closer to the other one.


Change the width of a drop-down list box on a toolbar

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the drop-down list box on a toolbar.

4	Point to the left or right border of the list box. When the pointer changes to a double-headed arrow, drag the border of the list box to change its width.


Move a toolbar

1	Point between buttons on a toolbar, or point to the toolbar title bar if it is a floating toolbar.

2	Drag the toolbar to a new location. If you drag it to the edge of the application window, the toolbar will dock to the edge of the window automatically.


Resize a toolbar

•	To resize a floating toolbar, drag any of its sides.

Note    You cannot resize a docked toolbar.


Change the image on a toolbar button

You can change the image on any toolbar button. You can copy an image from another button, create an image in a graphics application and then paste it onto the button, or alter an existing button image.

What do you want to do?

Copy an image from one toolbar button to another

Copy an image from a graphics application to a toolbar button

Edit a toolbar button image


Edit a toolbar button image

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars.

2	Click Customize.

3	If the button you want to edit is not on a toolbar, add it to a new or existing toolbar.

How?

4	Point to the button image on the toolbar, and then click the right mouse button.

5	On the shortcut menu, click Edit Button Image.

6	In the Button Editor, edit the button image.


Copy an image from a graphics application to a toolbar button

For a clear image, copy a picture that is the same size as a built-in button image (the default built-in button image is 16 by 15 pixels; the large button image is 24 by 23 pixels). A larger image may be distorted because it will be scaled to fit the button.

1	Copy the picture that you want to appear on the button to the Clipboard.

If you have the option of selecting the format for the copy of the picture, select bitmap or picture format.

2	Switch to your Microsoft Office application.

3	On the View menu, click Toolbars.

4	Click Customize.

5	Point to the toolbar button whose image you want to change, and then click the right mouse button.

6	On the shortcut menu, click Paste Button Image.


Copy an image from one toolbar button to another button

You can copy an image from a toolbar button to another button only if the other button is also on a toolbar (the same toolbar or a different one).

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars.

2	Click Customize.

3	Click the toolbar button whose image you want to copy, and then click the right mouse button.

4	On the shortcut menu, click Copy Button Image.

5	Point to the button you want to paste the copied image onto, and then click the right mouse button.

6	On the shortcut menu, click Paste Button Image.

Note   You cannot change a button image that appears under Buttons in the Customize dialog box (View menu, Toolbars command).


Delete a custom toolbar

1	On the View menu, click Toolbars.

2	In the Toolbars box, select the check box next to the name of the custom toolbar you want to delete.

3	Click Delete.

Note    You cannot delete a built-in toolbar. When you select a built-in toolbar in the Toolbars box, the Delete button changes to Reset.


Restore a built-in toolbar button to its original image

1	Display the toolbar that contains the button, and then click Toolbars on the View menu.

2	Click Customize.

3	On the toolbar, point to the button you want to restore, and then click the right mouse button.

4	On the shortcut menu, click Reset Button Image.


Move files between Windows and the Macintosh

1	Save your Windows file to a 3.5-inch floppy disk in a file format that can be opened by the Macintosh application you plan to use.

2	Insert the floppy disk in the Macintosh's floppy disk drive.

The Macintosh must be equipped with a floppy disk drive that supports Apple File Exchange.

3	Start Apple File Exchange, and then use it to move your file from the floppy disk to the Macintosh's hard disk.


Speeding up file searches

To speed up file searches in the Open dialog box, Office includes Find Fast, an application that can be accessed from the Windows Control Panel. During a Typical or Custom installation, Find Fast creates an index of the contents of the Office documents on all local drives. These indexes are automatically updated in the background while you work. You can create a Find Fast index for the contents of documents located in a specific folder or on a specific drive or network share.

Find Fast indexes aren't created in the following situations:

•	When you reinstall Office, Find Fast indexes aren't created for folders or drives that have already been indexed.

•	Find Fast indexes aren't created on removable drives.


Create a print file

Instead of printing a document, you can create a file that contains the document you want to print. You can then print the file at a later time.

1	On the File menu, click Print.

2	In the Name box, click the printer with which you'll print the file.

3	Select the Print To File check box, and then click OK.

4	In the File Name box, type a filename.

Notes

•	If you print a document to a file and then print the document on a different type of printer than the one you used to create the document, the page breaks and font spacing may change.

•	In Microsoft Excel, if you want to print your work to a file in a readable text format, click Formatted Text in the Save As Type box (File menu, Save As command).


Print and preview a document using shortcut keys

Command	Press
Print command (File menu)	CTRL+P
While in print preview, to	Press
Move around the page when zoomed in	Arrow keys
Move by one page when zoomed out	PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN
Move to the first page when zoomed out	CTRL+UP ARROW or CTRL+LEFT ARROW
Move to the last page when zoomed out	CTRL+DOWN ARROW or CTRL+RIGHT ARROW


Work with menus using shortcut keys

You can choose any menu command with the keyboard. Press ALT+ the letter underlined in the menu name, and then press the letter underlined in the command name.

To	Press
Display the shortcut menu	SHIFT+F10
Display the application Control menu	SPACEBAR (when the menu bar is active)
Select the next or previous command on the menu	DOWN ARROW or UP ARROW (with the menu displayed)
Select the menu to the left or right; or, with a submenu displayed, toggle the selection between the main menu and the submenu	LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW


Work in windows and dialog boxes

Work in windows

To switch to the	Press
Next application	ALT+TAB
Previous application	ALT+SHIFT+TAB
Start menu	CTRL+ESC
To	Press
Close the window	CTRL+F4
Restore the window size	CTRL+F5
Switch to the next window	CTRL+F6
Switch to the previous window	CTRL+SHIFT+F6
Carry out the Move command (Control menu)	CTRL+F7
Carry out the Size command (Control menu)	CTRL+F8
Maximize the window	CTRL+F10
Select a folder in the Open or Save As dialog box (File menu)	ALT+0, and then use the arrow keys
Choose a toolbar button in the Open or Save As dialog box (File menu)	ALT+ number (1 is the leftmost button, 2 is the next, and so on)
Refresh the Open or Save As dialog box (File menu)	F5
Work in dialog boxes using shortcut keys

To	Press
Switch to the next tab in a tab dialog box	CTRL+TAB or CTRL+PAGE DOWN
Switch to the previous tab in a tab dialog box	CTRL+SHIFT+TAB or CTRL+PAGE UP
Move to the next option or group of option buttons	TAB
Move to the previous option or group of option buttons	SHIFT+TAB
Move within the active list box or group of option buttons	Arrow key
Select the active command button or check box	SPACEBAR
Move to the next item beginning with that letter in an active list box	Letter key
Select the item with that underlined letter	ALT+ letter key
Display a drop-down list box	ALT+DOWN ARROW
Close a drop-down list box	ESC
Choose the default command button	ENTER
Cancel the command and close the dialog box	ESC
Within a text box, to	Press
Move to the beginning or end of the entry	HOME or END
Move one character to the left or right	LEFT ARROW or RIGHT ARROW
Select from the insertion point to the beginning of the entry	SHIFT+HOME
Select from the insertion point to the end of the entry	SHIFT+END
Select the character to the left	SHIFT+LEFT ARROW
Select the character to the right	SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW


Embed a document or workbook in a Lotus Notes form

To exchange information between Lotus Notes and either Microsoft Excel or Word, you embed a Word document or Microsoft Excel workbook as an object in a Lotus Notes form. You can also embed an object when you design the form; this way, the object will already exist within each new form that users create.

What do you want to do?

Embed a document or workbook in a single Lotus Notes form

Embed a document or workbook in a Lotus Notes form design


Embed a document or workbook in a single Lotus Notes form

1	On the Compose menu in Lotus Notes, click the name of a form.

The form must include an existing field with the rich-text data type.

2	Click in a field that will accept rich-text format.

3	On the Edit menu, point to Insert, and then click Object.

4	Click an object type in the list.

5	To embed an existing document, click Choose File.

To embed a new blank document, click OK.

6	To change how the object appears, click Display Format.

The default format, Picture, displays the first page of a Word document. This is the smallest representation that's available.


Embed a document or workbook in a Lotus Notes form design

1	On the Design menu in Lotus Notes, click Forms.

2	Select an existing form to edit.

To create a new form, click New or New Copy.

3	Click where you want the embedded object to appear.

4	On the Edit menu, point to Insert, and then click Object.

5	Click an object type in the list.

6	To embed an existing document, click Choose File.

To embed a new blank document, click OK.

7	To change how the object appears, click Display Format.

The default format, Picture, displays the first page of a Word document. This is the smallest representation that's available.


Update Lotus Notes fields

In Lotus Notes, you can create one-way fields or two-way fields. A one-way field updates Lotus Notes when the information changes in Microsoft Excel or Word. A two-way field updates Lotus Notes when the information changes in Microsoft Excel or Word, and it also updates the embedded worksheet or document when the field changes in Lotus Notes.

What do you want to do?

Update one-way fields from the embedded document or workbook

Update two-way fields from Lotus Notes


Update two-way fields from Lotus Notes

1	On the Edit menu in Lotus Notes, click Edit Object.

2	Type the new information between the brackets.

3	Activate the object.


Update one-way fields from the embedded document or workbook

1	In Lotus Notes, double-click the Microsoft Excel or Word object embedded in the form.

2	On the File menu, click Properties.

3	Type the new information.

4	Change the information in any properties you previously defined.

Close the document, and then return to Lotus Notes.


Open a document

1	Click  [image].

2	In the Look In box, click the drive that contains the document.

3	In the box beneath Look In that lists folders and files, double-click the name of the folder that contains the document. Continue double-clicking subfolders until you open the subfolder that contains the document.

4	In the list of files, click the document name.

5	Click Open.

Tip   To open a document you've used recently, click its name at the bottom of the File menu. If the list of recently used documents isn't displayed, click Options on the Tools menu, and then click the General tab. Select the Recently Used File List check box.

Note   To open a document created in another application, click the file format you want in the Files Of Type box, and then click the document name in the box that lists folders and files. You can also type the extension in the File Name box; for example, type *.wk4 to find Lotus 1-2-3 Release 4.0 files.


Display or hide a list of recently used documents on the File menu
Display or hide the list of recently used documents on the File menu

1	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the General tab.

2	Select or clear the Recently Used File List check box.


The Favorites folder and the My Documents folder

You use the Favorites folder to store shortcuts to files and folders of interest, including those in remote network locations. The original file or folder doesn't move. You can use a shortcut for quick access to the file without having to remember where the file is located. To add a file or folder to the Favorites folder, click Open on the File menu, select the file or folder you want a shortcut for, click  [image], and then click Add Selected Item To Favorites. To add a shortcut to the folder selected in the Look In box, click Add 'Look In' Folder To Favorites.

To open a favorite file or folder, click  [image], and then double-click the shortcut or the filename or folder name.

When you first use the Open and Save As dialog boxes, the My Documents folder is the default folder. The My Documents folder is located at the root level and is a good place to store documents and databases you're currently working on.


The Open dialog box doesn't list the file I'm looking for.

•	In the Open dialog box, type the name of the file in the File Name box, and then click Find Now.

•	Make sure that you have the correct file format selected in the Files Of Type box.

•	Make sure that the entries in the Text Or Property box and the Last Modified box are appropriate for the files you're searching for. To clear all current criteria except the file location and the default file type, click New Search.

•	Make sure that you're looking on the correct drive and in the correct folder.

•	If you don't know the folder name, you can search all the folders on the specified drive. Click  [image], and then click Search Subfolders.

•	You can search multiple paths by typing them in the File Name box. Separate each path with a list separator character—usually a semicolon; for example, type c:\House finances;c:\My work documents in this box. To search all subfolders, click  [image], and then click Search Subfolders.

•	If you're looking for a file on a network computer and the drive doesn't appear in the Look In box, click  [image], and then click Map Network Drive. In the Drive box, click the drive letter you want to use to connect to the network computer, enter its path in the Path box, and then click OK.


The password I typed to open a file doesn't work.

Passwords are case sensitive. Check to see whether CAPS LOCK is turned on, or retype the password to make sure that you didn't mistype it.


Commands And Settings button in the Open dialog box

To	Click  [image] and then
To open a network file or a Microsoft Excel workbook in a shared folder for viewing only	Click Open Read Only. To save changes to a read-only file, use the Save As command to save it with a new name.
Print the selected files	Click Print.
Edit or view file properties for the selected file	Click Properties. On the Summary tab or the Custom tab, add or edit the properties you want.
Sort a list of files found in a search	Click Sorting.
Search all subfolders in the selected folders	Click Search Subfolders.
Display the filenames from different folders as one list	Click Group Files By Folder, if it's selected.
Connect to a network drive	Click Map Network Drive. In the Drive box, click the drive letter you want.
Use an existing saved search to find the files you want	Click Saved Searches, and then click the name of the search.
Tip   To select several files at the same time, click the name of the first file. While holding down CTRL, click the name of each additional file. To select several files in sequence, click the name of the first file, hold down SHIFT, and then click the name of the last file. If you select a file you don't want, hold down CTRL, and then click the filename again.


Search for files

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	In the Look In box, click the drive you want to search.

3	In the box that lists files and folders, double-click the name of the folder you want to search. You can search more than one folder at a time.

How?

4	In the boxes at the bottom of the Open dialog box, specify any additional search criteria you want to use.

5	To search all subfolders of the selected folders and to display the folders that contain the files that are found, click  [image],  and then click Search Subfolders.

6	Click Find Now.

To cancel the search, click Stop.

Tips

•	You can display all the files found in the searched folders as one list. Click  [image], and then click Group Files By Folder to turn it off.

•	You can preview file contents and properties without opening the files. For more information, click  [image].

Notes

•	You can save search criteria you use regularly to search for documents quickly. For more information, click  [image].

•	To use an existing saved search to find the files you want, click  [image],  click Saved Searches, and then click the name of the search.

•	If the list of files found doesn't contain the file you want, you can specify more detailed search criteria. For more information, click  [image].


Entries in the File Name box

In the File Name box in the Open dialog box (File menu), you can do any of the following to locate your file:

•	You can type partial filenames. For example, type region to find all files with names that include "region."

•	You can type filename extensions. For example, type *.wk4 to find Lotus 1-2-3 Release 4.0 files.

•	You can use wildcard characters: use an asterisk (*) to match any number of characters, or use a question mark (?) to match any single character. For example, to find only filenames that end with "region," type *region; or type gr?y to find instances of both "gray" and "grey" in filenames.

•	You can include the full pathname — for example, c:\House finances\Property taxes in 1995. When you include a drive letter, share, or folder, the application automatically updates the location in the Look In box and displays only the name of the file in the File Name box.

•	You can search more than one folder at a time by typing multiple paths. Separate each path with a list separator character; usually this is a semicolon — for example, c:\House finances;c:\My work documents. To search all subfolders, click  [image],  and then click Search Subfolders.

•	To reuse a recent entry, you can click its name in the File Name box.


Use file property information to create search criteria

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	Click Advanced.

3	To clear the existing search criteria and use the default values in a search, click New Search.

4	Under Define More Criteria, define a search criterion by specifying the options you want in the Property, Condition, and Value boxes.

5	Click Add To List.

6	To create additional criteria, click And or Or, and then repeat steps 4 and 5.

7	In the Look In box, click the drive you want to search.

8	To search all subfolders of the folders on the selected drive, select the Search Subfolders check box.

9	Click Find Now.

To cancel the search, click Stop.

The files found are listed in the large box in the Open dialog box.

Tips

•	You can sort the files. For more information, click  [image].

•	You can preview file contents and properties without opening the files. For more information, click  [image].

Notes

•	You can save search criteria you use regularly to search for documents quickly. For more information, click  [image].

•	You can enter additional property information—such as a descriptive title and keywords that identify important information—to quickly find and view file information. You can also create custom properties. For more information, click  [image].


Save search criteria

1	Specify search criteria in the Open dialog box.

You can specify more detailed search criteria in the Advanced Find dialog box.

How?

2	To save search criteria specified in the Open dialog box, click Advanced to open the Advanced Find dialog box. If you're already in the Advanced Find dialog box, continue with the next step.

3	Click Save Search.

4	In the Name For This Search box, type a name for the saved search criteria.

You can use long, descriptive filenames if you want.

Tip   You can use the saved search the next time you want to find these files. On the File menu, click Open. Click  [image],  click Saved Searches, and then click the name of the search.


Sort a list of files

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	Click  [image].

3	Click Sorting.

4	Specify how you want to sort the files.


Change saved search criteria

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	Click Advanced.

3	In the Advanced Find dialog box, click Open Search.

4	Click the name of the saved search, and then click Open.

A box that lists the search criteria appears at the top of the Advanced Find dialog box.

5	Click the criterion you want to change, and then click Delete.

The criterion's settings appear in the Define More Criteria box. If you change your mind, you can click Add To List to restore the search criterion you just deleted.

To clear all criteria and use the default values in a search, click New Search.

6	Under Define More Criteria, specify the new criteria.

7	Click Add To List.

8	Click Save Search, type the name of the saved search, and then click OK.

9	Click Yes to replace the existing saved search.

To assign a new name to the modified search criteria, type a new name, and then click OK.

10	To start the search, click Find Now.


Delete a saved search

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	Click Advanced.

3	Click Open Search.

4	Click the name of the search, and then click Delete.


Troubleshoot finding files

What do you need help with?

I know that a file is on a drive or in a folder that's displayed in the Open dialog box, but I don't see the file.

When I use one of my saved searches, many of the files I previously found are no longer found.

The wrong files appear after I complete a search.

It takes a long time to find files that were created in other applications.

How do I find out whether a Find Fast index exists for the files I'm trying to find?


I know that a file is on a drive or in a folder that's displayed in the Open dialog box, but I don't see the file.

The current search criteria may include the correct location of the file, but other criteria may exclude the file you're looking for. Try the following:

•	Check the criteria specified at the bottom of the Open dialog box.

•	In the Open dialog box, click New Search to clear all current criteria except the location and the default file type. Try specifying different criteria before clicking Find Now.

•	In the Files Of Type box (Open dialog box), click All Files.

•	To search all subfolders, click  [image] in the Open dialog box, and then click Search Subfolders.

•	If you see the message "Find files that match these criteria (plus criteria in the Advanced Find)" at the bottom of the Open dialog box, click Advanced, and then check the criteria in the Advanced Find dialog box.

•	The file may be hidden. To display all files — including file types such as *.dll and *.sys — click the Windows Start button, point to Programs, and then click Windows Explorer. Click Options on the View menu, and then click Show All Files.


When I use one of my saved searches, many of the files I previously found are no longer found.

Check to see whether the search criteria include a network drive.

•	If the criteria include a network drive, make sure that the drive is still available.

•	If the criteria don't include a network drive, the missing files may have been deleted since the last time you performed this search.


The wrong files appear after I complete a search.

To speed up file searches in the Open dialog box, Office includes Find Fast, an application that can be accessed from the Windows Control Panel. If any of the following situations occur, Find Fast might not be working, or the Find Fast index might not be current:

•	Incorrect or deleted files appear in a search.

•	It takes longer and longer to find the same files.

•	Some searches take a lot longer than others.

To start Find Fast, double-click  [image]  on the Windows Control Panel.

You can check Find Fast for the following:

•	Open the Find Fast Indexer log. This log appears in the Windows Notepad and displays ongoing and completed Find Fast indexing tasks, including any errors encountered. Look for an index in the folder or on the drive that contains the files you want to find. For example, if you're looking for files on your C drive, look for an index for "C:\". For more information, click  [image].

If you don't see a Find Fast index for the location you want, you can create a Find Fast index. For more information, click  [image]. Make sure that the Continue To Update Automatically check box is selected.

If you do see a Find Fast index for the location you want, check the error log for problems encountered during an index update. If the last update occurred more than a day ago, you can update the index. For more information, click  [image]. Make sure that the Continue To Update Automatically check box is selected.

•	Check the types of files that are included in a Find Fast index. By default, when Find Fast is first installed, it creates an index of the contents of the Microsoft Office documents on all local drives. If All Files is selected instead, the search will take longer. For more information, click  [image].

•	Make sure that the Pause Indexing command on the Index menu isn't active. If it is, you can restart Find Fast indexing by clicking Pause Indexing again. Find Fast indexing automatically restarts when you restart your computer.

•	Make sure that the Find Fast application is located in the Windows StartUp folder. If it isn't, you should move it there. For more information, see your Windows documentation.

•	A search that specifies wildcard characters (* or ?) takes longer.

•	A search that specifies a phrase in quotation marks (" ") in the Text Or Property box in the Open dialog box (File menu), or that includes text properties with conditions such as "includes phrase" or "includes near" in the Advanced Find dialog box, also takes longer. To speed up this search, start Find Fast, click Create Index on the Index menu, and then select the Speed Up Phrase Searching check box. This option is usually not necessary, and it increases the size of the Find Fast index from about 5 percent to about 30 percent of the size of the indexed documents.


It takes a long time to find files that were created in other applications.

To speed up file searches, Find Fast creates an index of the contents of the Microsoft Office documents on all local drives during a typical Office installation. These indexes are automatically updated in the background while you work.

You can also create indexes for files created in other applications.

1	Make sure that you've installed the file format converters you need for the types of files for which you want to create a Find Fast index.

How?

2	Create a Find Fast index for all files instead of for Microsoft Office documents only.

How?

Note   Future searches will take longer when you create a Find Fast index for all files instead of for Microsoft Office documents only.


How do I find out if a Find Fast index exists for the files I'm trying to find?
How do I find out whether a Find Fast index exists for the files I'm trying to find?

1	Start Find Fast by double-clicking  [image]  on the Windows Control Panel.

2	Check the status of the indexes that appear in the Index For Documents In And Below box. If you don't see an index for the files you're looking for, you can create one.

How?


Save another copy of a document

1	On the File menu, click Save As.

2	In the File Name box, type a new name for the document.

3	Click Save.

Tip   To save the copy in a different location, click a different drive name or folder name. To save the copy in a new folder, click  [image].


Save a document for use in another application

1	On the File menu, click Save As.

2	In the File Name box, type a name for the document.

3	In the Save As Type box, click the file format you want.

4	Click Save.


Save a document that was created in another application

1	On the File menu, click Save As.

2	In the File Name box, type a new name for the document.

3	In the Save As Type box, click the format in which you want to save the document.

4	Click Save.


Keep the previous version of a document when I save

1	On the File menu, click Save As.

2	Click Options.

3	Select the Always Create Backup Copy check box.

4	Click OK.

5	Click Save.


When I try to save a document, I get a message saying that the document is read-only.

The document is protected with the Read-Only Recommended option. To save changes, you need to save the document with a new name. You can use the same name if you save the document in a new or different folder.


Commands And Settings button in the Save As dialog box

To	Click  [image] and then
Edit or view file properties for the selected file	Click Properties. On the Summary or Custom tab, add or edit the properties you want.
Sort a list of files	Click Sorting.
Connect to a network drive	Click Map Network Drive. In the Drive box, click the drive letter you want.


Close a document

•	On the File menu, click Close.

To close all open documents without quitting the application, hold down SHIFT and click Close All on the File menu.


Reset the TipWizard

•	While holding down CTRL, click [image].


Print more than one copy at a time

1	On the File menu, click Print.

2	In the Number Of Copies box, enter the number of copies you want to print.


Print one or more files
Print several files at once

All the files you want to print must be in the same folder.

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	While holding down CTRL, click the name of each document you want to print.

Click  [image], and then click Print.


Display the full screen

•	On the View menu, click Full Screen.

Note   To switch to your previous view, click  [image].


Preview file contents and properties

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	In the Look In box, click the drive and folder that contain the file you want to view.

3	In the large box, click the file you want.

If the file isn't listed in the box, you can search for it.

How?

4	To preview the contents of the file before opening it, click  [image].

To view such details as file size and the date last modified, click  [image].

To view such file properties as subject and statistics, click  [image].


Set file properties

You can enter property information for your files that makes it easy to find the files and information about them. Properties can include a descriptive title, the name of the author, the subject, and keywords that identify topics or other important information. You can also create your own custom properties and link a custom property to specific content in your file. Statistics such as file size and the dates that files were created and last modified are automatically maintained for you.

What do you want to do?

Set properties for the active file

Set properties for any file

Create custom file properties

Link custom properties to content in an active file


Set properties for the active file

1	On the File menu, click Properties, and then click the Summary tab.

2	Type any property information you want.


Set properties for any file

1	On the File menu, click Open.

2	In the Look In box, click the drive and folder that contain the file you want to set properties for.

3	In the large box, click the file you want.

If the file isn't listed in the box, you can search for it.

How?

4	To add or change properties, click [image], and then click Properties.


Change the name of the author

1	On the Tools menu, click Options, and then click the User Info tab (Word) or the General tab (Microsoft Excel).

2	In the Name box (Word) or the User Name box (Microsoft Excel), type the name you want to appear in the Author box on the Summary tab each time you create a new file.

Tip   To change the author name for the active file only, click Properties on the File menu, delete the name in the Author box, and then type a new name.


Searching for files using properties

You can use the properties of a file — such as its title, author name, and keywords — to find and view file information. You can also create custom properties. You can link your custom properties to specific content in a file, such as a bookmark in Word or a named cell in Microsoft Excel, and then use the property to search for the contents. For example, in Microsoft Excel you can create a custom property to use in all budget files, create a link to the cell that contains the budget total, and then search for all budget files in which totals exceed a certain value.

You can use Microsoft Exchange to view custom properties and to sort and categorize files by their properties. For example, you can create a custom view of all budget files in Microsoft Excel that have totals exceeding $10,000, or you can create a view of all budget files that are sorted by the value of their totals.


Use Microsoft Exchange to view files by their properties

Before you do this procedure, you must have Microsoft Exchange installed.

1	Drag or copy the files to a Microsoft Exchange folder.

2	Switch to Microsoft Exchange.

3	On the View menu, click Columns.

4	In the Available Columns box, enter the property for the file you want to view.

If the property you enter is a custom property, click a data type, and then click OK.

5	Click Add.


Create custom file properties

1	On the File menu, click Properties, and then click the Custom tab.

2	In the Name box, type a name for the custom property.

To enter a name that will not appear in other applications, such as Microsoft Exchange, precede the name with an underscore ( _ ).

3	In the Type box, click the type of property you want.

4	In the Value box, type a value for the property, and then click Add.

Note   The value you enter must match the selection in the Type box. For example, if you clicked Number in the Type box, you must type a number in the Value box. Values that don't match the selection in the Type box are stored as text.


Link custom properties to content in an active file

1	On the File menu, click Properties, and then click the Custom tab.

2	In the Name box, type a name for the custom property.

3	Select the Link To Content check box.

If the Link To Content check box is unavailable, you need to define specific content in your file — for example, bookmarks in Word or named cells in Microsoft Excel.

4	In the Source box, click the definition you want to link to, and then click Add.

Note   When links are broken — for instance, when content is removed — the file that uses the linked property will contain the last data saved.


Drag and drop information between applications

You can move or copy information between documents in different applications using drag-and-drop editing. Both applications must support object linking and embedding (OLE).

1	Arrange the application windows so that the source and destination documents are open and visible. You must be able to see the information you want to drag as well as the spot where you want to drop it.

2	Select the information you want to move or copy.

3	To move the information, point to the selected information, and then hold down the mouse button. When the [image] pointer appears, drag the pointer to the new location in the other application, and then release the mouse button.

To copy the information, hold down the CTRL key, point to the selected information, and then hold down the mouse button. When the [image] pointer appears, drag the pointer to the new location in the other application, and then release both the mouse button and the CTRL key.


Troubleshoot linking and embedding problems

What do you need help with?

When I double-click a linked or embedded object, a "cannot edit" error message occurs.

When I double-click an embedded Microsoft Excel object, Microsoft Excel doesn't open.

I want the embedded object rather than an icon to appear in my document.


When I double-click a linked or embedded object, a "cannot edit" error message occurs.

This message appears when the source file can't be opened.

•	Make sure that the application needed to edit the file is installed on your computer. If the application is not installed, you may be able to convert the object to a different file format that you can edit. For more information about converting an object to a different file format, click  [image].

•	Make sure that you have enough memory to run the source application. Close other applications to free up memory, if necessary.

•	If the source application is running, make sure that it doesn't have any open dialog boxes. Switch to the source application, and close any open dialog boxes.

•	If the object is linked, make sure that someone else doesn't have the source file open.

•	If the object is linked, make sure that the source file you want to edit still has the same name and has not been moved. Select the linked object, and then click the Links command on the Edit menu to see the name of the source file. If the source file has been renamed or moved, use the Change Source button in the Links dialog box to reconnect the links.


I want the embedded object rather than an icon to appear in my document.

1	Click the icon.

2	On the Edit menu, point to Object, and then click Convert.

3	Clear the Display As Icon check box.


Share information between Office applications

You can link or embed all or part of an existing file created in an Office application or in any other application that supports linking and embedding. You can also create a new object and then link or embed it. If the file you want to use was created in an application that does not support linking and embedding, you can still copy and paste information from the file, but you may not be able to link or embed from it.

The main differences between linking and embedding are where the data is stored and how it is updated after you place it in your file.

When you link, information gets updated if you modify the source file. Linked data is stored in the source file; the file into which you place the data stores only the location of the source and displays a representation of the linked data.

When you embed, information does not change if you modify the source file. Embedded objects become part of the container file itself. Double-clicking an object after you embed it opens the object in the source application. You can then edit it in place, and the original object in the source application remains unchanged.

What do you want to do?

Embed a new object

Link or embed an entire existing file

Link or embed selected information from an existing file


Embed a new object

To create an embedded object in another application, you must have the other application installed on your computer.

1	Click where you want to embed the new object.

2	On the Insert menu, click Object, and then click the Create New tab.

3	In the Object Type box, click the type of object you want to create.

4	To display the embedded object as an icon, select the Display As Icon check box.

Note   Only applications that are installed on your computer and that support linking and embedding appear in the Object Type box.


Link or embed an entire existing file

1	Click where you want to place the object.

2	On the Insert menu, click Object, and then click the Create From File tab.

3	In the File Name box, type the name of the object you want to link or embed.

To locate the file you want to link or embed, click Browse, and then select the options you want.

4	To display the embedded object as an icon, select the Display As Icon check box.

5	To maintain a link to the original file, select the Link To File check box.

Note   You cannot use the Object command on the Insert menu to insert certain types of files, including graphics. The commands used for inserting graphics vary among Office applications. To find the command you need, look up inserting pictures in online Help for the application in which you want to insert a graphic.


Link or embed selected information from an existing file

1	Select the information you want to link or embed.

2	Click  [image] or  [image].

3	Switch to the document in which you want to place the information, and then click where you want the information to appear.

4	On the Edit menu, click Paste Special.

5	To link the information, click Paste Link.

To embed the information, click Paste. In the As box, click the item with the word "object" in its name. For example, if you copied the information from a Word document, click Microsoft Word Document Object.

Note   When you link or embed an object in a Microsoft Access form or report, the object is displayed in an object frame. If the object you are embedding is from a Microsoft Access table, use a bound object frame. If the object is not stored in a table, use an unbound object frame.


Edit an embedded object

If the application in which you created an embedded object is installed on your computer, double-click the object to open it for editing. Some applications temporarily replace the menus and toolbars in the current application so that you can edit the embedded object in place, without switching to another window. Other applications start the original application in a separate window and then open the object for editing.

If you don't have the application in which an embedded object was created, convert the object to the file format of an application you do have. For example, if your Word document contains an embedded Microsoft Works Spreadsheet object and you don't have Works, you can convert the object to Microsoft Excel Workbook format and edit it in Microsoft Excel.

What do you want to do?

Edit an embedded object when I have the source application installed on my computer

Edit an embedded object when I don't have the application in which it was created


Edit an embedded object when I have the source application installed on my computer

1	Double-click the embedded object to open it.

2	Edit the object.

3	If you are editing the object in place, click anywhere outside the embedded object to return to the container file.

If you are editing the object in a separate application window, click either Exit or Quit on the File menu to return to the container file.

Note   Some embedded objects, such as video and sound clips, play when you double-click them, instead of opening an application for editing. To edit one of these objects, select it, point to Object Name Object on the Edit menu, and then click Edit.


Edit an embedded object when I don't have the application in which it was created

1	Select the object you want to edit.

2	On the Edit menu, point to Object Name Object (for example, Microsoft Works Spreadsheet Object), and then click Convert.

3	To convert the embedded object to the file format you've specified in the Object Type box, click Convert To.

To open the embedded object in the file format you've specified in the Object Type box, click Activate As.


Update a manual link

1	On the Edit menu, click Links.

The Links command is unavailable if your file contains no links.

2	Click the link, and then click the Update Now button.


Change the way a link is updated

1	On the Edit menu, click Links.

The Links command is unavailable if your file contains no links.

2	Click the link you want to update.

To select multiple links, hold down CTRL while you click each link.

3	To update linked information every time you open the file that contains the link and any time the linked information changes while your file is open, click Automatic.

To update linked information only when you click Update Now, click Manual.


Deciding which application to use to create an online or printed form

You can create a form in Word, Microsoft Access, or Microsoft Excel. All three applications provide sample forms you can use "as is" or as a starting point for creating custom forms. For example, Word provides several common online business forms, including invoice, purchase order, and weekly time sheet forms. In addition, Microsoft Access provides a Form Wizard that asks questions and then uses your answers to automatically lay out and format your form.

•	Use either Word or Microsoft Access to create a form that contains complex formatting, pictures, linked or embedded objects, check boxes, drop-down lists, and text areas that have specific data types, formatting, and default text. In either application, you can create forms that are filled in online or forms that are printed and then filled in on paper. In either Word or Microsoft Access, you can set conditions for adding data to the form, include macros that run automatically, and you can provide Help messages to make it easier for users to complete the form.

•	To generate a variety of reports from your data or to collect a large amount of information, use Microsoft Access. You should also use Microsoft Access if your form contains complex expressions or if you need full relational database capabilities.

•	To collect information for use in calculations, analysis, or financial documents (for example, a mortgage table or customer quotes), create your form in Microsoft Excel. You can also use a Microsoft Excel form to collect information and store it in a Microsoft Access database. After you create the form, run the AutoTemplate Wizard in Microsoft Excel to turn your form into a template that's easy to find and use.


Making a list of names and addresses for a mail merge

Before you create a list of names and addresses for a mail merge, you need to determine which Office application is suited to your task. For a mail merge, you can use a list you create in Word, Microsoft Access, Schedule+, or Microsoft Excel.

•	For a small- or medium-size list of names and addresses in which you don't expect to make many changes, click Create Data Source in the Word Mail Merge Helper.

•	To use the names and addresses in your Schedule+ Contact List, use the Word Letter Wizard.

•	For an automatically numbered list, use Word.

•	For a longer list—where you expect to add, delete, and change entries—or for a list of numbers, use Microsoft Excel.

•	For powerful sorting and searching capabilities, use either Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel.

•	For a list with full relational database capabilities, for a large list, or for a list you can share with others, use Microsoft Access.


Deciding which Office application to use to create a table

Before you create a table, you need to determine which Office application is best suited to your task. To create a table, you can use Word, Microsoft Excel, or Microsoft Access. All three applications can automatically format the table for you.

•	For a table that includes complex formatting such as bulleted lists, custom tabs, numbering, or hanging indents, use Word.

•	For a table that includes complex calculations, statistical analysis, queries, or charts, use Microsoft Excel. However, if your table entries will exceed 255 characters in length, do not use Microsoft Excel; instead, use Word or Microsoft Access.

•	For powerful sorting and searching capabilities, use either Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel.

•	If you need full relational database capabilities, create your table in Microsoft Access.

•	For a table that you can easily include in a PowerPoint presentation, use Word.


Importing or converting files from another Office application

To convert most types of files that were saved in another format, simply open the file in the Office application you want to use. When the Office application recognizes the file format, it converts the document and opens it. For example, you can open a Word document in PowerPoint, and PowerPoint will automatically convert the Word document to PowerPoint file format.

In some cases, you must first open the file in the source application and save it in the file format of the other application. After the source file is converted, you can open it directly in the other application. For example, to transfer a Microsoft Access database table to Microsoft Excel, click the Analyze It button in Microsoft Access to open the database table, save it in Microsoft Excel file format, and then open the file directly in Microsoft Excel.

Note   For information about which file formats an application can import or export, look up convert in that application's online Help. If you did not install a necessary file converter, run Office Setup again, adding the converters you need.


The format of information pasted from the Clipboard

Information you cut or copy to another application is pasted, if possible, in a format that the application can edit. For example, data from Microsoft Excel worksheets and records from Microsoft Access are pasted into Word as Word tables, complete with column widths and font formatting. Text from Word is pasted into Microsoft Excel as editable text, and records from Microsoft Access are pasted into a Microsoft Excel worksheet as rows, with each field in a separate column.

If an application can't edit the information, it embeds it as an object. You can use the source application to edit embedded information. If the information can't be embedded, it is pasted as a static picture that cannot be edited.

Note   To control how information is pasted, use the Paste Special command on the Edit menu.


When I double-click an embedded Microsoft Excel object, Microsoft Excel doesn't open.

You probably have the Ignore Other Applications check box selected, which causes Microsoft Excel to ignore all requests from other applications. Use the following procedure to turn off the Ignore Other Applications check box.

1	In Microsoft Excel, click Options on the Tools menu, and then click the General tab.

Clear the Ignore Other Applications check box.


Install or remove individual components of Microsoft Office

1	Close all open applications.

2	If the Office Shortcut Bar is available, click the area with the small button at the extreme left or top of the Office Shortcut Bar, and then click Add/Remove Programs.

If the Office Shortcut Bar is unavailable, point to Settings on the Windows Start menu, and then click Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs, and then click the Install/Uninstall tab. Click the Office application, and then click Add/Remove.

3	Follow the instructions on the screen.

Notes

•	If you originally installed the application from a network file server or a shared folder, run that copy of the Setup program.

•	To add or remove components of Office on Windows NT, start Office Setup the same as when you first installed Office, and follow the instructions on the screen.


Troubleshoot problems in Word with linked or embedded Microsoft Excel objects

What do you need help with?

When I paste link a Microsoft Excel worksheet into a Word document, Word inserts an extra paragraph mark above the link. I can't delete the paragraph mark.

Word changes the font size of the data I paste from Microsoft Excel.

After I save my Microsoft Excel worksheet in Word, I can't open it in Microsoft Excel.

In Word, I'm having trouble scaling an embedded Microsoft Excel chart object.

The cell alignment is wrong in some of the Microsoft Excel worksheets I pasted into Word.

When I drag a framed, linked Microsoft Excel worksheet to another location in my Word document, it appears twice in my document instead of once.


When I paste link a Microsoft Excel worksheet into a Word document, Word inserts an extra paragraph mark above the link. I can't delete the paragraph mark.

Although you can't delete the extra paragraph mark, you can make it very small by changing the line spacing setting to Exactly 0.01". To change line spacing, click Paragraph on the Format menu.

Note   The extra paragraph mark does not appear if you paste the worksheet instead of linking it.


Word changes the font size of the data I paste from Microsoft Excel.

Word changes 10-point text pasted from Microsoft Excel to the default font size used by Word. It does not change the typeface, nor does it change any text with a font size other than 10 points.

For example, if the default font (Normal style) in Word is Times New Roman 12-point, all Arial 10-point text in Microsoft Excel changes to Arial 12-point text when you paste it into Word. This change occurs only when you paste the data. It does not occur if you embed or link the Microsoft Excel data.

To have 10-point text from Microsoft Excel remain 10-point text when you paste it into Word, change the font size of the Normal style in Word to 10 points before you paste the Microsoft Excel data. After you paste the data, you can change the Normal style font size in Word back to the original setting.


After I save my Microsoft Excel worksheet in Word, I can't open it in Microsoft Excel.

Word can open (import) Microsoft Excel files, but it can't save (export) in Microsoft Excel format. If you save a Microsoft Excel Worksheet in Word, the file becomes a Word Document file. To edit and save changes to a Microsoft Excel worksheet, don't save it in Word; instead, open, edit, and save the worksheet in Microsoft Excel. Then open it again in Word.

If you then save the worksheet in Word Document format, Word replaces the Microsoft Excel file with a Word document file, which Microsoft Excel can no longer read. If your file was a Microsoft Excel workbook, all of the workbook contents are lost.

To edit and save changes to a Microsoft Excel worksheet, don't save it in Word; instead, open, edit, and save the worksheet in Microsoft Excel. Then open it again in Word.


In Word, I'm having trouble scaling an embedded Microsoft Excel chart object.

When you resize an embedded Microsoft Excel chart sheet in a Word document, the chart plot area may be resized while the chart text, chart legend, and object frame remain unchanged. This happens if the EMBED field in Word contains the \s switch, which returns an embedded object to its original size when you update the field.

When you resize a Microsoft Excel embedded chart, the chart in the object appears off center, the Microsoft Excel worksheet cells are visible, and the chart object frame returns to its original size. This happens partly because of the \s EMBED field switch, and partly because an embedded chart includes Microsoft Excel worksheet cells as well as the embedded chart. This makes the embedded object behave more like a Microsoft Excel Worksheet object than a Chart object.

Use the following procedure to remove the /s switch from either type of embedded chart so that you can resize the chart in Word without distorting the chart components or displaying cells from the underlying worksheet:

1	Select the embedded chart in Word.

2	Press SHIFT+F9 to display the field code instead of the object. The field code appears as follows:

{EMBED Excel.Chart.5 \s}

3	Delete " /s" from the field code so that it appears as follows:

{EMBED Excel.Chart.5}

4	With the field code still selected, press F9 to update the field, and then press SHIFT+F9 to display the chart object.

5	Size the chart object.

Tip   For best results in Word, embed a chart sheet rather than an embedded chart whenever possible, and size the chart in Microsoft Excel before you embed it in Word.


The cell alignment is wrong in some of the Microsoft Excel worksheets I pasted into Word.

Word does not support vertical alignment for table cells, so it does not retain center or bottom vertical alignment formatting that was applied in Microsoft Excel. To change the vertical alignment in Word, use paragraph formatting commands. You can also paste the worksheet as a picture rather than as formatted text.

When you link the Microsoft Excel worksheet, Word adds a formatting switch that maintains any formatting you apply to the worksheet in Word. If you change the alignment of cells in Microsoft Excel and then update the link in Word, the new alignment does not appear in Word.

•	To change the alignment of the cells in Microsoft Excel and have the changes appear in Word each time you update the link, delete the mergeformat option and its formatting switch from the LINK field in Word. The worksheet in Word reverts to the alignment of the cells in the Microsoft Excel worksheet each time you update the link in Word.

•	To change the alignment of the worksheet in Word so that it does not revert to the Microsoft Excel alignment when you update the link, leave the LINK field in Word unchanged and change the alignment formatting in Word.

•	To change the alignment in Microsoft Excel but preserve any subsequent alignment changes made in Word, delete and then reinsert the LINK field.


When I drag a framed, linked Microsoft Excel worksheet to another location in my Word document, it appears twice in my document instead of once.

The worksheet appears twice if the field result, rather than the field code, is displayed when you frame the LINK field. Word frames the worksheet (the field result) but not the field. Consequently, when you drag the framed field result, you drag a framed picture of the worksheet but you leave the unframed LINK field behind. If you later update the LINK field, a new, unframed copy of the worksheet appears in the original location.

Delete the unlinked, framed copy of the worksheet. Then frame both the LINK field and its picture result. To do this, in Word press SHIFT+F9 to display the field code, and then select the LINK field before you frame the worksheet. If you frame the LINK field with its picture, they will stay together when you drag them to a new location in Word.


Answers to common questions

Automated answers to common questions, solutions to technical problems, and tips are available at no cost — 24 hours a day, 7 days a week — by telephoning Microsoft FastTips. For more information about FastTips information services, click  [image].


Sending feedback on user assistance

The Answer Wizard senses that your question hasn't been answered to your satisfaction. In creating the Answer Wizard, our goal is to provide you with the assistance you need, when you need it. If the Answer Wizard hasn't provided you with the information you need, please let us know. Your feedback can help us refine future versions.

You can send feedback by electronic mail to:

•	offc95ua@microsoft.com

Or you can send a letter to:

•	Office UA Feedback
Microsoft Corporation
1 Microsoft Way
Redmond, WA   98052
USA

Tell us the question or questions you asked. Tell us what didn't work. The more details you provide, the better we can make adjustments in the future. We look forward to hearing from you!

The Microsoft Office User Assistance Team


Where the Answer Wizard wants to go

The Answer Wizard wants to go wherever you do. If you need help, ask the Answer Wizard about the task you're working on. The Answer Wizard can take you right to the tools you need, and it will tell you how to use them when you get there.


Make my computer smile

1	Type a colon (:).

2	Type a right parenthesis[ ) ].

Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the desired level of machine happiness is achieved.


Find Fast dialog box options

Index For Documents In And Below

Displays status information for each indexing task, including the drive, share, and folder location of the indexed documents.


Index menu commands in Find Fast

Create Index command

To create a new Find Fast index, click Create Index.

Update Index command

To update a Find Fast index, click Update Index.

Delete Index command

To delete a Find Fast index, click Delete Index.

Show Indexer Log command

To display a log of ongoing and completed Find Fast indexing tasks, including any errors encountered, click Show Indexer Log. To return to Find Fast, click Exit on the File menu.

Pause Indexing command

To temporarily stop Find Fast indexing, click Pause Indexing. To restart Find Fast indexing during the current computer session, click Pause Indexing again. Find Fast indexing automatically restarts when you restart your computer.

Cancel Selected Task command

To cancel an indexing task, click the task under Index For Documents In And Below and then click Cancel Selected Task.

Close command

To quit Find Fast, click Close.


Create a new Find Fast index

1	On the Windows Start menu, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel.

2	Double-click  [image].

3	On the Index menu, click Create Index.

4	In the In And Below box, specify the path for the documents you want Find Fast to index.

To create a Find Fast index for the contents of documents located in a specific folder on the local drive or on a network share, click Browse to specify the folder or network share you want.

5	In the Of Type box, click the type of document you want Find Fast to index.

Tips

•	It's more efficient to create a Find Fast index for an entire drive or top-level folder than to create smaller indexes for subfolders.

•	To index documents created in another application, such as Lotus 1-2-3 or Word Perfect, click All Files in the Of Type box. Make sure that you've installed the appropriate file format converter. For more information, click  [image].

•	To change the scope of a Find Fast index — for example, to change the file type, or to index all the documents instead of only those located in or below a specific folder on the local drive — you must delete the original index before you create the new one. For more information, click  [image].

Note   Before you create an index on a network share that's maintained by a system administrator, you should check with the system administrator. A Find Fast index is about 5 percent of the size of the indexed documents.


Update a Find Fast index

1	On the Windows Start menu, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel.

2	Double-click  [image].

3	On the Index menu, click Update Index.

4	In the In And Below box, click the path for the documents for which you want to update the Find Fast index.

To update a Find Fast index that doesn't appear in the list, click Browse. You can select any folder, drive, or network share that you specified when creating an index.

Tip   You can click Information to display information about the Find Fast index selected in the In And Below box, such as the date last updated, the number of documents indexed, and the size of the index.

Note   You won't have to update indexes in the future if the Continue To Update Automatically check box remains selected.


Delete a Find Fast index

1	On the Windows Start menu, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel.

2	Double-click  [image].

3	On the Index menu, click Delete Index.

4	In the In And Below box, click the location of the Find Fast index you want to delete.

To delete an index that doesn't appear in the list, click Browse. You can select any folder, drive, or network share that you specified when creating an index.

Tip   The information about the Find Fast index selected in the In And Below box—such as the date last updated, the number of documents indexed, and the size of the index—appears in the dialog box.


View a log of Find Fast indexing tasks

1	On the Windows Start menu, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel.

2	Double-click  [image].

3	On the Index menu, click Show Indexer Log.

4	To return to Find Fast, click Exit on the File menu.


Cancel or temporarily stop Find Fast indexing tasks

1	On the Windows Start menu, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel.

2	Double-click  [image].

3	To cancel a scheduled indexing task, click its path under Index For Documents In And Below, and then click Cancel Selected Task on the Index menu.

To temporarily stop all index creation and updating, click Pause Indexing on the Index menu.

Tip   To restart background indexing during the current session, click Pause Indexing on the Index menu again. Find Fast indexing automatically restarts when you restart your computer.


Add or delete shortcuts in the Microsoft Network dialog box

1	Connect to The Microsoft Network.

   How?

2	In The Microsoft Network, locate the topic you want to add to the Microsoft Network dialog box.

3	Using the right mouse button, click the topic icon, and then click Create Shortcut.

The Microsoft Network places a shortcut icon on your desktop.

4	Drag the shortcut icon from the desktop to the MSN toolbar on the Office Shortcut Bar.


Finding information in the Microsoft Knowledge Base

To find the technical information you need in the Microsoft Knowledge Base (KB), compose a text query that includes the elements in the following table.

Enter this element	By typing, for example
Topic	shortcut bar or pie chart
Application name	office or word
Application version	7.0 (for information about Word version 7.0)
Operating system	windows 95
KB keywords	kbprint (for information about printing) KB articles about the same topic are grouped by keyword. For a list of keywords, search the KB using kbkeyword. For a list of keywords for a specific Microsoft product, search the KB using kbkeyword and product name — for example, kbkeyword and excel.
Logical operators: AND, OR, NOT	print AND (landscape NOT portrait) AND laserjet AND (iiisi OR 4si) Use AND to return articles that contain the expressions on both sides of AND. Use OR to return articles that contain the expressions on one or both sides of OR. Use NOT to exclude articles that contain the expression following NOT.
Grouping operators:  " " (quotation marks),  ( ) (parentheses)	(explorer OR "my computer") AND "start button" Enclose phrases longer than one word in quotation marks. Enclose an expression in parentheses to change its evaluation order — for example, to evaluate an OR expression before an AND expression. (In the absence of parentheses, AND expressions are evaluated before OR expressions.)
Tip   Some Microsoft products offer KB articles in Windows Help file format. To access a list of these Microsoft products, search the KB using the keywords kbfile and help.

For more information about how to access the Microsoft Knowledge Base, click  [image].


Connect to Microsoft technical resources

If you have a question about an Office application, first look in the Getting Results books, the Answer Wizard, or the Readme file that comes with the application. If you don't find what you need, you can get information from several Microsoft technical resources, including online support forums, the Microsoft Knowledge Base (KB), Microsoft Software Library (MSL), Microsoft Download Service (MSDL), the Microsoft TechNet and Microsoft Developer Network CD-ROMs, and Microsoft Press publications.

If you have a modem, you can automatically connect to most of these resources by clicking The Microsoft Network on the Help menu in any Office application.

Where do you want to go for technical information?

The Microsoft Network (for KB, MSL, support forums, and more)

Microsoft FastTips (for popular KB articles and recorded, faxed, or mailed technical information)

Microsoft Download Service (MSDL)

The Internet (for KB, MSL, and more)

CompuServe, America Online, and GEnie (for KB, MSL, support forums, and more)

Microsoft TechNet and Microsoft Developer Network CD-ROMs (for KB, MSL, technical white papers, and more)

Microsoft Press (for technical publications)


The Microsoft Network

If you have a modem, you can quickly connect to The Microsoft Network (MSN) from any Office application.

1	On the Help menu, click The Microsoft Network.

2	Click where you want to go on The Microsoft Network, and then click Connect.


Microsoft FastTips

Microsoft FastTips gives recorded or faxed answers in English to common technical problems. You can also order Application Notes and popular articles from the Microsoft Knowledge Base (KB) by fax or mail.

Microsoft FastTips is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, by calling (800) 936-4100, toll-free, from a touch-tone telephone. Using the buttons on your telephone, follow the prompts to hear recorded answers to your technical questions, obtain a catalog of available information, or order items by fax.


Microsoft Download Service

To connect to the Microsoft Download Service (MSDL) bulletin board system, use your modem to call (206) 936-6735 in the United States or (905) 507-3022 in Canada, and then follow the prompts. This service is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

Note   MSDL supports 1200-, 2400-, 9600-, and 14,400-baud (V.32 and V.42) data transmission with 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity. The protocols that MSDL supports are Xmodem, Xmodem-1K, Ymodem (batch), Kermit, Super Kermit (Sliding Windows), and Zmodem.


The Internet via World Wide Web, FTP, or Gopher

You can access the Microsoft Knowledge Base (KB) and Microsoft Software Library (MSL) at any of the following three Internet sites:

•	Microsoft World Wide Web site, located at www.microsoft.com

•	Microsoft Gopher site, located at gopher.microsoft.com

•	Microsoft FTP site (which supports anonymous logon), located at ftp.microsoft.com

The KB at the World Wide Web and Gopher sites provides full-text searches and automatic links to files on the MSL so you can download files directly from KB articles.


CompuServe, America Online, and GEnie

The Microsoft Knowledge Base (KB) and Microsoft Software Library (MSL) are available on the CompuServe, America Online, and GEnie information services. CompuServe also hosts Microsoft forums where you can interact with other users and Microsoft support personnel.

CompuServe

•	To access the Microsoft Knowledge Base, type go mskb at any ! prompt.

•	To access the Microsoft Software Library, type go msl at any ! prompt.

•	To access Microsoft forums, type go microsoft at any ! prompt.

America Online

•	To access the Microsoft Knowledge Base, click Keyword on the Go To menu, type microsoft in the Enter Word(s) box, and then click Go. In the Microsoft Resource Center, click Knowledge Base.

GEnie

•	To access the Microsoft Knowledge Base, type m505 at the GEnie system prompt.


Microsoft TechNet and Microsoft Developer Network

To get the Microsoft Knowledge Base (KB), Microsoft Software Library (MSL), and other technical information on CD, you can subscribe to two different services — Microsoft TechNet and the Microsoft Developer Network (MSDN).

To subscribe to Microsoft TechNet, call (800) 344-2121. To subscribe to the MSDN, call (800) 759-5474. Both numbers are toll-free in the United States and Canada.


Microsoft Press

Microsoft Press offers a wide variety of technical publications about Microsoft products and related computer technologies. These publications include development kits, resource kits, the Step by Step and Running... series of how-to books, Field Guide reference books, programming books, and more. You can get Microsoft Press books from your local bookstore or by calling (800) MSPRESS, or (800) 677-7377.